50% found this document useful (2 votes)

2K views367 pages

900-00003-001 AC EFD1000-500 SW2 X Instl Man

Uploaded by

Silas Antoniolli

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

50% found this document useful (2 votes)

2K views367 pages

900-00003-001 AC EFD1000-500 SW2 X Instl Man

Uploaded by

Silas Antoniolli

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 367

EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.

X Installation Manual

EFD1000 and EFD500

Software Version 2.X
Installation Manual

Including the EA100 Adapter –Appendix E

Aspen Document # 900-00003-001 Revision AC

May 2012

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 1-367 Revision AC

Special Notes to the Installer

It is important to review the entire Installation Manual before installing the EFD1000/500.
The following items are of special note and should be considered for planning and installation.

This manual covers the installation of a single EFD1000 PFD and installations with an EFD1000
and/or EFD500 MFD. There are important limitations to the allowable configurations. To avoid
unsatisfactory results, refer to the STC Specific Requirements and Limitations, Section 4 and
review the Pre Mod Planning, Section 5 before beginning the installation.

Correct replacement and proper placement of the aircraft instruments is critical to maintain the
aircraft certification. Certain instruments can be removed. More importantly, certain
instruments must not be removed. Installation of an EFD1000 MFD with EBB authorizes
removal of standby airspeed and altitude instruments. In all cases, a standby attitude
instrument must be retained. See Section 4.

The EFD1000 PFD, EFD1000 MFD and/or EFD500 MFD are powered from the Battery Bus, not
the Avionics Bus. Connection through the avionics bus is not approved, and is not eligible to
be approved as a deviation to the STC. Separate EFD (1000 and 500) master switches are
required for each display.

The RSM contains magnetic elements that are sensitive to magnetic fields on the aircraft.
Section 6.9 describes locating the RSM installation. Mounting the RSM over the cabin can be
problematic due to passengers using headsets with magnetic speakers. Exercise the control
cables while validating a location. Consider all the magnetic field variations. A satisfactory
RSM location is part of the Final Check Sheet. Use caution when installing the RSM connector
to avoid damaging the connector or wiring.

The RSM can be damaged if exposed to a magnet. Do not use magnetic tools or magnetic
levels near the RSM.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 2-367 Revision AC

The installer must determine whether the design changes described in this document are
compatible with previously approved modifications.

The ICA requires installer-supplied wiring diagrams and equipment location information. See
Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-001, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

Each EFD battery must be charged before release to the customer. See Section 10.6.19.

This installation is not authorized as a Primary Flight Display for Category II Operations.
Installation in RVSM aircraft has significant limitations. See paragraph 4.1.

Installations in a Class III aircraft require a PFD containing RTCA DO-178B Level B software.
Verify the software level on the PFD System Data tag before installation.

If the aircraft has dual independent pitot/static systems then the PFD must be installed on one
system and the EFD1000 MFD must be installed on the other independent pitot/static system.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 3-367 Revision AC

DOCUMENT REVISIONS

Revision Description of Change ECO

() INITIAL RELEASE – for TSO Approval 1684
A See ECO 1774
B See ECO 1776
C See ECO 1789
D See ECO 1792
E See ECO 1846
F See ECO 1856
G See ECO 1892
H See ECO 1965
I Revision was skipped
J See ECO 2038
K See ECO 2058
L See ECO 2086
M See ECO 2112
N See ECO 2150
O Revision was skipped
P See ECO 2159
Q Revision was skipped
R See ECO 2190
S See ECO. Not released 2225
T See ECO. Not released 2232
U See ECO 2243
V See ECO 2603
W See ECO 2659
X Revision was skipped
Y See ECO 2774
Z See ECO 2796
AA Added Appendix F – Autopilot PFD/MFD Reversion switch. Added Appendix G – Altitude Preselect 3016
interface. Added Appendix H – Technical Notes applicable to STC SA10822SC. Updated FCS-810
wiring diagram. Updated Table 1-7 and 1-8 to fix “T” sizes and remove p/s hose. Updated Tables
1-7, 1-8, 1-9 to add kit versions with sonalert and databases. Added Table 1-10 Recess Mount Kit.
MFD1000 as backup ALT or IAS (sw 2.3.1 and later) no longer requires an electrical bus with over
voltage protection, updated Fig 4-4 & 4-5. Updated Fig 9-28D to remove JPI OAT probe from probe
list. Miscellaneous typographical and spelling corrections. Added copyright statement to page 5.
Updated Fig 9-18B&C to increase range of R1 resistor when using 600ohm T1. Added audibility
test for Sonalert. Added Table 1-4 “Latest Approved Software Ver” and Table 1-5 “Auth Software
Configurations”. Added Table 1-6 AML-STC Document List. Added instructions for Recess
mounting the EFD to section 6.
AB Software Version 2.5 approved. Added new SW2.5 installation menu page 13 of 24 in section 10. 3123
Updated Table 1-3, 1-4, 1-5 and1-6 for SW2.5. Corrected Figure F1 – Pin 44 of K1 to L2. Updated
Appendix G to update “PRESEL” switch location and readability requirements.
AC Software Version B2.3.3 approved. Updated Table 1-4, 1-5 and1-6 for swB2.3.3. Updated Fig 9- 3181
23F and 9-23G to fix FD Pitch Com ground point of shield. Added wording to Section 4.4.1 about
changing the backup AI vacuum source.

Prepared By: TLM Reviewed By: WCB See ECO Record For Release Authorization

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 4-367 Revision AC

The conditions and tests required for TSO approval of the EFD1000/500 System are minimum
performance standards. It is the responsibility of those installing this article either on or within specific
type or class of aircraft to determine that the aircraft installation conditions are within the TSO
standards. TSO articles must have separate approval for installation in an aircraft. The article may be
installed only if performed under 14 CFR Part 43 or the applicable airworthiness requirements.

This manual contains FAA Approved installation instructions for installation of the Aspen™
EFD1000/EFD500 system under the AML STC for use as a primary electronic flight display and
associated Multifunction display(s) (as applicable) during day/night IFR and VFR operations in those Part
23 Class I, II and III aircraft (as defined in AC 23.1309-1D) listed on the AML. Installation of the
EFD1000/500 into part 23 Class I, II or III aircraft not included in the AML, into any 14CFR Part 23 Class
IV aircraft, or into any part 25, 27, or 29 aircraft, or non-U.S. registered aircraft requires separate
airworthiness approval.

This document is protected by the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries. Nevertheless,
authorized Aspen dealers and distributors are licensed to make a reasonable number of verbatim copies of this
document for use in their business as Aspen dealers.

Reproduction for any other purpose is strictly prohibited.

Public or fee-based copy centers need not inquire into the bearer's status as an Aspen dealer or distributor, into the
purposes for which reproductions are to be made, or into the reasonableness of the number of reproductions
requested.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 5-367 Revision AC

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................ 23

1.1 PART NUMBERS ................................................................................................................ 23

1.1.1 Authorized Display Configurations ....................................................................... 24
1.1.2 Optional and Standard features of each Display System ......................................... 24
1.1.3 Latest Approved Software Versions ....................................................................... 25
1.1.4 EFD1000/500 System Authorized Software Configurations .................................... 25
1.1.5 Authorized System Components of each Display System ....................................... 26
1.1.6 AML-STC Document List ...................................................................................... 31
1.2 INSTALLATION KIT CONTENTS .............................................................................................. 32
1.3 OPTIONAL LRU INSTALLATION KITS....................................................................................... 34
1.4 ACCESSORIES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED – EFD1000 PFD ...................................................... 35
1.5 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES NOT SUPPLIED – EFD1000 PFD ........................................................... 35
1.6 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED – EFD1000 MFD ....................................... 36
1.7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED – EFD500 MFD ......................................... 36
1.8 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED – EA100 ................................................... 37
1.9 SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED................................................................................................... 37
1.10 VENDOR INFORMATION ...................................................................................................... 37
1.11 WARRANTY REGISTRATION .................................................................................................. 38
1.12 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE ................................................................................................. 38
1.12.1 Technical Standard Order ................................................................................... 38
1.12.2 Software Certification ......................................................................................... 38
1.12.3 Environmental Compliance ................................................................................. 38
1.12.4 Installation Approval .......................................................................................... 38
1.13 FIELD REPLACEABLE PARTS .................................................................................................. 39

2 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS AND LIMITATIONS .......................................................................... 41

2.1 EFD1000 PFD AND MFD ................................................................................................. 41

2.1.1 General Specifications .......................................................................................... 41
2.1.2 Operational Specifications: ................................................................................... 41
2.1.3 I/O Specifications:................................................................................................ 41
2.1.4 Certification Specifications: .................................................................................. 41
2.1.5 Outline Drawing: .................................................................................................. 44
2.2 EFD500 MFD ................................................................................................................ 44
2.2.1 General Specifications .......................................................................................... 44
2.2.2 Operational Specifications .................................................................................... 45
2.2.3 I/O Specifications................................................................................................. 45
2.2.4 Certification Specifications ................................................................................... 45
2.2.5 EFD500 Outline Drawing ...................................................................................... 46
2.2.6 Design Eye Viewing Envelope................................................................................ 46
2.3 REMOTE SENSOR MODULE (RSM): ........................................................................................ 47

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 6-367 Revision AC

2.3.1 General Specifications .......................................................................................... 47

2.3.2 Operational Specifications: ................................................................................... 47
2.3.3 I/O Specifications:................................................................................................ 47
2.3.4 Certification Specifications: .................................................................................. 47
2.3.5 Outline Drawing: .................................................................................................. 48
2.4 CONFIGURATION MODULE (CM) ........................................................................................... 48
2.4.1 General Specifications .......................................................................................... 48
2.4.2 Operational Specifications: ................................................................................... 49
2.4.3 I/O Specifications:................................................................................................ 49
2.4.4 Certification Specifications: .................................................................................. 49
2.4.5 Outline Drawing ................................................................................................... 49
2.5 ANALOG CONVERTER UNIT (ACU): ....................................................................................... 50
2.5.1 General Specifications .......................................................................................... 50
2.5.2 Operational Specifications: ................................................................................... 50
2.5.3 I/O Specifications:................................................................................................ 50
2.5.4 Certification Specifications: .................................................................................. 50
2.5.5 Outline Drawing: .................................................................................................. 51
2.6 ANALOG CONVERTER UNIT 2 ............................................................................................... 51
2.6.1 General Specifications .......................................................................................... 51
2.6.2 Operational Specifications: ................................................................................... 51
2.6.3 I/O Specifications:................................................................................................ 52
2.6.4 Certification Specifications: .................................................................................. 52
2.6.5 Outline Drawing ................................................................................................... 53
2.7 EBB58 EMERGENCY BACKUP BATTERY ................................................................................... 53
2.7.1 General Specifications .......................................................................................... 53
2.7.2 Operating Specifications....................................................................................... 54
2.7.3 I/O Specifications................................................................................................. 54
2.7.4 Certification Specifications: .................................................................................. 54
2.7.5 Outline Drawing ................................................................................................... 54

3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................ 55

3.1 EFD1000/EFD500 ........................................................................................................ 55

3.2 REMOTE SENSOR MODULE (RSM) ......................................................................................... 57
3.3 CONFIGURATION MODULE (CM) ........................................................................................... 57
3.4 ANALOG CONVERTER UNIT (ACU) ........................................................................................ 58
3.5 ANALOG CONVERTER UNIT 2 (ACU2) ................................................................................... 58
3.6 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ...................................................................................................... 59
3.7 EXAMPLE CONFIGURATIONS ................................................................................................. 60
3.7.1 PRO Digital Analog Mix with Autopilot .................................................................. 60
3.7.2 Two Display PFD with MFD1000 or MFD500 .......................................................... 61
3.7.3 Three Display PFD with MFD1000 and MFD500 ..................................................... 62

4 STC SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS ......................................................................... 63

4.1 GENERAL LIMITATIONS ....................................................................................................... 63

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 7-367 Revision AC

4.2 AUTHORIZED CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................................................ 64

4.3 SOFTWARE VERSION LIMITATIONS ......................................................................................... 68
4.4 GENERAL STANDBY INSTRUMENT REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 68
4.4.1 Pneumatic Standby Instruments (See Figure 4-5) .................................................. 68
4.4.2 Electric Standby Instruments ................................................................................ 68
4.4.3 Using the EFD1000 MFD as Standby Airspeed and/or Altimeter (see Figure 4-6) .... 69
4.5 CONSIDERATIONS FOR VMO AIRSPEED INDICATOR REMOVAL ......................................................... 70
4.5.1 Standby Attitude Positioning ................................................................................ 73
4.5.2 Standby Airspeed and Altimeter Positioning .......................................................... 74
4.5.1 Back Up Nav Indicator .......................................................................................... 75

5 PRE-MODIFICATION PLANNING .................................................................................................. 77

5.1 PRE-MODIFICATION CHECKLIST ........................................................................................... 77

5.1.1 Directional Gyro/ HSI ........................................................................................... 79
5.1.2 GPS Annunciators................................................................................................. 79
5.1.3 Synthetic Vision Enabled PFD Pro (level C) or MFD (requires external GPS position) . 79
5.1.4 Aircraft Power Requirements ................................................................................ 80
5.1.5 Equipment Power Requirements ........................................................................... 80
5.1.6 Special Considerations for Aircraft Limited to VFR ................................................. 80
5.1.7 Cessna 190/195 Special Consideration ................................................................. 81
5.2 CONVENTIONAL LANDING GEAR “TAIL DRAGGER” AIRCRAFT ......................................................... 82
5.3 PART 135 IFR OPERATIONS............................................................................................... 82
5.4 SETTING V-SPEED TEXTUAL MARKERS .................................................................................. 82
5.5 OPTIONAL INTERFACES....................................................................................................... 82
5.5.1 Autopilot ............................................................................................................. 82
5.5.1.1 EA100 Adapter ............................................................................................. 83
5.5.1.2 A/P Source Selection Switch .......................................................................... 83
5.5.1.3 Altitude Pre-Select System ............................................................................ 83
5.5.2 GPS Navigator Basemap Compatibility ................................................................... 83
5.5.3 GPSS .................................................................................................................... 85
5.5.4 GPS/ NAV Switching ............................................................................................. 85
5.5.5 Sonalert Tone Generator (Pro system only) ............................................................ 85
5.5.6 Heading Output ................................................................................................... 85
5.5.7 Air Data Outputs .................................................................................................. 86
5.5.7.1 EFD1000 as Encoding Altitude Source ........................................................... 86
5.5.8 Second ACU ......................................................................................................... 86
5.5.9 Decision Height ................................................................................................... 87
5.5.10 RS-232 Considerations (v1.1 PFD installations) ................................................... 87
5.5.11 Flush or Recess Mounting the PFD ...................................................................... 87
5.6 TRAFFIC SENSORS (OPTIONAL – MUST BE UNLOCKED ON PFD) ....................................................... 87
5.7 WEATHER INFORMATION (OPTIONAL ON LEVEL C ONLY – MUST BE UNLOCKED ON PFD) ........................ 88
5.8 ADF ............................................................................................................................. 88
5.9 RADIO ALTIMETER (AGL) ................................................................................................... 88
5.10 REMOTE OAT PROBE ........................................................................................................ 89

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 8-367 Revision AC

6 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................... 91

6.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT ................................................................................ 91

6.2 EQUIPMENT LOCATION DOCUMENTATION ................................................................................ 91
6.3 LOG BOOK ENTRY ............................................................................................................ 91
6.4 WEIGHT AND BALANCE....................................................................................................... 91
6.5 INSTALLATION LIMITATIONS ................................................................................................ 92
6.5.1 EFD1000 Installation Limitations .......................................................................... 92
6.5.2 RSM Mounting Limitations .................................................................................... 92
6.5.3 EFD1000 MFD – RSM Limitations (Dual RSM Mounting) .......................................... 92
6.5.4 EBB58 Emergency Battery mounting Limitations .................................................... 93
6.6 EQUIPMENT BONDING ........................................................................................................ 93
6.7 COOLING ....................................................................................................................... 94
6.8 EFD INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................... 94
6.8.1 Connecting the Internal Battery (does not apply to 910-00001-002) ..................... 94
6.8.2 PFD Mounting Location ........................................................................................ 94
6.8.3 MFD1000 Mounting Location ................................................................................ 95
6.8.4 Surface Mounting the EFD as per Figure 6-2 ......................................................... 96
6.8.5 Recess Mounting the EFD as per Figure 6-4 .......................................................... 97
6.8.5.1 Recess Mount Modification Procedure ........................................................... 98
6.8.6 EFD Bonding Strap ............................................................................................. 104
6.8.7 Pitot and Static Connections (EFD1000 only) ....................................................... 104
6.8.8 Quick Connector Installation .............................................................................. 105
6.8.9 Leak Check Requirements .................................................................................. 106
6.9 RSM INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... 107
6.9.1 RSM External Top Mounting ............................................................................... 107
6.9.2 RSM Internal Mounting ....................................................................................... 108
6.9.3 RSM External Bottom Mounting .......................................................................... 108
6.9.4 Proposed RSM Location Check ............................................................................ 111
6.9.5 Pressurized Aircraft............................................................................................ 112
6.9.6 RSM Mounting on Non-Metal or Damage-Tolerant Design Aircraft....................... 113
6.9.7 Second RSM Placement (MFD1000) ..................................................................... 113
6.9.8 RSM Mounting Angles ........................................................................................ 113
6.9.8.1 Longitudinal Axis ....................................................................................... 114
6.9.8.2 Pitch Axis ................................................................................................... 114
6.9.8.3 Roll Axis .................................................................................................... 115
6.9.9 RSM External Mount – Aluminum Skin ................................................................. 116
6.9.9.1 RSM Doubler Fabrication ............................................................................. 116
6.9.10 RSM Internal Mount .......................................................................................... 118
6.9.11 RSM Installation ............................................................................................... 118
6.9.12 RSM Shim Fabrication (if necessary) .................................................................. 119
6.10 ACU/ACU2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................... 121
6.10.1 ACU/ACU2 Mounting ....................................................................................... 122
6.11 CONFIGURATION MODULE INSTALLATION ............................................................................... 125

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 9-367 Revision AC

6.12 EBB58 EMERGENCY BACKUP BATTERY INSTALLATION ................................................................ 126

6.12.1 EBB58 Mounting............................................................................................... 126
6.13 SONALERT INSTALLATION .................................................................................................. 127

7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................... 129

7.1 ELECTRICAL LOAD ANALYSIS............................................................................................... 129

7.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ................................................................................................. 129
7.2.1 EFD1000 PFD ..................................................................................................... 129
7.2.2 EFD1000 MFD .................................................................................................... 129
7.2.3 EFD500 MFD ...................................................................................................... 130
7.2.4 ACU or ACU2 (optional) ...................................................................................... 130
7.2.5 EBB58 (optional)................................................................................................. 130
7.2.6 Miscellaneous Wiring.......................................................................................... 131
7.2.7 HIRF/Lightning Requirements ............................................................................. 131
7.2.8 EFD to GPS/VLOC/ACU Wiring ............................................................................ 133
7.2.9 RSM Wiring ........................................................................................................ 133
7.2.9.1 Assembly using Aspen P/N A-08-148-00-A or 412-00005-001 30ft cable . 134
7.2.9.2 Assembly using M27500-A24SD7T23 Cable: ............................................... 134
7.2.9.3 EFD END ..................................................................................................... 135
7.2.10 Configuration Module Wiring ............................................................................ 135
7.2.11 ACU Wiring ...................................................................................................... 135
7.2.12 Back Up NAV Indicator Wiring ........................................................................... 136
7.2.13 Autopilot Wiring ............................................................................................... 136
7.2.14 EBB58 Wiring ................................................................................................... 136

8 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 139

8.1 EFD ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 139

8.1.1 Power Input ....................................................................................................... 139
8.1.2 Tone (PFD)/Reversion (MFD) Output.................................................................... 139
8.1.3 RS-232 GPS Input .............................................................................................. 139
8.1.4 RS232 ADC Output ............................................................................................ 139
8.1.5 ARINC 429 GPS Inputs ........................................................................................ 140
8.1.6 ARINC 429 VLOC Input ....................................................................................... 141
8.1.7 ARINC 429 Output ............................................................................................. 141
8.2 ACU ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (910-00004 ALL DASH NUMBERS) ........................................... 142
8.2.1 Power Input ....................................................................................................... 142
8.2.2 Decision Height (DH) Input ................................................................................. 142
8.2.3 VLOC Receiver ................................................................................................... 142
8.2.3.1 NAV Composite Input ................................................................................. 142
8.2.3.2 ILS Energize Discrete Input.......................................................................... 142
8.2.3.3 Glide Slope Deviation Input ......................................................................... 142
8.2.3.4 Glide Slope Flag Input ................................................................................. 142
8.2.4 GPS Receiver ...................................................................................................... 143
8.2.4.1 OBS Sine, Cosine, Rotor .............................................................................. 143

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 10-367 Revision AC

8.2.4.2 TO/ FROM FLAG Input................................................................................. 143

8.2.4.3 LEFT/ RIGHT Input ...................................................................................... 143
8.2.4.4 Lateral Flag Input........................................................................................ 143
8.2.4.5 Vertical Deviation Input .............................................................................. 143
8.2.4.6 Vertical Deviation Flag Input ....................................................................... 143
8.2.4.7 OBS/ LEG (HOLD) Input ............................................................................... 144
8.2.4.8 APPR Active Input ....................................................................................... 144
8.2.4.9 FCS-LOC Engage Input................................................................................ 144
8.2.5 Autopilot ........................................................................................................... 144
8.2.5.1 Lateral Deviation Output ............................................................................. 144
8.2.5.2 Lateral Flag Output ..................................................................................... 144
8.2.5.3 Vertical Deviation Output ............................................................................ 144
8.2.5.4 Vertical Flag Output .................................................................................... 144
8.2.5.5 ILS Energize Output .................................................................................... 145
8.2.5.6 15 Volt Reference Output............................................................................ 145
8.2.5.7 KI-525A Heading and Course Datum Output ............................................... 145
8.2.5.8 NSD-360 Heading and Course Datum Output .............................................. 146
8.2.5.9 PN-101 Heading and Course Datum Output ................................................ 146
8.2.5.10 ACU Flight Director Types ......................................................................... 147
8.2.5.11 Flight Director Valid Input ......................................................................... 148
8.2.5.12 Flight Director Engaged Input.................................................................... 148
8.2.5.13 Heading Valid Output ............................................................................... 148
8.2.5.14 GPS Selected Output ................................................................................. 148
8.2.6 ARINC 429 Output ............................................................................................. 148
8.3 ACU2 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (910-00004-10X ONLY) ................................................... 149
8.3.1 ADF Bearing ....................................................................................................... 149
8.3.2 Radio Altimeter .................................................................................................. 149
8.3.3 Heading Synchro Out ......................................................................................... 150
8.3.4 +/- 15Vdc Power Output ................................................................................... 150
8.3.5 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) .......................................................................... 150
8.3.6 Glideslope Flag (Narco) ...................................................................................... 150
8.3.7 ACU2 Flight Director Inputs ................................................................................ 151
8.3.8 ARINC 429 Output ............................................................................................. 151
8.4 EFD PIN OUT................................................................................................................. 152
8.5 RSM PIN OUT ................................................................................................................ 153
8.6 CONFIGURATION MODULE PIN OUT ...................................................................................... 154
8.7 ACU/ACU2 PIN OUT ...................................................................................................... 154

9 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................ 161

9.1 LIST OF WIRING DIAGRAMS – PFD ........................................................................................ 162

9.2 LIST OF WIRING DIAGRAMS – MFD/PFD MULTI DISPLAY SYSTEMS ................................................ 163
9.3 OPTIONAL INTERFACES – ACU AND ACU2 ............................................................................. 164

10 CONFIGURATION AND EQUIPMENT CHECKOUT .......................................................................... 223

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 11-367 Revision AC

10.1 POST INSTALLATION WIRING CHECKS .................................................................................... 223

10.1.1 Wiring Verification ........................................................................................... 223
10.1.2 Bonding Check – FAR 23.867(b) ........................................................................ 223
10.2 DATABASE INSTALLATION .................................................................................................. 224
10.3 INITIAL SYSTEM TURN ON .................................................................................................. 224
10.4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................... 225
10.4.1 Main Menu Access ........................................................................................... 225
10.4.2 Menu Navigation .............................................................................................. 225
10.4.3 Edit Mode ........................................................................................................ 225
10.4.4 Main Menu Configuration ................................................................................. 225
10.4.5 INSTALLATION MENU – UNIT CONFIGURATION .................................................. 226
10.4.6 EFD1000 Installation Menu Configuration ......................................................... 228
10.4.6.1 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - IAS CONFIG A ............................................... 228
10.4.6.2 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG B ................................................ 229
10.4.6.3 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG C .............................................. 230
10.4.6.4 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG D ............................................... 230
10.4.6.5 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG E ................................................ 230
10.4.6.6 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - IAS CONFIG F ................................................ 231
10.4.6.7 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - IAS CONFIG G (SW v2.2 and above) ................ 231
10.4.6.8 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SETUP A ................................................ 232
10.4.6.9 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SETUP B................................................. 232
10.4.6.10 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SETUP C .............................................. 233
10.4.6.11 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG A ......................................... 233
10.4.6.12 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG B ........................................ 234
10.4.6.13 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG C ........................................ 234
10.4.6.14 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG A ............................................ 235
10.4.6.15 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG B ............................................ 235
10.4.6.16 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG A .......................................... 235
10.4.6.17 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG B .......................................... 236
10.4.6.18 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG C ........................................... 236
10.4.6.19 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG D ........................................... 237
10.4.6.20 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RSM CALIBRATION ...................................... 238
10.4.6.21 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACCEL BIAS CAL ......................................... 239
10.4.6.22 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – WX-500 ..................................................... 240
INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – WX-500 ........................................................................... 240
10.4.6.23 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NETWORK PAGE ......................................... 240
INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NETWORK PAGE ................................................................ 240
10.4.6.24 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - DIAGNOSTICS ............................................ 241
10.4.7 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – DIAGNOSTICS ...................................................... 241
10.4.7.1 EXITING / SAVING DATA ........................................................................... 242
10.4.8 EFD500 MFD Installation Menu Configuration ................................................... 243
10.4.8.1 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - IAS CONFIG A .............................................. 243
10.4.8.2 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG B ............................................... 243
10.4.8.3 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG C (SW v2.2 and above) ................ 243

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 12-367 Revision AC

10.4.8.4 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG D ............................................... 244

10.4.8.5 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - IAS CONFIG E ................................................ 244
10.4.8.6 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG F ................................................ 244
10.4.8.7 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG G ............................................... 245
10.4.8.8 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SET UP A .............................................. 245
10.4.8.9 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SET UP B................................................ 245
10.4.8.10 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SET UP C ............................................. 246
10.4.8.11 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG A ....................................... 246
10.4.8.12 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG B ........................................ 247
10.4.8.13 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG C ......................................... 247
10.4.8.14 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG A ........................................... 247
10.4.8.15 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG B ............................................ 248
10.4.8.16 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG A .......................................... 248
10.4.8.17 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG B .......................................... 248
10.4.8.18 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG C .......................................... 249
10.4.8.19 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG D ........................................... 249
10.4.8.20 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RSM CALIBRATION ..................................... 249
10.4.8.21 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACCEL BIAS CAL ......................................... 250
10.4.8.22 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – WX500 ...................................................... 250
10.4.8.23 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NETWORK PAGE ......................................... 250
10.4.8.24 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – DIAGNOSTICS ............................................ 250
10.4.8.25 EXITING / SAVING DATA.......................................................................... 251
10.4.9 CONFIGURATION DEFINITIONS .......................................................................... 251
10.4.9.1 Aircraft with Vmo/Mmo airspeed indicators ............................................... 251
10.4.9.2 IAS Configurations .................................................................................... 257
10.4.9.3 PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ .............................................................................. 259
10.4.9.4 PANEL ROLL ADJ ....................................................................................... 260
10.4.9.5 ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL ADJ ....................................................................... 260
10.4.10 NAV Setup Configuration................................................................................ 260
10.4.10.1 GPS/NAV#1 (ID#1) .................................................................................. 260
10.4.10.2 GPS/NAV#2 (ID#2) .................................................................................. 261
10.4.10.3 COMPOSITE PHASE (VOR1, VOR2) ............................................................ 261
10.4.11 ACU Configuration ......................................................................................... 261
10.4.11.1 ACU HSI TYPE ......................................................................................... 261
10.4.11.2 ACU FD TYPE .......................................................................................... 261
10.4.11.3 ACU DATUM ........................................................................................... 262
10.4.11.4 FD ROLL OFFSET ADJ ............................................................................... 262
10.4.11.5 FD PITCH OFFSET ADJ ............................................................................. 262
10.4.11.6 EXITING / SAVING DATA.......................................................................... 262
10.5 RSM CALIBRATION .......................................................................................................... 263
10.5.1 Calibration Overview ........................................................................................ 263
10.5.1.1 Second Phase RSM Location Evaluation ...................................................... 264
10.5.1.2 Conventional Gear RSM Calibration Procedure ........................................... 266
10.5.2 RSM Calibration Procedure ............................................................................... 268

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 13-367 Revision AC

10.5.3 Heading Offset Adjustment .............................................................................. 271

10.5.3.1 Heading Offset Adjustment ....................................................................... 271
10.5.4 Heading Accuracy Test ..................................................................................... 272
10.5.5 Heading Interference Test ................................................................................ 272
10.6 GROUND TEST PROCEDURE (PFD, EFD500 MFD AND EFD1000 IN PFD REV & MFD MODE) ............273
10.6.1 Indicated Airspeed Display ............................................................................... 274
10.6.2 Altitude Display ............................................................................................... 274
10.6.3 System Leak Test ............................................................................................. 274
10.6.4 Outside Air Temperature (if ENABLED) .............................................................. 274
10.6.5 AHRS Sensor Test............................................................................................. 274
10.6.6 GPS Sensor Test ............................................................................................... 274
10.6.6.1 All GPS interfaces ..................................................................................... 275
10.6.6.2 Analog GPS interfaces ............................................................................... 275
10.6.6.3 RSM GPS (if ENABLED) ............................................................................... 275
10.6.7 NAV Receiver Sensor Test ................................................................................. 276
10.6.8 Backup Navigation Indicator ............................................................................. 276
10.6.9 Autopilot Sensor Test ....................................................................................... 276
Flight Director Test ....................................................................................................... 277
10.6.10 ACU2 Analog Inputs ....................................................................................... 277
10.6.10.1 Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) ............................................................ 277
10.6.10.2 Radio Altimeter ...................................................................................... 277
10.6.11 Sonalert Test ................................................................................................. 277
10.6.12 Decision Height (DH) Test .............................................................................. 278
10.6.13 Traffic Display Test (if installed, for PFD, EFD500 MFD, & EFD1000 MFD) ......... 278
10.6.14 XM Weather Display and Control Test (if installed, applies to PFD, EFD500 MFD,
and EFD1000 MFD)........................................................................................................ 278
10.6.15 WX-500 Display and Control Test (if installed, applies to PFD, EFD500 MFD, and
EFD1000 MFD) .............................................................................................................. 278
10.6.16 Ancillary Equipment Heading Check ................................................................ 278
10.6.17 Ancillary Equipment Air Data Check ................................................................ 278
10.6.18 EFD Inter-System Communication Test ........................................................... 279
10.6.19 EBB58 Battery Test (if installed) & internal battery tests ................................... 279
10.6.20 TAPES Configuration Check ............................................................................ 280
10.6.21 EMI Test (test with all EFD units operating)...................................................... 280
10.6.22 Flight Control Interference Check ................................................................... 280
10.6.23 OBS Mode Check - Dual ARINC SDI GPS devices .............................................. 280
10.6.24 OBS Mode Check for one analog/RS-232 GPS device and one analog GPS device or
one analog/RS-232 GPS device and one ARINC GPS device. ............................................ 281
10.6.25 OBS Mode Check - Single analog, ARINC or RS-232 GPS device ....................... 281
10.6.26 EA100 Adapter Testing .................................................................................. 281
10.7 WX-500 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................... 281
10.7.1 System Data..................................................................................................... 282
10.7.2 Strike Test ....................................................................................................... 283
10.7.3 Noise Monitor .................................................................................................. 284

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 14-367 Revision AC

10.7.4 Antenna Mount ................................................................................................ 284

11 POST INSTALLATION FLIGHT CHECK .......................................................................................... 285

11.1 BASIC ADI FLIGHT CHECKS (PFD AND EFD1000 MFD IN REVERSION) .......................................... 285
11.2 BASIC HSI/DG FLIGHT CHECKS (PFD AND EFD1000 MFD IN REVERSION) ..................................... 285
11.3 ILS FLIGHT CHECKS PFD (EFD1000 MFD AND EFD1000 SECONDARY HSI) ................................. 286
11.4 AUTOPILOT FLIGHT CHECKS (IF INSTALLED, PFD ONLY) .............................................................. 286
11.5 DOCUMENT TEST FLIGHT ................................................................................................... 287

12 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................................... 289

12.1 PILOT CONTROLS ............................................................................................................ 289

12.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 289
12.1.2 Power Control .................................................................................................. 289
12.1.3 PFD Display and Control Layout ........................................................................ 291
12.1.4 Control Knobs.................................................................................................. 292
12.1.4.1 General .................................................................................................... 292
12.2 TRAFFIC DISPLAY (OPTIONAL) ............................................................................................. 292
12.3 XM WEATHER DISPLAY (OPTIONAL) ...................................................................................... 292
12.4 WX-500 DISPLAY (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................................... 292
12.5 CHARTS ........................................................................................................................ 293

13 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORMS ................................................................................. 295

Appendix A TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................ 299

Appendix B INSTALLATION FINAL CHECK SHEET ................................................. 307
Appendix C OPERATOR CONFIGURATION CHECKLIST.......................................... 313
Appendix D Component Maintenance Manual (CMM) .......................................... 317
Appendix E EA100 Adapter ............................................................................... 319
Appendix F A/P Source Select ............................................................................ 348
Appendix G APS4A Altitude Pre-Select System ................................................... 353
Appendix H Technical Notes Applicable to AML-STC SA10822SC........................ 361

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 15-367 Revision AC

List of Tables

Table 1-1 - TSO Part Numbers ........................................................................................................... 23

Table 1-2 - Authorized Display Configurations................................................................................... 24
Table 1-3 – Display System Options ................................................................................................... 24
Table 1-4 – Latest Approved Software Versions .................................................................................. 25
Table 1-5 – Authorized Software Configurations ................................................................................. 25
Table 1-6 – AML-STC Additional Document List .................................................................................. 32
Table 1-7 903-00001-( ) EFD1000 PFD Install Kits ............................................................................. 32
Table 1-8 903-00001-( ) EFD1000 MFD Install Kits ............................................................................ 33
Table 1-9 903-00004-( ) and 903-00001-( ) EFD500 Install Kits ........................................................ 33
Table 1-10 903-00007-001 EFD Recess Mount Kit ............................................................................. 34
Table 1-11 903-00002-( ) RSM Install Kits ......................................................................................... 34
Table 1-12 903-00003-001 ACU Install Kit ........................................................................................ 34
Table 1-13 903-00011-( ) EA100 Install Kits ...................................................................................... 35
Table 1-14 903-00003-002 ACU2 Install Kit ...................................................................................... 35
Table 1-15 PFD Accessories Required but Not Supplied ...................................................................... 35
Table 1-16 PFD Optional Accessories Not Supplied ............................................................................. 36
Table 1-17 EFD1000 MFD Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied ......................................... 36
Table 1-18 EFD500 MFD Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied ........................................... 37
Table 1-19 EA100 Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied ..................................................... 37
Table 5-1 - PFD Pre-Modification Checklist ........................................................................................ 78
Table 5-2 - MFD Pre-Modification Checklist ....................................................................................... 78
Table 5-3 - GPS Basemap Compatibility ............................................................................................. 84
Table 5-4 – Heading Sources.............................................................................................................. 85
Table 5-5 – Air Data Sources .............................................................................................................. 86
Table 6-1 – Component Weights ........................................................................................................ 91
Table 7-1 – Current Draw................................................................................................................. 129
Table 8-1 – RS232 ADC Outputs ...................................................................................................... 139
Table 8-2 - EFD A429 GPS Input ...................................................................................................... 141
Table 8-3 - EFD A429 VLOC Input .................................................................................................... 141
Table 8-4 - EFD1000 A429 GPS Output ............................................................................................ 142
Table 8-5 – KI525A Emulation Specifications .................................................................................... 145
Table 8-6 – NSD360A Emulation Specifications ................................................................................. 146
Table 8-7 – PN101 Emulation Specifications ..................................................................................... 147
Table 8-8 – ACU Flight Director Types .............................................................................................. 148
Table 8-9 - ACU A429 Output ......................................................................................................... 148
Table 8-10 – Radio Altimeter Types .................................................................................................. 149
Table 8-11 – Flight Director Types ................................................................................................... 151
Table 8-12 – ACU2 ARINC 429 Output.............................................................................................. 152
Table 8-13 - PFD/MFD Pin Out......................................................................................................... 153
Table 8-14 - RSM Pin Out ................................................................................................................ 153

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 16-367 Revision AC

Table 8-15 - Configuration Module Pin Out ...................................................................................... 154

Table 8-16 - ACU J1 Pin Out ............................................................................................................ 155
Table 8-17 - ACU J2 Pin Out ............................................................................................................ 156
Table 8-18 - ACU J3 Pin Out ............................................................................................................ 157
Table 9-1- PFD Wiring Diagrams ...................................................................................................... 163
Table 9-2 - MFD Wiring Diagrams .................................................................................................... 163
Table 9-3- Optional ACU/ACU2 Interfaces ....................................................................................... 164
Table 10-1 – Turbo Prop Aircraft with Vmo Airspeed Indicators ......................................................... 257
Table 10-2 – Vertical Component Evaluation table ............................................................................ 264
Table 13-1 - EFD1000 Environmental Qualification Form .................................................................. 295
Table 13-2 - RSM Environmental Qualification Form ......................................................................... 296
Table 13-3 - ACU Environmental Qualification Form ......................................................................... 297

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 17-367 Revision AC

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 - EFD1000 PFD PRO Authorized System Components ......................................................... 26

Figure 1-2 - EFD1000C3 Level B PFD Authorized System Components ................................................ 27
Figure 1-3 – EFD1000 PFD PILOT Authorized System Components....................................................... 28
Figure 1-4 - EFD1000 MFD Authorized System Components ............................................................... 29
Figure 1-5 - EFD1000 MFD Authorized System Components (Suitable for replacing standby AS/ALT) ... 30
Figure 1-6 - EFD500 MFD Authorized System Components ................................................................. 31
Figure 2-1 – EFD1000 Outline Drawing (inches) .................................................................................. 44
Figure 2-2 – EFD500 Outline Drawing (inches) .................................................................................... 46
Figure 2-3 - RSM Outline Drawing (inches) ......................................................................................... 48
Figure 2-4 - Configuration Module Outline Drawing (inches) ............................................................... 49
Figure 2-5 - ACU Outline Drawing (inches) ......................................................................................... 51
Figure 2-6 – ACU2 Outline Drawing (inches) ....................................................................................... 53
Figure 2-7 – EBB58 Outline Drawing (inches) ...................................................................................... 54
Figure 3-1 – EFD1000 in a PFD view ................................................................................................... 56
Figure 3-2 - EFD1000 Single PFD System Architecture ........................................................................ 59
Figure 3-3 – Example Digital and Analog PFD configuration ................................................................ 60
Figure 3-4 – Example Two display PFD and MFD configuration ............................................................ 61
Figure 3-5 – Example Three Display PFD/MFD Configuration ............................................................... 62
Figure 4-1 – EFD1000 PFD Authorized Configuration .......................................................................... 64
Figure 4-2 – EFD1000 PFD and MFD500 Authorized Configuration ...................................................... 65
Figure 4-3 – EFD1000 PFD and MFD1000 Authorized Configuration (with or without MFD500) ............. 66
Figure 4-4 – EFD1000 PFD and MFD1000 with EBB58 (with and without MFD500) ................................ 67
Figure 4-5 – Required Mechanical Backup Instruments Flowchart ........................................................ 71
Figure 4-6 – Required Backups when using MFD1000 with EBB58 Flowchart ........................................ 72
Figure 4-7 – Standby Instrument Placement ........................................................................................ 73
Figure 4-8 – Basic T configuration ...................................................................................................... 74
Figure 6-1 - PFD Mounting Location................................................................................................... 95
Figure 6-2 – EFD and Bracket Installation ............................................................................................ 97
Figure 6-3 - Single Display Recess Mount Cutout (inches) ................................................................... 99
Figure 6-4 - Single Display Recess Mount Bracket Installation ........................................................... 100
Figure 6-5 - Ground Strap Attachment Points ................................................................................... 101
Figure 6-6 – Dual Display Recess Mount Cutout (inches) ................................................................... 102
Figure 6-7 – Three Display Recess Mount Cutout (inches).................................................................. 102
Figure 6-8 – Recess Mounting Bracket Dimensions (inches) ............................................................... 103
Figure 6-9 - EFD Mounting Bracket (inches) ...................................................................................... 103
Figure 6-10 – EFD Bonding Strap Connection ................................................................................... 104
Figure 6-11 - Pitot & Static Quick Connector .................................................................................... 105
Figure 6-12 – Pitot & Static Line Connections .................................................................................... 105
Figure 6-13 - RSM-External Mounting Locations (Top/Side View) – all aircraft types .......................... 109
Figure 6-14 - RSM Internal Mounting Locations – Composite/Fabric Aircraft...................................... 110
Figure 6-15 - RSM-003 External Mounting Locations (Bottom view) .................................................. 111

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 18-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-16 – RSM Top View longitudinal Alignment ......................................................................... 114

Figure 6-17 – RSM Fore or Aft Max Tilt ............................................................................................. 114
Figure 6-18 – RSM Fore or Aft Max Tilt (Shim installed) ..................................................................... 115
Figure 6-19 – RSM Side to Side Max Tilt ............................................................................................ 115
Figure 6-20 – RSM Side to Side Max Tilt (Shim installed) .................................................................... 115
Figure 6-21 – RSM Doubler P/N 503-00015-001 .............................................................................. 116
Figure 6-22 - Masking of Doubler .................................................................................................... 117
Figure 6-23 - Doubler Installation .................................................................................................... 118
Figure 6-25– RSM Mounting ............................................................................................................. 119
Figure 6-26 – Example Shim Top View .............................................................................................. 120
Figure 6-27 – Example Shim Side View ............................................................................................ 120
Figure 6-28 – Masking of Shim for Priming ....................................................................................... 121
Figure 6-29 – ACU/ACU2 Mount to Flat Metal Shelf .......................................................................... 122
Figure 6-30– ACU Dimensions (inches) ............................................................................................. 123
Figure 6-31 – ACU2 Dimensions (inches) .......................................................................................... 124
Figure 6-32 – Configuration Module Dimensions (inches) .................................................................. 125
Figure 6-33 – Configuration Module Tie Wrapped to Harness ............................................................ 125
Figure 6-34 - EBB58 Mounting Bracket Installation ........................................................................... 126
Figure 6-35 - EBB58 Attachment locations ....................................................................................... 127
Figure 6-36 - Sonalert Mounting Instructions ................................................................................... 127
Figure 7-1 - EFD1000 PFD/EFD1000 MFD/EFD500MFD Switches ....................................................... 130
Figure 7-2 - EBB58 Switch ............................................................................................................... 131
Figure 7-3 – Over Braid/ Double Shield Requirements ....................................................................... 132
Figure 7-4– EFD Back Shell Grounds ................................................................................................. 133
Figure 7-5 – RSM Connector assembly .............................................................................................. 134
Figure 7-6 – EFD Back Shell Grounds/RSM ........................................................................................ 135
Figure 7-7 - EBB Wiring Harness Switch Connections ........................................................................ 137
Figure 7-8 - EBB EMER DISC switch labeling ...................................................................................... 137
Figure 8-1– PFD/MFD Connector (as viewed from rear of unit) .......................................................... 153
Figure 8-2 - RSM Mating Connector –Install Side .............................................................................. 153
Figure 8-3 - Configuration Module Connector (Install side) ............................................................... 154
Figure 8-4-ACU J1 Connector (as viewed from front of unit) ............................................................. 155
Figure 8-5 –ACU J2 Connector (as viewed from front of unit) ............................................................. 156
Figure 8-6 -ACU J3 Connector (as viewed from front of unit) ............................................................ 157
Figure 9-1 – EFD1000/500 Main Connections ................................................................................... 165
Figure 9-2 – ACU/ACU2 Input Power ................................................................................................ 166
Figure 9-3 – Decision Height (DH) Interface ...................................................................................... 166
Figure 9-4 – PILOT system Digital RS232 Interface ............................................................................ 167
Figure 9-5 – PILOT system Digital ARINC 429 Interface ..................................................................... 167
Figure 9-6 - PRO Single Digital with "Tracker" or no Autopilot Interface............................................. 168
Figure 9-7 – PRO Single Digital with Autopilot Interface .................................................................... 169
Figure 9-8 – PRO Digital & Analog Mix with or without Autopilot Interface ......................................... 170
Figure 9-9 - PRO Dual Digital without Autopilot Interface ................................................................. 171
Figure 9-9 A– PRO Dual Digital with Autopilot .................................................................................. 172

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 19-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-10 – PRO ARINC 429 GPS & Analog VLOC (1 or 2) with or without Autopilot ......................... 175
Figure 9-11 – PRO RS232 GPS & Analog VLOC (1 or 2) with or without Autopilot ................................ 176
Figure 9-12 – KLN89B & KLN94 RS232 and Analog to ACU Interface .................................................. 177
Figure 9-13 – KLN-90/A/B RS232 and Analog to ACU Interface ......................................................... 178
Figure 9-14 – GX-50/60 & GX-55/65 RS232 and Analog to ACU Interface ......................................... 179
Figure 9-15 – Analog NAV Interface.................................................................................................. 180
Figure 9-15 A - Narco and Cessna ARC Navigation Radios ................................................................ 181
Figure 9-16 – KI525A Emulation (Bendix/King autopilot to ACU) ....................................................... 182
Figure 9-16 A– KFC250 (4”)/325 Autopilot to ACU ............................................................................ 183
Figure 9-16 B– KFC300 Autopilot to ACU Interface ............................................................................ 184
Figure 9-17 – STEC Autopilot to ACU Interface (minus HDG/CRS Datum) ........................................... 185
Figure 9-17 A– KI525A Emulation (STEC Autopilot) ........................................................................... 185
Figure 9-17 B– NSD360A Emulation (STEC Autopilot) ........................................................................ 186
Figure 9-18 – Century Autopilot to ACU Interface (minus HDG/CRS Datum) ....................................... 187
Figure 9-18 A– NSD360A Emulation (Century 21/31/41/2000) ......................................................... 187
Figure 9-18 B– NSD360A Emulation Century 1C388/M, 1C388C/MC Radio Couplers ......................... 188
Figure 9-18 C- NSD360A Emulation Century 1C388-2/-3 Radio Couplers ........................................ 189
Figure 9-18 D- NSD-360A Emulation Century IV (DC version) ........................................................... 190
Figure 9-19 – Cessna ARC 300B/400B/800B Autopilot to ACU Interface ............................................ 191
Figure 9-19 A– Cessna Navomatic 300/400/800 IFCS to ACU Interface ............................................. 192
Figure 9-19 B– NAVOMATIC 400/400A Autopilot to ACU Interface .................................................... 193
Figure 9-19 C– Cessna ARC 300A AC & DC version to ACU Interface ................................................. 194
Figure 9-19 D– Cessna 300 Navomatic to ACU Interface.................................................................... 195
Figure 9-20– Bendix FCS-810 Autopilot to ACU ................................................................................ 197
Figure 9-20 A– Bendix M-4C and M-4D Autopilot to ACU ................................................................. 198
Figure 9-21 – Collins AP-106/107 Autopilot to ACU ......................................................................... 199
Figure 9-22 – Sperry SPZ200/500 Autopilot (-002 ACU2 only) .......................................................... 200
Figure 9-23 – KI-256 Emulation (Bendix King) Flight Director ............................................................ 201
Figure 9-23 A– 52C77 Emulation (Century 41/2000) Flight Director .................................................. 202
Figure 9-23 B– 52C77 Emulation (Century IV) Flight Director ............................................................. 203
Figure 9-23 C– G550A/1050A Emulation (Cessna ARC) Flight Director .............................................. 204
Figure 9-23 D– KI256 Emulation (STEC 55/55X/60/65) Flight Director .............................................. 205
Figure 9-23 E– Reserved .................................................................................................................. 206
Figure 9-24– Back-up NAV Indicator (Internal Converter) .................................................................. 209
Figure 9-25 – Back-up NAV Indicator (OBS Resolver) ......................................................................... 210
Figure 9-26 – Back-up NAV/GPS Indicator (GNS-430/530) ................................................................ 211
Figure 9-27 – Non-Aspen Equipment Configuration Notes ................................................................ 212
Figure 9-28 – Evolution Hazard Awareness – Traffic/XM/WX500........................................................ 213
Figure 9-28 A - Digital Heading Outputs .......................................................................................... 214
Figure 9-30 - Two Display System PFD/MFD, Generic ....................................................................... 218
Figure 9-30 A - Three Display System PFD/MFD1000/MFD500, Generic ............................................ 219
Figure 9-31 - Two Display System PFD/MFD, GNAV1 and Analog NAV#2 or GPS#2 Configurations (1A-
2D) or (1A-2H) or (1A-2F) ................................................................................................................ 220
Figure 10-1 – Installation Menu Access............................................................................................. 226

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 20-367 Revision AC

Figure 10-2 – Installation Menu Warning .......................................................................................... 226

Figure 10-3 – TAPES Configuration Flow Chart .................................................................................. 258
Figure 10-4 – Illustration of aircraft 2º nose high .............................................................................. 259
Figure 10-5 – Illustration of Zero degree pitch adjustment ................................................................ 260
Figure 10-6 – RSM Calibration Graphic ............................................................................................. 267
Figure 10-7 – RSM Calibration Page .................................................................................................. 268
Figure 10-8 – Calibration in Process ................................................................................................. 269
Figure 10-9 – Aircraft Turning.......................................................................................................... 269
Figure 10-10 – Accept/Reject Results ............................................................................................... 270
Figure 10-11 – Results Accepted ...................................................................................................... 270
Figure 10-12 – Results Rejected ....................................................................................................... 271
Figure 10-13 – Calibration Heading before adjustment ..................................................................... 271
Figure 10-14 – Calibrated Heading after adjustment ......................................................................... 271
Figure 10-15 – WX-500 System Data Page 1 ..................................................................................... 282
Figure 10-16 – WX-500 System Data Page 2 ..................................................................................... 282
Figure 10-17 – WX-500 System Data Page 3 ..................................................................................... 283
Figure 10-18 – WX-500 System Data Page 4 ..................................................................................... 283
Figure 10-19 – WX-500 Strike Test Page .......................................................................................... 283
Figure 10-20 – WX-500 Noise Monitor Page ..................................................................................... 284
Figure 12-1 – Bezel and Display Features ......................................................................................... 291
Figure F1 – EA100 Outline Drawing (inches) and center of gravity ...................................................... 322
Figure F2 – EA100 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 322
Figure F3 – EA100 Mounting............................................................................................................. 325
Figure F4 – A/P AHRS FAIL Annunciator Location ............................................................................... 327
Figure F4A - MS25041-4 Dimmable “Catseye” .................................................................................. 328
Figure F5 – EA100 Main Wiring Connections...................................................................................... 330
Figure F6 – EA100 to KAP100/KAP150/KFC150 Attitude Source w/DISC ............................................ 331
Figure F7 – EA100 to KAP/KFC200 Attitude Source w/DISC ................................................................ 332
Figure F8 – EA100 to KFC225 Attitude Source w/DISC ....................................................................... 333
Figure F9 – EA100 to KFC250 (with KA141) Attitude Source w/DISC ................................................... 334
Figure F10 – EA100 to KFC250 (without KA141) Attitude Source w/Disc ............................................ 335
Figure F11 – EA100 to KFC275 Attitude Source w/Disc ...................................................................... 336
Figure F12 – ACU Flight Director Modification ................................................................................... 337
Figure G1– APS4A Mount to Flat Metal Shelf (dimensions in mm) ....................................................... 355
Figure G2 - Eaton Quik Connect ....................................................................................................... 357
Figure G3 – Switch Body removal ...................................................................................................... 358
Figure G4 – Side View of properly mounted switch ............................................................................ 358
Figure G5– APS4A System Wiring Diagram......................................................................................... 359

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 21-367 Revision AC

List of Definitions, Acronyms, Abbreviations

ACU Analog Converter Unit
ADAHRS Air Data Attitude Heading Reference System
ADC Air Data Computer
ADI Attitude Director Indicator
AI Attitude Indicator
AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference System
AML Approved Model List
AMMD Aerodrome Moving Map Display (geo-referenced airport diagram)
A/P Autopilot
A429 ARINC 429 interface
CM Configuration Module
DG Directional Gyro
DH Decision Height
EBB Emergency Backup Battery
EFD Electronic Flight Display (refers to all versions)
EFD500 EFD500 MFD Flight Display
EFD1000 EFD1000 PFD or EFD1000 MFD
EHA Evolution Hazard Awareness
ESV Evolution Synthetic Vision
EWR Evolution Weather Receiver
FAR Federal Aviation Regulations
FD Flight Director
FPM Flight Path Marker
GNAV Combined GPS and VOR radio (all A429 interface)
GPS Global Positioning System
GS Glide-slope or Groundspeed
HSI Horizontal Situational Indicator
ICA Instructions for Continued Airworthiness
IFR Instrument Flight Rules
LOC ILS Localizer
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
MFD Multi-Function Display (refers to EFD500 MFD or EFD1000 MFD)
MOL Maximum Operating Limit
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OBS Omni-Bearing Selector
PFD Primary Flight Display (refers to EFD1000 PFD only)
RSM Remote Sensor Module
STC Supplemental Type Certificate
TAS True Airspeed
VFR Visual Flight Rules
VLOC The VOR side of a GNAV radio
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 22-367 Revision AC

1 Introduction
This Installation Manual contains FAA Approved Data, but only when used to install the Aspen Avionics
EFD1000 and/or EFD500 display systems in accordance with AML STC SA10822SC. This document
contains detailed instructions for installing the EFD1000/500 System into specific aircraft as listed in the
AML-STC. There are regulations that must be complied with to ensure an airworthy installation. Section
4 -STC Specific Requirements and Limitations and Section 5 -Pre-Modification Planning will guide you
through these requirements.

1.1 Part Numbers

List of the major hardware components (by part number) that make up the EFD1000/500 system
complying with the standards prescribed in this TSO.

Part Number Description

910-00001-001 EFD1000, Evolution Flight Display, PFD/MFD
910-00001-004 EFD1000 Level B, Evolution Flight Display, PFD, Level B software (Required
for installation in Class III aircraft)
910-00001-002 EFD1000, Evolution Flight Display, MFD, for use with EBB58 Emergency
Backup Battery
910-00001-003 EFD500, Evolution Flight Display, MFD
910-00005-004 Configuration Module, Assy
910-00003-001 RSM, Remote Sensor Module, Top Mount w/GPS
910-00003-002 RSM, Remote Sensor Module, Top Mount w/o GPS
910-00003-003 RSM, Remote Sensor Module, Bottom Mount w/o GPS
910-00004-001 ACU, Analog Converter Unit - optional
903-00001-( ) EFD1000 PFD Install Kit
903-00001-( ) EFD1000 MFD Install Kit
903-00004-001 EFD500 Install Kit
903-00002-( ) RSM Install Kit
903-00003-001 ACU Install Kit
413-00002-001 EBB58, Emergency Backup Battery
903-00006-001 EBB58 Installation Kit, 7ft cable, mounting tray
Table 1-1 - TSO Part Numbers

Part Number Description

910-00013-001 EA100 Adapter
903-00011-( ) EA100 Installation Kit
910-00004-101 ACU2 Analog Converter Unit– ADF/RAD ALT/HDG Synchro/C3 Flt Dir.
910-00004-102 ACU2 – Same as ACU2-001 but with discrete to drive autopilots with G/S
and NAV superflag inputs.
903-00003-002 ACU2 Install Kit
Table 1-1A – EFD1000 Optional LRUs

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 23-367 Revision AC

1.1.1 Authorized Display Configurations

The following table identifies the only Authorized Display Configurations for software version 2.X
equipment. Other combinations are not approved. See Aspen Document A-01-126-00 for
installation of software version 1.0 and 1.1 equipment.

System Display Configurations

Single Display EFD1000 PFD Pro

or EFD1000 Level B
or EFD1000 PFD Pilot
Two Display EFD1000 PFD Pro or EFD1000C3 PFD
plus EFD1000 MFD
Two Display EFD1000 PFD Pro or EFD1000C3 PFD
plus EFD500 MFD
Three Display EFD1000 PFD Pro or EFD1000C3 PFD
plus EFD1000 MFD
plus EFD500 MFD
Table 1-2 - Authorized Display Configurations

Note: The EFD1000 Level B PFD is required for Class III aircraft.

Note: Standalone MFD installations are not authorized at this time. An MFD must always be in
installed with a PFD.

1.1.2 Optional and Standard features of each Display System

Option EHA Traffic ESV(1) ACU ACU2(2) Class III EA100

Evolution Evolution
Display FD(3)
Hazard Synthetic Vision
(no WX)
System Awareness

PFD Pilot N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Option N/A Option Option(3) Option

PFD Pro Standard Option(2)
Unlock Card incl. in EHA Unlock Card Unlock Card (King A/P)
Option Option(3) Option
PFD C3 N/A N/A Standard Option(2)
Unlock Card Unlock Card (King A/P)
Option
MFD 500 Standard Standard N/A N/A N/A N/A
Unlock Card
Option
MFD 1000 Standard Standard N/A N/A N/A N/A
Unlock Card
(1) ESV will require a Sonalert connection unless a TAWS system is installed. EFD1000C3 SW version B2.3.2 and
higher supports MFD ESV.
(2) ACU2 may be required for ADF/Rad Alt/Remote OAT/ARINC 407 Heading out/ Class III Flight Director. Certain
Class III FD types require an Unlock Card.
(3) FD Types 8-15 (see Section 8) require Unlock Card. The ACU2 is required for these FD Types.

Table 1-3 – Display System Options

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 24-367 Revision AC

1.1.3 Latest Approved Software Versions

Description Hardware Component Software Rev

EFD1000 and EFD500 Display 910-00001-XXX (except -004)

MAP Version 2.5
or
(software Level C) IOP Version 2.0.3
A-05-110-00

EFD 1000 PFD MAP Version B2.3.3

910-00001-004
(software Level B) IOP Version B2.0.3

Analog Control Unit (ACU) 910-00004-001 or A-05-112-00 Version 1.1

Analog Control Unit2 (ACU2) 910-00004-10x Version 2.0

EA100 910-00013-001 Version 1.0.3

Previous software versions are also approved for installation

Table 1-4 – Latest Approved Software Versions

1.1.4 EFD1000/500 System Authorized Software Configurations

EFD1000 MFD and/or EFD500 MFD

Software
V2.1 V2.2.x V2.3.x V2.4.x V2.5
Version
VB2.1 OK - - - -

VB2.2.x - OK - - -
EFD1000
PFD VB2.3.1 - - OK - -
PRO C3
VB2.3.2 - - - OK -

VB2.3.3 - - - - OK

V2.1 OK - - - -

V2.2.x - OK - -
EFD1000
PFD V2.3.x - - OK - -
PRO
V2.4.x - - - OK -

V2.5 - - - - OK

EFD1000
All SW N/A - MFDs are not authorized for installation
PFD
Versions with a EFD1000 Pilot PFD
PILOT

Table 1-5 – Authorized Software Configurations

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 25-367 Revision AC

1.1.5 Authorized System Components of each Display System

Figure 1-1 - EFD1000 PFD PRO Authorized System Components

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 26-367 Revision AC

EFD1000 Level B, TSO

PFD w/ Level B Software

910-00001-004 DISPLAY
w/ Internal Battery

302-00013-( ) SOFTWARE
EFD1000 IOP

302-00014-( ) SOFTWARE
EFD1000 MAP

910-00005-004 Configuration
Module

300-00001-007 CM IMAGE
PRO – Level B

300-00001-010 CM IMAGE
PRO w/ Traffic– Level B
EFD1000 SW vB2.2.3 and above

910-00003-001 RSM
w/GPS, TOP MOUNT

Pick one 910-00003-002 RSM

RSM w/o GPS, TOP MOUNT

910-00003-003 RSM
w/o GPS, BOTTOM MOUNT

903-00001- ( ) PFD Install Kit

903-00002- ( ) RSM Install Kit

Optional Equipment

910-00013-001 EA100
903-00011-001 EA100 Install Kit
910-00004-001 ACU
910-00004-101, -102 ACU2
903-00003- ( ) ACU/ACU2 Install Kit
903-00001-005 Tone Generator Kit
903-00007-001 EFD Recess Mount

Figure 1-2 - EFD1000C3 Level B PFD Authorized System Components

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 27-367 Revision AC

Figure 1-3 – EFD1000 PFD PILOT Authorized System Components

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 28-367 Revision AC

Figure 1-4 - EFD1000 MFD Authorized System Components

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 29-367 Revision AC

Figure 1-5 - EFD1000 MFD Authorized System Components (Suitable for replacing standby AS/ALT)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 30-367 Revision AC

Figure 1-6 - EFD500 MFD Authorized System Components

1.1.6 AML-STC Document List

The following list of SB documents contain engineering aspects that are a part of AML-STC SA10822SC
data.

Document P/N Rev Description

ICA 900-00012-001 P Instructions for Continued Airworthiness
SB2012-03 991-00076-001 () Upgrading EFD1000 C3 from software version B2.x to software version
vB2.3.3
SB2012-01 991-00072-001 () Upgrading EFD1000/500 from software version 2.x to software version 2.5
SB2011-07 991-00064-001 () Upgrading EFD1000 C3 from software version B2.x to software version
vB2.3.2
SB2011-05 991-00060-001 A Upgrading EFD1000/500 from software version 2.x to software version
2.4.1
SB2011-03 991-00056-001 A Upgrading EFD1000/500 from software version 2.x to software version
2.3.1
SB2011-02 991-00055-001 () Upgrade the EA100 from Version 1.0 or 1.0.1 or 1.0.2 to Version 1.0.3
SB2010-11 991-00046-001 A Upgrading the EA100 from Version 1.0 or 1.0.1 to Version 1.0.2

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 31-367 Revision AC

SB2010-10 991-00045-001 A Upgrading EFD1000/500 from software version 2.x to software version
2.2.3
SB2010-09 991-00039-001 () Upgrading the EA100 from Version 1.0 to Version 1.0.1
SB2010-08 991-00035-001 () Upgrading EFD1000/500 from software version 2.x to software version
2.2.2
SB2010-07 991-00034-001 D Upgrading EFD1000/500 from software version 2.x to software version 2.2
SB2009-06 991-00028-001 () Upgrading EFD1000/500 from software version 2.0 to software version 2.1
SB2009-05 991-00027-001 B Upgrading the EFD1000 PFD from software version 1.1 to software version
2.1
SB2009-04 991-00021-001 () Upgrading the EFD1000 Pro PFD software version 1.1 to software version
2.0
SB2008-01 A-10-102-00 B Upgrading the EFD1000 Pro PFD software version 1.0 to software version
1.1
TN2010-08 991-00036-001 D Modifying Pitot Obstruction Monitor Detection Time – Appendix H
Table 1-6 – AML-STC Additional Document List

1.2 Installation Kit Contents

Installation Kit, EFD1000 PFD - Basic P/N 903-00001-004

Aspen P/N Description Quantity
403-00002-001 Panel Mounting Bracket Assembly 1
116-00022-002 44 Pin HD D-Sub connector with contacts 1
116-00026-006 EMI Metal Back shell 1
275-00001-002 Pitot Quick Connector 1
275-00001-001 Static Quick Connector 1
273-00003-001 Tee Fittings for pitot/static, 0.25” x 0.17” x 0.25” 2
271-00001-001 Miniature Hose Clamps 8
412-00004-001 Configuration Module Cable Assembly 1
Installation Kit, EFD1000 - Tone Generator P/N 903-00001-005
Aspen P/N Description Quantity
143-00001-002 Tone Generator –Required for ESV, optional for 1
Selected Altitude annunciations
Installation Kit, EFD1000 – Datacard, Americas P/N 903-00001-006
Aspen P/N Description Quantity
430-00006-001 MicroSD Card with Charts and Jeppesen Database – 1
Americas
Installation Kit, EFD1000 – Datacard, International P/N 903-00001-007
Aspen P/N Description Quantity
430-00006-002 MicroSD Card with Charts and Jeppesen Database – 1
International

Table 1-7 903-00001-( ) EFD1000 PFD Install Kits

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 32-367 Revision AC

Installation Kit, EFD1000 MFD - Basic P/N 903-00001-003

Aspen P/N Description Quantity
403-00002-001 Panel Mounting Bracket Assembly 1
116-00022-002 44 Pin HD D-Sub connector with contacts 1
116-00026-006 EMI Metal Back shell 1
275-00001-002 Pitot Quick Connector 1
275-00001-001 Static Quick Connector 1
273-00003-001 Tee Fittings for pitot/static, 0.25” x 0.17” x 0.25” 2
271-00001-001 Miniature Hose Clamps 8
412-00004-001 Configuration Module Cable Assembly 1
Installation Kit, EFD1000 – Datacard, Americas P/N 903-00001-006
Aspen P/N Description Quantity
430-00006-001 MicroSD Card with Charts and Jeppesen Database – 1
Americas
Installation Kit, EFD1000 – Datacard, International P/N 903-00001-007
Aspen P/N Description Quantity
430-00006-002 MicroSD Card with Charts and Jeppesen Database – 1
International
Table 1-8 903-00001-( ) EFD1000 MFD Install Kits

Installation Kit, EFD500 – MFD Basic P/N 903-00004-001

Aspen P/N Description Quantity
403-00002-001 Panel Mounting Bracket Assembly 1
116-00022-002 44 Pin HD D-Sub connector with contacts 1
116-00026-006 EMI Metal Back shell 1
412-00004-001 Configuration Module Cable Assembly 1
Installation Kit, EFD1000 - Datacard, Americas P/N 903-00001-006
(Also used in the EFD500)
Aspen P/N Description Quantity
430-00006-001 MicroSD Card with Charts and Jeppesen Database – 1
Americas
Installation Kit, EFD1000 – Datacard, International P/N 903-00001-007
(Also used in the EFD500)
Aspen P/N Description Quantity
430-00006-002 MicroSD Card with Charts and Jeppesen Database – 1
International
Table 1-9 903-00004-( ) EFD500 Install Kit and 903-00001-( ) EFD1000 Install Kits used in the EFD500

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 33-367 Revision AC

Optional EFD Recess Mount Kit P/N 903-00007-001

Aspen P/N Description Quantity
903-00007-001 EFD Recess Mount Installation Kit (1 required per 1
EFD)
Table 1-10 903-00007-001 EFD Recess Mount Kit

Aspen P/N Description Kit Part Number

903-00002-001 903-00002-002
412-00005-001 RSM 30ft cable assembly
1 1
w/connector
201-00004-001 Screw, Machined, Pan, Phillips, 4 4
Brass, 8-32 11/4”, MS35214-47
212-00001-001 Nut, Hex, Locking, Nylon Insert, 4 5
Brass, 8-32, MS21044B08
231-00001-001 Washer, Flat, #8, Brass, 11/64” 4 4
ID, 3/8” OD, NAS1149B0832H
256-00001-001 O-Ring, AS568A-120 1 1
201-00004-003 Screw, Machined, Pan, Phillips,
- 1
Brass 8-32, 3/8”, MS35214-40
503-00015-001 Doubler - 1
Table 1-11 903-00002-( ) RSM Install Kits

Aspen P/N Description Quantity

116-00014-001 15 pin D-Sub connector 1
116-00014-002 25 pin D-Sub connector 1
116-00014-003 37 pin D-Sub connector 1
116-00026-002 DB15 EMI Back shell 1
116-00026-003 DB25 EMI Back shell 1
116-00026-005 DB37 EMI Back shell 1
116-00015-001 Crimp Sockets 77
Table 1-12 903-00003-001 ACU Install Kit

1.3 Optional LRU Installation Kits

Kit Part Numbers

Kit Contents Description 903-00011 903-00011 903-00011
-001 -002 -003
116-00022-002 44 Pin HD D-Sub connector with
1 1 1
contacts
116-00026-001 DB 25 EMI Metal Back shell 1 1 1
116-00014-001 15 pin D-sub connector 1 1 1
116-00026-007 DB15 EMI Back shell 1 1 1

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 34-367 Revision AC

116-00015-001 Crimp Sockets (15) 1 1 1

122-00031-001 Diode Junction Splice, 200v 1 1 1
412-00013-001 EA100 10ft Ethernet Cable - 1 -
412-00013-002 EA100 20ft Ethernet Cable - - 1
Table 1-13 903-00011-( ) EA100 Install Kits

Aspen P/N Description Quantity

116-00014-001 15 pin D-Sub connector 1
116-00014-002 25 pin D-Sub connector 1
116-00014-003 37 pin D-Sub connector 1
116-00052-001 62 pin high density D-Sub connector, contacts, 1
back shell
116-00026-002 DB15 EMI Back shell 1
116-00026-003 DB25 EMI Back shell 1
116-00026-005 DB37 EMI Back shell 1
116-00015-001 Crimp Sockets 77

Table 1-14 903-00003-002 ACU2 Install Kit

1.4 Accessories Required but Not Supplied – EFD1000 PFD

Description Manufacturer’s P/N or Specification

Circuit Breaker pull to open (EFD1000) 7.5 MS 26574-7.5
amp
Circuit Breaker (ACU) 2 amp (1 for each ACU) MS26574-2
EFD to GPS/ACU double shielded cable M27500-22TG2V64
Unshielded wire 24, 22, 20 AWG MIL-W-22759/16
Shielded Wire 22/20 AWG MIL-C-27500
3/16” pitot/static tube (EFD to T fitting MIL-DTL-5593
EFD Mounting Screws #6-32, 6 ea. MS24693-S30
EFD Mounting Lock Nuts #6-32 MS21044N06
EFD Mounting Washers NAS1149FN632P
ACU Mounting Screw #8-32 MS35206-XXX
ACU Mounting Lock Nuts #8-32 MS21044N08
ACU Mounting Washers NAS1149FN832P
Table 1-15 PFD Accessories Required but Not Supplied

1.5 Optional Accessories Not Supplied – EFD1000 PFD

Description Manufacturer P/N or Specification

EFIS Master switch –rated for 7.5 amps cont. MS35058-22 SPST switch
Circuit Breaker/Switch 7.5amp (optional – in MS24509-A-5, MS24509-A- 7½

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 35-367 Revision AC

lieu of separate C/B and switch)

*Tinned Copper Over Braid – MIL-SPEC# AA59569R36T0250 ¼”
*used in lieu of double shielded wire MIL-SPEC# AA59569R36T0500 ½”
RSM Doubler Installer fabricated per Section 6.9.5
RSM Shim – may be required on extreme Installer fabricated per Section 6.9.9
mounting angles
RSM sealant non-pressure vessel mounting MIL-A-46146, Dow 738
7 conductor shielded cable, for installer M27500-A24SD7T23/ M27500-22TG7T14
fabricated harness using 116-00020-001
connector.
Remote OAT Probe – only required if OAT Davtron # 655 P/N 10-00653 (PMA) or
sensor in RSM is not acceptable based on RSM Shadin P/N 681201-1 (TSO)
location. (requires ACU2) Installation approval of these probes is
outside the scope of the Aspen EFD
installation approval.
Table 1-16 PFD Optional Accessories Not Supplied

1.6 Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied – EFD1000 MFD

Description Manufacturer or Specification

MFD Master switch – rated for 7.5A MS35058-22 SPST switch
continuous
Circuit Breaker/Switch 7.5A (optional – in lieu MS24509-A-5, MS24509-A- 7½
of separate C/B and switch)
3/16” pitot/static tube (EFD to T fitting MIL-DTL-5593
See RSM mounting items in Table 1-16
EFD Mounting Screws #6-32, 6ea. MS24693-S30
EFD Mounting Lock Nuts #6-32, 6ea. MS21044N06
EBB Emergency Disconnect Switch – Locking MS24658-22D SPST switch. (Required for EBB
Toggle Switch (used when EBB58 is installed) emergency disconnect) See Section 7.2for
labeling
EBB Emergency Disconnect Switch & Switch Switch – MS35058-22, SPST
Guard (option to locking toggle switch above) Guard - MS25224-1, capable of locking in an
open position.
Table 1-17 EFD1000 MFD Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied

1.7 Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied – EFD500 MFD

Description Manufacturer or Specification

MFD Master switch –rated for 5A-7.5A cont. MS35058-22 SPST switch
Circuit Breaker EFD500 5A – 7.5A MS26574-5 or MS26574-7.5
Circuit Breaker/Switch 5A -7.5A (optional – in MS24509-A-5, MS24509-A- 7½
lieu of separate C/B and switch)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 36-367 Revision AC

EFD Mounting Screws #6-32, 6ea. MS24693-S30

EFD Mounting Lock Nuts #6-32, 6ea. MS21044N06
Table 1-18 EFD500 MFD Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied

1.8 Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied – EA100

Description Manufacturer or Specification

A/P AHRS FAIL press-to-test indicator Electroswitch Electronic Products MS25041-4
“dimmable cat’s-eye” (dimmable) (also available from Aircraft
Spruce)
EA100 10ft (or 20ft) Ethernet Cable (Cat 5e Order Aspen Avionics EA100 Installation kits
Ethernet cable (MX100P-24) 903-00011-002 or -003 which include the
cable.
EA100 Mounting Lock Nuts #8-32 (6) MS21044N08 *
EA100 Mounting Washers (6) NAS1149FN832P *
EA100 Mounting Screw #8-32 (6) MS35208-XXX *
Circuit Breaker 2A MS26574-2
Table 1-19 EA100 Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied

1.9 Special Tools Required

Tool Part Number Usage

Positronics crimp tool 9507-0-0-0 All D-Sub
Daniels crimp tool AFM8 All D-Sub
Positioner M81969/1-02, K13-1 ACU/ACU2 –J1/J2/J3, EA100 J1
Positioner M81969/1-01, K41 EFD, ACU2 – J4, EA100 J2

Table 1-20 Special Tools

1.10 Vendor Information

Aspen Avionics Inc. EDMO Distributors, Inc. – Wire, Cable

5001 Indian School Road NE 12830E Mirabeau Pkwy
Albuquerque, NM 87110 Spokane Valley, WA 99216
(505) 856-5034 (800) 235-3300
[email protected] [email protected]

A.E. Petsche Co. – Double Shielded & RSM Cable Jeppesen – JSUM Application Help
2112 West Division St. JSUM – Jeppesen Services Update Mgr.
Arlington, TX 76012-3693 (800) 732-2800
(817) 461-9473 (303) 328-4587
[email protected] [email protected]

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 37-367 Revision AC

Positronic Industries Inc. - Crimpers Jeppesen – Database Accounts/passwords

423 N. Campbell Ave. -Connectors Customer Service
Springfield, MO 65801 (800) 621-5377
(417) 866-2322 (303) 799-9090
[email protected] [email protected]

WIRENETICS – Thermax Cat 5e cable Aircraft Spruce – OAT Probes

27737 Avenue Hopkins 225 Airport Circle
Valencia, CA 91355 Corona, CA 92889
(661) 257-2400 877-477-7823
[email protected] www.aircraftspruce.com

1.11 Warranty Registration

Registration of LRU part numbers and serial numbers must be recorded on the dealer portal of the
Aspen Avionics website at www.aspenavionics.com/dealerramp. Activating the warranty on the
EFD1000/500 system is just one important aspect of providing a satisfying installation experience
for our customers.

1.12 Regulatory Compliance

1.12.1 Technical Standard Order

All components of the EFD1000/500 system are produced under Technical Standard Order
Authorization (TSOA).

1.12.2 Software Certification

The software for the EFD1000/500 system was developed to RTCA DO-178B software Level C. A
variant of the EFD1000 software provides Level B software for the Primary Flight Display. The RSM
GPS receiver software was developed to RTCA DO-178B level E. The RSM GPS is approved for
emergency use only.

1.12.3 Environmental Compliance

All system components meet the categories of RTCA/DO-160E as shown in the environmental
qualification forms in Section13.

1.12.4 Installation Approval

Installation of the EFD1000 PFD and EFD1000 MFD and/or EFD500 MFD is FAA approved under
AML STC SA10822SC. This installation manual contains FAA Approved Data, but only when used
to install the Aspen Avionics EFD1000 and/or EFD500 display systems in accordance with this AML
STC. The data in this manual may be used only by Authorized Aspen Avionics Dealers, and then
only to support installation of the EFD1000 and/or EFD500, either under STC SA10822SC, or as a

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 38-367 Revision AC

follow-on field approval for aircraft not included in the Approved Model List. Use of this data for
any other purpose requires separate written approval from Aspen Avionics Inc.

1.13 Field Replaceable Parts

Refer to Appendix D- Component Maintenance Manual (CMM) for a list of field replaceable parts.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 39-367 Revision AC

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 40-367 Revision AC

2 Equipment Specifications and Limitations

2.1 EFD1000 PFD and MFD

2.1.1 General Specifications

Part Number …………………………… 910-00001-001, 910-00001-002, 910-00001-004

Width/Height …………………………… 3.50 in./7.00 in. (Measured at Bezel)
Can Depth ……………………………… 4.15 in. (Rear of Bezel to Rear of Can)
Overall Depth …………………………… 6.35 in. (Knob to Rear Pressure Fitting)
Weight …………………………………… 2.9 lbs. with bracket (-002 part number is 2.1 lbs.)
Display Type …………………………… 6.0 in. Diagonal TFT Active Matrix LCD (400x760)
Display Colors ………………………… 32,768
Face ……………………………………… Anti-Reflective Coated Glass
Backlight ………………………………… High Intensity White LED
Rotary Knobs …………………………… Optical Encoder with Momentary Push
Dimming ………………………………… Manual & Automatic (Front Bezel Mounted Sensor)

2.1.2 Operational Specifications:

Operating Temp: ……………………… -20°C to +55°C

Storage Temp: ………………………… -55°C to +85°C
Max Operating Altitude ……………… 35,000 ft. Unpressurized/ 55,000 ft. Pressurized
Cooling ………………………………… Integral Fan
Max Humidity ………………………… 95% at 50°C
Input Voltage ………………………… +9 to +32 VDC (Note: Input power must transition >11VDC
to turn on the unit)
Nominal Current ……………………… 2.4/4.8 Amps (28v/14v)

2.1.3 I/O Specifications:

ARINC 429 Inputs ……………………… 5 Low/High Speed

ARINC 429 Outputs …………………… 1 Low Speed
RS-232 Inputs ………………………… 5
RS-232 Outputs ……………………… 3
Pitot / Static …………………………… Quick Connect

2.1.4 Certification Specifications:

Technical Standard Order (EFD1000):

TSO-C2d ……………………………… Airspeed Instruments
TSO-C3d ……………………………… Turn and Slip Instrument
TSO-C4c ……………………………… Bank and Pitch Instruments
TSO-C6d ……………………………… Direction Instrument Magnetic (Gyroscopically Stabilized)
TSO-C8d ……………………………… Vertical Velocity Instrument (Rate-of-Climb)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 41-367 Revision AC

TSO-C10b ……………………………… Altitude Pressure Activated Sensitive Type

TSO-C106 ……………………………… Air Data Computer
TSO–C113 ……………………………… Airborne Multipurpose Electronic Display
TSO-C165 ……………………………… Electronic Map Display Equipment for Graphical Depiction of
Aircraft Position (Optional, Aircraft Position on the Approach
Charts, when the approach charts database is used, MFD
Only.
Software:
RTCA DO-178B ………………………… Level C, or Level B for a specialized software variant for the
PFD.
Complex Electronic Hardware (CEH): None
Environmental:
RTCA DO-160E ………………………… See Environmental Qualification Form Section 13

European Technical Standard Order:

ETSO-C2d Type B, -C3d Type II, -C4c, -C6d, -C8d Type B, -C10b (-1600 to 51,000 feet), -C106,
-C113, Type I.

List of ETSO deviations:

1. Use of EUROCAE ED-14E/RTCA DO-160E instead of ED-14D/DO-160D change 3.

2. Deviate from ETSO-C2d to eliminate the requirement 3.2.3 in SAEAS 8019 that requires "the instrument
face to be marked with 'Airspeed' or 'IAS' and also with the applicable units of measure."

3. Deviate from ETSO-C4c 3.1.2 and SAE Aerospace Standard AS 8001 to use RTCA DO-160D instead of
RTCA DO-138 as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.

4. Deviate from SAEAS 392C Section 4.2.4 to not display ALTITUDE or ALT next to the tape indicating
altitude.

5. Deviate from ETSO-C10b 3.1.1 to use RTCA DO-160D instead of SAEAS 392C as the standard for
Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment.

6. Deviate from SAE AS 392C Section 4.1. In lieu of a pointer moving in a clockwise direction, there is a
display of a vertical altitude scale/tape with digital readout. The altitude display comports with SAE ARP
4102-7 Appendix A Symbols 39 and 40.

For more information, see the Declaration of Design and Performance, Issue 7 or
subsequent, available from Aspen Avionics.

The EFD1000 includes the following non-TSO functions:

• Selected Airspeed “Bug”
• Selected Altitude “Bug” and Altitude Alerter Function
• Selected Heading “Bug”
• Minimums Alerter
• Display of External GPS Flight Plan Data
• Display of External Radar Altimeter Decision Height
• Provide Course and Heading datum to Autopilots
• Battery Backup Capability

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 42-367 Revision AC

• Installation Configuration Mode

• Pilot-adjustable Nav Map Pan timeout selection
• Check Pitot heat Function

TSO-C165 Operational Capability is the depiction of the ownship on the precomposed

instrument approach charts for use in flight.

With respect to TSO-C165, the software qualification is level C. Failure of the functions
defined in TSO-C165 for Electronic Map Display (airborne applications) have been determined
to be a major failure condition for malfunctions causing the display of misleading information.

The conditions and tests required for TSO approval of this article are minimum performance
standards. It is the responsibility of those installing this article either on or within a specific
type or class of aircraft to determine that the aircraft installation conditions are within the TSO
standards. TSO articles must have separate approval for installation in an aircraft. The article
may be installed only if performed under 14 CFR Part 43 or the applicable airworthiness
requirements.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 43-367 Revision AC

2.1.5 Outline Drawing:

2.75

Figure 2-1 – EFD1000 Outline Drawing (inches)

Not shown: The EFD1000 -002 variant with D-connector for the EBB

2.2 EFD500 MFD

2.2.1 General Specifications

Part Number …………………………… 910-00001-003

Width …………………………………… 3.50 in. (Measured at Bezel)
Height …………………………………… 7.00 in. (Measured at Bezel)
Can Depth ……………………………… 4.15 in. (Rear of Bezel to Rear of Can)
Overall Depth …………………………… 5.70 in. (Knob to Rear of Can)
Weight …………………………………… 2.4 lbs. with bracket
Display Type …………………………… 6.0 in. Diagonal TFT Active Matrix LCD (400x760)
Display Colors ………………………… 32,768
Face ……………………………………… Anti-Reflective Coated Glass

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 44-367 Revision AC

Backlight ………………………………… High Intensity White LED

Rotary Knobs …………………………… Optical Encoder with Momentary Push
Dimming ………………………………… Manual & Automatic (Front Bezel Mounted Sensor)

2.2.2 Operational Specifications

Operating Temp: ……………………… -20°C to +55°C

Storage Temp: ………………………… -55°C to +85°C
Max Operating Altitude ……………… 35,000 ft. Unpressurized/ 55,000 ft. Pressurized
Cooling ………………………………… Integral Fan
Max Humidity ………………………… 95% at 50°C
Input Voltage ………………………… +9 to +32 Volts DC (Note: Input power must transition
>11VDC to turn on the unit)
Nominal Current ……………………… 0.8/1.6 Amps (28v/14v)

2.2.3 I/O Specifications

ARINC 429 Inputs ……………………… 5 Low/High Speed

ARINC 429 Outputs …………………… 1 Low Speed
RS-232 Inputs ………………………… 5
RS-232 Outputs ……………………… 3
Pitot / Static …………………………… N/A

2.2.4 Certification Specifications

Technical Standard Order:

TSO–C113 ……………………………… Airborne Multipurpose Electronic Display
TSO-C165 ……………………………… Electronic Map Display Equipment for Graphical Depiction of
Aircraft Position (Optional, Aircraft Position on the Approach
Charts, when the approach charts database is used, MFD
Only.

Software:
RTCA DO-178B ………………………… Level C
Complex Electronic Hardware (CEH): None
Environmental:
RTCA DO-160E ………………………… See Environmental Qualification Form Section 13

European Technical Standard Order: Same as those listed under EFD1000 specifications

The EFD500 includes the following non-TSO functions:

• Display of External GPS Flight Plan Data
• Battery Backup Capability
• Installation Configuration Mode
• Pilot-adjustable Nav Map Pan timeout selection

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 45-367 Revision AC

2.2.5 EFD500 Outline Drawing

1.75

2.75
C.G.
1.50

Figure 2-2 – EFD500 Outline Drawing (inches)

2.2.6 Design Eye Viewing Envelope

The following information defines the viewing envelope within which the EFD1000 and EFD500
comply with the equipment standards:

Minimum and maximum distance from the center of the EFD display surface:
10 inches (25.4 cm) minimum to 45 inches (114.3 cm) maximum

Total viewing angles:

From -30º to +30º (left/right), and +30º to -30º (top/bottom) perpendicular to the EFD front glass
surface.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 46-367 Revision AC

2.3 Remote Sensor Module (RSM):

There are three versions of the Remote Sensor Module. One is designed for top mounting and
contains the emergency GPS, the second is also designed for top or internal mounting and does not
include the emergency GPS. The third version is designed for bottom or internal mounting and does
not include the emergency GPS.

2.3.1 General Specifications

Part Number …………………………… A-05-111-00 or 910-00003-001 (RSM with GPS)

…………………………………………… 910-00003-002, (RSM, top mount, no GPS)
…………………………………………… 910-00003-003 (RSM, bottom mount, no GPS)
Width …………………………………… 2.65 in. (Measured at Base)
Height …………………………………… 1.00 in. (Measured from Base)
Length …………………………………… 4.40 in. (Front to Rear)
Weight …………………………………… 0.2 lbs.

2.3.2 Operational Specifications:

Operating Temp ……………………… -55°C to +70°C

Storage Temp ………………………… -55°C to +85°C
Max Operating Altitude ……………… 55,000 ft. Unpressurized
Cooling ………………………………… None Required
Max Humidity ………………………… 95% at 50°C
Input Voltage ………………………… Provided by EFD
Nominal Current ……………………… Included in EFD Current

2.3.3 I/O Specifications:

Magnetometer ………………………… Proprietary Digital

OAT ……………………………………… Proprietary Digital
GPS ……………………………………… Proprietary Digital

2.3.4 Certification Specifications:

The RSM is certified as a component of the EFD1000 system

Software:
RTCA DO-178B ………………………… Level E
Complex Electronic Hardware (CEH): None
Environmental:

RTCA DO-160E ………………………… See Environmental Qualification Form Section 13

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 47-367 Revision AC

2.3.5 Outline Drawing:

0.813

Figure 2-3 - RSM Outline Drawing (inches)

2.4 Configuration Module (CM)

For EFD1000/500 systems using Software Version 2.X, there is a single hardware part number
Configuration Module, which is then loaded with the appropriate configuration settings image file
that established the functionality and feature set of the attached EFD1000 or EFD500 system.

2.4.1 General Specifications

Part Number …………………………… A-05-114-00 (Original CM for Pro)

…………………………………………… A-05-113-00 (Original CM for Pilot)
…………………………………………… 910-00005-004 (common CM for Version 2.X software)
Width …………………………………… 1.0 in.
Height …………………………………… 0.55 in.
Length …………………………………… 1.85 in.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 48-367 Revision AC

Weight …………………………………… 0.1 lbs.

2.4.2 Operational Specifications:

Operating Temp: ……………………… -20°C to +55°C

Storage Temp: ………………………… -55°C to +85°C
Max Operating Altitude ……………… 35,000 ft. Unpressurized/ 55,000 ft. Pressurized
Cooling ………………………………… none required
Max Humidity ………………………… 95% at 50°C
Input Voltage ………………………… Provided by EFD
Nominal Current ……………………… Included in EFD Current

2.4.3 I/O Specifications:

Proprietary digital

2.4.4 Certification Specifications:

The Configuration Module is certified as a component of the EFD1000/500 system

Software: None

Complex Electronic Hardware (CEH): None

Environmental:
RTCA DO-160E ……………………… See Environmental Qualification Form Section 13

2.4.5 Outline Drawing

1. 85
in

C.G.
in
55
0.

C.G. is in the dimensional center of

the module for HxWxL
in
0
1.

Figure 2-4 - Configuration Module Outline Drawing (inches)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 49-367 Revision AC

2.5 Analog Converter Unit (ACU):

2.5.1 General Specifications

Part Number …………………………… A-05-112-00, 910-00004-001 (These part numbers are

equivalent)
Width …………………………………… 5.75 in. including mounting flanges
Height …………………………………… 1.60 in.
Length ……………………………………… 4.28 in.
Weight …………………………………… 0.8 lbs.

2.5.2 Operational Specifications:

Operating Temp: ……………………… -40°C to +55°C

Storage Temp: ………………………… -55°C to +85°C
Max Operating Altitude ……………… 35,000 ft.
Cooling ………………………………… none required
Max Humidity ………………………… 95% at 50°C
Input Voltage ………………………… +11 to +32 VDC
Nominal Current ……………………… 0.5/1.0 Amps (28v/14v)

2.5.3 I/O Specifications:

ARINC 429 Inputs ……………………… 2 Low Speed

ARINC 429 Outputs …………………… 2 Low Speed
RS-232 Inputs ………………………… 1 (software loading only)
VHF Nav Receiver ……………………… 1 Analog input
GPS Receiver …………………………… 1 Analog input
GPS OBS Interface ……………………… 1 Output
GPS Discrete ……………………………… 4 Active low inputs
DH Discrete ……………………………… 1 Active low input
Flight Director …………………………… 1 input port
Autopilot Interface ……………………… 1 Analog port

2.5.4 Certification Specifications:

The ACU is certified as a component of the EFD1000 system

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 50-367 Revision AC

2.5.5 Outline Drawing:

4.2
2 8
4 .7

C.G.

2.1
6 4
2.3

1.60

Figure 2-5 - ACU Outline Drawing (inches)

2.6 Analog Converter Unit 2

2.6.1 General Specifications

Part Number …………………………… 910-00004-101, -102

Width …………………………………… 5.75 in. including mounting flanges
Height …………………………………… 2.25 in.
Length ……………………………………… 4.28 in.
Weight …………………………………… 1.1lbs

2.6.2 Operational Specifications:

Operating Temp: ……………………… -40°C to +55°C

Storage Temp: ………………………… -55°C to +85°C
Max Operating Altitude ……………… 35,000 ft.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 51-367 Revision AC

Cooling ………………………………… none required

Max Humidity ………………………… 95% at 50°C
Input Voltage ………………………… +11 to +32 VDC
Nominal Current ……………………… 0.5/1.0 Amps (28v/14v)

2.6.3 I/O Specifications:

ARINC 429 Inputs ……………………… 2 Low/High Speed

ARINC 429 Outputs …………………… 3 Low/High Speed
RS422 …………………………………… 2 Transmitters
RS422 …………………………………… 2 Receivers
RS-232 Input …………………………… 1 (software loading only)
VHF Nav Receiver ……………………… 1 Analog input
GPS Receiver …………………………… 1 Analog input
GPS OBS Interface ……………………… 1 Output
GPS Discrete ……………………………… 4 Active low inputs
DH Discrete ……………………………… 1 Active low input
Flight Director …………………………… 1 input port
Autopilot Interface ……………………… 1 Analog port
G/S and NAV Flag to A/P……………… low level (-101), Discrete to drive Superflag (-102)
ADF ………………………………………… 2 Sin/Cos inputs
Heading Synchro………………………… 1 Output with 26Vac Reference
Radio Altimeter ………………………… 2 differential Analog Inputs
………………………… …………………… 1 digital Input
Outside Air Temperature……………… 1 Analog Input for probe

2.6.4 Certification Specifications:

The ACU2 is certified as a component of the EFD1000 system

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 52-367 Revision AC

2.6.5 Outline Drawing

1.12

Figure 2-6 – ACU2 Outline Drawing (inches)

2.7 EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery

The EBB58 can only be installed with an EFD1000 MFD.

2.7.1 General Specifications

Part Number …………………………… 413-00002-001

Width …………………………………… 3.6 in. (widest point on mounting clips)
Height …………………………………… 1.7 in.
Length …………………………………… 8.52 in. (rear of mounting tray to connector)
Weight …………………………………… 2.25 lbs. (includes bracket)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 53-367 Revision AC

2.7.2 Operating Specifications

Operating Temp: ……………………… -20°C to +55°C

Storage Temp: ………………………… -55°C to +85°C
Max Operating Altitude ……………… 35,000 ft. Unpressurized/ 55,000 ft. Pressurized
Cooling ………………………………… None required
Max Humidity ………………………… 95% at 50°C
Input Voltage ………………………… Powered by EFD1000
Nominal Current ……………………… Powered by EFD1000

2.7.3 I/O Specifications

Proprietary

2.7.4 Certification Specifications:

The EBB58 is certified as a component of the EFD1000 system

Software: None

Complex Electronic Hardware (CEH): None

Environmental:
RTCA DO-160E ………………………… Contained within the EFD1000 Environmental Qualification
Form. See Section 13

2.7.5 Outline Drawing

Figure 2-7 – EBB58 Outline Drawing (inches)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 54-367 Revision AC

3 System Description
The Aspen Avionics EFD1000 and EFD500 systems are multi-purpose displays. The EFD1000 contains
an internal ADAHRS that is used to provide attitude, heading and air data for the display. The EFD500 is
a variant of the EFD1000 and does not contain the internal ADAHRS. The EFD1000 and the EFD500
come standard with an internal battery to provide a nominal 30-minute operation in the event of power
loss. These batteries are not designed to provide 30-minute operation under all foreseeable operating
conditions, such as extreme cold temperatures where battery operation is not assured. An optional
Emergency Backup Battery (EBB) is available that will provide at least 30 minutes of operation under all
foreseeable operating conditions. Typical EBB endurance at 25 deg C will exceed two hours when the
battery is fully charged. When a PFD is installed, and the Emergency Backup Battery is connected to an
EFD1000 MFD, the legacy standby altimeter and airspeed indicators may be removed from the aircraft.

Additional equipment is normally installed in support of the displays, including the Remote Sensor
Module (RSM), Configuration Module (CM), optional Emergency Backup Battery (as noted above) and
optional Analog Converter Unit (ACU). Several external sensors can optionally be connected to the
displays, including GPS systems, the Aspen EWR50 XM weather receiver, WX-500 Stormscope, GTX330
and certain other ARINC 735A protocol TAS and TCAS I systems.

The EFD1000 system can be configured as a PFD or MFD. In the PFD configuration, the EFD1000
provides display of attitude, airspeed, altitude, direction of flight, vertical speed, turn rate, and turn
quality. The system can provide display of navigation information, pilot-selectable indices (“bugs”), and
annunciations to increase situational awareness and enhance flight safety.

The “Pro” and “Pilot” configuration are available in software version 2.1 and later. The Pro System can
optionally display WX-500 data, XM datalink weather products and traffic information from ARINC 735
compatible traffic systems. The EFD1000C3 Level B PFD can optionally display traffic but not XM or WX-
500 data. The Pilot System provides a moving map; however it does not provide an HSI or second GPS
navigation.

The EFD1000 can also be purchased in a multi-function display configuration with reversion capability
to a Primary Flight Display. The EFD500 is a variant of the EFD family that does not include an ADAHRS.
The EFD500 may only be purchased in a multi-function display configuration, and does not include
reversion capability.

3.1 EFD1000/EFD500

The EFD1000/EFD500 are digital systems that consists of a high-resolution 6” diagonal color LCD
display, user controls, photocell and Micro SD data card slot. The rear portion of the EFD1000
includes a non-removable electronics module that contains a full air data computer, attitude heading
reference system, power supplies, backup battery, and dual processor electronics. Also on the rear of
the unit, a fan is provided to cool the backlight and electronics. The EFD500 does not contain an air
data computer or attitude heading reference system.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 55-367 Revision AC

The EFD1000/500 mounts to the front surface of most instrument panels. The electronics module
and cooling fins on the back are sized to fit into existing instrument panel holes. A recess-mount
bracket is available to mount the displays nearly flush with the instrument panel.

The mechanical design allows the instrument to be installed in a vertically oriented pair of instrument
openings, without interfering with the surrounding instruments. The installation requires minimal
mechanical modifications to most general aviation aircraft instrument panels.

The EFD1000 and EFD500 contain a microSD card port and reader at the bottom of the display bezel.
When authorized, software updates and system upgrades can be installed using the card port. The
port is also used for database information in the EFD1000 MFD, EFD500 MFD and EFD1000 PFD with
the Evolution Synthetic Vision enabled.

Figure 3-1 – EFD1000 in a PFD view

The EFD1000 is a digital system and supports both ARINC 429 and RS-232 digital interfaces. In
installations with a modern digital radio installation, the PFD connects directly to the interfaced
equipment.

In installations that require interfaces to analog avionics (i.e., older VLOC navigation radios and
autopilots) an ACU is required to digitize the analog signals into ARINC 429 for the PFD. The EFD1000
and EFD500 can be installed in the following configurations:

• EFD1000 configured as a PFD Pro or Pilot

• PFD Pro plus EFD1000 configured as an MFD
• PFD Pro plus EFD500 configured as an MFD
• PFD Pro plus EFD1000 and EFD500, each configured as MFDs
The MFDs are connected to the PFD and each other via an RS-232 digital cross-communications bus.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 56-367 Revision AC

NOTE: Version 1.X PFD is not compatible with the Version 2.X MFD. To be used in a multi-display
configuration, the PFD must be upgraded to Version 2.X.

3.2 Remote Sensor Module (RSM)

The RSM is required for each EFD1000 and connects directly to the display. It physically resembles a
traditional GPS antenna and follows the industry standard mounting hole pattern.

The RSM contains all of the sensors that must be remotely located from the PFD display unit. Certain
versions of the RSM can be installed on the underside of the aircraft or internally.

The RSM is powered by the PFD through a shielded wire harness and contains the following sub-
systems:

• Outside Air Temperature (OAT) sensor

• Emergency backup GPS (RSM GPS version)
• Magnetic “flux” sensors

All RSM versions must be mounted in a magnetically quiet environment. The emergency GPS version
of the RSM is mounted in an area that will provide acceptable reception for the integral GPS antenna.
The versions that do not have GPS can be mounted internally to the fuselage or wing structure, or in
the case of the bottom-mount RSM, on the underside of the aircraft. Internally mounting the RSM
may require disabling of the OAT on the associated EFD unless a remote OAT probe is installed with
the ACU2. It is also possible to inter-communicate OAT information from one display with an OAT
sensor to another display without an OAT sensor. Disabling of OAT will also disable TAS and
calculated winds.

There are three versions of RSM:

• Top Mount with Emergency Backup GPS
• Top Mount without Emergency Backup GPS
• Bottom Mount without Emergency Backup GPS

CAUTION: Do not mount an RSM made for inverted operation on the top of the aircraft as reverse
magnetic sensing will result, producing unacceptable AHRS performance.

3.3 Configuration Module (CM)

The Configuration Module retains system configuration settings and calibration data. The
Configuration Module connects to the EFD1000/500 through a short fabricated harness and is
fastened to the main wiring bundle of the display.

Each display has an associated Configuration Module that retains that display’s aircraft specific
configuration, calibration data and user settings. This scheme permits the display hardware to be
replaced without re-entering the installation settings or re-calibrating the EFD.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 57-367 Revision AC

3.4 Analog Converter Unit (ACU)

The optional Analog Converter Unit (ACU) provides compatibility with older, analog-based avionics
when required. The ACU converts and concentrates multiple analog interfaces to digital signals
supported by the EFD1000. Control parameters, such as desired heading and selected course, are
also sent from the PFD to the ACU for conversion to analog format for autopilot support.

The feature set of the “Pilot” system does not support interface to navigation equipment, and
therefore does not support the ACU interface. The ACU is required when any of the following
capabilities are required in a “Pro” installation:

• Interface to supported autopilots

• Interface to supported non-ARINC 429 VLOC navigation radios
• Interface to supported non-ARINC 429 GPS navigators
• Interface to supported radar altimeter decision height (discrete)

If digital radios (i.e., Garmin 4XX/5XX series radios) are equipped in the aircraft and no other aircraft
interfaces are to be used, then the ACU is not required.

3.5 Analog Converter Unit 2 (ACU2)

The optional ACU2 provides all the features of the standard ACU above but adds the following
capabilities:

• ADF1 and ADF2 inputs that are displayed on the HSI bearing pointers.
• Radio Altimeter input that displays in feet AGL on the PFD.
• Heading Synchro (bootstrap) output to drive ancillary equipment that requires an ARINC 407
analog heading input.
• Remote OAT probe input for when the RSM is internal mounted or in the exhaust stream.
• Additional Flight Director interfaces.
• A special variant of ACU2 (-102) provides G/S and NAV flag output for autopilots that require
a superflag input.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 58-367 Revision AC

3.6 System Architecture

The system architecture in Figure 3-2 shows the relationships of a single EFD1000 with its associated
RSM, Configuration Module and ACU. The EFD500 is identical to the EFD1000 but without the
pitot/static, RSM, and ACU connections.

Figure 3-2 - EFD1000 Single PFD System Architecture

NOTE: The ARINC 429 data bus between the ACU and the EFD1000 contain proprietary data labels.
Connecting other systems to this bus is not authorized as the other systems may incorrectly decode
the data.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 59-367 Revision AC

3.7 Example Configurations

The following are some examples of popular system interfaces. See the wiring diagrams in Section 9
for a complete list of the various system interfaces.

3.7.1 PRO Digital Analog Mix with Autopilot

The following configuration shows an EFD1000 PFD Pro connected to a GNAV (GPS and VLOC) unit,
a RS232 GPS#2, an Analog NAV receiver #2 and an autopilot. Any combination of these sensors
may be connected as well as a second GNAV or second analog NAV receiver using a second ACU.

Figure 3-3 – Example Digital and Analog PFD configuration

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 60-367 Revision AC

3.7.2 Two Display PFD with MFD1000 or MFD500

The following configuration shows an EFD1000 PFD Pro and an EFD1000 MFD or EFD500 MFD
interfaced with optional traffic, XM weather, and the WX-500 Stormscope. Any combination of
these sensors may be connected as well as the required RS-232 or ARINC 429 connections from a
GPS receiver and or VLOC receiver for navigation, flight plan and moving map. The MFD1000
supports the reversion of PFD functions in the event of a PFD failure. The EFD1000 MFD with
Emergency Backup Battery authorizes removal of legacy standby indicators for airspeed and
altitude.

Static
Pitot

RS232 RX1
RS232 RX3
RS232 RX2
RS232 RX0
RS232 RX4

RS232 RX1
RS232 RX3
RS232 RX2
RS232 RX0

RS232 RX5
RS232 TX2
RS232 TX0

RS232 TX1
RS232 TX3
RS232 TX2
RS232 TX0
Digital Out

Digital Out
429 RX1
429 RX2
429 RX3
429 RX4
429 RX5

429 RX3
429 TX1

429 RX1
429 RX2

429 RX4
429 RX5

429 TX1

Figure 3-4 – Example Two display PFD and MFD configuration

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 61-367 Revision AC

3.7.3 Three Display PFD with MFD1000 and MFD500

The following configuration shows an EFD1000 PFD Pro, an EFD1000 MFD, and an EFD500 MFD
interfaced with optional traffic, XM weather, and the WX-500 Stormscope. Any combination of
these sensors may be connected as well as the required RS-232 or ARINC 429 connections from a
GPS receiver and or VLOC receiver for navigation, flight plan and moving map. The EFD1000 MFD
supports the reversion of PFD functions in the event of a PFD failure. The EFD1000 MFD with
Emergency Backup Battery in this configuration authorizes removal of legacy standby indicators for
airspeed and altitude.

Figure 3-5 – Example Three Display PFD/MFD Configuration

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 62-367 Revision AC

4 STC Specific Requirements and Limitations

4.1 General Limitations

This section contains requirements that must be considered before installing the EFD1000/EFD500
systems. The EFD1000 MFD with the Emergency Backup Battery (must be installed with an EFD1000
PFD) can be used to replace the standby airspeed and altimeter. There are important limitations. See
below. A standby attitude indicator is always required in accordance with 14CFR 23.1311, except for
aircraft limited to VFR. See Section 5.1.6.

This installation is not authorized as a Primary Flight Display for Category II Operations or RVSM
Operations.

Class III aircraft, as identified in the Approved Model List, require Software level B for the PFD. Level B
can be verified by the software level identified on the EFD1000 data tag (serial number label).

Important Limitations Associated with Backup Airspeed and Altitude Instruments:

Your customer must be aware of the limitations associated with replacing the backup altimeter and
airspeed indicator. When the EFD1000 MFD with Emergency Backup Battery is used as the backup,
the reliability of the aircraft electrical system drives the requirement for a backup battery charge level
that will permit operation for at least 30 minutes, even in cold temperatures. This means the
Emergency Backup Battery state of charge must be checked before flight, and if the state of charge is
less than the percentage prescribed in the AFMS, takeoff is prohibited until the charge level is
adequate.

The EBB58 may only be installed in a multiple display configuration and may only be connected to the
EFD1000 MFD. No other connections are permitted.

Important Limitations for Aircraft with RVSM Approval:

The EFD1000 system altimeter has not been evaluated for RVSM operations. For EFD1000
installations in RVSM-qualified aircraft, the altitude and airspeed tapes must be locked off in the
Installation menus. Integration of the EFD1000 static input on RVSM qualified aircraft is beyond the
scope of this STC.

Assumptions and Limitations

Unless otherwise specifically identified in this section, aircraft with a certified maximum takeoff gross
weight of more than 12,500 pounds are not eligible for this STC due to the additional operational
requirements imposed when a type rating is required.

Certain aircraft can be modified to permit a maximum takeoff weight of more than 12,500 lb. Any
aircraft modified in this manner are not eligible for this STC unless specifically noted in this section.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 63-367 Revision AC

4.2 Authorized Configurations

The following are authorized configurations. Other configurations, such as stand alone MFD
installations, are not authorized at this time:

Figure 4-1 – EFD1000 PFD Authorized Configuration

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 64-367 Revision AC

Figure 4-2 – EFD1000 PFD and MFD500 Authorized Configuration

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 65-367 Revision AC

PFD & MFD1000, or

PFD & MFD1000 & MFD500(2)

Required Backups

IAS ATT ALT Compass

RSM RSM

CM CM
MFD
PFD
1000

ACU
optional

or
IFR GPS
EA100
optional

-Standby Attitude indicator(1)

-Standby Altimeter
-Standby Airspeed indicator
-Magnetic Direction Indicator (compass)
-IFR GPS connected to each EFD1000
-Alternate Static Source

A standby attitude indicator is always required in accordance with 14CFR 23.1311,

(1)
except for aircraft limited to VFR. See Section 5.1.5.

(2) An MFD500 added to this configuration does not change the required components.

Figure 4-3 – EFD1000 PFD and MFD1000 Authorized Configuration (with or without MFD500)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 66-367 Revision AC

PFD & MFD1000 with EBB58, or

PFD & MFD500(2) & MFD1000 with EBB58

Required Backups

ATT Compass

RSM RSM

CM CM
MFD
PFD
1000
EBB58
ACU
optional
Emergency Backup Battery

or
IFR GPS
EA100
optional

-Standby Mechanical Attitude indicator(1)

-Magnetic Direction Indicator (compass)
-IFR GPS connected to each EFD1000
-Alternate Static Source
-Emergency Backup Battery with adequate level of charge, checked before each departure
-Instrument Panel Placard installed reading “EMER BAT DISPATCH LIMIT 80% - SEE EFD AFMS”

(1)Note: This configuration has been FAA approved under an Equivalent Level of Safety and
requires a mechanical standby attitude indicator.

(2) An MFD500 added to this configuration does not change the required components.

Figure 4-4 – EFD1000 PFD and MFD1000 with EBB58 (with and without MFD500)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 67-367 Revision AC

4.3 Software Version Limitations

Multiple display configurations must use EFD1000/500 MAP and IOP software version 2.0, or later FAA
approved version. All displays in a multi-display arrangement must be at the same “base” software
revision level. See Table 1-5.

4.4 General Standby Instrument Requirements

FAR 23.1311(a)(5) requires that independent secondary instruments be installed (existing units may
be relocated) for Attitude, Altitude, Airspeed, and magnetic direction indicator “whiskey compass”
when an Electronic Display (i.e., EFD1000) is used as the primary instrument. These instruments are
collectively and individually referred to as “standby instruments” throughout this document.
IFR certificated Part 23 aircraft that do not have an existing attitude Indicator must install a standby
attitude indicator along with the PFD as required by FAR 23.1311(a)(5).

In accordance with FAA Policy, the secondary attitude indicator requirement of FAR 23.1311 (a)(5)
does not always apply to aircraft limited to VFR. See Section5.1.6,Special Considerations for Aircraft
Limited to VFR.

Note that some existing ADI indicators contain a fast/slow or angle of attack (AOA) indication. The
EFD1000 does not support a fast/slow or angle of attack display. Removal of such an ADI under this
STC is not permitted unless the fast/slow or angle of attack is not required by the type certification of
the aircraft, or the fast/slow or angle of attack can be provided by approved alternate means.

Note that some existing ADI systems contain autopilot annunciations. The EFD1000 does not
support autopilot annunciations. Removal of such an ADI under this STC is not permitted unless the
autopilot annunciations can be provided by approved alternate means.

The existing outside air temperature probe (if installed) and magnetic direction indicator “whiskey
compass” may not be removed during the installation of the EFD1000 system.

The 30 minute, internal battery in the PFD is not approved for use as a power source to meet the
electrical power source requirement under 14 CFR 23.1353, or for single engine Part 135 IFR
operations under 14 CFR 135.163.

4.4.1 Pneumatic Standby Instruments (See Figure 4-5)

Aircraft with existing pneumatic attitude, altitude, and airspeed instruments may relocate them as
necessary as described in Section 4.4.4. The standby pneumatic airspeed and altimeter should be
connected to an independent pitot and static line (independent from PFD) whenever available.
Changing the vacuum source of the AI is beyond the scope of the STC and must be separately
approved.

4.4.2 Electric Standby Instruments

Aircraft that are all electric must keep the EFD1000 PFD on an independent power source from the
standby instruments as determined from the flow chart of Figure 4-5. The installer must verify

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 68-367 Revision AC

that the standby instruments are electrically isolated from the PFD through either of the following
two methods:

1. Standby instruments are powered by a dedicated standby battery, separate from the
aircraft starter battery, which meets the requirements of FAR 23.1353(h). [Note: The
EFD1000 PFD internal battery does not qualify as an independent battery under FAR
23.1353(h)].
2. Dual independent electrical systems (dual alternators and dual batteries) with the PFD on
one system and the standby instruments on the other system.

The standby, electric attitude indicator must not rely on pitot/static inputs for its operation.

Removal of pneumatic standby instruments and installation of electric standby instruments (other
than the MFD1000) is not authorized by this STC. Separate installation approval would be
required.

The installation of dual independent electrical systems or a standby (emergency) aircraft battery is
not authorized by this STC. Separate installation approval would be required. The EBB is
authorized by this STC.

4.4.3 Using the EFD1000 MFD as Standby Airspeed and/or Altimeter (see Figure 4-6)

Under certain conditions (see the Caution messages below and Section 4.5), the EFD1000 MFD may
be used as the required standby airspeed and/or altimeter in class I, II and III aircraft. If being used
as the required standby instrument then the EFD1000 MFD must be connected to the EBB58
Emergency Backup Battery. The placard must be located near the EFD1000 MFD within the pilot’s
maximum field of view (see figure 4-8). The placard must be in black and white (white letters on
black background or black letters on white background) in a font no smaller than other placards in
the aircraft and reads as follows:

The placard requires the EBB58 battery capacity to be verified prior to each flight.

CAUTION: Do not remove any airspeed indicators that are of the Vmo or barber pole type as they have
an overspeed-warning alert generated by the indicator or by a separate circuit. The existing type
certificated overspeed warning alert is the only overspeed warning allowed at this time under this STC.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 69-367 Revision AC

If the aircraft has dual independent electrical systems then the PFD must be installed on one bus
and the EFD1000 MFD must be installed on the other independent bus. If independent buses do
not exist then the PFD and MFD are to be installed on the aircraft’s battery bus or essential bus.

If the aircraft has dual independent pitot and/or static systems then the PFD must be installed on
one system and the EFD1000 MFD must be installed on the other independent pitot and/or static
system.

Some altimeters have outputs for Baro set and encoded altitude to an autopilot pre-selector,
transponder, traffic system, or other ancillary equipment. Verify no functions are being eliminated
that cannot be replaced from another source (i.e., blind encoder, etc.) prior to removal of existing
altimeter from aircraft.

NOTE: It is advisable to keep standby instruments when space permits

4.5 Considerations for Vmo Airspeed Indicator Removal

It is not permissible to remove a Vmo/Mmo airspeed indicator at this time. The existing airspeed
indicator must be retained and used as the backup airspeed indicator. If the airspeed tape on the PFD
can be configured to look exactly like the existing indicator then the existing indicator may be
relocated to a position that meets the requirements of a backup instrument. See Section 4.5.2.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 70-367 Revision AC

START

1 Note – Overvoltage protection is no longer required with

EFD1000 PFD EFD software version 2.3.1 and later. Independent
AS electrical buses still apply.
PRIMARY
INSTRUMENTATION

EXISTING
ATTITUDE, ALTITUDE, PNEUMATIC
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
POWER SOURCE?

ELECTRIC

ARE THERE TWO

INDEPENDENT ELECTRICAL NO
BUSES WITH OVERVOLTAGE KEEP EXISTING
PROTECTION? PNEUMATIC
CONNECTION AND
1 INSTRUMENT(S)

YES

OBTAIN SEPARATE
CONNECT STANDBY AIRWORTHINESS
INSTRUMENT TO BUS APPROVAL TO USE
INDEPENDENT OF BATTERY
EFD1000 PFD POWERED BACKUP
INSTRUMENTS

CONFIRM CAPACITY
OF PRIMARY CONNECT STANDBY
INSTRUMENT BUS BY INSTRUMENT TO
ELECTRICAL LOAD BACKUP BATTERY
ANALYSIS POWER

CONFIRM CAPACITY
OF BACKUP VERIFY BACKUP
INSTRUMENT BUS BY BATTERY POWER
ELECTRICAL LOAD CAPACITY EXCEEDS
ANALYSIS 30 MINUTES

STOP

Figure 4-5 – Required Mechanical Backup Instruments Flowchart

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 71-367 Revision AC

START

NOTE:
EFD1000 PFD IT IS ADVISABLE TO KEEP MECHANICAL
AS BACKUP INSTRUMENTS IF SPACE PERMITS
PRIMARY
INSTRUMENTATION

Does the aircraft YES Original Airspeed

have a Vmo/Mmo Indicator must not be
Airspeed Indicator removed.

USE FIGURE 4-5

MFD1000
NO “FLOWCHART FOR
INSTALLED AS
MECHANICAL
BACKUP
STANDBY
IAS and/or ALT?
INSTRUMENTS”

YES

CONNECT MFD1000
P/N 910-00001-002 TO
ESSENTIAL OR
BATTERY BUS
(independent of PFD if
available)

CONNECT EFD1000
MFD TO
INDEPENDENT PITOT/
INSTALL EBB58 STATIC SYSTEM
EXTERNAL BATTERY (IF AVAILABLE)
AND CONNECT TO
EFD1000 MFD

INSTALL EBB58 Verify a qualifying

“EMER BAT DISC” Backup Mechanical
LOCKING TOGGLE Attitude Indicator is
SWITCH and LABEL installed per Figure 4-7
“DISC” and “NORM”
POSITIONS

INSTALL PLACARD with the following label:

EMER BAT DISPATCH LIMIT 80% - SEE EFD AFMS

Installation is
conforming

Figure 4-6 – Required Backups when using MFD1000 with EBB58 Flowchart

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 72-367 Revision AC

4.5.1 Standby Attitude Positioning

The Attitude indicator must be relocated to a position within the pilot’s primary maximum field of
view in accordance with FAR 23.1321(a). The requirements are ±35 degrees from the pilot’s
centerline horizontally (± 21 inches from centerline as defined by AC23-1311-1b) to an area just
below the basic T configuration to the glare shield vertically (see Figure 4-7 below). It is
recommended that the Standby instruments be mounted in the instrument panel immediately
adjacent to the EFD1000/500 displays, but in no case may they be mounted outside the ±35º field
of view requirement.

The standby instruments may be 2 ¼ inch instruments if they meet the placement requirements
(installed under separate approval).

NOTE: In addition to the above positioning requirements, the standby instruments must be as
close as practical to the PFD.

Figure 4-7 – Standby Instrument Placement

Also note that some attitude indicators (i.e., KI-256) are the primary pitch and roll reference for
the autopilot and must remain in the aircraft but may be copilot or blind mounted provided a
separate standby attitude indicator is installed in accordance with this section. For rate-based
autopilots the Turn and Slip Indicator must remain in the aircraft, and may be relocated to the
copilot side or blind mounted provided it is not used as the autopilot mode controller. If used as
the autopilot mode controller then it must be located where it can be easily reached by the pilot
while seated.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 73-367 Revision AC

4.5.2 Standby Airspeed and Altimeter Positioning

The airspeed indicator and altimeter must be within the pilot’s primary maximum field of view in
accordance with FAR 23.1321(a). The requirements are +/- 35 degrees from the pilot’s centerline
horizontally (+/- 21 inches from centerline as defined by AC23.1311-1b), see Figure 4-8.

Single Display Configuration

In a single PFD installation the existing airspeed indicator and altimeter may remain in their
original location. However, if the original location does not satisfy the basic “T” configuration per
FAR 23.1321(d) it is required to “LOCK” the airspeed and altitude tape in the PFD to “ON” via the
installation menu. Therefore if the airspeed indicator is not in position (AS) and the altimeter in
position (AL) of Figure 4-8 below, then the TAPES must be locked on so that the pilot cannot de-
clutter them from the display during flight.

Likewise, older aircraft panel layouts that do not have the airspeed indicator to the left or the
altimeter to the right of the attitude indicator (AI) must either relocate the instrument(s) to these
positions or set the TAPES setting to “LOCK ON” in the installation configuration menu.

NOTE: In addition to the above positioning requirements, the standby instruments must be as
close as practical to the PFD.

Figure 4-8 – Basic T configuration

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 74-367 Revision AC

Multi-Display Configuration
In a two or three display configuration (PFD and one or two MFD), in which an MFD is positioned
adjacent to the PFD, it is required by this STC for the TAPES to be locked on in the installation
menu so that the pilot cannot de-clutter them from display during flight. This requirement is
mandatory regardless of whether the EFD1000 MFD or the existing IAS/ALT indicators are being
used as the required standby instruments.

If an MFD is installed such that separate airspeed and altitude instruments are installed in the
basic T arrangement described above, then the PFD tapes may remain unlocked.

CAUTION: If the airspeed tape on the EFD1000 cannot be configured to look exactly like the existing
airspeed indicator then the existing airspeed indicator must remain immediately adjacent to the left of
the PFD. The TAPES must also be LOCKED OFF so that the airspeed and altimeter tape is out of view. This
scenario would require any MFD to be placed two instrument holes away from the PFD so that the
Altimeter and Airspeed indicators can remain in the Basic T configuration.

WARNING: Failure to adhere to these specific instrument layout requirements and EFD1000
configuration requirements will violate the STC.

4.5.1 Back Up Nav Indicator

For certification reasons a backup navigation indicator is required for at least one type of
operation for which the aircraft is certificated. This means that in any installation in an aircraft
certified for IFR where the EFD1000 is the only display of navigation information in the cockpit, a
backup navigation indicator is required. This will ensure that a failure of the EFD1000 system
does not result in a complete loss of all navigation data to the flight crew. A backup navigation
indicator is not required for an EFD1000 installation in aircraft limited to VFR.

Thus, for example, an installation that includes a panel mount GPS with an integral LCD display
that includes a moving map or CDI indicator would not require a backup NAV indicator. However,
a configuration with no GPS and dual legacy VLOC radios that do not include an integral display
with CDI indications will require a backup NAV indicator.

In a two or three display configuration the EFD1000 or EFD500 MFD satisfies the requirement for a
backup NAV indicator.

If there is already a dedicated indicator wired to an existing NAV Receiver or GPS then it can be
paralleled to the ACU as shown in Section 9.

WARNING: Failure to provide a backup NAV indicator when required will violate the STC.

CNX-80/GNS480
It is not recommended that a backup NAV indicator be connected. If it is desired to connect a
backup navigation indicator then it should only be wired to the dedicated VOR Composite output
on connector P7. Connecting the NAV indicator to the AUX CDI output on P5 or to the Main
Course Deviation output is not recommended.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 75-367 Revision AC

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 76-367 Revision AC

5 Pre-Modification Planning
NOTE: The installer must provide the aircraft operator with copies of wiring diagrams (copy from Section
9 or draft ones not shown) and equipment locations (completed Figure 1 in the ICA) that are suitable for
system troubleshooting.

5.1 Pre-Modification Checklist

Complete Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 (if installing MFD) to insure that the aircraft to be modified is a
suitable candidate for installation of the EFD1000 PFD/MFD system(s) using this AML-STC. It is
required to have a PASS or NA for all rows in order to use this AML-STC as the certification basis for
the EFD1000 installation. NA means Not Applicable because no interface is made to that device. Only
Items designated with “– NA if no ____ “ may use NA in the PASS column.
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY - PFD
ITEM CRITERIA PASS
1 Is the aircraft to be modified on the Approved Model List (AML)?
2 Does aircraft have sufficient electrical capacity to supply all required equipment
given the current draw in Table 7-1?
3 Is there an acceptable location to mount or relocate the required standby
instruments in the pilot’s field of view? (see Figures 4-7 and 4-8) See Section 4 to
determine the required standby instruments.
4 Do the standby instruments meet the requirements of Figure 4-5 and 4-6?
5 Is there acceptable clearance between the control column (yoke or stick) and the
PFD when the flight controls are in the full nose down position.
6 If removing an EFIS system - does the EFD1000 replace all required
instrumentation previously displayed on the removed EFIS? - NA if no EFIS
7 Is a backup navigation indicator required (see section 4.5.1) - NA if no Backup NAV
indicator is required. If a backup indicator is required, is there an acceptable
location to mount or relocate a required backup NAV Indicator in the pilot’s field of
view? (see Figure 4-8)
8 Is there an acceptable location to mount the RSM? (see Section 6.9)
9 Is there a location to mount the necessary circuit breakers that will be accessible to
the pilot while seated?
10 Are there suitable locations to mount the necessary switches that are accessible to
the pilot while seated? – NA if not installed.
11 Does the aircraft have a compatible GPS receiver or will one be installed? (see
Electrical Interface Section 8 to determine compatibility) - NA if no GPS interface.
12 Does the aircraft have a compatible Navigation receiver or will one be installed?
(see Electrical Interface Section 8 to determine compatibility) - NA if no NAV
interface.
13 If the aircraft is equipped with an autopilot – is the Autopilot compatible? (see
Electrical Interface Section 8 to determine heading and nav compatibility, and
Appendix E to determine attitude input (KI-256 replacement compatibility) - NA if
no autopilot interface.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 77-367 Revision AC

PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY - PFD

ITEM CRITERIA PASS
14 If the aircraft is limited to VFR, is there a placard or other acceptable means, stating
“Operation of This Aircraft is Limited to VFR Only”, or similar phraseology
acceptable to the FAA, as required by § 23.1525, § 23.1559 and § 91.9. Since the
kinds of operations are limited to VFR, this placard or other acceptable means
should already be in place, but should be verified.
15 If the aircraft is Class III, is the PFD software level B?
Table 5-1 - PFD Pre-Modification Checklist

MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY - MFD

ITEM CRITERIA PASS
1 If an EFD1000 MFD is installed and the standby airspeed and/or altimeter are to be
removed, is there an acceptable location to mount the required EBB58 Emergency
Backup Battery? (see Section 6.12) NA if no backup instruments removed.
2 If an EFD1000 or EFD500 MFD is installed, does the aircraft have an IFR GPS
installed? NA if EFD1000 MFD not installed.
3 If an EFD1000 MFD is installed, does the aircraft have an alternate static source?
4 Does the aircraft have a standby attitude indicator in the pilot’s primary maximum
field of view (See Figure 4-7)?
5 Does the aircraft have a Vmo or barber pole type airspeed indicator installed? If yes,
do not remove the existing airspeed indicator.
6 If the standby airspeed indicator and altimeter are to be removed, is there an
acceptable location to mount the required placard reading “EMER BAT DISPATCH
LIMIT 80% - SEE EFD AFMS”? NA if EBB not required to be installed.
7 Is there an acceptable location to mount and label the EBB emergency disconnect
switch? NA if EBB not required to be installed.
8 Does aircraft have sufficient electrical capacity to supply all required equipment
given the current draw in Table 7-1?
9 Is there an acceptable location to mount or relocate the required standby airspeed
and altitude instruments, collocated with the standby attitude indicator, all within
the pilot’s primary maximum field of view? (see Figure 4-7 and 4-8)
10 Do the standby instruments meet the requirements of Figure 4-5 and 4-6?
11 Is there acceptable clearance between the control column (yoke or stick) and the
MFD(s) when the flight controls are in the full nose down position?
12 Is there an acceptable location to mount the EFD1000 MFD RSM? (see Section 6) -
NA if EFD500 only installation
13 Is there a location to mount the MFD circuit breaker(s) that will be accessible to the
pilot while seated?
14 Is there a location to mount the MFD switch(s) that is accessible to the pilot while
seated?
Table 5-2 - MFD Pre-Modification Checklist

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 78-367 Revision AC

5.1.1 Directional Gyro/ HSI

The EFD1000 Flight Display will replace the existing Directional Gyro or HSI in the panel. The
HSI/DG indicator may be removed from the aircraft at the operator’s discretion. If another device
is “bootstrapped” from the compass then it will need to be determined whether RS232 or LS ARINC
429 heading is accepted by this device and rewired appropriately. If the other device only accepts
ARINC 407 synchro heading or HS ARINC 429 then an ACU2 will be required.

A magnetic direction indicator is required as a secondary direction indicator per FAR

23.1311(a)(5).

5.1.2 GPS Annunciators

The EFD1000 is capable of displaying GPS annunciations on the HSI portion of the display from
those ARINC 429 connected GPS receivers that output these labels. If using the PFD display for
any required GPS annunciations verify that the GPS receiver outputs these messages on the ARINC
429 bus.

GPS Annunciations on PFD (if provided by the GPS):

• MSG
• WPT
• TERM
• APPR
• INTEG

NOTE: It is up to the installer to determine if the annunciations are sufficient for the GPS
navigation application.

5.1.3 Synthetic Vision Enabled PFD Pro (level C) or MFD (requires external GPS position)

Aircraft without a TAWS system installed:

When a PFD and/or MFD has the Synthetic Vision (ESV) option enabled it is required that a Sonalert
be connected to the PFD discrete output pin 7. Installations with synthetic vision on the MFD only
still require that the PFD have the Sonalert connected. The EFD1000C3 requires software version
B2.3.2 or later before it can be connected to a MFD with ESV enabled and the C3 PFD will require a
Sonalert connection. ESV is not available on a C3 PFD.

Aircraft with a TAWS system installed:

The Sonalert is an option for Altitude Alert functions only. The Sonalert is not authorized for use
with ESV and will be configured off in programming during configuration. The TAWS audible alert
is used instead of the Sonalert from the Aspen Terrain Warning System. ESV is not available on a
C3 PFD. The Aspen C3 Software version B2.3.2 and higher supports the ESV function on an MFD.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 79-367 Revision AC

5.1.4 Aircraft Power Requirements

An electrical load analysis must be performed to ensure the installed EFD1000 components do not
exceed the current capacity of the aircraft’s charging system (see Section 7.1).

The EFD1000 system uses either an internal battery or an EBB58 to permit operation of the
EFD1000 during an aircraft charging system failure. If the aircraft bus voltage falls below a
nominal 12.3V (14V electrical system) or 24.6V (28V electrical system), and the indicated airspeed
is above 30 knots or mph (as configured), the EFD1000 will switch to the internal or EBB battery.
The installer must ensure that the aircraft electrical system attains the minimum voltage when the
electrical system is loaded to flight configuration and engine RPM is at or above the level necessary
for nominal alternator/generator output.

The EBB58 may only be installed in a multiple display configuration and may only be connected to
an EFD1000 MFD no other connections are permitted.

5.1.5 Equipment Power Requirements

For first-time EFD installations, a switch or switch breaker to the PFD and to each MFD must be
installed. These controls are used during emergency procedures, and also enable the PFD and
MFD(s) to remain off during engine start. It is recommended that previous PFD installations that
did not include an EFIS Master switch add a switch in the existing circuit, or replace the existing
circuit breaker with a circuit breaker switch. For multiple installations, the same style of
switch/breaker should be used on each EFD.

All MFD and PFD switches must be separate to mitigate against potential single point failure of
both primary and secondary instruments. When not using a switch style circuit breaker, each
circuit breaker(s) must be a trip free pull type and must be connected to the main battery bus
(after the Battery Master Switch) as shown in the EFD1000 wiring diagram.

The switches should be arranged in the same order as the EFDs. For example, if the installed EFD
arrangement is EFD500 MFD, EFD1000 PFD, and EFD1000 MFD (from left to right), the switches
should be arranged in that order, from left to right. Alternately, the switches may be arranged
vertically, from top to bottom, in the same order.

If available, connect the ACU/ACU2 to the avionics electrical bus. Otherwise, connecting the ACU
to the switched battery bus is permissible.

5.1.6 Special Considerations for Aircraft Limited to VFR

Relief from the requirement for a secondary attitude reference for VFR aircraft has been provided
in an FAA memorandum dated December 8, 2008, “Certification of Electronic Displays in Part 23
Aircraft Limited to VFR (Visual Flight Rules) Operations; Project No. SA9024SC-A, Aspen Avionics,
Inc. FAA Approved Model List.” The Policy within this Memorandum permits exclusion of
23.1311(a)(5) with respect to the requirement for a secondary attitude indicator for aircraft limited
to VFR.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 80-367 Revision AC

It is not acceptable to use this FAA Policy to change the established kinds of operations authorized
for a particular aircraft (see 14 CFR §23.1525). Rather, the policy may be applied for aircraft that
are limited by their certification basis to VFR only operations. Changes to the kinds of operations
authorized for any aircraft on the AML is beyond the scope of this modification and must be
established separately.

The following requirements must be met in order to install the EFD1000 without a standby attitude
indicator in U.S. registered Part 23 aircraft limited to VFR:

The aircraft must have a placard or other acceptable means, stating “Operation of This Aircraft is
Limited to VFR Only”, or similar phraseology acceptable to the FAA, as required by § 23.1525, §
23.1559 and § 91.9. Since the kinds of operations will have been limited to VFR by the aircraft
certification basis, this placard should already be in place prior to installation of the EFD1000/500
system, but should be verified.

For aircraft limited to VFR, magnetic compass information must remain independent of the
aircraft’s primary electrical power.

5.1.7 Cessna 190/195 Special Consideration

Some Cessna 190/195 aircraft have non-standard airspeed indicators that cannot be replaced by
standard airspeed indicators. Therefore, when used in aircraft with non-standard airspeed
systems, the EFD1000 airspeed tapes must be “locked off” in the EFD1000 installation menus so
the pilot always uses the non-standard airspeed indicator.

Most Cessna 190/195 aircraft with a standard (“L”)-shaped pitot mast use standard airspeed
indicators. Cessna 190/195 aircraft with a “Harpoon”- shaped pitot mast do not have a standard
airspeed indicator.

Review of the logbooks and technical data must be accomplished to verify that the airspeed
indicator is standard or not. Generally, unless modified, aircraft serial number 16084 and above
have standard airspeed indicators, and 16083 and below do not.

The pitot and static systems must still be connected to the EFD1000 because these inputs are used
in the EFD1000 for other purposes.

CAUTION: Cessna 190/195 aircraft using non-standard airspeed indicators must have the
EFD1000 airspeed and altitude tapes “locked off” in the installation menus.

NOTE - The Pitot and Static system must be connected to the EFD1000 even when the tapes are
not to be displayed.

NOTE – Verify that the aircraft is on the Approved Model List prior to modification.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 81-367 Revision AC

5.2 Conventional Landing Gear “tail dragger” Aircraft

The following precautions are necessary for installations in aircraft with conventional landing gear,
due to the necessity of initializing the EFD1000 in a tail-down position:

• The RSM must be P/N 910-00003-00X, or A-05-111-00, serial number 1301 or above.
• The on ground heading accuracy of the EFD1000 must be within +/-4 degrees. A RSM shim
might be required to meet this tolerance – see Section 6.9.9.
See Section 10.5.1.1 for a conventional gear specific RSM calibration procedure.

5.3 PART 135 IFR Operations

The 30 minute internal battery in the PFD is not approved for use as a power source to meet the
electrical power source requirement under 14 CFR 23.1353, or for single engine Part 135 IFR
operations under 14 CFR 135.163.

5.4 Setting V-SPEED Textual Markers

Have the aircraft operator complete “Operator Configuration Checklist” in Appendix C so that this
data is available prior to configuring the system in Section 10. We suggest making a copy of this form
and have it signed by owner/operator, then put a copy in Installation Package.

The V-speeds must be set in the EFD1000 PFD and EFD1000 MFD.

5.5 Optional Interfaces

5.5.1 Autopilot

The EFD1000 Pro with ACU emulates a KI-525A, NSD-360A and PN-101 HSI by providing HDG
Datum, CRS Datum, and navigation L/R outputs to a connected autopilot. Any autopilot
compatible with the KI-525A, NSD-360A or PN-101 HSI is compatible with the EFD1000 System.

Similarly, the EFD1000 Pro with ACU emulates the KI-254, KI-256, G-550A, and 52C77 flight
director indicators by accepting FD signals compatible with these indicators and displaying them
on the EFD. The ACU2 adds to these FD types the Collins FD-112V (includes Collins and some
Bendix M4D autopilots)and the Sperry AD500. NOTE – The Cessna ARC1000 and Sperry autopilots
require the use of ACU2 P/N 910-00004-102 for G/S and NAV superflag connection.

Section 9 of this document shows interconnect diagrams for common autopilots that are
compatible with the EFD1000. Because the EFD1000 outputs Heading Datum and Course Datum
via the ACU the existing HSI/DG is no longer required to provide this output to the autopilot.

In addition, some existing autopilots that have only a DG installed (i.e. no HSI) will gain full HSI
features with the installation of the EFD1000 System. Please check the manufacturer’s installation
data for any jumpers or hardware that must be added or removed from the autopilot to add the
HSI interface.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 82-367 Revision AC

When the EFD1000 System is installed, the ACU controls all analog navigation signals provided to
the autopilot. Navigation signal output to the autopilot is switched depending on which sensor is
coupled to the EFD1000 HSI. Therefore the LT/RT/UP/DN, flags, and ILS Energize must only be
connected between the ACU and autopilot, and there should be no direct connection between the
navigation receiver and the autopilot.

The autopilot’s flight director output may be paralleled from the autopilot to the existing Flight
Director indicator and to the ACU so that it is displayed on both instruments unless an EA100 is
installed in which case the FD may only be connected to the ACU.

5.5.1.1 EA100 Adapter

See Appendix E for detailed EA100 installation eligibility. The EA100 can only be used to replace
the analog outputs from a KG-258, a KI-254, a KI-255, or a KI-256 Flight Command Indicator
to the autopilots identified in Appendix E. No other autopilot interfaces are authorized. KFC250
autopilots must have the P/N 065-5016-XX Adapter Board to be eligible for connection to the
EA100.

5.5.1.2 A/P Source Selection Switch

In a two-display PFD and MFD1000 installation you may install a panel mounted switch that will
allow the MFD1000 to drive navigation signals to the autopilot in the event of a PFD issue. See
Appendix F for instructions.

5.5.1.3 Altitude Pre-Select System

For KFC200 autopilots, the Avionik Straubing APS4A Altitude Pre-Select System may be installed
with the EFD1000 PFD which allows the autopilot to capture the PFD Selected Altitude. See
Appendix G for instructions.

5.5.2 GPS Navigator Basemap Compatibility

Not all GPS navigator outputs are the same. Some navigators provide output to support curved
flight plan segments. Other navigators can only provide the straight segments of a flight plan, and
the curved segments are not depicted. Some navigators provide an output that result in a
straight-line depiction of a curved flight plan segment, which should not be used. It is possible to
connect the navigator in an incorrect configuration, resulting in potentially misleading information
to the pilot.

NOTE: Other GPS navigators have not been evaluated and may be compatible.
Contact Aspen Avionics for information regarding additional navigators.

The following table identifies the correct configuration of compatible systems:

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 83-367 Revision AC

Navigator Navigator Mode EFD1000 Mode Basemap Depiction

and/or and/or
Type of Connection Type of Connection
Apollo Standard Mode, RS- GPS TYPE 3, RS-232 This connection method presents
GX50 232 straight-leg portions of flight plans. An

GX60 open segment is shown in lieu of a curved

segment.
GX65
Bendix King Standard Mode, RS- GPS TYPE 1, RS-232 This connection method presents
KLN 90/A/B, 232 straight-leg portions of flight plans. An

KLN900 open segment is shown in lieu of a curved

segment.
KLN 90/A/B ARINC 429 ARINC 429 This connection method displays straight-
leg portions of flight plans.
Bendix King Standard Mode, RS- GPS TYPE 1, RS-232 This connection method presents
KLN 94 232 straight-leg portions of flight plans. An

KLN 89/B open segment is shown in lieu of a curved

segment.
Bendix King Enhanced Mode, GPS TYPE 2, RS-232 This connection method presents curved
KLN94 RS-232 segments of flight plans.

Enhanced
Mode
Garmin ARINC 429 ARINC 429 This connection method presents curved
GPS155 approaches. The GPS155XL shows an

GPS155XL open segment in lieu of a curved segment.

GPS300XL,
GNC300
GPS165
Garmin ARINC 429 ARINC 429 This connection method presents curved
GNS-4xx/5xx approaches.

GTN-6xx/7xx
Garmin RS-232 This configuration This connection method can incorrectly
GNS-4xx/5xx should not be used. display curved segments as straight lines

GTN-6xx/7xx and the displayed information can be

misleading to the pilot in certain
conditions.
Garmin GNS- ARINC 429 This configuration This software version has not been tested
480 (Software should not be used. with EFD software 2.X. GNS-480 should
v2.0 and below) be upgraded to SW v2.3.

Garmin GNS- ARINC 429 ARINC 429 This connection method presents curved
480 (Software GAMA 429 GFX Int approaches.
v2.3)
Trimble RS-232 This configuration This connection method can incorrectly
TNL-2000 should not be used. display the map information.

TNL-3000
Table 5-3 - GPS Basemap Compatibility

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 84-367 Revision AC

5.5.3 GPSS

GPS Steering provides a steering command to the autopilot through the HDG Datum channel to
provide for enroute, procedure turn, holding pattern, and turn anticipation operation. GPSS
through the EFD1000 is only available if Label 121 is transmitted by the GPS over the ARINC 429
bus.

5.5.4 GPS/ NAV Switching

Existing GPS/NAV switching from the GPS and VLOC receiver to the original HSI will be removed as
the PFD will provide this capability. The existing GPS and VLOC receivers will be wired directly to
the PFD or ACU(s) as per the installation drawings in Section 9. Analog connections from the GPS
and/or VLOC receiver to the autopilot will be removed and wired per the ACU to autopilot
interfaces shown in Section 9.

5.5.5 Sonalert Tone Generator (Pro system only)

The discrete output from the EFD1000 PFD Pro is used to drive a tone generator or Sonalert. The
Sonalert will sound when approaching the “Selected Altitude”, leaving the “Selected Altitude” by
more than 200ft, when “Minimums” is reached, or if an Evolution Synthetic Vision (ESV) alert is
triggered. The Sonalert must be mounted in a location so that it is audible to the pilot while seated
such as above the pilot’s head, on the instrument panel, on the glare shield, or some other
acceptable location. The Sonalert is not an option but required when ESV is enabled and the
aircraft does not have a TAWS system installed. The MFD discrete output can be used to permit
switching the autopilot datum source to a reverted MFD. See Appendix FA/P Source Select.

5.5.6 Heading Output

Magnetic heading is available in the following formats:

Heading Type Sources

ARINC 429 Low Speed ACU (P3 pins 4/5)
ACU2 (P3 pins 4/5)
EFD1000 (pins 26/27), only when no ACU is installed
ARINC 429 High Speed ACU2 (P3 pins 4/5)
EFD1000 with sw 2.3 and later (pins 26/27) -only
when no ACU is installed
RS-232 (Format C and Z) EFD1000 (pins 13,14,15)
Synchro (ARINC 407) ACU2 (analog)
includes XYZ synchro out, 26Vac Ref out(1), and valid

Table 5-4 – Heading Sources

The EFD500 does not have an integral AHRS and therefore does not output heading information.

(1)NOTE: The ACU2 26Vrms@400hz reference output can support loads up to 0.06VA, which may
be one analog or several digital indicators. It is suggested to determine the load requirements of
the sources or use an external inverter as the synchro reference.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 85-367 Revision AC

5.5.7 Air Data Outputs

Air data information is available in the following formats. The ACU does not pass-thru air data
information to its output bus, the ACU2 does. See Section 8 for ARINC 429 and RS232 air data
output specifications.

Air Data Type Sources

ARINC 429 Low Speed ACU2 (P3 pins 4/5)
EFD1000 (pins 26/27), only when no ACU is installed
ARINC 429 High Speed ACU2 (P3 pins 4/5)
EFD1000 with sw 2.3 and later (pins 26/27) -only
when no ACU is installed
RS-232 (Format C and Z) EFD1000 (pins 13,14,15)

Table 5-5 – Air Data Sources

The EFD500 does not have an integral air data computer and therefore does not output air data
information.

5.5.7.1 EFD1000 as Encoding Altitude Source

14CFR 91.217 states in part, a) No person may operate any automatic pressure altitude reporting
equipment associated with a radar beacon transponder—

Unless, as installed, that equipment was tested and calibrated to transmit altitude data
corresponding within 125 feet (on a 95 percent probability basis) of the indicated or calibrated
datum of the altimeter normally used to maintain flight altitude, with that altimeter referenced to
29.92 inches of mercury for altitudes from sea level to the maximum operating altitude of the
aircraft

Aspen has shown that the EFD1000 system is capable of transmitting altitude data reliably on a
better than 95% probability basis. Therefore, when the EFD1000 altimeter system is tested and
calibrated in accordance with 14CFR 91.413, the EFD1000 system can be used as an Encoding
Altitude source.

The EFD1000 provides this output in RS232 Format Z. See Figure 9-28 for wiring connections.
Second ACU

5.5.8 Second ACU

A second ACU is required when two (2) analog VLOC receivers are installed. Note when installing
two ACUs they both must be of the same type (ACU vs. ACU2) if the ACU2 is being used for the
advanced features of ADF/RAD ALT/OAT. The advanced features require the ACU2 to be
configured high speed and the ACU can only operate low speed A429.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 86-367 Revision AC

5.5.9 Decision Height

A decision height (DH) input from a compatible radar altimeter may be connected to the
ACU/ACU2. “DH” will be displayed on the PFD when decision height is reached.

5.5.10 RS-232 Considerations (v1.1 PFD installations)

Several new RS-232 ports are enabled in v2.X software. When an EWR50 XM received is added to
the installation during a v2.X upgrade and there is an existing RS-232 GPS connection, this will
need to be moved to another port. See Section 8.

5.5.11 Flush or Recess Mounting the PFD

If there is insufficient clearance between the PFD and control column when the flight controls are
in the full nose down position, it will be required to flush mount or recess mount the PFD in the
instrument panel. Also the installer may choose to flush mount the PFD for cosmetic reasons.

Aspen Avionics Flush Mount Kit

Aspen Avionics offers a specific Flush Mount Kit for this purpose. See Service Bulletin SB2009-03
document number 991-00018-001 for instructions.

Locally Fabricated Brackets

If the installer chooses to fabricate their own brackets for flush mounting the displays then this
modification is beyond the scope of this manual and will require that the brackets and the
instrument panel modification be separately approved.

5.6 Traffic Sensors (optional – must be Unlocked on PFD)

On the PFD the traffic feature is a chargeable option that must be unlocked. Traffic is standard on all
MFD systems. The PFD and MFD systems are compatible with ARINC 735A protocol traffic systems,
utilizing the ARINC 429 interconnection. The EFD1000C3 Level B PFD requires software version
B2.2.3 or later. The following systems are known to be compatible:

• Ryan 9900BX - (TAS)

• Avidyne TAS600/610/620 - (TAS)
• Garmin GTX 330 - (TIS)
• Garmin GTS8xx Series – (TAS)
• Garmin GDL-90 (TIS)
• L3 Skywatch 497/899 - (TAS)
• Bendix/King KTA 870/KMH880 - (TAS)

Additional sensors (including TCAS I) will be added from time to time and will be identified in
subsequent revisions of this manual or in Service Bulletins or Tech Notes. Traffic sensor control
functions are performed using existing traffic equipment installations or other compatible equipment.
TCAS II is incompatible with the EFD1000/500. TCAS II installations are not authorized.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 87-367 Revision AC

5.7 Weather Information (optional on Level C only – must be Unlocked on PFD)

On the level C PFD the weather features (XM and WX500) are a chargeable option that must be
unlocked. Weather is standard on all MFD systems. Weather is not an option on the level B PFD. The
compatible PFD and MFD systems can interface with the following weather information products:

• Aspen EWR50 XM Weather Receiver

• WX-500 Stormscope Sensor

EWR50 XM Weather
See Aspen Avionics document 900-00007-001 “EWR50 Installation Manual” for installation data on
installing the complete EWR50 system.

WX-500
The EFD can be configured so that it is the control panel and the display for the WX-500. In this
configuration the EFD will be configured for “CONTROL” which allows the installer to configure the
WX-500 receiver, initiate various tests, and view system data from the WX-500 via the EFD. The EFD
RS232 transmitter and receiver will be connected.

If an existing WX-500 control panel exists and it is desired to keep that interface operational then the
EFD will be configured as “DISPLAY” and only the EFD RS232 receiver will be connected.

5.8 ADF

One or two Bendix King KR-87 type ADF receivers may be connected to the ACU2. ADF1 and ADF2
may be selected as bearing pointers on the HSI. The ACU2 does not support stepper motor drive for
remote RMI, but does provide ARINC 407 synchro heading output for RMI that support this interface.

5.9 Radio Altimeter (AGL)

The ACU2 supports one radio altimeter in either an analog or ARINC 429 format. See section 8 for
compatible systems. The radio altimeter display in AGL has the following accuracy based on the radio
altimeter system output meeting the manufacturers’ specifications:

Radio Altimeter Display Accuracy

Height Range Accuracy of height information
displayed to the crew1
-20 to 100ft ±10ft
100 to 500ft ±10% of radio altimeter output
500 to 2500ft ±5% of radio altimeter output
1 This allows for instrumental but not perceptive inaccuracies

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 88-367 Revision AC

5.10 Remote OAT Probe

The ACU2 supports a remote OAT probe for when the RSM is internally mounted or in a heated
exhaust stream. A dedicated OAT probe is required for this connection as the ACU cannot share an
OAT probe with other equipment.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 89-367 Revision AC

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 90-367 Revision AC

6 Mechanical Installation

The PFD and MFD installation will require mechanical modifications to the aircraft. The PFD, RSM (a RSM
is required for each EFD1000 installation), and Configuration Module will be installed in all installations,
while one (1) or two (2) ACU(s), and one (1) or two (2) MFD(s) may be installed in others. Most
installations will require removing and relocating existing flight instruments to alternate locations in the
instrument panel to be used as standby instrumentation.

6.1 Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment

Inspect the equipment for evidence of shipping damage. If a damage claim is to be filed save all
shipping boxes and packing material to substantiate your claim. To avoid damage to the equipment,
do not place the EFD Displays face down on the knobs.

6.2 Equipment Location Documentation

It is required by the AML-STC that the PFD, MFD, RSM, CM, and ACU mounting locations be recorded
on Figures 1 and 2 of Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-001 Instructions for Continued
Airworthiness. It is also required that an accurate description of wire and cable routing be noted on
the figures. This information will be required later to comply with the ICAs. Make a copy of the form
and give to owner for inclusion in permanent aircraft records.

6.3 Log Book Entry

Make a logbook entry at the completion of the installation indicating that the aircraft has been
modified in accordance with the EFD1000 AML-STC.

6.4 Weight and Balance

Using the component weights in Table 6-1 and the moment arm of the component mounting
locations perform a weight and balance calculation per AC 43.13-1B Chapter 10. Also account for
equipment removed during the modification process.

Component Weight (Ibs.)

EFD1000 with internal battery including bracket (910-00001-001 -004) 2.9
EFD1000 without internal battery including bracket (910-00001-002) 2.1
EFD500 including bracket 2.4
RSM – Remote Sensor Module 0.2
ACU – Analog Converter Unit (A-05-112-00 or 910-00004-001) 0.8
ACU2 – Analog Converter Unit 2 (910-00004-10x) 1.1
Configuration Module 0.1
EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery including bracket 2.25
EBB Pre-Fabricated harness 7ft 1.0
Table 6-1 – Component Weights

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 91-367 Revision AC

6.5 Installation Limitations

The following mounting limitations must not be exceeded during the installation of the EFD1000 and
RSM.

6.5.1 EFD1000 Installation Limitations

• The EFD1000 must be mounted within 20º nose down to -10º nose up of perpendicular to
the aircraft waterline.
• The EFD1000 must be mounted within 0.0±2.0º of the zero degree roll “wings level” axis.

6.5.2 RSM Mounting Limitations

• The RSM must be mounted within ±4º to the longitudinal axis of the aircraft (see Figure
6-16)
• The RSM must be mounted within ±10º to the zero degree roll “wings level” axis (see
Figure 6-19)
• The RSM must be mounted within ±10º to the zero pitch axis “waterline” of the airframe
(see Figure 6-17).
• RSM must be mounted to a relatively flat surface such that when installed it will not deform
the aircraft skin and must not allow more than a .030” gap between RSM and skin.
• RSM must not be mounted to a NO ZONE as pictured in Figure 6-13, Figure 6-14, and
Figure 6-15.
• Mounting the RSM to, or making other penetrations through, the aircraft pressure vessel is
beyond the scope of this STC. Separate FAA approval of pressure vessel penetrations
required to accommodate RSM mounting is required prior to the installation of the
remaining EFD1000 system components under the EFD1000 AML-STC.
• Mounting the RSM to the exterior of a composite or fabric skinned aircraft structure is
beyond the scope of this STC. To mount the RSM on composite or fabric skin aircraft
structures, separate FAA approval of the RSM mounting is required prior to the installation
of the remaining EFD1000 system components under the EFD1000 AML-STC.

6.5.3 EFD1000 MFD – RSM Limitations (Dual RSM Mounting)

The RSM provides information required for the presentation of attitude, heading and OAT
information for each EFD1000 display. If the EFD1000 MFD is used as backup for attitude (this is
presently not permitted) then the redundant RSMs in a dual EFD1000 display installation are
essential. If there is anticipation that the backup attitude indicator would eventually be a
candidate for replacement by the EFD1000 MFD, then the following would apply: to ensure the
RSM devices would remain redundant.

NOTE: If the EFD1000 MFD is not used as a backup attitude indicator, these RSM
separation requirements are only recommendations, and the minimum separation
for RSMs is six inches, edge to edge.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 92-367 Revision AC

To avoid possible common mode failures the PFD and EFD1000 MFD RSMs should be separated by
aircraft structure and mounted in different regions of the airframe. For example, one RSM can be
top mounted on the aft empennage region while the other is internal wing mounted (i.e., old flux
sensor location). If this is not practical, the two RSMs must be separated by a minimum of 12
inches laterally (preferably separated by dorsal or keel structure), or if lined up longitudinally
where one RSM is directly fore or aft of the other, the separation must be a minimum of 24 inches.

Note that in future software releases it may be possible to remove the mechanical attitude
indicator, provided that sufficient separation exists between the two RSMs.

• Although each RSM’s wiring to its display is manufactured as individually shielded and
continuous wiring, the redundant RSM wiring is specifically not permitted to share the
same connector, nor the same shield throughout their entire installation.
• A minimum of 12” lateral separation is required for all wiring (with the limited exception of
regions permitting benign bulkhead penetrations) unless physical partitions exist.
• When the EBB58 is installed its wiring harness must also remain isolated/separate from the
EFD1000 PFD’s RSM wiring to provide independence. This will ensure that any physical
damage to a particular wiring bundle cannot damage both the PFD’s RSM input and the
EBB’s ability to provide emergency power to the EFD1000 MFD.
• Turbine Compressor Rotor burst considerations: If installed in a rotor burst zone the RSMs
must be installed on the top and bottom of the fuselage and not within the multiple
fragment region with corresponding wire routing. If the RSMs are outside of the rotor burst
zone but their wire routing is within this threat area, then only the wiring installation must
include this level of separation.
• Bird strike considerations: If not shielded by the shadow of the fuselage, the RSMs must
either be laterally separated or installed on the top and bottom of the aircraft.

6.5.4 EBB58 Emergency Battery mounting Limitations

The EBB58 must not be mounted to the firewall.

6.6 Equipment Bonding

Bond all metal components to the airframe. Prepare bonded surfaces for best contact (resistance of
connections should not exceed 0.003 ohm).

The EFD uses an installer fabricated braided bonding strap to ensure proper bonding to the panel.
The bond strap is attached with supplied screw (3/8th inch length) to the back of the EFD at a
location just below and left of static port. The other end of the strap is attached to the EFD mounting
bracket screw at the rear of the panel. Each EFD1000 display must have its own (i.e. not shared with
another EFD1000) bonding strap ground location.

The RSM does not require an RF ground plane, but it must be bonded to the airframe to meet
compliance with DO-160E EMI and lightning certification requirements. Bonding of the RSM is
achieved through the mounting fasteners. The attached ground wire on the RSM is not a bonding

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 93-367 Revision AC

wire but is a shield ground for the pigtail over braid and must be connected to airframe ground. Each
RSM harness shield must have its own (i.e. not shared with another RSM) bonding location.

The ACU is bonded through its six (6) mounting holes and chassis when mounted to a metal surface,
otherwise a braided or single stranded wire bonding strap to airframe ground will need to be
fabricated for mounting on composite structures.

The optional EBB58 bracket must be bonded to the airframe ground.

6.7 Cooling

The EFD uses an integral fan for cooling. The area near the fan must be unobstructed to permit
maximum airflow through the unit. Venting and cooling air circulating behind the EFD will improve
heat dissipation and may improve equipment reliability, and is therefore a good installation practice.
The RSM, ACU, Configuration Module, and EBB58 have no cooling requirements.

6.8 EFD Installation

Mechanical installation of the EFD requires installing the included mounting bracket, connecting a
braided bonding strap between the EFD and panel, and installing pitot and static connections
(EFD1000 only) to the two keyed quick release pressure fittings.

NOTE: To avoid damage to the equipment, do not place the EFD Display face down on the knobs.

6.8.1 Connecting the Internal Battery (does not apply to 910-00001-002)

The internal battery may be disconnected for shipping and must be reconnected prior to the Post
Installation Flight Check and maintenance release of the aircraft.

Connection of the battery is performed as follows:

• Remove the two screws that hold the battery cover in place. The battery cover is located
below the 44-pin connector on the EFD cylinder.
• Remove the battery cover.
• Plug the battery connector into the mating connector within the battery compartment.
• Re-install the battery cover. Be careful to avoid pinching the wires with the cover.
• Re-install the two screws to hold the battery cover in place.
• Verify “Bat:” status on page 10 of the Main Menu shows “Charging” when external power is
supplied to the EFD.

6.8.2 PFD Mounting Location

The PFD must be mounted approximately centered in the instrument panel per FAR 23.1321(d). If
the two existing instrument holes that contain the attitude indicator and direction indicator are not
exactly centered, but are the closest instruments to the center, then that position is acceptable for
mounting the PFD.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 94-367 Revision AC

The PFD can be mounted on the non-pilot (typically right side) side of the instrument panel if it is
not for use by any required pilot during takeoff, initial climb, final approach, and landing. Backup
instruments are required on the pilot side only. See 14CFR 23.1311 and 14CFR 23.1321.

NOTE: Modification to the existing instrument panel is not authorized under this STC. Any
modification must be approved separately.

Figure 6-1 - PFD Mounting Location

6.8.3 MFD1000 Mounting Location

Since the MFD1000 may become a PFD during MFD to PFD reversion, the EFD1000 MFD should be
positioned adjacent to the right or left of the PFD. If this is not practical or permitted (see note
below), then the EFD1000 MFD must be mounted in the pilot’s primary maximum field of view in a
position that meets FAR 23.1321(a) if it is to be used as a backup instrument or if the MFD is for
use by any required pilot during takeoff, initial climb, final approach, and landing. The
requirements are +/- 35 degrees from the pilot’s centerline horizontally (+/- 21 inches from
centerline as defined by AC23.1311-1b). See Figure 4-7.

NOTE: If it is not possible to configure the EFD1000 airspeed tape to look identical to the
existing airspeed indicator then the airspeed and altimeter must remain in the original
positions (to preserve the basic “T”) and the airspeed/altitude tapes on the PFD (and
reverted MFD) must be locked off. This will require any MFD to be positioned outside of
the airspeed indicator or altimeter.

NOTE: The standby instruments must be as close as practical to the PFD. This applies to the
EFD1000 MFD when used as the standby airspeed and altitude – the standby AI must be
as close as practical to the EFD1000 MFD.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 95-367 Revision AC

6.8.4 Surface Mounting the EFD as per Figure 6-2

The pre-drilled holes in the mounting bracket support both standard 3” round instrument holes,
and 3ATI square cutouts. The bracket is centered on the upper instrument hole. The lower
portion of the bracket is provisioned with screw slots, allowing variable vertical spacing
configurations.

If the lower cutout is a 3ATI or other larger standard cutout, a commercially available metal
blanking plate should be used to flush fill the cutout. Use the EFD Mounting Bracket as a template
to cut the 2.10” diameter cutout for the fan and two 0.150” diameter mounting holes. All cut
edges should be treated to prevent corrosion.

Aircraft with tilted instrument panels of 20º or less can install the EFD flat against the panel. The
tilt will later be removed electronically in the system configuration using the Panel Tilt Pitch
Adjustment.

The EFD is attached to the instrument panel in 6 places with MS24693-S30 (#6-32 flathead
screws), NAS1149FN632P (washers), and MS21044N06 (#6-32 Nuts). It is also acceptable to use
existing #6 nutplates.

1) Burnish the back of the instrument panel around one of the 6 mounting holes to allow for
bracket to instrument panel bonding through the screw/washer/nut.
2) Loosely install the bracket with the upper two mounting screws/nuts/washers as shown in
Figure.
3) Use an inclinometer on the top of the EFD bracket with the aircraft level to make this
adjustment. It may be necessary to slot the existing holes to align the bracket in the roll
axis.
4) The PFD must be mounted within 0.0±2.0º of the zero degree roll “wings level” axis.
5) Fabricate an 8” bonding strap from braid and two ground lugs. Attach one ground lug to a
mounting screw on the backside of the panel (see Figure 6-10).
6) Install remaining EFD mounting bracket screws and nuts.
7) Tighten all six (6) mounting screws and nuts to 12 in-lbs. anchoring the bracket to the
panel.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 96-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-2 – EFD and Bracket Installation

6.8.5 Recess Mounting the EFD as per Figure 6-4

These are partial instructions for accomplishing the aircraft modification to permit recess mounting the
EFD1000 displays using Aspen Avionics Recess Mounting Kits. Recess mounting of the EFD displays can
be done for cosmetic reasons or for clearance when the flight controls are in the full nose down position.
This data, and the information found in AC 43.13-2B Chapters 1, 2 and 11 normally is sufficient data to
accomplish the modification.

This section contains instructions for preparing the instrument panel to accept the EFD1000/500 in a
recessed mounting. This data is approved for the structural aspects of the instrument panel
modification; however, by itself, it may not be sufficient data to address all aspects of modifying the
instrument panel of an aircraft. These instructions and the data in AC43.13-2B chapters 1, 2 and 11 is
normally sufficient data to complete the modification. In some cases (for example only, if the
instrument panel supporting structure, structural attachments, or a structural instrument panel are
modified) then additional data will be required. In those cases where this data is insufficient then these
instructions, combined with additional data to accommodate individual differences in an aircraft, can be
presented to a Structural DER or Regulatory Authority for approval. If the data package is satisfactory,
the DER or Regulatory Authority will approve the data for use in the modification of the instrument
panel.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 97-367 Revision AC

Once all necessary approved data to accomplish the panel mounting is obtained, and the modification is
accomplished, the EFD1000/500 installation can proceed in accordance with AML STC SA10822SC or
other regulatory approval process.

One Recess Mounting Kit is required for each EFD display.

Qty Part Number Description

1 per EFD 903-00007-001 Recess Mount EFD Installation Kit
6 per EFD MS24693-S24 6-32 x ¼” flat head screw(included in kit)
4 per EFD MS24693-S26 6-32 x 3/8”flat head screw (included in kit). Bracket
to instrument panel attachment.
1 per EFD MS24693-S30 6-32 x ¾” flat head screw (included in kit)
1 per EFD MS21044N06 6-32 Lock Nut

6.8.5.1 Recess Mount Modification Procedure

STEP 1 – Evaluate the Installation and Determine if Sufficient Approved Data is Available to Proceed

Normally, the instructions in this section and in AC43.13-2B Chapters 1, 2 and 11 are sufficient data to
complete the modification. If the data is not sufficient, such as, for example the instrument panel
structural supports are affected or the panel itself provides structural integrity to the airframe, then
additional data must be developed and approved. If additional data is required, collect and prepare the
approved data necessary to substantiate the alteration before modifying the aircraft.

STEP 2 – Plan the Cutouts for the Instrument Panel in Accordance with the Cutout Location Figures Below

Using the dimensions from Figure 6-3 – Single EFD, Figure 6-6 – Dual EFD, or Figure 6-7– Triple EFD as
a guide determine the mounting location of the brackets. Verify that no supporting structure is
compromised. See AC43.13-2B.

STEP 3 – Obtain one Recess Mount Kit for Each Display to be Installed

One Kit is required for each EFD Display.

STEP 4 – Measure and Mark the EFD Cutout and Bracket Mounting Hole Locations

Using the dimensions from – Figure 6-3 Single EFD, Figure 6-6 Dual EFD, or Figure 6-7 Triple EFD as a
guide mark the EFD cutout and four bracket mounting holes per EFD.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 98-367 Revision AC

The clearance notch at the top (see detail “A”) is to permit a tool to be inserted to press the EFD release
mechanism and release the EFD from the mounting bracket.

Figure 6-3 - Single Display Recess Mount Cutout (inches)

STEP 5 – Cut out the EFD hole and Drill Four Mounting Holes per EFD

1) Remove instruments from surrounding area to be cut or remove instrument panel from the
aircraft. Verify nothing is in the way of the cutting tool before making the cut.

2) Cut the display bezel opening and drill four bracket mounting holes (per EFD) 0.144” in diameter
and countersink as required.

3) Remove burrs and break sharp edges on the panel (0.005” – 0.015”).

4) Chemical conversion coat the bare aluminum and primer or paint as required.

Step 6 – Install the Recess Mount Brackets and Hardware

Using Figure 6-4 for reference:

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 99-367 Revision AC

1) Fit the spacers (A) between instrument panel and recess brackets (C) as shown in Figure 6-4,
using four MS24693-S26 6-32 X 3/8 machine screws. The flat head screws from the kit may be
used or pan head screws may be installer supplied if that look is desired. Tighten all four
mounting screws and nuts to 12 in-lbs anchoring the brackets to the panel.

NOTE: Spacers (A) come in a strip of three which can be snapped apart for Single and Dual
display installations. Triple displays will use the spacer in one long piece. The thickness of the
instrument panel will determine how many spacers will be required. Instrument panels that are
1/8” thick should require one spacer while 1/16” panels may require up to four spacers to provide
the desired appearance.

2) Mount EFD Bracket (B) to Recess Brackets (C) using six MS24693-S24 6-32 X ¼ flat head machine
screws.

3) Tighten all six mounting screws and nuts to 12 in-lbs.

Recess Brackets (C)

Spacer (A)
One spacer is shown
for reference (1 to 4
will be required)

EFD Bracket (B)

Figure 6-4 - Single Display Recess Mount Bracket Installation

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 100-367 Revision AC

STEP 7 – Assemble and Attach the EFD Ground Strap

1) Fabricate one 8” bonding strap (per EFD) from braid with ground lugs at each end.

2) Insert a MS24693-S30 6-32 x ¾” flat head machine screw through either an unused threaded
insert or an existing EFD bracket attachment screw (see Figure 6-5). Attach one end of the
ground strap to this screw using a MS21044N06.

Location of 6-32 X ¾”
screw

Figure 6-5 - Ground Strap Attachment Points

STEP 8 – Perform the Structural Load Test on the Bracket Installation

The following test is to structurally substantiate the bracket installation. The applied static test load is
determined using 2.9lbs for each EFD mass. See AC 43.13-2B for additional Structural Data.

Number of Direction of Pull Load Factor Static Test Load

Displays (push on bracket) (load factor x EFD
weight)
1 Forward (toward firewall) 9.0g 9.0 x 2.9 = 26 lbs
2 Forward (toward firewall) 9.0g 9.0 x 5.8 = 52 lbs
3 Forward (toward firewall) 9.0g 9.0 x 8.7 = 78 lbs
Static Load Table

Use a block of wood or piece of aluminum that will cover the EFD bracket(s). This ensures an even force
is applied to the entire set of bracket(s) at once. Place mechanical or digital push/pull gauge against
block and assert the static test load defined in the table above for a minimum of 3 seconds. Ensure
instrument panel and brackets show no signs of permanent deformation.

NOTE: The recessed brackets are TSO’d and meet the meet the sideward, upward, downward, and
forward axis load requirements of the EFD. Therefore only the forward axis is tested above to
substantiate the overall bracket installation.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 101-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-6 – Dual Display Recess Mount Cutout (inches)

Figure 6-7 – Three Display Recess Mount Cutout (inches)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 102-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-8 – Recess Mounting Bracket Dimensions (inches)

Figure 6-9 - EFD Mounting Bracket (inches)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 103-367 Revision AC

6.8.6 EFD Bonding Strap

An 8” or shorter braided bonding strap is required between the screw (below and left of the static
port- see Figure 6-10) on the backside of the EFD to a location on the backside of the instrument
panel using one of the mounting screws and nuts. Each EFD bonding strap must have its own (i.e.
not shared with another EFD) bonding location. Verify ≤ 3 milliohms resistance to airframe ground
at bonding strap connection point.

Figure 6-10 – EFD Bonding Strap Connection

6.8.7 Pitot and Static Connections (EFD1000 only)

NOTE: The EFD1000 system altimeter has not been evaluated for RVSM operations. For EFD1000
installations in RVSM-qualified aircraft, the altitude and airspeed tapes must be locked off in the
Installation Menus. Integration of the EFD1000 static input on RVSM qualified aircraft is beyond
the scope of this STC and requires separate approval.

Pitot and Static connections are made to the EFD1000 via two keyed quick connect fittings. These
connections will typically require a “T fitting” to be installed in-line with the existing altimeter and
airspeed indicators.

The quick connectors are keyed such that they cannot be interchanged. Once the correct quick
connector is fastened to the pitot and static lines, they cannot be inadvertently swapped on the
rear of the EFD unit.

Installations that include an EFD1000 MFD require that there be an alternate static valve accessible
to the pilot while seated in the normal position. Installation of an alternate static valve is outside
the scope of the EFD1000 STC.

If the aircraft has dual pitot and/or static systems then connect the PFD to one system and the
EFD1000 MFD (if installed) to the other independent pitot and/or static system.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 104-367 Revision AC

NOTE: The pitot quick connector will fit on the EFD static port but the static quick
connector cannot be inadvertently connected to the EFD pitot port due to
the keying.

Each connector has a barbed fitting that accepts a 3/16” hose.

Figure 6-11 - Pitot & Static Quick Connector

6.8.8 Quick Connector Installation

1) Insert “T” fitting into existing aircraft Pitot line and secure with the supplied hose clamp
(see Figure 6-12).
2) Connect a length of pitot line tubing between the “T” fitting and the “P” quick connector.
Verify the length of tubing can be installed with no drip loop and that it can be secured
away from flight controls. Secure each end with the supplied hose clamps.
3) Insert “T” fitting into existing aircraft Static line and secure with the supplied hose clamp
(see Figure 6-12).
4) Connect a length of static line tubing between the “T” fitting and the “S” quick connector.
Verify the length of tubing can be installed with no drip loop and that it can be secured
away from flight controls. Secure each end with the supplied hose clamps.
5) Secure pitot and static lines as necessary to prevent interference with other aircraft
structures and components and to prevent them from kinking when the EFD is slid in to
place.

CAUTION: Secure pitot and static lines so that they will not interfere with flight controls and are not
at risk of mechanical damage. The lines can soften when the EFD warms and should be secured in a way
that prevents the line from kinking.

PITOT QUICK “T” FITTING SPLICE INTO PITOT LINE

EFD1000 CONNECTOR
P/N 275-00001-002
(KEYED – Yellow Band)

PITOT
PITOT

3/16” ID TUBING

HOSE CLAMP

STATIC

3/16” ID TUBING
STATIC QUICK
CONNECTOR
P/N 275-00001-001
“T” FITTING SPLICE INTO STATIC LINE

Figure 6-12 – Pitot & Static Line Connections

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 105-367 Revision AC

6.8.9 Leak Check Requirements

A pitot static leak check is required after the installation of the quick connectors and the EFD1000 is
installed. The quick connectors are designed such that they seal when disconnected.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 106-367 Revision AC

6.9 RSM Installation

CAUTION: The RSM is an integral part of the attitude function of the AHRS. A stable and
magnetically quiet location for the RSM is essential for proper AHRS operation.

CAUTION: There are special considerations for mounting the RSM on composite, fabric and
pressurized aircraft. See sections 6.9.5and 6.9.6.

There are three versions of RSM available for mounting in different orientations. The –001 version
includes an internal emergency use GPS and is generally for external top mounting, although may
also be internally mounted. The –002 version does not include the internal GPS and is for external or
internal mounting in a top-mounted orientation. The –003 version also does not include the internal
GPS and is for external or internal mounting in a bottom-mounted orientation.

NOTE: If all RSM are mounted internally (and no remote OAT connection to ACU2) the OAT
sensor must be disabled which will result in no TAS and wind display. If the RSM is
mounted on the bottom, or internally mounted in an aluminum aircraft, then the
emergency GPS sensor will be disabled, but can be inter-communicated from a RSM that
is receiving GPS through configuration.

The RSM includes magnetic flux sensors which is why it is important to locate the RSM as far away
from the cabin and baggage (or “hat rack”) compartment as practical as these areas may have varying
magnetic fields (baggage, passengers, etc.).

The RSM should not be mounted within 18 inches of a VHF Comm antenna, 6 inches of a GPS or ELT
antenna, or within 12 inches of an active traffic antenna or DME antenna.

The RSM should be mounted to a relatively flat surface such that there is less than .030” gap
surrounding the RSM when installed. The RSM must not be mounted to an excessively curved area
that could deform the RSM or aircraft skin.

The RSM must not be mounted within a composite fairing such as a fiberglass wingtip cover, or
vertical fin cover as these do not protect against direct lightning effects.

6.9.1 RSM External Top Mounting

See Figure 6-13. The RSM is typically installed near the tail of the aircraft on an unpressurized
portion of the airframe. To take advantage of the OAT sensor and internal GPS (-001 only) the
RSM must be mounted on the top outside of the airframe. Any RSM may be mounted internally if
an outside location is impractical. Whenever an RSM is internally mounted, the OAT must be
configured “off” and the internal GPS (-001 only) may need to be disabled if GPS signal reception is
problematic.

For a top external mount the preferred RSM installation area is a minimum of 12 inches behind a
typical baggage or (hat rack) compartment to no closer than 39” from the end of the fuselage. The

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 107-367 Revision AC

“Less Preferred” areas over the cabin should only be selected if impossible to find an acceptable
location within the “Preferred” area of Figure 6-13.

Unlike a GPS antenna that is used for primary navigation, the backup GPS usage and inherent
sensitivity do not require a full view of the sky. Therefore, the vertical stabilizer may partially
mask the antennas view of the sky/horizon. Installation on either side of the vertical fin is
acceptable.

When externally mounted, the NO ZONE areas are hot zones for a lightning strike and are not to be
used for mounting the RSM. The RSM must not be mounted externally to the wing, the top of the
vertical stabilizer, the horizontal stabilizer, the fuselage forward of the cabin, or within 39” of the
tail as measured from the fuselage aft end as shown.

If it is impossible to find a suitable external mounting location in the preferred area, and internal
mounting is not possible, it may be permissible to mount the RSM above the cabin. A location will
need to be found that is a minimum of 18 inches from any small cabin speakers or electronic
device that can cause compass fluctuations. Large cabin speakers may cause RSM interference at
distances up to 3 feet. Use the procedure in Section 6.9.4 to locate a quiet area. During operation
of the electrical systems, concentrate on those devices that are in the cabin and within the
headliner. Be aware that headsets and other items worn by and operated by the flight crew and
passengers could potentially interfere with the RSM. Typically this would be when the headset is
within 12” of the RSM location. Find a location that cannot be affected by passenger and flight
crew headsets while seated or moving about the cabin.

6.9.2 RSM Internal Mounting

With software version 2.X it is also possible to internally mount the RSM within an area of the
aircraft fuselage or wing structure that is magnetically benign. For aluminum aircraft, the RSM
may be mounted anywhere inside the aluminum structure.

For composite or fabric covered aircraft, the RSM must not be mounted forward of the windscreen,
or within 39” of the aft end of the fuselage. It may be mounted within the wing but no closer than
39” of the wingtip. It must not be mounted within the horizontal stabilizer, or within the vertical
stabilizer. See Figure 6-14.

NOTE: If internally mounting the RSM a mounting plate must be locally fabricated and approved
separately. All mounting instructions for a magnetically quiet location still apply.

6.9.3 RSM External Bottom Mounting

See Figure 6-15. The–003 version of the RSM is designed for external bottom mounting. This
version may be mounted to any magnetically quiet area on the underside of the fuselage.
Mounting this RSM to the underside of an aerodynamic surface, such as the wing or the horizontal
stabilizer is not approved. Any location that results in the OAT sensor becoming heated from
engine exhaust requires that the OAT sensor be disabled in configuration menus.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 108-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-13 - RSM-External Mounting Locations (Top/Side View) – all aircraft types

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 109-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-14 - RSM Internal Mounting Locations – Composite/Fabric Aircraft

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 110-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-15 - RSM-003 External Mounting Locations (Bottom view)

6.9.4 Proposed RSM Location Check

The installer must determine the best RSM location given the above factors. A navigation quality
handheld compass (i.e., hiking compass) can be used to find a magnetically quiet area free from
the effects of magnetic disturbances from flight controls, autopilot servos, strobes, or any other
large magnetic field appliance.

The RSM can detect magnetic fields in three dimensions. This means that magnetic influences
below the RSM can also affect performance. Be sure to evaluate potential magnetic influences
above and below the RSM.

NOTE: Changes to the magnetic field around the RSM can affect the RSM calibration and require
revalidation of the RSM performance.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 111-367 Revision AC

Known sources of interference include (but are not limited to) the following types of material
located near the RSM (normally, these materials within 12 inches can cause interference):

• Steel-wound hose or ducting

• Steel hose clamps
• Magnetized or magnetic hardware
• Servos
• Trim motors
• Poor bonding of electrical connections
• Blower motors

Place a small handheld compass in the proposed RSM mounting location and move the compass
around the location looking for needle deflection. There should be no more than 2º of compass
needle movement within an area 18” x 18”x 18” around the proposed location. Should the
compass show excessive needle movement it would be required to find a new location or, if
feasible, treat the affected area with a degaussing coil. Contact Aspen Avionics product support
for information on obtaining or using a handheld degaussing coil. A degaussing coil can be
purchased at most audio and video stores.

Operate flight controls from stop to stop and verify no more than 2º of compass needle
movement. Should the compass show excessive needle movement it would be required to find a
new location or degauss the flight control cables and or flight control hardware.

Operate all electrical systems. The compass needle should not deflect more than 2 degrees during
testing.

If a location cannot be found with less than 2 degrees of deflection then the electrical device
causing the interference will need to be determined. The device causing the interference may
need to be re-bonded or the wiring may need to be relocated.

If the compass does not show any deflection from electrical or mechanical sources then that
location should be acceptable to mount the RSM.

6.9.5 Pressurized Aircraft

On pressurized aircraft it will be necessary for the RSM wiring to penetrate the aircraft pressure
vessel. The installer is responsible for obtaining proper documentation and FAA approvals from
either the airframe manufacturer or from a DER or FAA field office for any penetrations of the
pressure vessel or bulkhead.

CAUTION: Penetration of the pressure vessel is not approved under this STC and will require
separate approval.

CAUTION: Mounting the RSM on the pressure vessel is beyond the scope of this STC and
requires separate approval.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 112-367 Revision AC

6.9.6 RSM Mounting on Non-Metal or Damage-Tolerant Design Aircraft

Approval for the structural aspects of mounting the RSM to a composite or fabric skinned aircraft,
including consideration for the direct effects of lightning, is beyond the scope of the EFD1000 AML
STC. Separate FAA approval for structural and lightning direct effects considerations is required
before mounting the RSM on these aircraft types.

RSM installation on aircraft certified to 14CFR Part 23 Amendment 23-48 or later (such as the
Gippsland GA-8) must be evaluated for damage tolerance if the RSM is to be located on the wing,
empennage or associated structure. Therefore the installation of the RSM on the wing, empennage
or associated structure of these aircraft is beyond the scope of this manual and requires separate
approval.

The installation information for the RSM in this manual is satisfactory to meet the requirements for
the direct effects of lightning for all metal aircraft.

It is not possible to determine the lightning direct effects on equipment mounted internally in
composite and fabric aircraft. Therefore, the only acceptable areas for RSM internal mounting are
shown in Figure 6-14. The same bonding requirements for an external mounting must be
adhered to.

Though separate approval must be obtained for the RSM structural and, in the case of fabric and
composite aircraft, lightning direct effects; installation of the remaining EFD1000 system
components is approved under the EFD1000 AML-STC. This includes HIRF and lightning induced
transient susceptibility approval of the EFD1000 system installation (i.e. display, RSM, CM, ACU,
and associated wiring).

Each RSM harness shield must have its own (i.e. not shared with another RSM) bonding location.

6.9.7 Second RSM Placement (MFD1000)

Use the EFD1000 MFD’s RSM mounting limitations in Section 6.5.3.

6.9.8 RSM Mounting Angles

For RSM mounting the following maximum mounting angles apply.

NOTE - For aircraft operating in the latitudes above 55N or in the southern forth of Australia it is
recommended that the RSM mounting angles be at 5 degrees or less.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 113-367 Revision AC

6.9.8.1 Longitudinal Axis

Figure 6-16 – RSM Top View longitudinal Alignment

6.9.8.2 Pitch Axis

Maximum fore and aft tilt is in relation to the aircraft waterline. An aluminum shim might be
required to keep orientation within limits (see Section 6.9.12 for shim fabrication).

Figure 6-17 – RSM Fore or Aft Max Tilt

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 114-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-18 – RSM Fore or Aft Max Tilt (Shim installed)

6.9.8.3 Roll Axis

Maximum side-to-side tilt is 10 degrees in relation to wings level. An aluminum shim might be
required to keep orientation within limits (see Section 6.9.12 for shim fabrication).

Figure 6-19 – RSM Side to Side Max Tilt

Figure 6-20 – RSM Side to Side Max Tilt (Shim installed)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 115-367 Revision AC

6.9.9 RSM External Mount – Aluminum Skin

This STC approves the use of the doubler shown in Figure 6-21 for Aluminum Skinned aircraft
only. Mounting the RSM to a composite or fabric aircraft is not approved by this STC and will
require that the installer obtain separate approval of the RSM mounting on these classes of
aircraft. After the RSM mounting has been approved, this STC may be subsequently installed.

The doubler may be purchased from Aspen under P/N 503-00015-001 or may be installer
fabricated using the dimensions and rivet holes as shown. Should the installer wish to deviate
from this doubler in size, rivet count, rivet spacing, or doubler thickness, they are required to seek
separate approval.

6.9.9.1 RSM Doubler Fabrication

• Determine the thickness of the aircraft skin.

• For aircraft skins 0.050” thick and less the doubler should be made from 0.050” material
or optionally Aspen P/N 503-00015-001 doubler may be used. For aircraft skins
thicker than 0.050 the doubler should be made from material the same thickness as the
aircraft skin.

Figure 6-21 – RSM Doubler P/N 503-00015-001

• Fabricate the doubler from 2024-T3 AMS-QQ-A-250/5 to the dimensions in Figure

6-21, Tolerances ± 0.030.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 116-367 Revision AC

NOTE – The tab for the RSM shield ground lug connection may be bent as shown or the
entire forward edge may be extended and bent down as a tab.

• Remove burrs and break sharp edges (0.005” – 0.015”).

• Finish with Alumiprep Etch and Alodine Conversion Coating.

• Mask around the four (4) mounting holes the diameter of the mounting washers or 1/2"
on the down side of the doubler (see Figure 6-22). Prime that side with epoxy primer
per MIL-P-23377. Do not prime the side that faces the aircraft skin. This allows for a
doubler to aircraft skin bond and mounting washer to doubler bond.

• Mark forward direction on doubler because pattern is not symmetrical.

• Using the doubler as a template match drill holes in aircraft fuselage at location
determined from Section 6.9.4. Doubler must be aligned to the longitudinal axis of the
aircraft to within ±4º (see Figure 6-16).

Figure 6-22 - Masking of Doubler

• Remove burrs and break sharp edges on the aircraft skin (0.005” – 0.015”)

• Burnish the aircraft skin on the inner surface in the area where the doubler will mount.
Apply Alodine 1201 and do not prime.

• The doubler is attached to the inside surface of the aircraft skin with solid rivets.

• For aircraft skin less than 0.032 thick install with MS20470AD4 protruding head rivets.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 117-367 Revision AC

• For aircraft skin thickness of 0.032 install with NAS1097AD4 rivets flush in the fuselage
skin. Carefully control the countersink depth to not knife-edge the fuselage skin.

• For aircraft skin thicknesses 0.040 to 0.050 install with NAS1097AD4 rivets flush in the
fuselage skin.
• For aircraft skins 0.063 or thicker install with NAS1097AD5 rivets flush in the fuselage
skin.

Figure 6-23 - Doubler Installation

6.9.10 RSM Internal Mount

The installer must use a suitable existing shelf or fabricate a suitable mounting bracket for
internally mounting the RSM. Use AC43.13-2B Chapter 1 for additional structural data.

6.9.11 RSM Installation

CAUTION: Do not use a magnetic tipped or electric screwdriver to mount the RSM as this may
magnetize the RSM and cause heading errors.

CAUTION: For installations made under revision J or later of the Installation manual, only non-
ferrous mounting hardware can be used (i.e., screws, nuts, washers, nutplates) to mount the RSM.
Use of any ferrous hardware may cause compass errors. The supplied Brass hardware should be
used.

NOTE: The RSM contains a sensitive magnetometer. Nearby ferrous components or hardware
can magnetize the RSM and/or cause erroneous indications.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 118-367 Revision AC

1) It is not required to remove aircraft surface paint below RSM unless an aluminum shim was
required on extreme mounting angles. The shim must be bonded to the fuselage. Bonding
of RSM is through four (4) mounting screws to doubler.

2) Install ring terminal to RSM shield ground wire.

3) Install RSM on aircraft and secure using four (4) screws, four (4) washers, and four (4) nuts
as identified below. Installer may substitute non-ferrous nut plates for washers and nuts
provided the nutplates are attached to the doubler only and not the aircraft skin.

Description
8-32 Brass screw 1¼” MS35214-47
Brass locking nuts MS21044B08 (formerly AN365-B832)
Brass Washer NAS1149B0832H (formerly AN960-B8)
Figure 6-24 - RSM Mounting Hardware

4) Torque hardware to 12-15 in-lbs. Do not over-torque the hardware as it may cause the
RSM housing to crack.

5) Attach ring terminal to ground stud on RSM doubler tab.

6) Apply a bead of non-corrosive sealant around the RSM and over each mounting screw.

Figure 6-25– RSM Mounting

6.9.12 RSM Shim Fabrication (if necessary)

If the RSM exceeds the mounting limits of Section 6.9.8 a shim will be required.

Fabricate a shim with the dimensions of the RSM baseplate. Optionally the shim can be made
square and slightly larger than the RSM baseplate for ease of construction (see Figure 6-26).

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 119-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-26 – Example Shim Top View

The shim must not exceed the minimum and maximum thickness as shown in Figure 6-27. Use of
a thicker shim is acceptable but not approved under this STC. A thicker shim will require a local
approval.

Figure 6-27 – Example Shim Side View

1) Use RSM doubler as a template to mark shim stock.

2) Fabricate shim from 2024-T3 aluminum with the four (4) mounting holes and 0.625” cable
pass-thru drilled through.

3) Remove burrs and break sharp edges (0.005” – 0.015”)

4) Finish with Alumiprep Etch and Alodine Conversion Coating.

5) Mask off top side of shim 1/4” inside mounting surface of RSM and mask off a similar area
on the bottom so that these areas remain Alodine only (see Figure 6-28). Prime unmasked
areas with epoxy primer per MIL-P-23377. Paint to match aircraft color if desired.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 120-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-28 – Masking of Shim for Priming

6) The shim must be bonded to the aircraft skin by removing the paint and prepping the
aircraft surface where the shim and RSM will be mounted. Remove paint ½” inside the
outer footprint of the RSM mounting location. Burnish the aircraft skin and apply Alodine
1201, do not prime.

7) Sandwich the shim between the aircraft skin and the RSM following the RSM installation
procedure in Section 6.9.8.

8) Apply non-corrosive sealant around shim and RSM.

6.10 ACU/ACU2 Installation

The ACU/ACU2 has no user interface, and therefore can be remote mounted. The optimum mounting
location is an area that minimizes wire runs to interfacing equipment. This typically means near the
autopilot computer if installed.

When mounting the ACU/ACU2 find a location in the aircraft of known load carrying capabilities such
as:
• Existing Avionics Shelf
• Baggage compartment
• Radio Rack
• Cockpit Floor

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 121-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-29 – ACU/ACU2 Mount to Flat Metal Shelf

6.10.1 ACU/ACU2 Mounting

Mount the ACU to existing shelf in any orientation using six (6) MS35206 #8-32 screws, six (6)
NAS1149FN832P washers, and six (6) MS21044N08 #8-32 self-locking nuts. Tighten nuts to 12
in-lbs.

Installation of the ACU/ACU2 must be in accordance with AC43.13-2B, Chapter1 Paragraphs 100
to 114, pages 1 to 8. An unpainted surface of the ACU case must be bonded to aircraft ground
either through mounting to a metal shelf or with an installer fabricated bonding strap of wire braid
or single stranded wire no more than 12 inches in length. Attach ground lug of bonding strap to
one of the mounting screws if required. Refer to AC 43.13-1B paragraphs 11-187 to 11-190,
pages 11-73 to 11-79 for additional bonding information.

Verify ACU case to airframe ground has ≤ 3 milliohms of resistance.

Should a shelf or bracket need to be fabricated in order to install the ACU it is beyond the scope of
this STC and will require separate FAA approval for that modification.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 122-367 Revision AC

1 19
20 37
1 13 1 8
14 25 9 15

Figure 6-30– ACU Dimensions (inches)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 123-367 Revision AC

Figure 6-31 – ACU2 Dimensions (inches)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 124-367 Revision AC

6.11 Configuration Module Installation

The Configuration Module will be cable tied to the PFD wire harness. Leave just enough slack in the
cable ties so that the configuration module can slide along the PFD cable. This will prevent strain on
the configuration module connector while the PFD harness is manipulated during installation and
subsequent removal/replacement.

Figure 6-32 – Configuration Module Dimensions (inches)

Cable Tie two (2) places

Figure 6-33 – Configuration Module Tie Wrapped to Harness

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 125-367 Revision AC

6.12 EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery Installation

The EBB58 has no user interface so it can be remote mounted. A location within the cabin will need to
be selected so that it can be securely mounted and still be close enough to the EFD1000 MFD to fall
within the maximum cable length. It should not be mounted where the occupants can disturb it.

The EBB58 must be mounted within the temperature-controlled part of the aircraft. It must not be
mounted to the firewall. The battery warms during operation and therefore should not be mounted
under a seat.

The installer must use an existing shelf with suitable load carrying capabilities or fabricate a suitable
mounting bracket for mounting the EBB58. Use AC43.13-2B Chapter 1 for additional structural data.

Figure 6-34 - EBB58 Mounting Bracket Installation

6.12.1 EBB58 Mounting

Secure EBB58 bracket to existing structure or fabricated bracket using four (4) MS35206 #6-32
screws, four (4) NAS1149FN632P washers, and four (4) MS21044N06 #6-32 self locking nuts.
Tighten nuts to 12 in-lbs.

Install the EBB58 in the rack so that the rear tab is properly retained and the spring clips are fully
seated.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 126-367 Revision AC

NOTE: If the spring clip(s) are sprung so the pins do not fully seat, the mounting bracket must
be replaced.

Figure 6-35 - EBB58 Attachment locations

6.13 Sonalert Installation

The Sonalert must be mounted in a location so that it is audible to the pilot while wearing a
headset during in flight conditions. Acceptable locations are above the pilot’s head, on the
instrument panel, on the glare shield facing upward, or in another location that will assure that the
warning is audible while wearing a headset.

Figure 6-36 - Sonalert Mounting Instructions

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 127-367 Revision AC

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 128-367 Revision AC

7 Electrical Installation

7.1 Electrical Load Analysis

Perform an electrical load analysis to verify the aircraft complies with FAR 23.1351(a) using the
current draw of each installed component as determined from Table 7-1 below.

Component Current Draw (amps)

EFD1000 2.4 nominal @ 28Vdc

4.8 nominal @ 14Vdc
EFD500 0.8 nominal @ 28Vdc
1.6 nominal @ 14Vdc
RSM – Remote Sensor Module Current Draw
included in EFD1000
ACU – Analog Converter Unit 0.5 nominal @28Vdc
1.0 nominal @ 14Vdc
ACU2 – Analog Converter Unit 2 0.5 nominal @ 28Vdc
1.0 nominal @ 14Vdc
Configuration Module Current draw
included in EFD1000
Table 7-1 – Current Draw

7.2 Electrical Installation

7.2.1 EFD1000 PFD

A dedicated 7.5 amp pull type circuit breaker and switch or breaker/switch combination for the
EFD1000 PFD must be installed in a location accessible to the pilot while seated. The breaker will
be powered from the switched battery or essential bus. Label the switch and/or breaker “EFD1000
PFD.” Note – the switch may be labeled “PFD” in a PFD only configuration. The switch must be rated
for at least 7.5 amps continuous duty. Record the location of circuit breaker and switch on Figure
3 of Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-001, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

7.2.2 EFD1000 MFD

A dedicated 7.5 amp pull type circuit breaker and separate switch or breaker/switch combination
for the EFD1000 MFD must be installed in a location accessible to the pilot while seated. The
breaker will be powered by the switched battery or essential bus. Label the switch and/or breaker
“EFD1000 MFD.” Note - The switch must be rated for at least 7.5 amps continuous duty. Record
the location of circuit breaker and switch on Figure 3 of Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-
001, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

If the aircraft has independent electrical systems then the PFD will be connected to one bus and
the MFD must be connected to the other independent bus.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 129-367 Revision AC

7.2.3 EFD500 MFD

A dedicated 5A to 7.5A pull type circuit breaker and separate switch or breaker/switch
combination for the EFD500 MFD must be installed in a location accessible to the pilot while
seated. The breaker will be powered by the switched battery or essential bus. Label the switch
and/or breaker “EFD500 MFD”. The switch must be rated for at least 5 amps continuous duty. The
EFD500 MFD must have its own independent switch. Record the location of circuit breaker and
switch on Figure 3 of Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-001, Instructions for Continued
Airworthiness.

Figure 7-1 - EFD1000 PFD/EFD1000 MFD/EFD500MFD Switches

7.2.4 ACU or ACU2 (optional)

A two (2)-amp pull type circuit breaker for the ACU/ACU2 must be installed in a location
accessible to the pilot while seated. Wire the power source from the avionics bus (switched battery
bus if no avionics bus exists). The breaker is to be labeled “ACU” or “ACU #1” in a dual ACU
installation. If a second ACU is installed it will require its own two (2) amp breaker labeled “ACU
#2”. Record the location of circuit breaker(s) on Figure 3 of Aspen Avionics document #900-
00012-001, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

7.2.5 EBB58 (optional)

The EBB58 connects via a prefabricated harness to the back of the EFD1000 MFD (P/N 910-00001-
002 only). A “Locking Toggle” switch rated for at least 0.5A continuous duty must be installed in a
location accessible to the pilot while seated. The switch must be labeled “EBB EMER DISC” and have
a “DISC” and “NORM” position. The NORM position is when the switch is in the open position. The
switch will be connected to the EBB D-sub connector as shown in Figure 7.5. Record the location of
the switch on Figure 3 of Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-001, Instructions for Continued
Airworthiness.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 130-367 Revision AC

Figure 7-2 - EBB58 Switch

7.2.6 Miscellaneous Wiring

Use of MIL-C-27500 shielded wire and MIL-W-22759 single conductor wire is recommended. All
wires should be fabricated as shown in Section 9 keeping all grounds as short as possible.

Wires and connectors must be clearly marked per FAR 23.1365(d).

Wires and wiring bundles must be secured in such a way to eliminate risk of mechanical damage
and minimize exposure to heat and fluids per FAR 23.1365(e).

7.2.7 HIRF/Lightning Requirements

In order to meet HIRF and Lightning requirements it is required that the following cable runs use
either an over braid applied during fabrication or double shielded wires. The over braid or double
shield must extend within the back shell and must be grounded at both ends.

All ARINC 429 and RS-232 wiring into or out of the EFD require either a double-shielded wire or a
tinned copper over braid be applied over the twisted shielded pair. See Figure 7-3 below and
NOTE 1 on Wiring Diagrams 9-4 through 9-14.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 131-367 Revision AC

Over Braid or
Double Shield 1

GPS1
Twisted Shielded Pair or Pairs* RS-232 or A429

Over Braid or 1
Double Shield

Twisted Shielded Pair or Pairs* GPS2

RS-232 or A429

PFD
*Twisted Shielded Pair or Pairs = all shielded
wires as shown on Wiring Diagrams in Section 9.
This may be one, two, or three sets of twisted
shielded pair. Over braid installed over top.

Over Braid or
Double Shield 1

ACU
Twisted Shielded Pair or Pairs* A429 PFD to ACU only

ACU to Analog GPS,

ACU to Analog VLOC, and
ACU to Autopilot do not require over
1 Tinned copper over braid or doubled shielded wires are braid.
required on the following inputs and outputs. Wire as shown on Wiring Diagrams in
Section 9.

Figure 7-3 – Over Braid/ Double Shield Requirements

The following wires require single shields to comply with HIRF and Lightning requirements:

• Aircraft power to the EFD requires a single stranded shielded wire from circuit
breaker to EFD. See Figure 9-1.
• The discrete output from the EFD to the Sonalert (or relay) and the power wire
from circuit breaker to Sonalert (or relay) require a single stranded shielded
wire. See Figure 9-1.
• EFD to Configuration Module comes as an assembly with color coded wires and
uses an over braid over non-shielded single conductor wires.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 132-367 Revision AC

EFD1000 to RSM wiring does not require the over braid or double shield, only what is specified in
Section7.2.9.

ACU to GPS, ACU to VLOC receiver, and ACU to autopilot require no additional shielding just what
is specified in the wiring diagrams of Section 9.

7.2.8 EFD to GPS/VLOC/ACU Wiring

Use tinned copper over braid or double-shielded wires on all ARINC 429 and RS-232 wires
entering or exiting the EFD back shell. Ground the over braid and wire shields within the back
shell. If using double shielded wire it may be difficult to terminate all shields within the back shell.
If this is the case then use a piece of tinned copper over braid that extends at least 6 inches
outside the back shell to cover all unshielded wires (see Figure 7-4).

Figure 7-4– EFD Back Shell Grounds

At the GPS/VLOC/ACU terminate the over braid within the back shell or as close as possible.
Ground the over braid at this end using a pigtail as short as possible. If using double shielded
wires then ground both shields at the GPS/VLOC/ACU with pigtail as short as possible.

7.2.9 RSM Wiring

The EFD1000 to RSM wiring run is made with a single cable seven (7) conductor shielded wire.
M27500-A24SD7T23 or M27500-22TG7T14 seven (7) conductor shielded cable can be used.
Cable runs longer than 35ft are not recommended.

Ensure that a trap or drip loop is provided to prevent fluids or condensed moisture from running
into wires and cables dressed downward to a connector, terminal block, panel, or junction box.
See AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 133-367 Revision AC

7.2.9.1 Assembly using Aspen P/N A-08-148-00-A or 412-00005-001 30ft cable

This cable assembly is prefabricated with the following wire color markings and will be cut to
length at the EFD1000.

Pin 1 ………… White/Black

Pin 2 ………… White/Red
Pin 3 ………… White/Orange
Pin 4 ………… White/Yellow
Pin 5 ………… White/Green
Pin 6 ………… White/Blue
Pin 7 ………… White

7.2.9.2 Assembly using M27500-A24SD7T23 Cable:

Terminate the aircraft side of the RSM wiring with the Hirose circular connector from installation
kit as shown in Figure 7-5below. Due to the compact design of the Hirose connector it may be
easier to solder the wires to the solder cups on the bench versus inside the tail of the aircraft.
Use a fine tip soldering iron for this procedure.

1) Pass the cable through the hood and metal cover. Strip back the insulation to expose
the shielding and wires with the dimensions that are shown.
2) Stake the metal clamper to the shield in the location shown. A hexagonal crimper such
as the ones used for BNC Coax connector assembly work can be used to crimp it to
approximately 5.2mm outside diameter.
3) Assemble the two pieces of the connector such that the ring retains the solder cup
piece. Discard the washer as it is not required.
4) Solder the seven (7) 24 AWG wires to the connector.
5) Thread metal cover onto connector.
6) Insert screw into metal cover so that it indents into metal clamper.
7) Put hood over metal cover.

Figure 7-5 – RSM Connector assembly

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 134-367 Revision AC

CAUTION: Do not run RSM wiring near high current devices such as strobes and air
conditioners and avoid running RSM wiring in same wire bundle as strobe
and air conditioning wiring bundles if at all practical.

7.2.9.3 EFD END

Terminate the shield at the PFD end inside the back shell. Attach pigtail ground wire to shield
and connect to ground screw as shown in Figure.

Figure 7-6 – EFD Back Shell Grounds/RSM

7.2.10 Configuration Module Wiring

The Configuration Module (CM) connector comes as an assembly with color-coded wires within an
over braid. The wires are inserted into the appropriate pins as shown in Figure 9-1. The green
wire with ground lug is attached to back shell.

PFD Pin Color CM Pin

41 Black 1
42 Brown 2
43 Orange 4
44 Red 3
-- Green 5
Table 7.2 – CM Wiring

7.2.11 ACU Wiring

Wire the ACU as shown in Section 9 keeping all grounds as short as possible. No additional HIRF
shielding is required. The ACU case must be grounded to airframe ground for proper operation.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 135-367 Revision AC

7.2.12 Back Up NAV Indicator Wiring

Wire the NAV indicator as shown in Figures 9-24, 9-25, and 9-26. Do not parallel more than one
NAV Indicator to each ACU. When paralleling the wiring make the splice is as close to the
navigation receiver as practical. Do not splice the connection at the back of the NAV indicator.

7.2.13 Autopilot Wiring

Wire the autopilot to ACU as shown in Section 9. Remove any existing connections and switching
between GPS and NAV receivers to autopilot. Only ARINC 429 wiring may remain between the GPS
and autopilot for NAV mode GPSS. The ACU will perform all switching functions to autopilot for
GPS1, GPS2, NAV1, and NAV2.

7.2.14 EBB58 Wiring

The EBB58 Wiring harness comes prefabricated with connectors both at the battery and the MFD
end. The twisted pair for the Emergency Battery Disconnect switch should be cut to length and
connected across the required SPST locking toggle type emergency battery disconnect switch.
Optionally a SPST switch and integral guard may be installed in place of the locking toggle switch.
The guard would be installed so the switch is normally open. When the guard is lifted and the
switch is enabled, the switch will close, disconnecting the relay in the EBB. The shield is not
grounded at the switch end.

The switch must be installed in a position so that is accessible to the pilot while seated. Be sure
the switch guard can remain open so the guard does not return to the resting position and
inadvertently open the switch.

NOTE: When in the DISC position, the EBB Emergency Disconnect switch energizes a relay
powered by the EBB. Thus, when the switch is in the DISC position, the Emergency battery
will gradually discharge through the relay.

Plug prefabricated wiring harness in to EBB58 and secure the connector by tightening the
jackscrews. Connect the other end to the back of the EFD1000 MFD (P/N 910-00001-002 only)
and secure the connector by tightening the jackscrews. The EBB battery cable must be routed
separately from the MFD main power wiring and the PFD RSM wiring.

CAUTION: The EBB harness connector at the MFD1000 end has 3 symmetrical contacts and it can
inadvertently be plugged in upside down. Make sure the label on the backshell marked “TOP” is
facing up or damage to the MFD and EBB could occur.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 136-367 Revision AC

Figure 7-7 - EBB Wiring Harness Switch Connections

Figure 7-8 - EBB EMER DISC switch labeling

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 137-367 Revision AC

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 138-367 Revision AC

8 Electrical Connections
8.1 EFD Electrical Specifications

8.1.1 Power Input

Nominal Input: ………………………… 14Vdc or 28Vdc

Operating Range: ……………………… 9Vdc to 32Vdc (Note: Input power must transition >11VDC
to turn on the unit)

8.1.2 Tone (PFD)/Reversion (MFD) Output

Active on: ………………………………… Ground

Inactive off: ……………………………… Open
Load Current: …………………………… 100ma maximum

8.1.3 RS-232 GPS Input

Data is accepted in packets coded in the industry standard "avionics" format at a baud rate of
9600, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. Packets are accepted at approximately 1 Hz.

In Software version 2.X the following GPS configuration options are available in the Installation
menu:
• GPS TYPE 1 – KLN94 and KLN90B Standard RS-232 configuration.
• GPS TYPE 2 – KLN94 Enhanced configuration. Allows the KLN94 to be configured
for Enhanced RS-232. Curved flight paths can be displayed.
• GPS TYPE 3 – GX-50/55/60/65 configuration.

8.1.4 RS232 ADC Output

The EFD1000 Display outputs the following computed air data output signals over the RS-232 bus
in Format Z (Shadin) (ADC TYPE 1) and Format C (Bendix King) (ADC TYPE 2):

Label ADC TYPE 1 ADC TYPE 2

True Air Speed X X
Indicated Air Speed X X
Pressure Altitude X X
Outside Air Temp (OAT) X
Wind Direction X X
Wind Speed X X
Rate of Turn X
Vertical Speed X X
Heading Data X X

Table 8-1 – RS232 ADC Outputs

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 139-367 Revision AC

8.1.5 ARINC 429 GPS Inputs

The EFD receives the following labels on pins (16, 17) and (20, 21) when transmitted
from a GPS receiver. ARINC 429 word definitions are implemented per GAMA Pub 11. The GPS
input ports can be configured either HIGH or LOW.

ARINC Label(s) EFD Parameter

074 Data Record Header
075, bit 9 set OBS/HOLD Mode
075, bit 9 not set Auto Course Select
Label 100, bits CDI Select (GPS) [GNAV installation only]
13(0) and 12(1)
Label 100, bits CDI Select (VLOC) [GNAV installation only]
13(1) and 12(0)
Label 114 GPS “Desired Track”
Label 115 GPS “Waypoint Bearing”
Label 116 GPS “Crosstrack”
Label 117 GPS “Vertical Deviation”
Label 147 GPS “Magnetic Variation”
Label 121 GPS “Horizontal Command”
Label 251 GPS “Distance to Go”
Label 252 GPS “Time to Go”
Label 261G, bits GPS “ENROUTE”
25 (0), 26(0),
27(0)
Label 261G, bits GPS “ TERMINAL”
25(1), 26(0),
27(0)
Label 261G, bits GPS “APPR Active”
25(0), 26(1),
27(0)
Label 275, bit 23 GPS “TO” Flag
Label 275, bit 24 GPS “FROM” Flag
Label 275, bit 11 GPS “WPT ALERT”
set
Label 275, bit 22 GPS “INTEGRITY”
set
Label 275, bit 27 GPS “MSG ALERT”
set
Label 300 GPS “Mag. Station Decl, Wpt Type, Class
Label 303 GPS “Message Length, Type, Number
Label 304 GPS “Message Characters 1-3”

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 140-367 Revision AC

ARINC Label(s) EFD Parameter

Label 305 GPS “Message Characters 4-6”
Label 306 GPS NAV Waypoint Latitude” Full precision
Label 307 GPS NAV Waypoint Longitude” Full precision
Labels 310 GPS “Present Position Latitude”
Label 311 GPS ”Present Position Longitude”
Label 312 GPS “Ground Speed”
Label 313 GPS “Track”
Label 326 GPS “Lateral Deviation Scale Factor” full precision
Label 327 GPS “Vertical Deviation Scale Factor” full precision
Label 330 GPS FPL Curved “CONIC Arc Inbound Course”
Label 331 GPS FPL Curved “CONIC Arc Radius”
Label 332 GPS FPL Curved “CONIC ARC Course Change Angle”
Label 333 GPS FPL Curved “Airport Runway Azimuth
Label 334 GPS FPL Curved “Airport Runway Length
Label 335 GPS FPL Curved “Holding Pattern Azimuth”
Label 340 GPS FPL Curved “Procedure Turn Azimuth”
Table 8-2 - EFD A429 GPS Input

8.1.6 ARINC 429 VLOC Input

The EFD receives the following labels on Pins (18, 19) and (22, 23) when transmitted from a VLOC
receiver. The VLOC input ports can be configured either HIGH or LOW.

ARINC (Label) EFD Parameter

Label 34 Tuned Frequency
Label 34, bit 14 set ILS Energize
Label 173 Localizer deviation and validity flags
Label 174 Glide Slope deviation and validity flags
Label 222 VOR Omni bearing
Table 8-3 - EFD A429 VLOC Input

8.1.7 ARINC 429 Output

The EFD1000 transmits the following labels on pins 26 and 27 (only when the installation is
configured for no ACU) for ancillary equipment that require high or low speed ARINC 429 Heading,
OBS, and Air Data. Note - if an ACU is installed then the connections will be made at ACU P3 pins
4 and 5.

ARINC Label EFD Parameter Software Version

Label 100 Selected Course 2.0 and subsequent

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 141-367 Revision AC

Label 320 Magnetic Heading 2.0 and subsequent

Label 203 Pressure Altitude 2.0 and subsequent
Label 204 Pressure Altitude (Baro 2.0 and subsequent
corrected)
Label 210 True Airspeed 2.0 and subsequent
Table 8-4 - EFD1000 A429 GPS Output

8.2 ACU Electrical Specifications (910-00004 all dash numbers)

8.2.1 Power Input

Nominal Input: ………………………… 14Vdc or 28Vdc

Operating Range: ……………………… 11Vdc to 32Vdc

8.2.2 Decision Height (DH) Input

A differential input from the DH output of a radar altimeter.

DH on: …………………………………… Difference between +DH and –DH greater than 5Vdc
DH off: …………………………………… Difference between +DH and –DH less than 1Vdc
Load: ……………………………………… 10000 ohms +DH to –DH

8.2.3 VLOC Receiver

8.2.3.1 NAV Composite Input

An input connected to the composite output of a VHF Navigation receiver.

Nominal Input: ……………………… 0.5Vrms VOR
…………………………………………… 0.35Vrms Localizer
Input Impedance: …………………… 100K ohms

8.2.3.2 ILS Energize Discrete Input

Low impedance to ground supplied from a Navigation receiver when it is tuned to a localizer
frequency.
Active: ………………………………… Less than 500 ohms to ground or less than 1.5Vdc
Inactive: ………………………………… Open circuit sinking less than 1 ma to ground at 28Vdc

8.2.3.3 Glide Slope Deviation Input

A low level differential input that accepts a glide slope signal from an external VHF Nav receiver.
Input Range: …………………………… ±150mVdc full scale
Max Input Range: …………………… ±400mVdc
Load: …………………………………… 1000 ohm

8.2.3.4 Glide Slope Flag Input

A low level valid input from an external VHF Navigation receiver.

Valid: …………………………………… Greater than 260mV across a 1000-ohm load

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 142-367 Revision AC

Invalid: ………………………………… Less than 100mV across a 1000 ohm load

8.2.4 GPS Receiver

8.2.4.1 OBS Sine, Cosine, Rotor

An OBS resolver output for GPS receivers that require an OBS input. The resolver output electrical
zero is set to +60º (300º ORZ) for compatibility with most legacy resolvers. The ACU
accommodates OBS excitation with DC offset.
Excitation Amplitude: ……………… 5Vac min to 26Vac max (H to C)
Excitation Frequency: ……………… 30Hz to 5000Hz
Output Format: ……………………… Sine (D and E), Cosine (F and G)
Output Gradient: …………………… Excitation * 0.401 (26Vac in = 10.4Vac out)
DC Offset: …………………………… 0Vdc to +5Vdc (Offset applied to Rotor C)

8.2.4.2 TO/ FROM FLAG Input

Differential input from a GPS receiver indicating whether flying TO or FROM the active waypoint.
TO the waypoint: ………………… +40mV or greater
FROM the waypoint: ……………… -40mV or greater

8.2.4.3 LEFT/ RIGHT Input

Differential input from a GPS receiver indicating LEFT or RIGHT of GPS course.

Input Range: ………………………… ±150mVdc full scale

Load: …………………………………… 1000 ohm

8.2.4.4 Lateral Flag Input

Validity flag from the GPS receiver indicating valid LEFT and RIGHT data.

Valid: …………………………………… 260mV to 800mVdc

Invalid: ………………………………… Less than 260mVdc

8.2.4.5 Vertical Deviation Input

Differential input from a GPS receiver indicating a fly UP or DOWN command.

Input Range: ………………………… ±150mVdc full scale

Load: …………………………………… 1000 ohm

8.2.4.6 Vertical Deviation Flag Input

Validity flag from the GPS receiver indicating valid UP and DOWN data.
Valid: …………………………………… 260mV to 800mVdc
Invalid: ………………………………… Less than 260mVdc

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 143-367 Revision AC

8.2.4.7 OBS/ LEG (HOLD) Input

Active low discrete input from a GPS receiver when in the OBS or HOLD mode.

8.2.4.8 APPR Active Input

Active low discrete input from a GPS receiver when approach mode is activated.

8.2.4.9 FCS-LOC Engage Input

Active low discrete input from a GPS receiver when approach is selected.

8.2.5 Autopilot

8.2.5.1 Lateral Deviation Output

A low-level lateral deviation output that is connected to an autopilot lateral deviation (RT/LT)
input. The low side of the differential output is referenced to ground. Before connecting this
output verify the receiving equipment’s left/right input can accommodate a ground potential on
the low side.
Lateral Deviation: …………………… ±15mVdc for ± 10º of course error
Sense: ………………………………… Positive voltage for fly right
Load: …………………………………… Will drive up to three 1000 ohm loads

8.2.5.2 Lateral Flag Output

A low level valid output to the autopilot indicating the Lateral (LT/RT) signal from the ACU is
valid.
Valid: …………………………………… 0.4 to 0.8Vdc
Invalid: ………………………………… Less than 0.05Vdc
Load: …………………………………… Will drive up to three 1000 ohm loads
NOTE – ACU2 P/N 910-00004-102 does not have a low level flag. It provides a discrete to
ground for energizing an external superflag relay.

8.2.5.3 Vertical Deviation Output

A low level vertical deviation output that is connected to an autopilot vertical (UP/DN) input. The
low side of the differential output is referenced to ground.
Output Voltage: …………………… ±150mVdc nominal, tracks the glide slope deviation input
signal to within 5%
Loading: ……………………………… Up to three 1000-ohm loads

8.2.5.4 Vertical Flag Output

A low level output to the autopilot indicating the UP/DN from the ACU is valid.
Valid: ………………………………… 0.4 to 0.8Vdc
Invalid: ………………………………… Less than 0.05Vdc
Load: …………………………………… Will drive up to three 1000-ohm loads
NOTE – ACU2 P/N 910-00004-102 does not have a low level flag. It provides a discrete to
ground for energizing an external superflag relay.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 144-367 Revision AC

8.2.5.5 ILS Energize Output

Active low output to an autopilot when an ILS is selected or GPS approach is active.
ILS/GPS APPR Active: ……………… Sink to ground
ILS/GPS APPR Inactive: ……………… Open
Load Current: ………………………… 100ma maximum

8.2.5.6 15 Volt Reference Output

An internally generated +15Vdc reference for KI-525 emulation.

Output Voltage: ……………………… +15Vdc ±2Vdc
Load Current: ………………………… 30ma maximum

8.2.5.7 KI-525A Heading and Course Datum Output

Emulated KI-525A outputs to drive the heading and course datum inputs of an autopilot.

BENDIX KING KI525A EMULATION

ACU HSI TYPE = 0
1DATUM SCALING 2REFERENCE DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE (with ACU DATUM = NORMAL)
ACU P3-23
HDG 500mVdc per degree 15Vdc 500mVdc per degree up to a maximum
ACU P3-22 up to a maximum angle of 30⁰, or 15Vdc. The output
angle of 30⁰, or remains at +15Vdc from 31⁰ to 180⁰. At
15Vdc. 181⁰ it switches to -15Vdc. Likewise for
negative angles (HDG bug left of the
lubber line) the gradient is -500mVdc per
degree up to -30⁰. The output remains at
-15Vdc from -31⁰ to -179⁰. At 180⁰ it
switches to +15Vdc.

CRS 167mVdc per degree 15Vdc 167mVdc per degree up to 90⁰, or

ACU P3-3 up to 90⁰, or 15Vdc. +15Vdc. From 91⁰ to 180⁰ the output
diminishes by 167mVdc per degree,
reaching 0Vdc at 180⁰. For negative
angles (CRS pointer left of the lubber line)
the gradient is -167mVdc per degree up
to -90⁰. From -90⁰ to -179⁰ the output
diminishes by 167mVdc per degree
reaching 0Vdc at 180⁰.

1Datum outputs are in reference to ACU P3-11, ACU reference ground.

215Vdc reference may come from ACU P3-9, ACU +15Vdc Out.

Table 8-5 – KI525A Emulation Specifications

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 145-367 Revision AC

8.2.5.8 NSD-360 Heading and Course Datum Output

Emulated NSD-360 outputs to drive the heading and course datum inputs of an autopilot.

NSD-360 EMULATION
ACU HSI TYPE = 1
1DATUM SCALING 2REFERENCE DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE (with ACU DATUM = NORMAL)
ACU P3-23
HDG 167mVdc per degree 15Vdc Assuming a reference voltage of 15Vdc,
ACU P3-22 up to 90⁰, or 15Vdc. the gradient is 167mVdc per degree up to
Reference 90⁰, or +15Vdc. From 91⁰ to 180⁰ the
voltage may output diminishes by 167mVdc per
be any degree, reaching 0Vdc at 180⁰. For
positive DC negative angles (HDG Bug left of the
or AC lubber line) the gradient is -167mVdc per
reference degree up to -90⁰. From -90⁰ to -179⁰
voltage the output diminishes by 167mVdc per
degree reaching 0Vdc at 180⁰.

CRS 167mVdc per degree 15Vdc Assuming a reference voltage of +15Vdc,

ACU P3-3 up to 90⁰, or 15Vdc. the gradient is 167mVdc per degree up to
Reference 90⁰, or +15Vdc. From 91⁰ to 180⁰ the
voltage may output diminishes by 167mVdc per
be any degree, reaching 0Vdc at 180⁰. For
positive DC negative angles (CRS pointer left of the
or AC lubber line) the gradient is -167mVdc per
reference degree up to -90⁰. From -90⁰ to -179⁰
voltage the output diminishes by 167mVdc per
degree reaching 0Vdc at 180⁰.

1Datum outputs are in reference to ACU P3-11, ACU reference ground.

2Reference voltage typically comes from autopilot computer.

Table 8-6 – NSD360A Emulation Specifications

8.2.5.9 PN-101 Heading and Course Datum Output

Emulated PN-101 outputs to drive the heading and course datum inputs of an autopilot.

PN-101 EMULATION
ACU HSI TYPE = 3
1DATUM SCALING 2REFERENCE DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 146-367 Revision AC

ACU P3-21 (with ACU DATUM = NORMAL)

HDG The gradient is scaled 26Vac Assuming a reference voltage of 26Vac,

ACU P3-22 to 11.8Vac maximum the gradient is 131mVac per degree up to
at 90⁰ when using a Reference 90⁰, or 11.8Vac. From 91⁰ to 180⁰ the
26Vac reference. It is voltage may output diminishes by 131mVac per
linear between 0⁰ and be any AC degree, reaching 0Vac at 180⁰. For
90⁰. reference negative angles (HDG Bug left of the
voltage lubber line) the gradient is out of phase
with the reference and is 131mVac per
degree up to -90⁰. From -90⁰ to -179⁰
the output diminishes by 131mVac per
degree reaching 0Vdc at 180⁰.

CRS The gradient is scaled 26Vac Assuming a reference voltage of 26Vac,

ACU P3-3 to 11.8Vac maximum the gradient is 131mVac per degree up to
at 90⁰ when using a Reference 90⁰, or 11.8Vac. From 91⁰ to 180⁰ the
26Vac reference. It is voltage may output diminishes by 131mVac per
linear between 0⁰ and be any AC degree, reaching 0Vac at 180⁰. For
90⁰. reference negative angles (HDG Bug left of the
voltage lubber line) the gradient is out of phase
with the reference and is 131mVac per
degree up to -90⁰. From -90⁰ to -179⁰
the output diminishes by 131mVac per
degree reaching 0Vdc at 180⁰.

1Datum outputs are in reference to ACU P3-11, ACU reference ground.

2Reference voltage typically comes from autopilot computer or aircraft inverter.
Table 8-7 – PN101 Emulation Specifications

8.2.5.10 ACU Flight Director Types

Flight ACU FD TYPE Scale Pitch, Range Scale Roll, Range FD Valid
Director Setting
Type
None ACU FD TYPE 0
Bendix ACU FD TYPE 1 -6.0 Vdc = 9.9⁰ UP -0.6Vdc = 10⁰ RT >5Vdc on P2-27
King +10.0Vdc = 9.1⁰ DN +0.6Vdc = 10⁰ LT >5Vdc on P2-9

KI256 Offset 0Vdc Offset 0Vdc

Reserved ACU FD TYPE 2
ARC ACU FD TYPE 3 +0.5Vdc = 20⁰ UP +0.5Vdc = 20⁰ RT >5Vdc on P2-27
G550A (note 1) -0.5Vdc = 20⁰ DN -0.5Vdc = 20⁰ LT >5Vdc on P2-9

Offset 0Vdc Offset 0Vdc

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 147-367 Revision AC

Century ACU FD TYPE 4 9Vdc = Full UP +10Vdc = Full RT >2Vdc on Pitch

52C77 (note 1) 3Vdc = Full DN -10Vdc = Full LT Hi P2-33

Offset 6Vdc Offset 0Vdc

Table 8-8 – ACU Flight Director Types

NOTE 1: ACU Software Version A-02-178-1.1 or subsequent is required for the

G- 550A and 52C77 Flight Director emulations.

8.2.5.11 Flight Director Valid Input

A single high level valid discrete supplied by the flight director computer indicating validity of the
command bar signals to the ACU.
Valid: ………………………………… Greater than 5Vdc

Invalid: ………………………………… Less than 2Vdc

8.2.5.12 Flight Director Engaged Input

A single high level valid discrete indicating the pilot has engaged the flight director.
Engaged: ……………………………… Greater than 5Vdc
Disengaged: …………………………… Less than 2Vdc

8.2.5.13 Heading Valid Output

Active low discrete output indicating the PFD directional gyro is valid.
Valid: …………………………………… Sinks to ground
Invalid: ………………………………… Open
Load Current: ………………………… 100ma maximum

8.2.5.14 GPS Selected Output

Active low discrete output indicating GPS1 or GPS2 is the current coupled sensor on the HSI.
GPS coupled: ………………………… Sinks to ground
GPS not coupled: …………………… Open
Load Current: ………………………… 100ma maximum

8.2.6 ARINC 429 Output

The ACU transmits the following labels on P3 pins 4 and 5 for GPS receivers and systems that
require ARINC 429 magnetic heading and selected course.

ARINC PFD Data Rate EFD Software

Label (ms) Version
100 Selected Course 200 2.0 and later
320 Magnetic Heading 200 2.0 and later
Table 8-9 - ACU A429 Output

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 148-367 Revision AC

8.3 ACU2 Electrical Specifications (910-00004-10x only)

The ACU2 has the same interfaces as the ACU above on connectors J1/J2/J3 plus it adds the following
interfaces on connector J4.

8.3.1 ADF Bearing

The ACU2 will read Sin/Cos signals from an ADF#1 and a ADF#2.

Input Range ………………………… 4.5 ± 3 Vdc scale

Max Input Range …………………… +8.5Vdc
Load ……………………………… at least 68000 ohm

8.3.2 Radio Altimeter

The ACU2 will read differential signal from a compatible Radio Altimeter.

Input Range ………………………… -0.2 to +28Vdc

Max Input Range …………………… ± 29.2Vdc
Load ………………………………… at least 121000 ohm
Displayed Resolution…………………10ft from 0 to 500ft, 100ft from 500ft and above

Radio Altimeter Valid:

Valid …………………………………… Less than 1V or greater than 9V
Invalid ………………………………… Greater than 1V and less than 9V

Radio Altimeter Type RA TYPE Setting Scaling

None NONE
KRA 10 RA TYPE 1 For Radio Altitude 20 to 2500 ft. = +4mV/foot
Collins ALT 50/55 RA TYPE 2 For Radio Altitude ≤ 500 feet:
Voltsin = (0.02 * RALT) + 0.4 or
RALT (ft.) = (50ft/VDC * Voltsin ) - 20 ft.
For Radio Altitude > 500 feet:
Voltsin = 0.003 * (RALT-500) +10.4 or
RALT (ft.) = (333.3333ft/VDC * Voltsin) – 2966.7
ARINC 552 RA TYPE 3 For Radio Altitude ≤ 480 feet:
Voltsin = (0.02 * RALT (ft.)) + 0.4
For Radio Altitude > 480 feet:
Voltsin = (10) * (1 + Ln ((RALT (ft.) + 20)/500)
KRA 405 RA TYPE 4 For Radio Altitude -20 to 2500 ft.
Precision Out -10mv/ft.

KRA 405 RA TYPE 5 For Radio Altitude -20 to 500 ft.= +20mv/ft.
Aux Out #1 For Radio Altitude 500 to 2500 ft.= +3mv/ft.
For Radio Altitude = Zero ft.= +0.400 volts
Sperry RT-200 RA TYPE 6 For Radio Altitude -20 to 2500 ft.= -4mv/ft.
ARINC 429 RA TYPE 7 Label 164 on ARINC 429 RX3
Table 8-10 – Radio Altimeter Types

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 149-367 Revision AC

8.3.3 Heading Synchro Out

The ACU2 will output a heading synchro (bootstrap) signal per ARINC 407 to external equipment.
Heading Reference In:
Input Range …………………………… 17Vac to 30Vac
Frequency Range ……………………… 300Hz to 5500Hz
Load ………………………………… at least 68100 ohm

Heading Reference Out:

Output Voltage ………………………… 17Vac to 30Vac (26Vrms nominal) into a 10000 ohm load
Frequency Range ……………………… 350Hz to 450Hz
Load ………………………………… 10000 ohm

Synchro Output:
Output Format ………………………… VX-z = VRefsin(Ө - 120⁰)
VY-Z = VRef sin(Ө + 120⁰)
Output Range ………………………… 0 to 11.8Vrms
The ACU2 will disable the heading reference output when an external reference of greater than
18Vac is applied across pins 26V-REF-H and 26V-REF-C.

Heading Valid:
Open Collector output to the heading valid flag. It can sink up to 100mA to ground at 28Vdc.

8.3.4 +/- 15Vdc Power Output

The ACU2 outputs +15Vdc and -15Vdc to external equipment such as a Bendix King KA-52/57.
+15 Range ………………………… +14Vdc to +15.5Vdc at up to 150mA
-15 Range ………………………… -14Vdc to -15.5Vdc at up to 150mA

8.3.5 Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

The ACU2 will accept an external OAT probe to drive the OAT indication on the EFD. May be used
when the RSM is mounted internally or in the exhaust stream.

OAT Excitation ………………………… 4.5 to 5.5Vdc at up to 20mA

OAT Signal ……………………………… 213.15 to 333.15μA (±60C)
OAT Signal Load ………………… 6040 ohm ± 0.1%

8.3.6 Glideslope Flag (Narco)

The ACU2 provides a high impedance(10K) glideslope flag input for use with Narco and other NAV
radios unable to drive the standard 1k load.
Valid: …………………………………… Greater than 260mV across a 10000-ohm load
Invalid: ………………………………… Less than 100mV across a 10000 ohm load

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 150-367 Revision AC

8.3.7 ACU2 Flight Director Inputs

The ACU2 makes hardware and software changes to the flight director inputs on connector J2 that
allows for new FD types. FD Valid and FD Engage inputs are the same as ACU above.

KI256 Offset 0Vdc Offset 0Vdc

Reserved ACU FD TYPE 2
ARC ACU FD TYPE 3 +0.5Vdc = 20⁰ UP +0.5Vdc = 20⁰ RT >5Vdc on P2-27
G550A -0.5Vdc = 20⁰ DN -0.5Vdc = 20⁰ LT >5Vdc on P2-9

Offset 0Vdc Offset 0Vdc

Century ACU FD TYPE 4 9Vdc = Full UP +10Vdc = Full RT >2Vdc on Pitch
52C77 3Vdc = Full DN -10Vdc = Full LT Hi P2-33

Offset 6Vdc Offset 0Vdc

Reserved ACU FD TYPE 5
Reserved ACU FD TYPE 6
Reserved ACU FD TYPE 7
Reserved ACU FD TYPE 8
Reserved ACU FD TYPE 9
Collins ACU FD TYPE 10 +150mVdc/deg, +20U⁰ +150mVdc/deg, +18R⁰ Valid when P2-
FD112x -150mVdc/deg, -20D⁰ -150mVdc/deg, -18L⁰ 27 is < 2Vdc,

Offset 0Vdc Offset 0Vdc Invalid when >

5Vdc
Sperry ACU FD TYPE 11 +27mVdc/deg, +10U⁰ +7.5mVdc/deg, +30R⁰ >5Vdc on P2-27
AD500 -27mVdc/deg, -10D⁰ -7.5mVdc/deg, -30L⁰
Offset 0Vdc Offset 0Vdc
Reserved ACU FD TYPE 12

Table 8-11 – Flight Director Types

8.3.8 ARINC 429 Output

The ACU2 transmits the following labels on J3-4/J3-5 (TX2)for GPS receivers and systems that
require ARINC 429 magnetic heading, air data and selected course.

ARINC PFD Data Rate (ms) EFD Software

Label Version
100 Selected Course 200 2.0 and later
320 Magnetic Heading 200 2.0 and later
203 Pressure Altitude 200 2.0 and later
204 Baro Corrected Altitude 200 2.0 and later

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 151-367 Revision AC

210 True Airspeed 200 2.0 and later

Table 8-12 – ACU2 ARINC 429 Output

8.4 EFD Pin Out

Pin Name Input / Function

Number Output
1 POWER - Main DC power input
2 POWER - “
3 POWER - “
4 GND - Main DC ground
5 GND - “
6 GND - “
7 Digital_Discrete OUTPUT Tone Alert (PFD)/Reversion Relay (MFD)
8 RS232_RX1 INPUT RS232 RX1 (115kb)
9 RS232_RX2 INPUT RS232 RX2
10 RS232_RX3 INPUT RS232 RX3
11 RS232RX4 INPUT RS232 RX4
12 RS232RX5 INPUT RS232 RX5
13 RS232_TX1 OUTPUT RS232 TX1
14 RS232_TX2 OUTPUT RS232 TX2
15 RS232_TX3 OUTPUT RS232 TX3
16 ARINC_RX1A INPUT ARINC Receiver 1
17 ARINC_RX1B INPUT ARINC Receiver 1
18 ARINC_RX2A INPUT ARINC Receiver 2
19 ARINC_RX2B INPUT ARINC Receiver 2
20 ARINC_RX3A INPUT ARINC Receiver 3
21 ARINC_RX3B INPUT ARINC Receiver 3
22 ARINC_RX4A INPUT ARINC Receiver 4
23 ARINC_RX4B INPUT ARINC Receiver 4
24 ARINC_RX5A INPUT ARINC Receiver 5
25 ARINC_RX5B INPUT ARINC Receiver 5
26 ARINC_TX1A OUTPUT ARINC Transmitter 1
27 ARINC_TX1B OUTPUT ARINC Transmitter 1
28 Reserved - Future Expansion
29 Reserved - “
30 RS232_TX0 OUTPUT RS232 TX
31 RS232_RX0 INPUT RS232 RX0 (115kb)
32 RSM_C - RSM data (EFD1000 only)
33 RSM_D - RSM data (EFD1000 only)
34 RSM_E - RSM data (EFD1000 only)
35 RSM_F - RSM data (EFD1000 only)
36 RSM_G - RSM data (EFD1000 only)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 152-367 Revision AC

Pin Name Input / Function

Number Output
37 ENET TX+ OUTPUT Ethernet TX bus
38 ENET TX- OUTPUT Ethernet TX bus
39 ENET RX+ INPUT Ethernet RX bus
40 ENET RX- INPUT Ethernet RX bus
41 CONFIG_A - Configuration Module connection
42 CONFIG_B - “
43 CONFIG_C - “
44 CONFIG_D - “
Table 8-13 - PFD/MFD Pin Out

Figure 8-1– PFD/MFD Connector (as viewed from rear of unit)

8.5 RSM Pin Out

Pin Name Input / Function

Number Output
1 RSM_A - RSM Connection
2 RSM_B - RSM Connection
3 RSM_C - RSM Connection
4 RSM_D - RSM Connection
5 RSM_E - RSM Connection
6 RSM_F - RSM Connection
7 RSM_G - RSM Connection
Table 8-14 - RSM Pin Out
Male Pin Side Solder Cup Side

Figure 8-2 - RSM Mating Connector –Install Side

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 153-367 Revision AC

8.6 Configuration Module Pin Out

Pin Name Input / Function

Number Output
1 Config_A - CM Connection
2 Config_B - CM Connection
3 Config_D - CM Connection
4 Config_C - CM Connection
5 Config_S - Shield Ground
Table 8-15 - Configuration Module Pin Out

Figure 8-3 - Configuration Module Connector (Install side)

8.7 ACU/ACU2 Pin Out

Pin Input /
Name Function
Number Output
J1-1 429RX2A INPUT ARINC 429 Port 2 Receive A
J1-2 429RX2B INPUT ARINC 429 Port 2 Receive B
J1-3 PWR-COM - Power Common
J1-4 GPS+LT INPUT GPS Lateral Dev Input (-)
J1-5 GPS-LATFLG INPUT GPS Lateral Flag Input (-)
J1-6 GPS+DN INPUT GPS Vertical Dev Input (-)
J1-7 GPS+FR INPUT GPS TO/FROM Input
J1-8 GPS-VERTFLG INPUT GPS Vertical Dev Flag (-)
J1-9 Reserved - Reserved
J1-10 +11 to 32Vdc - Aircraft Primary Power
J1-11 GPS+RT INPUT GPS Lateral Dev Input (+)
J1-12 GPS+LATFLG INPUT GPS Lateral Flag Input (+)
J1-13 GPS+UP INPUT GPS Vertical Dev Input (+)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 154-367 Revision AC

Pin Input /
Name Function
Number Output
J1-14 GPS+TO INPUT GPS TO/FROM Input
J1-15 GPS+VERTFLG INPUT GPS Vertical Flag (+)
Table 8-16 - ACU J1 Pin Out

Figure 8-4-ACU J1 Connector (as viewed from front of unit)

Pin Input /
Name Function
Number Output
J2-1 COMPOSITE INPUT VOR/LOC Composite input
J2-2 /ILS-ENERGIZE INPUT Active Low input from VHF Nav Rx
J2-3 /Spare-Disc1 INPUT Spare Discrete Input
OUTPUT Open collector output to drive the back
J2-41 /BACK-CRS-OUT
course sense circuit of an autopilot
OUTPUT Active Low Output when ILS Selected or GPS
J2-5 /ILS-ENERGIZE-OUT
Appr Active
J2-6 /FCS-LOC-IN INPUT Low Input from GPS when Appr Selected
INPUT Active Low from GPS when GPS OBS mode
J2-7 /OBS-LEG-IN
selected
J2-8 -DH INPUT Differential –DH input
INPUT Flight Director Engaged (command bars in
J2-9 FD-ENGAGED
view when active)
J2-10 FD-ROLL2 INPUT Roll input for ARC and Bendix
J2-11 +VLOCFLG-OUT OUTPUT Valid VHF Nav VOR or Localizer signal
J2-12 +GS-IN INPUT Glideslope deviation from VHF Nav Rx
J2-13 +GSFLG-IN INPUT Glideslope flag from VHF Nav Rx
J2-14 FD-PITCH-COM INPUT Pitch Signal common for all FD types
J2-15 FD-ROLL-COM INPUT Roll Signal common for all FD types
J2-16 +UP OUTPUT Vertical output to autopilot (H)
J2-17 +VERT-FLG OUTPUT Vertical output flag (H)
J2-18 +RT OUTPUT Lateral deviation output
J2-19 ACU #1/#2 INPUT Spare Discrete Input
J2-20 COMPOSITE-COM - VOR/LOC common
J2-21 Reserved - Spare Discrete Input
J2-22 Reserved - Spare Discrete Input
J2-23 Reserved - Reserved

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 155-367 Revision AC

Pin Input /
Name Function
Number Output
INPUT Active Low input from GPS when GPS
J2-24 APPR-ACT
approach mode activated
J2-251 HEADING VALID OUTPUT Active Low Output when Heading Valid
J2-26 +DH INPUT Differential +DH Input
J2-27 FD-VALID INPUT Flight Director Active High valid
J2-28 FD-PITCH2 INPUT Pitch Input for ARC Flight Director
J2-29 ALT ENGAGE OUTPUT 10Vdc when Selected Alt reached
J2-30 -VLOCFLG-OUT - Common
J2-31 -GS-IN INPUT Glideslope deviation from VHF Nav Rx
J2-32 -GSFLG-IN INPUT Glideslope flag from VHF Nav Rx
J2-33 FD-PITCH1 INPUT Pitch Input for Century and Bendix FD
J2-34 FD-ROLL1 INPUT Roll Input for Century FD
J2-35 +DN OUTPUT Vertical output to autopilot (L)
J2-36 -VERT-FLG OUTPUT Vertical output flag (L)
J2-37 +LT OUTPUT Lateral deviation output
Table 8-17 - ACU J2 Pin Out
1NOTE – On ACU2 P/N 910-00004-102, J2-4 is a NAV Flag Discrete and J2-25 is a Glide Slope Flag
Discrete used on autopilots that require a superflag input.

Figure 8-5 –ACU J2 Connector (as viewed from front of unit)

Pin Input /
Name Function
Number Output
J3-1 429RX1A INPUT ARINC 429 Port 1 Receive A
J3-2 429TX1A OUTPUT ARINC 429 Port 1 Transmit A
J3-3 CRS-DATUM OUTPUT Course Datum output
J3-4 429TX2A OUTPUT ARINC 429 Port 2 Transmit A
J3-5 429TX2B OUTPUT ARINC 429 Port 2 Transmit B
J3-6 OBS SIN - OUTPUT Sin of selected course angle (L)
J3-7 OBS COS - OUTPUT Cos of selected course angle (L)
J3-8 ROTOR C OUTPUT OBS sin/cos excitation (L)
J3-9 +15V-EXT-OUT OUTPUT Internal +15Vdc reference
J3-10 SIGNAL-COM - Signal ground
J3-11 HDG/CRS-COM - Signal ground
J3-12 Reserved - Reserved
J3-13 Reserved - Reserved

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 156-367 Revision AC

Pin Input /
Name Function
Number Output
J3-14 429RX1B INPUT ARINC 429 Port 1 Receive B
J3-15 429TX1B OUTPUT ARINC 429 Port 1 Transmit B
J3-16 SIGNAL-COM - Signal ground
OUTPUT Active Low signal to drive GPS and Autopilot
J3-17 GPS SELECTED
inputs.
J3-18 OBS SIN + OUTPUT Sin of selected course angle (H)
J3-19 OBS COS + OUTPUT Cos of selected course angle(H)
J3-20 ROTOR H INPUT OBS sin/cos excitation (H)
ARINC-HDG-CRS- - 26Vac reference to emulate an ARINC
J3-21
EXT synchro interface
J3-22 HDG-DATUM OUTPUT Heading Datum output
HDG-CRS-DATUM- INPUT
J3-23 Heading/Course Datum excitation input
EXT
J3-24 Reserved - Reserved
INPUT Heading/Course Datum excitation offset
J3-25 HDG-CRS-OFST
input
Table 8-18 - ACU J3 Pin Out

Figure 8-6 -ACU J3 Connector (as viewed from front of unit)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 157-367 Revision AC

Pin Input /
Name Function
Number Output
J4-1 +15VDC Out OUTPUT 15Vdc power to external equipment
J4-2 429TX3B OUTPUT ARINC 429 Port 3 Transmit B
J4-3 429RX3B INPUT ARINC 429 Port 3 Receive B
J4-4 400HZ-REF-LO OUTPUT 400Hz excitation for heading synchro
J4-5 HDG Y OUTPUT Heading synchro (Y-Z)
J4-6* DME1-DATA +8V INPUT Serial Data in for DME1
J4-7* DME1-CLK +8V INPUT Serial Clock In for DME1
J4-8* DME2-GATE +8V INPUT Data Gate In for DME2
J4-9* DME-COM INPUT Common for DME1 and DME2
J4-10 ADF1 +REF INPUT DC Voltage In from ADF1
J4-11 OAT +5 OUTPUT 5V excitation to OAT probe
J4-12 ADF2 +REF INPUT DC Voltage In from ADF2
J4-13 OAT_SIG INPUT OAT input signal
J4-14* 422TX1+ OUTPUT RS422 Port 1 Serial Data Out
J4-15* 422TX2+ OUTPUT RS422 Port 2 Serial Data Out
J4-16* 422RX1B INPUT RS422 Port 1 Serial Data In, or RS232 RX1
J4-17* 422RX2A INPUT RS422 Port 2 Serial Data In
J4-18 /DISC1 OUTPUT Active Low Discrete Output
J4-19 /DISC3 OUTPUT Active Low Discrete Output
J4-20 +RADALT INPUT Radio Altitude Input
J4-21 RADALT-VLD INPUT Radio Altitude Valid
J4-22 -15VDC OUT OUTPUT -15Vdc Output for external equipment
J4-23 429TX3A OUTPUT ARINC 429 Port 3 Transmit A
J4-24 429RX3A INPUT ARINC 429 Port 3 Receive A
J4-25 400HZ-REF-HI OUTPUT 400Hz excitation for heading synchro
J4-26 HDG-X OUTPUT Heading synchro output (X-Z)
J4-27 HDG-Z OUTPUT Heading synchro output (Z)
J4-28* DME1-GATE +8V INPUT Data Gate In for DME1
J4-29* DME2-DATA +8V INPUT Serial Data In for DME2
J4-30* DME2-CLK +8V INPUT Serial Clock In for DME2
J4-31 ADF1+SIN INPUT DC voltage In from ADF1
J4-32 ADF1+COS INPUT DC voltage In from ADF1
J4-33 ADF2+SIN INPUT DC voltage In from ADF2
J4-34 ADF2+COS INPUT DC voltage In from ADF2
J4-35* 422TX1- OUTPUT RS422 Port 1 Serial Data Out, or RS232 TX1
J4-36* 422TX2- OUTPUT RS422 Port 2 Serial Data Out, or RS232 TX2
J4-37* 422RX1A INPUT RS422 Port 1 Serial Data In
J4-38 232/422 SERIAL COM - Chassis Ground

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 158-367 Revision AC

Pin Input /
Name Function
Number Output
J4-39* 422RX2B INPUT RS422 Port 2 Serial Data In, or RS232 RX2
J4-40 /DISC2 OUTPUT Active Low Discrete Output
J4-41 /DISC4 OUTPUT Active Low Discrete Output
J4-42 -RADALT INPUT Radio Altitude Input
J4-43* ANN-LOAD INPUT STEC 55X Annunciator Load
J4-44 /SPARE-DISC3 INPUT Discrete Input
J4-45 /SPARE-DISC4 INPUT Discrete Input
J4-46 /SPARE-DISC5 - Discrete Input or Output
J4-47 /SPARE-DISC6 - Discrete Input or Output
J4-48 /SPARE-DISC7 - Discrete Input or Output
J4-49 /SPARE-DISC8 - Discrete Input or Output
J4-50 /SPARE-DISC9 INPUT Discrete Input
J4-51 /SPARE-DISC10 INPUT Discrete Input
J4-52 /SYN-HDG-VALID OUTPUT Active Low output when synchro Hdg Valid
J4-53 MK12D-GS+FLG INPUT High impedance Glideslope Flag (Narco)
J4-54 MK12D-GS-FLG INPUT High impedance Glideslope Flag (Narco)
J4-55* ANN-CLK INPUT STEC 55X Annunciator Clock
J4-56* ANN-DATA INPUT STEC 55X Annunciator Data
J4-57* VSC-REF INPUT Vertical Speed Reference In
J4-58* VSC OUTPUT Vertical Speed Out
J4-59* VSC-COM - Vertical Speed Common
J4-60 26V-REF-H INPUT 26V Heading Synchro Reference In
J4-61 26V-REF-C INPUT 26V Heading Synchro Reference In
J4-62* BARO-OUT OUTPUT Baro Correction Output (0-5Vdc)
Table 8-19 - ACU J4 Pin Out(ACU2 only)

*NOTE – These connections are provisional only and are not operational at this time. Future EFD
software will enable these functions.

Figure 8-7 - ACU2 J4 Connector (ACU2 only)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 159-367 Revision AC

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 160-367 Revision AC

9 Installation Wiring Diagrams

The following Section contains wiring diagrams for common interfacing equipment to the PFD, MFD,
ACU, RSM, and Configuration Module. Although the list of interfacing equipment is quite extensive it
does not cover all compatible equipment. For interfaces that are installed but not shown it is required by
the ICAs that a drawing be made and inserted into Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-001,
Instructions for Continued Airworthiness. All other drawings used from this section by the installer must
be copied and inserted into the ICA’s.

There will be some GPS receivers not shown on these drawings that will be compatible with the EFD1000
system. The EFD1000 is compatible with ARINC 429, RS-232, and analog GPS receivers. For flight plan
information to be presented on the PFD an RS-232 or ARINC 429 interface is required. Should an RS-232
or ARINC 429 bus not be available or incompatible then the GPS can still be connected to the EFD1000
system using analog signals to drive the HSI deviation indications. In this situation, GPS flight plan data
will not be available. It will be up to the installer to verify the interface is fully functional by performing a
complete GPS manufacturer’s ground check of the system.

There are also VLOC receivers not shown in these drawings that can be connected either by ARINC 429
to the PFD or through VOR composite video into the ACU or ACU2. Any radio with a nominal output of
0.5Vrms VOR or 0.35Vrms Localizer composite video format are supported. It will be up to the installer
to verify the interface is fully functional by performing a complete VOR manufacturer’s ground check of
the system.

The EFD1000 Pro with ACU or ACU2 emulates a Bendix King KI-525A, a NSD-360A, and a PN-101 HSI by
providing outputs for HDG Datum and CRS Datum to an autopilot. The EFD1000 is compatible with any
autopilot that is compatible with a KI-525A, NSD-360A, or PN-101 HSI. Should connections be made to
an autopilot not shown in these drawings the installer must verify the interface is fully functional by
performing a complete ground and flight check of the system per the autopilot manufacturer’s
installation manual or maintenance instructions.

The EFD1000 Pro with ACU emulates the Bendix King KI-254/256, ARC G-550A, and Century 52C77
flight director indicators. The EFD1000 Pro with ACU2 emulates the same FD types as the ACU but
includes the FD112V and AD500 flight director indicators. All autopilots that output flight director
signals of the above types are compatible with the EFD1000 flight director display.

NOTE-The FD112V and AD500 Flight Director require an unlock card to enable.

To begin planning the electrical installation, select the drawing in the list below preceded by an “*” that
matches the aircraft equipment configuration, and then wire as shown. GPS1, GPS2, NAV1, NAV2, and
the autopilot are options on each page. Simply make the connections to the equipment you plan to
install and omit the units from the drawing you don’t. You will configure the system later based upon
the Configuration ID#s shown in the Configuration Matrix on each drawing. Aspen Avionics Inc. uses the
terms “GNAV” when referring to a combination GPS/VLOC Receiver with an integral CDI source select
(i.e., GNS-430), “GPS” for a standalone GPS Receiver (i.e., GNS-400, KLN90B), and “VLOC” for stand-
alone VOR/Localizer equipment (i.e. KX-155, SL30).

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 161-367 Revision AC

9.1 List of Wiring Diagrams – PFD

Figure # Description
9-1 EFD1000 Main Connections
9-2 ACU Main Power
9-3 Decision Height (DH)
*9-4 Pilot PFD - Digital RS-232 Interface
*9-5 Pilot PFD - Digital ARINC 429 Interface
*9-6 Pro Single Digital with “Tracker” or No autopilot
*9-7 Pro Single Digital with autopilot(example: GNS430 and ACU, no Analog NAV)
*9-8 Pro Digital/Analog Mix with and w/o autopilot(example: GNS430 and Analog NAV)
*9-9 Pro Dual Digital without autopilot
*9-9A Pro Dual Digital with autopilot
9-9B ARINC 429 EFIS with cross-side EFD1000
9-9C ARINC 429 EFIS with cross-side EFD1000 using ACU2
*9-10 Pro ARINC 429 GPS & Dual Analog VLOC with and w/o autopilot
*9-11 Pro Legacy GPS & Analog VLOC with and w/o autopilot
9-12 KLN89/B & KLN94 Interface
9-13 KLN-90/A/B Interface
9-14 Apollo GX-50/55/60/65 Interface
9-15 Analog NAV/VLOC Interface
9-15A Analog Narco and ARC Navigation Radio Interface
Appen F Autopilot Source Selection – PFD/MFD1000 – See Appendix F
Appen G Altitude Pre-Select for KFC200 only – See Appendix G
9-16 Bendix/King KAP and KFC 100/140/150/200/250/275 Autopilot Interface
9-16A Bendix King KFC250 (4”)/325 Autopilot Interface
9-16B Bendix King KFC300 Autopilot Interface
Appen E EA100 Autopilot Attitude Source, Bendix King only – See Appendix E
9-17 S-TEC autopilot interface
9-17A S-TEC KI-525A Emulation - Recommended
9-17B S-TEC NSD-360A Emulation
9-18 Century autopilot interface
9-18A Century 21/31/41/2000
9-18B Century IIB/III 1C388/M & 1C388C/MC
9-18C Century IIB/II 1C388-2/-3
9-18D Century IV
9-19 Cessna ARC 300B/400B/800B
9-19A Cessna 300/400/800 IFCS
9-19B Cessna Navomatic 400/400A
9-19C Cessna Navomatic 300A
9-19D Cessna Navomatic 300
9-19E Cessna ARC 1000A IFCS

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 162-367 Revision AC

Figure # Description
9-20 Bendix FCS-810
9-20A Bendix M-4C and M-4D
9-21 Collins AP-106/107
9-22 Sperry SPZ200 and SPZ500 Autopilots
9-23 KI-256 Flight Director Emulation Bendix/King
9-23A 52C77 Flight Director Emulation Century 41/2000
9-23B 52C77 Flight Director Emulation Century IV
9-23C G-550A/1050A Flight Director Emulation ARC
9-23D S-TEC 55/55X/60/65 Flight Director using ST645/670
9-23F Collins FD-112V Flight Director Emulation
9-23G Bendix M-4D Flight Director with existing Collins FD
9-23H Sperry AD500 Flight Director Emulation
9-24 Back-Up NAV Indicator (internal converter)
9-25 Back-Up NAV Indicator (OBS Resolver)
9-26 Back-Up NAV/GPS Indicator (OBS Resolver)
9-27 Non-Aspen Equipment Configuration Notes
9-28 EHA Interfaces - Traffic, XM Weather, WX-500
9-28A RS232 Air Data Output
Table 9-1- PFD Wiring Diagrams

9.2 List of Wiring Diagrams – MFD/PFD Multi Display Systems

Two “Generic” drawings (Figure 9-30 and 9-30A) are provided that will work with any interface. It will
be necessary to use other drawings from Section 9 to complete the wiring interface to the GPS
receiver, NAV receiver, and ACU.

Two configuration specific drawings (Figure 9-31 and 9-32) are provided that show the most
common system configurations. These drawings show the complete NAV/GPS and ACU interfaces to
the EFD1000 and EFD500 systems.

Figure # Description
9-1 EFD500/1000 MFD main connections
9-30 GENERIC: PFD with MFD
9-30A GENERIC: PFD with MFD1000 and MFD500
9-31 PFD with MFD, GNAV1 and Analog NAV2 and/or GPS2
9-32 PFD with MFD, GNAV1 and GNAV2
Table 9-2 - MFD Wiring Diagrams

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 163-367 Revision AC

9.3 Optional Interfaces – ACU and ACU2

Figure # Description ACU ACU2

9-28A Magnetic Heading – Low Speed ARINC 429 X X
9-28A Magnetic Heading – High Speed ARINC 429 X
9-28A Air Data output (ARINC 429) – ACU installations must use RS-232 X
output from EFD (Fig 9.28) for Air Data output.
9-28B Magnetic Heading -ARINC 407 Synchro X
9-28C ADF Interface X
9-28C Radio Altimeter Interface X
9-28D Remote OAT Probe Interface X

Table 9-3- Optional ACU/ACU2 Interfaces

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 164-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-1 – EFD1000/500 Main Connections

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 165-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-2 – ACU/ACU2 Input Power

KRA-10A
1 DH interface requires PFD software
1 version 1.1 or later.
ACU
P3 DH On requires that DH+ (Pin 26) is 5Vdc
2
greater (or more) than DH- (Pin 8) when
+15 V out 9 Decision Height is reached by Radar
4 KI-250 Altimeter. DH Off = less than 1Vdc difference.
P2 4
P1 3 KFC200/250 installations – If pin B of the
DH + 26 KI258/256 is powered by KA-285 pin A
DH - 8 8 then pin A should be moved to pin 11 of
the KI-250 as shown. See KRA-10A
installation manual for Note 6 “Optional
11 Dimming Bus” connection.

4 If the Rad Alt has a ON/OFF switch then

the DH light may come on when the
KI-258/256 switch is OFF. Use second contact of a
double pole switch to open the jumper
P1
from ACU P3-9 to P2-26.
KA-285
3 B DH Annun HI (28V)
5 If your Radar Altimeter System is not
Autopilot
Annunciator A existing wire
shown consult manufacturers’ reference
T DH Annun HI (14V)
documents for proper connection.
(move)
W DH Annun LO
Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to
6
verify the integration data and for
information regarding checkout procedures.
This drawing, as it pertains to the non-
Aspen equipment, is for reference only.

Figure 9-3 – Decision Height (DH) Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 166-367 Revision AC

GPS
EFD1000 KLN89/B KLX135
GX50
GX55 KLN35A
/60 KLN94 /A
Over Braid or
Double Shield P891
P1 P1 P1 P1
1 P941

RS232 IN PORT 2 (1) 9 (8) 5 6 2 10 12

1 Over shield or over braid required on this wire bundle to

Configuration Matrix comply with HIRF & Lightning. Extend within back shell.
(see Section 10) Ground at both ends.

ID#1 ID#2 Description 2 Configure RS-232 output to “Aviation” format on GPS.

F NONE GPS1, No GPS2
3 Optionally a twisted pair (22TG2V64) may be used with
NONE NONE No GPS1, No GPS2 the second conductor grounded at both ends.

4 Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to verify the

integration data and for information regarding checkout
procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the non-Aspen
equipment, is for reference only.

Figure 9-4 – PILOT system Digital RS232 Interface

Figure 9-5 – PILOT system Digital ARINC 429 Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 167-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-6 - PRO Single Digital with "Tracker" or no Autopilot Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 168-367 Revision AC

This drawing is used for a single GNAV and autopilot interface only.
Use Figure 9-8 if adding a second GPS or Analog Nav2 receiver.

GNAV
EFD1000 2 2 6
GNS430/W CNX-80
GTN6xx/7xx
GNS530/W GNS-480
Over Braid or
Double Shield P1001 P1004 Px001 Px006 P5
1
429 GPS RX1A 16 _ 46 _ 4 4
10
429 GPS RX1B _ _
17 29 47 24
ACU/ACU2
P1
429 RX2A 1 _ 24 _ 24 5 4
_ 23 _ 23 25
429 RX2B 2

P3
_
429 TX2A 4 48 48(50) _ 8
5
67 _ 49(51) _
429 TX2B 5 28

25 57
1 See Fig 9-28A for optional
Over Braid or
Double Shield P3 air data interface

Autopilot
VLOC/ACU RX2A 18 2 429 TX1A
A
VLOC/ACU RX2B 19 15 429 TX1B U
T
See Figure:
O
PFD 429 TX1A 26 1 429 RX1A P
I 9-16 to 9-22 for Autopilot
PFD 429 TX1B 27 14 429 RX1B L
O
9-23 for Flight Director
T

1 Over shield or over braid required on this wire

bundle to comply with HIRF & Lightning. Extend Configuration Matrix
within back shell. Ground at both ends.
(see Section 10)
2 See Figure 9-27 for GNAV configuration. ID#1 ID#2 Description
GNS430, No GPS2
3 Use pins 48 & 49 or 50 & 51 not both. B NONE No NAV2
With Autopilot
4 Pins 4 & 24 may be swapped with pins 5 & 25 if *GNS530, GNS480 and GTN650/750 use
configured accordingly. same config as GNS430

5 If 429 IN 1 is in use see manufacturers installation

instructions and wire to another unused 429 IN Port.

6 Requires GNS-480 SW v2.3. See Figure 9-27 for GNS-

480 configuration.

7 Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to verify the

integration data and for information regarding
checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains
to the non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.

Figure 9-7 – PRO Single Digital with Autopilot Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 169-367 Revision AC

This drawing is used for a single GNAV with a GPS2 and/or NAV2 and with
or w/o autopilot interface. Use Figure 9-7 if No GPS2 and No Analog Nav2 receiver.
GNAV #1
2 2 6
EFD1000
GNS430/W CNX-80
GTN6xx/7xx
GNS530/W GNS-480
Over Braid or
Double Shield P1001 P1004 Px001 Px006 P5
1
429 GPS RX1A 16 _ 46 _ 4 4
10
429 GPS RX1B _ _
17 29 47 24

1
429 VLOC RX2A 18 _ 24 _ 24 5 4
_ 23 _ 23 25
429 VLOC RX2B 19
ACU/ACU2
P3
optional _
429 TX2A 4 48 48(50) _ 8
5 3
429 VLOC RX3A 20 A429 _ 49(51) _
429 TX2B 5 67 28
429 VLOC RX3B 21 GPS2
25 57
Over Braid or See Fig 9-28A for optional
Double Shield P3 air data interface

ACU RX4A 22 2 429 TX1A

RS-232/Analog GPS #2 - optional
ACU RX4B 23 15 429 TX1B
To
G
P
EFD1000 RS-232 Flight Plan See Figure:
PFD 429 TX1A 26 1 429 RX1A S
Pin 9

PFD 429 TX1B 27 14 429 RX1B # 9-12 for KLN89/B & KLN94
2
9-13 for KLN-90/A/B
I 9-14 for GX-50/60 & GX-55/65
N
1 Over shield or over braid required on this wire P
bundle to comply with HIRF & Lightning. U
T
Extend within back shell. Ground at both
ends.
2 See Figure 9-27 for GNS and GTN configuration.

3 Use pins 48 & 49 or 50 & 51 not both.

Analog VLOC #2 - optional
V
4 Pins 4 & 24 may be swapped with pins 5 & 25 L
if configured accordingly. O See Figure 9-15 for:
C
5 If 429 IN 1 is in use see manufacturers
installation instructions and wire to another #
2
KX-155(A) &165(A)
unused 429 IN Port. KN-53
6 Requires GNS-480 SW v2.3. See Figure 9-27 I
KX-170A/170B/175/175B
N
for GNS-480 configuration. Optional
P
U
Back-Up SL-30
7 Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to Nav
T Indicator
verify the integration data and for information
regarding checkout procedures. This drawing,
as it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is See Figure 9-24, 9-25, 9-26 for
for reference only. Back-Up NAV recommendations.
Autopilot-optional
Configuration Matrix
(see Section 10)
A
ID#1 ID#2 Description U See Figure:
T
GNS430, No GPS2,
A D NAV2
O
GNS430, 232 GPS2,
P 9-16 to 9-22 for Autopilot
A F I
No NAV2
L 9-23 for Flight Director
GNS430, 232 GPS2, O
A H NAV2 T
GNS430, A429 GPS2,
A B NAV2
*GNS530, GNS480 and GTN650/750
use same config as GNS430

Figure 9-8 – PRO Digital & Analog Mix with or without Autopilot Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 170-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-9 - PRO Dual Digital without Autopilot Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 171-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-9 A– PRO Dual Digital with Autopilot

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 172-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-9 B – ARINC 429 EFIS with cross-side EFD1000

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 173-367 Revision AC

A429 EFIS (i.e.,G500/600) with cross-side EFD1000 and ACU2

(requires EFD1000 sw v2.3 and later)
Note – Due to the requirement for the EFIS to have High Speed GPS and Low Speed VLOC, the A429 inputs to the EFD1000
must be wired as shown and configured as below.
EFD1000 GNAV #1
GNS430/W CNX-80
GTN6xx/7xx
GNS530/W GNS-480
Over Braid or EFIS GPS1 Rx A P1001 P1004 Px001 P5
Px006
Double Shield
EFIS GPS1 Rx B
429 GPS RX1A 16 _ 46 _ 4
10
_ _
429 GPS RX1B 17 29 47 24
ACU2 EFIS GPS1 Rx A
P1
EFIS GPS1 Rx B
_ _
429 RX2A 1 24 24 5
_ 23 _ 23 25
429 RX2B 2

P3
_
429 TX2A 4 EFIS TX A 48 48(50) _ 8
N/C 1 _ _
429 TX2B 5 EFIS TX B 67 49(51) 28
1

Over Braid or
Double Shield P3 ADF/Rad Alt/Autopilot
A429 RX3A 20 2 429 TX1A See Figure:
A429 RX3B 21 15 429 TX1B 9-16 to 9-22 for Autopilot
9-23 for Flight Director
EFD 429 TX1A 26 1 429 RX1A 9-28 for ADF/Rad Alt/Rmt
EFD 429 TX1B 27 14 429 RX1B OAT/ARINC 407 synchro
HDG

GNAV #2
GNS430/W CNX-80
GTN6xx/7xx
GNS530/W GNS-480
Over Braid or
EFIS GPS1 Rx A P1001 P1004 Px001 Px006 P5
Double Shield
EFIS GPS1 Rx B
429 RX2A _ 46 _ 4
18 10
_ _
429 RX2B 19 29 47 24
EFIS GPS1 Rx A

EFIS GPS1 Rx B
429 VLOC RX4A 22 _ _
24
24 5
429 VLOC RX4B 23 _ 23 _ 23 25

_
EFIS TX A 48 48(50) _ 8
1 _ _
EFIS TX B 67 49(51) 28

Configuration Matrix
EFD1000 Configuration Menu Page (sw 2.3 and later)
NAV NAV NAV ACU
GNAV GNAV Config
SETUP A SETUP B SETUP C CONFIG B
# Installed ID#1 ID#2 A429 IN PORT A429 PORT SPEED VLOC1 Speed A429 Tx Speed
IN 1 = GPS1, IN 2 = NONE IN 1 & 2 = HIGH, 3 & 4 = LOW Tx Speed = Low GPS1 = HS A429, GPS2 = HS A429,
1 B None IN 3 = VLOC1 + ACU, IN 4 = NONE Output = HIGH Rx Speed = Low VLOC1 = LS A429, VLOC2 = LS A429
IN 1 = GPS1, IN 2 = GPS2 IN 1 & 2 = HIGH, 3 & 4 = LOW Tx Speed = Low
2 B A IN 3 = VLOC1 + ACU, IN 4 = VLOC2 Output = HIGH Rx Speed = Low
GPS1 = HS A429, VLOC1 = LS A429

1 OBS connection from EFD1000 not possible if A429 EFIS is controlling this input. OBS operation will be performed
from cross-side EFIS. If it is desired to have the EFD1000 control one or both OBS input(s) then wire ACU2 TX2
Out pins 4&5 to GNAV pins 48&49. Do not connect both A429 EFIS and EFD1000 simultaneously to this input.

Figure 9-9 C - ARINC 429 EFIS with cross-side EFD1000 and ACU2

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 174-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-10 – PRO ARINC 429 GPS & Analog VLOC (1 or 2) with or without Autopilot

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 175-367 Revision AC

EFD1000 RS-232/Analog GPS #1

To
EFD1000 RS-232 Flight Plan
Pin 9 See Figure:
ACU/ACU2 #1
1
Over Braid or P3 9.12 for KLN89/B & KLN94
Double Shield
G
P
9.13 for KLN-90/A/B
GPS/VLOC RX2A 18 2 429 TX1A S 9.14 for GX-50/60 & GX-55/65
GPS/VLOC RX2B 19 15 429 TX1B I
N
P
U
T

Analog VLOC #1
V
L
O See Figure 9.15 for:
C

# KX-155(A) &165(A)
1
KN-53
Optional
KX-170A/170B/175/175B
Back-Up SL-30
Nav
Indicator

3 Autopilot - optional

1 A
Over Braid or U See Figure:
Double Shield T
O
PFD 429 TX1A 26 1 429 RX1A P 9.16 to 9.22 for Autopilot
I
L 9.23 for Flight Director
PFD 429 TX1B 27 14 429 RX1B
O
T

1 ACU/ACU2 #2 4
P3
Analog VLOC #2
1 429 RX1A V
L
14 429 RX1B O See Figure 9.15 for:
C
1
Over Braid or # KX-155(A) &165(A)
Double Shield 2
KN-53
429 VLOC RX4A 22 2 429 TX1A
Optional
KX-170A/170B/175/175B
429 VLOC RX4B 23 15 429 TX1B
Back-Up SL-30
Nav
Indicator

Configuration Matrix 1 Over shield or over braid required on this wire 4 Omit ACU #2 if using only 1 Analog Nav. ACU
bundle to comply with HIRF & Lightning. Extend #1 & #2 must be both the same base P/N 910-
(see Section 10) 0000x-xxx.
within back shell. Ground at both ends.
ID#1 ID#2 Description
See Figure 9.24, 9.25, 9.26 for Back-Up 5 Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to verify
G NONE
GPS1, No NAV1, 2 the integration data and for information regarding
No NAV2 NAV recommendations. If no GPS installed then
GPS1,NAV1, One backup NAV indicator is required. checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains
H NONE
No NAV2 to the non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.
H D GPS1, NAV1, NAV2
3 Autopilot must be connected to ACU #1

Figure 9-11 – PRO RS232 GPS & Analog VLOC (1 or 2) with or without Autopilot

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 176-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-12 – KLN89B & KLN94 RS232 and Analog to ACU Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 177-367 Revision AC

ARINC 429 is the preferred connection, see Figure 9-10

RS232 does not support GPSS

KLN-90/A/B
EFD1000 Over Braid or
Double Shield 1 P901

RS232 IN PORT 2 (1) 9 (8) 13 RS-232 OUT

4
ACU
P3

OBS COS + 19 37 OBS RESOLVER COS

OBS COS - 7
OBS SIN - 6 27 AC GROUND
OBS SIN + 18 26 OBS RESOLVER SIN
ROTOR (H) 20 31 OBS RESOLVER OUT
ROTOR (C) 8
2
1 Over shield or over braid required
K1
on this wire bundle to comply with NO
/GPS MODE SEL 17
HIRF & Lightning. Extend within
1 GPS DISPLAYED
back shell. Ground at both ends. NC
ACFT PWR 5
P2
KLN-90B ONLY. These pins are
2 /FCS-LOC 6 17 FCS LOC /ENG
not connected on KLN-90 and
KLN90A units. 16 APPR ACTIVE
/APPR ACTIVE 24
3 If existing installation has external
OBS/LEG switch then splice as /OBS-LEG 7 33 /OBS-LEG
Existing
shown. OBS/LEG
P1 switch
4 Pin 8 may be used provided the 3
interface does not include XM Wx GPS +TO 14 21 +TO
GPS +FR 7 20 +FROM
5 GPS selected on PFD requires
open to GPS. NAV1 or NAV2 GPS LAT FLG + 12 19 NAV FLG +
selected on PFD requires ground to
GPS. Use 14V or 28V SPDT relay GPS LAT FLG - 5
for K1, P/N M5757/10.
GPS +LT 4 25 D-BAR +LT/NAV FLG-
6 Optionally a twisted pair (22TG2V64)
GPS +RT 11 22 D-BAR +RT
may be used with the second
conductor grounded at both ends.

7 Refer to manufacturers’ GPS +UP 13 N/C

documentation to verify the GPS +DN 6 N/C
integration data and for information
regarding checkout procedures. This GPS Vert FLG + 15 N/C
drawing, as it pertains to the non-
Aspen equipment, is for reference GPS Vert FLG - 8 N/C
only.

Figure 9-13 – KLN-90/A/B RS232 and Analog to ACU Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 178-367 Revision AC

GX-50/55/60/65

GX-50
EFD1000 Over Braid or
GX-55 GX-60
GX-65
Double Shield 1
P1 P1

RS232 IN PORT 2 (1) 9 (8) 6 5 RS-232 OUT

6
ACU
4

_ OBS(HOLD)
/OBS-LEG 7 34
_ ACTIVE
/APPR ACTIVE 24 15

P1
_
GPS Vert FLG+ 15 28 Vert FLG+
_
GPS Vert FLG- 8 29 Vert FLG- 3
_
GPS +UP 13 30 Vert UP+
_
GPS +DN 6 31 Vert DN+

GPS +TO 14 2 12 +TO

GPS +FR 7 9 11 +FROM

GPS +RT 11 4 13 D-BAR +RT

GPS +LT 4 5 14 D-BAR +LT

GPS LAT FLG+ 12 11 10 FLG+

GPS LAT FLG- 5 10 29 FLG- 3

Over shield or over braid required on this wire

1 5 Configure RS-232 TX Port for “MovMap” in
bundle to comply with HIRF & Lightning. Extend GPS.
within back shell. Ground at both ends.
6 Optionally a twisted pair (22TG2V64) may be
2 The GX-50/55/60/65 do not have an OBS used with the second conductor grounded at
connection. both ends.

3 The GX-50/60 share pin 29 between Vert FLG- 7 Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to
and NAV FLG-. verify the integration data and for information
regarding checkout procedures. This drawing,
4 Pin 8 may be used provided the interface does as it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is
not include XM Wx for reference only.

Figure 9-14 – GX-50/60 & GX-55/65 RS232 and Analog to ACU Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 179-367 Revision AC

ACU KX155 KX155A

KX165A
KX170A/
KX165 170B/175B

P401 P901 A1 A2 P171

P2
_ _
NAV Composite 1 H H 3
Composite GND 20
4
_ _
/ILS Engage 2 8 8 4
GS +UP _ _ _
12 15 - S 15 - S
_ _ _
GS +DN 31 16 - T 16 - T
_ _
3 2
_ 17 - U
GS +FLG 13 17 - U
_ _ _
GS -FLG 32 14 - R 14 - R
1 1

See manufacturers’ documentation for

1 KX155/165 Nav units have dual GS outputs. Use 3
“Numbered” or Lettered pins, not both. Use unused KN-70/73/75 Glideslope connections.
pins independent from those driving a backup NAV
indicator if possible. Otherwise parallel as close to 4 Diode required when paralleling ILS Energize wire
with backup NAV indicator. See Figure 9-24. Use
NAV receiver as possible (see Figure 9-24 & 9-25) 1N4005.

2 Glideslope interface is for units with GS option. 5 Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to verify the
integration data and for information regarding
checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to
the non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.

2
ACU KN-53 SL-30

P532 P1
P2

NAV Composite 1 B 19
Composite GND 20 15 37
3
/ILS Engage 2 12 33
GS +UP 12 P 30

GS +DN 31 14 31
GS +FLG 13 13 28
GS -FLG 32 R 32

1 If paralleling GS signals with backup NAV indicator 3 Diode required when paralleling ILS Energize wire
then splice wires as close to NAV receiver as with backup NAV indicator. See Figure 9-24. Use
possible. Do not parallel at back of NAV indicator 1N4005.
(see Figures 9-24 & 9-25)
4 Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to verify the
integration data and for information regarding
2 See Figure 9-27 for SL-30 configuration.
checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to
the non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.

Figure 9-15 – Analog NAV Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 180-367 Revision AC

NARCO and Cessna ARC Radio Interfaces

Figure 9-15 A - Narco and Cessna ARC Navigation Radios

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 181-367 Revision AC

© Copyright 2012 Aspen Avionics Inc.
1 8 7 9 8 4 4
ACU
KAP/KFC- KFC-250(3")
KAP-140 KAP/KFC-200 KFC-225 KFC-275
100/150 w/ 065-5016-XX
P2951 KCP220 KCP220 KMC321
P1401 P1402 P1901 P1902 P2952 P2251 P2252 P2991 P2992
P3 P2201 P2202 P3211

CRS DATUM 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _
17 W W 16 W 32
2
HDG DATUM _ _ _ _ _ _ _
22 2 X H 2 H 16
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
CRS/HDG COM 11 27 20 M 28 M 33
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 _ _
19 S

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001
+15 OUT 9
HDG-CRS EXT 23

P2
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
+ RIGHT 18 25 17 A 26 A 2
24 _ U _ _ C 25 _ _ C 3 _ _
+ LEFT 37
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
+ LAT FLG 11 22 23 27
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- LAT FLG 30 23 24 26
_ 9 _ _ _ _ _ 11 _
+UP 16 V M 12 M
+DN 35 _ _ _ _ _ _ 28 _
10 19 K 52 K
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
+VERT FLG 17 31 21 C 14 C 27
_ 12 _ Y D _ _ 15 D _ _ 10 _
-VERT FLG 36
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
/ILS ENERGIZE 5 7 B AA 7 AA 22

PAGE 182-367
11 _ _ c _ _ c _ _ _
/HDG VALID 25 1 11 38

© Copyright 2012 Aspen Avionics Inc.

P3
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
/GPS MODE SEL 17 26 34
5

1 Autopilot can only be connected to ACU #1 in a dual 6 Installations with a Yaw system and a KRG331/332 10 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation
ACU configuration. rate gyro and are removing the KG102A may need to for autopilot-side integration information
install a peanut inverter if the KRG331/332 got its (including autopilot STC compliance data) and for
2 If the existing DG/HSI is to remain in the aircraft do 26VAC from the KG102A. autopilot and flight director checkout procedures.
not parallel HDG/CRS Datum with ACU. Cap and This drawing, as it pertains to the non-Aspen
7 If removing a KG-107 DG the KAP/KFC 19X computer

Figure 9-16 – KI525A Emulation (Bendix/King autopilot to ACU)

Stow at DG/HSI. equipment, is for reference only.
will need to have the Top Board Adapter Module
3 See Flight Director section Figure 9.23 for command bar changed so that CJ601 “DG/HSI Sel Strap” is correct.
interface. Otherwise the PFD HDG Bug will control HDG and
NAV modes, no CRS pointer input. Configuration Matrix
4 KFC-250/275 HDG & CRS Datum for 3" Instruments
(KCS-55A) only. (see Section 10)
8 If removing a DG reprogram the KAP140 or KFC225
autopilot computer for “HSI”.
5 GPS Mode Sel. If connected on a WAAS capable GPS ACU HSI TYPE = 0
it will not allow the autopilot’s vertical mode to couple. 9 ACU outputs not compatible with KFC19X-16
It can be connected on all other GPS types. computers as they have specific outputs for EFIS40.

Revision AC
EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual
EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual

3
ACU2 1
KFC-250(4")
w/ 065-5015-XX
KFC-325
KCP220 KCP220 KCP220 KMC321
P2991 P2992
P3 P2201 P2202 P2203 P3211

CRS DATUM 3 _ W _ _ 10 _
_ _ _ _
CRS/HDG COM 11 S 9
_ M _ _ 35 _
_ _ _ 34 _
HDG DATUM 22 H
_ _ _ _ _
36
21 H _ _ 11 _
HDG-CRS EXT HI 43
_ _ _ _ 22 _
HDG-CRS EXT LO 10

KVG350 pin E (26VAC Ref)

P2 KVG350 pin B (Ref Lo)

_ _ _ _
+ RIGHT 18 A 2
_ _ _ _
+ LEFT 37 C 3
+ LAT FLG _ _ _ _
11 48 27
4 4
- LAT FLG _ _ _ _ 26
30 49
_ _ 11 _ _
+UP 16 M
_ _ _ _
+DN 35 K 28
_ _ _ _
+VERT FLG 17 C 27
D _ _ _ _
-VERT FLG 36 10

/ILS ENERGIZE _ _ _ _
5 AA 22

/HDG VALID 25 c _ 38 _ _ _

1 Autopilot can only be connected to ACU #1 in a dual 3 KFC-250 HDG & CRS Datum for 4" Instruments
ACU configuration. only. KCP299 with 065-5015-XX Adapter Card
only.
2 If the existing DG/HSI is to remain in the aircraft do
not parallel HDG/CRS Datum with ACU. Cap and 4 KCP220 -15 and above p/n computers wire LAT
Stow at DG/HSI. FLG to pins 48&49, KCP220 -14 and below
computers wire to pins 27 and 26 of KMC321.
Configuration Matrix 5 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation
(see Section 10) for autopilot-side integration information (including
autopilot STC compliance data) and for autopilot
ACU HSI TYPE = 3
and flight director checkout procedures. This
drawing, as it pertains to the non-Aspen
equipment, is for reference only.

Figure 9-16 A– KFC250 (4”)/325 Autopilot to ACU

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 183-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-16 B– KFC300 Autopilot to ACU Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 184-367 Revision AC

Must also make HDG/CRS

connections per Figure 9-17A or 9-17B
SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM
ACU 20/30 40/50
SYSTEM 55
55X 60-2/65

P1 P1 P1 P2 P1 P2 109 110
P2
10 13 30 _ _ _
+ RIGHT 18 30 21
9 31 _ _ 23 _
+ LEFT 37 14 31
+ LAT FLG _ _ 13 _ 13 _ 24 _
11
- LAT FLG _ _ _ 14 _ _
30 14 6
_ _ _ _ 18 _ 46
+UP 16 18
_ _ _ _ _
+DN 35 19 19 45
_ _ _ _ _
+VERT FLG 17 1 1 77
_ _ _ 2 _ 2 _ 58
-VERT FLG 36

/ILS ENERGIZE _ _ _ _ _
5 32 32 16

P3
42 26 _ 49 _ _ _
/GPS MODE SEL 17 49
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
38
3
1 Autopilot can only be connected to ACU #1 in a
dual ACU configuration.
4 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for
2 See Flight Director section Figure 9-23 for autopilot-side integration information (including
command bar interface. autopilot STC compliance data) and for autopilot and
3 P2-38 is GPSS SELECT which is grounded when flight director checkout procedures. This drawing, as
there is an A429 GPSS direct connection between it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is for
GPS and 55X. When using the EFD1000 GPSS reference only.
only, this pin is left open.

Figure 9-17 – STEC Autopilot to ACU Interface (minus HDG/CRS Datum)

SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM

ACU 1 20/30 40/50
SYSTEM 55
55X 60-2/65

P1 P1 P1 P2 P1 P2 109 110
P3
_ _ 11 _ 11 _ _
CRS DATUM 3 20
31 28 _ 28 _ _
HDG DATUM 22 8 19
29 _ _ _
CRS/HDG COM 11 7 29 29 13
_ _ _ _ _ _
12 12
+15 OUT 9 _ _ _
35 46 44 44 37
HDG-CRS EXT 23

1 CRS/HDG Datum is wired to simulate a KI-525A 3 If the existing DG/HSI is to remain in the aircraft do
HSI. If existing HSI is other than KI-525A then not parallel HDG/CRS Datum with ACU. Cap and
autopilot needs to be modified to accept KI525A Stow at DG/HSI.
inputs. See Figure 9-17B for NSD-360 interface.
4 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for
2 If existing installation used a DG then a DG Select autopilot-side integration information (including
jumper may need to be removed. Refer to S-TEC autopilot STC compliance data) and for autopilot and
reference material. flight director checkout procedures. This drawing, as
it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is for
Configuration Matrix reference only.
(see Section 10)

ACU HSI TYPE = 0

Figure 9-17 A– KI525A Emulation (STEC Autopilot)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 185-367 Revision AC

NOTE:
For best performance it is strongly recommended to configure the
STEC computer for a KI-525 interface and wire per Figure 9-17A.

REMOVE
ACU 1
P3 STEC
AP Computer
HDG-CRS OFFSET 25 NSD-360 (configured for
NSD-360)

66.5K 1% P1

HDG-CRS EXT 21 20 EXC. +10Vdc

NC 19 EXC. GND

CRS DATUM 3 22 CRS Datum 3

HDG DATUM 22 21 HDG Datum

HDG-CRS EXT 23 NC

1 CRS/HDG Datum is wired to simulate a NSD-

360 HSI. If existing HSI is other than an NSD- Configuration Matrix
360 then it is recommended to use Figure 9-17A (see Section 10)
and configure and wire as a KI-525A emulation.
Set ACU HSI TYPE = 1
2 66.5K 1% 1/4W resistor will scale the output as
follows:

HDG BUG DATUM VOLTAGE

-90º 0.5 Vdc
0º 5.0Vdc
+90º 9.5Vdc

3 CRS Datum applies to STEC 55, 55X, 60, 65 only.

4 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for

autopilot-side integration information (including
autopilot STC compliance data) and for autopilot and
flight director checkout procedures. This drawing, as
it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is for
reference only.

Figure 9-17 B– NSD360A Emulation (STEC Autopilot)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 186-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-18 – Century Autopilot to ACU Interface (minus HDG/CRS Datum)

Figure 9-18 A– NSD360A Emulation (Century 21/31/41/2000)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 187-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-18 B– NSD360A Emulation Century 1C388/M, 1C388C/MC Radio Couplers

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 188-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-18 C- NSD360A Emulation Century 1C388-2/-3 Radio Couplers

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 189-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-18 D- NSD-360A Emulation Century IV (DC version)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 190-367 Revision AC

3 4
300B/400B/800B
ACU CA-550A/FD

J1-P4 J2-P5
To other A/P
P3 equipment
(parallel wiring)

HDG-CRS EXT 23 10 _

CRS/HDG COM 11 _
21
_
HDG DATUM 22 24

2 CRS DATUM 3 _ 17

P2
18 _
+ RIGHT 2
_ 5
+ LEFT 37
+ LAT FLG _ _
11
- LAT FLG _ _
30
18 _
+UP 16
_
+DN 35 17
_ _
+VERT FLG 17
_ _
-VERT FLG 36

5 _ 9
/ILS ENERGIZE

1 Autopilot can only be connected to ACU #1 in a dual 6 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation
ACU configuration. for autopilot-side integration information
(including autopilot STC compliance data) and for
2 Existing DG installations must make CRS Datum autopilot and flight director checkout procedures.
connection as shown to gain full HSI features.
This drawing, as it pertains to the non-Aspen
Remove Jumper from J2-17 to J1-21 if installed.
equipment, is for reference only.
3 See Flight Director section Figure 9-23 for
command bar interface. 5 CA-550/FD J1-24 and J2-17 may have been
previously connected to ground if they were unused.
These prior connections must be removed.
4 Note – autopilot connections are shown at CA-550A/FD
computer but may route through the S-550A Mode
selector or A/P Accessory Unit. Wire as shown or ACU
may be connected to these units provided NAV1 and Configuration Matrix
NAV2 inputs are jumpered together. (see Section 10)

Set ACU HSI TYPE = 1

Figure 9-19 – Cessna ARC 300B/400B/800B Autopilot to ACU Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 191-367 Revision AC

2
Cessna 300/400/800
ACU IFCS
Mode AP
Controller Computer
Other A/P
S530A CA530FD
P3 equipment
(parallel if other J3/P18 J1/P16
wires exist)

HDG-CRS EXT 23 _ E
_
EXT LO 10 F

HDG DATUM E _
22
C _

CRS DATUM 3 _
V
HDG/CRS COM 11 k _

b _

m _
P2
_
+ RIGHT 18 U
T _
+ LEFT 37
a _

Z _

N _
+UP 16
+DN 35 P _

d _
_
f

5 S _
/ILS ENERGIZE
Y _

1 Autopilot can only be connected to ACU #1 in a dual 4 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for
ACU configuration. autopilot-side integration information (including
autopilot STC compliance data) and for autopilot and
2 The EFD1000 is not currently compatible with the flight director checkout procedures. This drawing, as
Flight Director output of the CA-530FD. Keep it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is for
existing G519FD indicator in pilot field of view. reference only.
3 CRS Datum, LT/RT, UP/DN, and ILS Energize are
paralleled to both the Nav1 and Nav2 inputs on the Configuration Matrix
S530A. This is so that the EFD1000 will drive the (see Section 10)
autopilot no matter the position of the Nav1/2
selector switch. Set ACU HSI TYPE = 1
Set ACU DATUM = REVERSED

Figure 9-19 A– Cessna Navomatic 300/400/800 IFCS to ACU Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 192-367 Revision AC

This interface drawing pertains to a 400 or 400A system with

the following Mode Controller and AP Computer combinations:
3 C-420 and a CA-520/B
C-520A/B and a CA-520/B
C-520A/B and a CA-530A
C-530A and a CA-530A

NAVOMATIC 400/400A
AP Mode Controller AP Computer
ACU C-520A/B C-530A C-420A CA-520/B CA-530A

P3 P1 P3 P1 P2 P1 P3 J1/P10 P5

_ _ _ _ _
HDG-CRS EXT 23 B B B 400Hz Ref Source (10Vac)
1 _ _ _ _ _ _
EXT-OFFSET 25 A D 400Hz Ref Common (4.5Vdc)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
EXT-COM 10 C 400Hz Ref Common

HDG DATUM 22 _ _ _ _ _
E A A HDG GYRO Signal IN
CRS DATUM 3

_ _ _ _ _
2 M X M GND= NAV, OPEN= HDG
K1
N _ R _ N _ _ _ AP ON (14V or 28V)

Existing wire between

controller and computer _ _ _ _ _ _ L X
amp. Insert diode in line.

18 _ _ _ _ _ _
+ RIGHT M B
4 _ _ _ _ _ _
+ LEFT 37 N A

_ _ _ _ _ _ _
+UP 16 C
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
+DN 35 D
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ a
ILS Energize 5

1 Verify 10Vac goes to ACU P3-23 and 4.5Vdc goes to 4 The R/L output is no different than any previous HSI/
ACU P3-25 before connecting the ACU. Sometimes NAV interface and may need to be run through a
the 10Vac and 4.5Vdc signals are reversed at the Backcourse relay circuit in the Cessna audio control
mode controller. panel or other existing BC relay box.

2 The relay allows the HDG Bug to be used in heading 5 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for
mode and the CRS Pointer to be used in NAV/APPR autopilot-side integration information (including autopilot
modes. Optionally the relay may be omitted and ACU STC compliance data) and for autopilot and flight director
P3-22 wired directly to HDG GYRO Signal IN of the checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the
mode controller (HDG Bug will be used in HDG and non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.
NAV modes). K1 must be rated for 14V or 28V
depending on autopilot operating voltage, P/N M5757/ Configuration Matrix
10. Diodes are 1N4005. (see Section 10)

3 If the mode controller has a integrated HDG knob then it Set ACU HSI TYPE = 1
must be modified to work with an external DG. Set ACU DATUM = REVERSED

Figure 9-19 B– NAVOMATIC 400/400A Autopilot to ACU Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 193-367 Revision AC

300A
Navomatic
CA-395A CA-395A
(DC Datum) (AC Datum)

ACU 1 2
P3 J1 J1

n/c 23 4.5Vdc reference

HDG-CRS OFFSET 25
66.5K 1%
1

HDG-CRS EXT 21 17 n/c 9Vdc reference

HDG-CRS EXT 23 n/c 20 2Vac reference

CRS/HDG COM 11 18 18
HDG DATUM 22 20 17

P2
+ RIGHT 18 9 9
+ LEFT 37 11 11
13 13

/ILS ENERGIZE 5 15 15
3

1 When replacing IG-832C, DC version HSI

Configuration Matrix
ARC computer p/n 42660-2x0x only. (A3) Heading (see Section 10)
Demodulator Assembly p/n 43368-0001
1
Connect 66.5K 1% 1/4W resistor from ACU P3 – 21 to pin 25
with 21 also connected to CA-395 pin 17. Output is as follows: Set ACU HSI TYPE = 1

HDG BUG DATUM VOLTAGE

-90º 0.5 Vdc
0º 4.5Vdc
+90º 8.5Vdc

2 When replacing G-502A or 504A, AC version DG

ARC computer p/n 42660-12XX

Do not use Resistor. Connect ACU P3-25 to CA-395 pin 23.
Output as follows:
2
HDG BUG DATUM VOLTAGE
-90º 2.0 Vac Set ACU HSI TYPE = 1
0º 0 Vac Set ACU DATUM = REVERSED
+90º 2.0 Vac
The ac voltages will ride on a 4.5Vdc offset voltage

3 ILS Energize out may be used to operate a BC relay in the

Cessna Audio Control panel or external BC relay as needed.

4 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for autopilot-

side integration information (including autopilot STC compliance
data) and for autopilot and flight director checkout procedures.
This drawing, as it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is for
reference only.

Figure 9-19 C– Cessna ARC 300A AC & DC version to ACU Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 194-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-19 D– Cessna 300 Navomatic to ACU Interface

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 195-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-19 E – Cessna ARC 1000A IFCS Interface (-102 ACU2 only)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 196-367 Revision AC

2
FCS-810 ACU

CA-814A P2

E 18 + RIGHT
3
F 37 + LEFT

A 16 + UP

B 35 + DOWN

existing wire Bendix PS-815/819

Power Adapter
26VAC 400Hz
P6-F P3
1
r EXC HI 21 DATUM EXCITATION

BB EXC LO 10 SIGNAL COMMON

T1
10K :10K
HDG HI
z 4 1

2
5
22 HDG DATUM
HDG LO 6
t 3

4
T1
10K :10K
CRS HI 4 1
C
5 2
3 CRS DATUM
CRS LO 6 3
D

T1 – Use Triad SP-66 MIL No. TF5S21ZZ.

1 A resistor may be inserted in series with the 26V Exc Hi 5 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for
line connected to ACU P3-21 if lower HDG/CRS gain is autopilot-side integration information (including autopilot
required. STC compliance data) and for autopilot and flight director
checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the
2 Flight Director interface not supported at this time. non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.
3 Some CA-814A have the L/R output reversed.
Perform ground test to determine if E&F must be Configuration Matrix
reversed. (see Section 10)

4 Previous wiring diagrams showed ground from ACU Set ACU HSI TYPE = 3
pin 11 to T1 pin 3. Wiring was changed to ground T1-
Set ACU DATUM = NORMAL
3 from CA-814 to prevent CRS Datum interference in
to HDG Datum signal.

Figure 9-20– Bendix FCS-810 Autopilot to ACU

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 197-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-20 A– Bendix M-4C and M-4D Autopilot to ACU

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 198-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-21 – Collins AP-106/107 Autopilot to ACU

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 199-367 Revision AC

NOTE – The SPZ-200A/500 require ACU2 (P/N 910-00004-102)

due to the requirement for Superflag inputs.

2 ACU2 SPZ-200A and SPZ500

910-00004-102 only
FZ-500 SP-200
P3
To other A/P J1A J1B J1B
equipment
(parallel wiring)

_ _
HDG-CRS EXT 21 7
_ _ 5
EXT LO 10

HDG DATUM 22 36 _ _

CRS/HDG COM 11

CRS DATUM 3 _ _
41
CRS/HDG COM 11 37 _ _

P2
_ _
+ RIGHT 18 21
_ _
+ LEFT 37 20

3 K1
ACU C/B
+28V _ _
16
NAV Flag Discrete 4
_ _
+UP 16 16
_ _
+DN 35 17

3 K2
ACU C/B
+28V _ 7 _
G/S Flag Discrete 25

_ _
/ILS ENERGIZE 5 22
_ _
23

1 Autopilot can only be connected to ACU #1 in a dual 5 See Figure 9-23H for Flight Director interface
ACU configuration.
6 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for
2 ACU2 p/n 910-00008-002 required for Superflag output. autopilot-side integration information (including autopilot
STC compliance data) and for autopilot and flight director
3 K1 and K2 must be mounted as close to the ACU as checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the
practical. Use 28V relay for K1 and K2, P/N M5757/10- non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.
039.

4 The Directional Gyro (C-14) has several FD and AP Configuration Matrix

interlocks (J1-h to J1-j and J1-d to J1-e). When the HSI (see Section 10)
is removed it may be necessary to supply +28V to FZ500
J1A-23. Set ACU HSI TYPE = 3

Figure 9-22 – Sperry SPZ200/500 Autopilot (-002 ACU2 only)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 200-367 Revision AC

Bendix King KI254/256 FD

EA100
installations
see Appendix F

3 3

ACU KI-254 KI-256

or P1 P1
P2
FD VALID 27 H H
FD PITCH COM 14 N N
FD ROLL COM 15
FD PITCH 33 L L
FD ROLL 10 M M
1
Configuration Matrix
(see Section 10)

FD ENGAGE 9 P P Set ACU FD TYPE = 1

AP FD Power
AP CMD Bar Ref
AP CMD Bar Pitch
AP CMD Bar Roll
AP FD Engage

1 Install two diodes in opposite polarity as shown to 3 Non EA100 installations – Flight director wiring may
emulate the diode circuit inside the KI256. These be paralleled to both ACU and KI 254/256.
diodes are required when the KI256 is removed from
aircraft for proper autopilot and flight director EA100 installations – Do Not parallel flight director
operation. It is recommended that these diodes are wiring to KI 254/256 if the instrument is being
installed in all installations. Use Aspen P/N 122- retained.
00031-001 or 1N4003 (200v). Note – the side of the
diodes shown to aircraft ground may instead be 4 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for
connected to ACU P2 pins 14 and 15 (which is ACU autopilot-side integration information (including autopilot
flight director ground). STC compliance data) and for autopilot and flight director
checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the
2 S-TEC Systems that are retaining the KI-256 must non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.
cap and stow existing FD wiring to the KI-256 and
wire the ACU per Figure 9-23D or 9-23E. The ST-670
and ST-645 cannot drive both loads.

Figure 9-23 – KI-256 Emulation (Bendix King) Flight Director

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 201-367 Revision AC

Century 41/2000 FD

ACU 3
P2 52C77 52C77 Configuration Matrix
( )(-2) (-3) (-4)
(see Section 10)
CD-64 CD-144
FD VALID 27 N/C
Set ACU FD TYPE = 4
FD PITCH COM 14 F 12
2
FD PITCH 33 J 11

FD ROLL COM 15 K 28
FD ROLL 34 H 10
FD ENGAGE 9 N/C - -

PITCH STRG RET

PITCH STRG
1 ROLL STRG #2

1 Existing Flight Director wiring may be paralleled 3 Software version A-02-178-1.1, or later is
with ACU Flight Director input. (--------) lines are required. Software version is marked on ACU.
existing aircraft wiring. See Note 2 if not
paralleling indicator. 4 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for
autopilot-side integration information (including autopilot
2 If connecting the Century Autopilot computer to the ACU STC compliance data) and for autopilot and flight director
without a paralleled 52C77 indicator, then a load resistor checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the
will be required as shown. For a 14V Century 41/2000 non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.
the resistor is 15.8ohms 10W, and for a 28V Century 41/
2000 the resistor is 31.6ohms 10W. The roll output does
not require a resistor.

Figure 9-23 A– 52C77 Emulation (Century 41/2000) Flight Director

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 202-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-23 B– 52C77 Emulation (Century IV) Flight Director

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 203-367 Revision AC

Cessna ARC G-550A/1050A

ACU 2 G-550A G-1050A

P2 P1 P1
Configuration Matrix
FD VALID 27 1 24 3 (see Section 10)

FD PITCH COM 14 26 27
Set ACU FD TYPE = 3
FD ROLL COM 15
FD PITCH 28 10 28
FD ROLL 10 9 26
FD ENGAGE 9 8 24 3

AP FD Power
AP CMD Pointer Com
1 AP Pitch CMD Pointer
AP Roll CMD Pointer
AP FD Engage

1 Existing G-550A Flight Director wiring may be 4 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for
paralleled with ACU Flight Director input. autopilot-side integration information (including autopilot
(-------) lines are existing aircraft wiring. STC compliance data) and for autopilot and flight director
checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the
non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.
2 Software version A-02-178-1.1, or later is
required. Software version is marked on ACU.

3 Pin 24 is paralleled to ACU pin 9 & 27.

Figure 9-23 C– G550A/1050A Emulation (Cessna ARC) Flight Director

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 204-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-23 D– KI256 Emulation (STEC 55/55X/60/65) Flight Director

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 205-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-23 E– Reserved

Collins FD-112V

Collins FD
AP106/107
ACU2 1
913K-1
161H-1
910-00004-101 913K-1A
J1 J1 J2
P2
_ _
FD VALID 27 33 Other
Collins
Autopilot
FD ROLL1 34 _ _ and Flight
28 Directors
FD ROLL COM 15 _ _
28 with 150mv/
deg pitch
and roll
20 _
FD PITCH1 33 52 command
_ _ bar signals
FD PITCH COM 14 8

1 ACU2 is required with Class III FD “Unlock” card.

Configuration Matrix
(see Section 10)
2 ACU P2-27 is looking for open = FD Valid and +28v Set ACU FD TYPE = 10
= FD Invalid.

3 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for

autopilot-side integration information (including autopilot
STC compliance data) and for autopilot and flight director
checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the
non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.

Figure 9-23 F – FD-112V Emulation (Collins) Flight Director

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 206-367 Revision AC

Bendix M-4D using FD-112V

Flight Director interface requires that the Collins FD Adapter
40007463-0501 be installed in the M-4D computer.

Before

Flight
Director
(existing) M-4D
FCS Autopilot
ON Computer
Master FD-112V P1 P2
28Vdc
_
z 39
OFF

After
Flight
Director 3
(existing)
FCS
ON
Master
28Vdc

OFF 2
Bendix M-4D FD
M-4D
ACU2 1 Autopilot
Computer
910-00004-101
P1 P2
P2
_
FD VALID 27 39

FD ROLL1 34 _
35
FD ROLL COM 15 _
36

_ 38
FD PITCH1 33
_ 37
FD PITCH COM 14

1 ACU2 is required with Class III FD “Unlock” card. 4 Refer to autopilot manufacturers’ documentation for
autopilot-side integration information (including autopilot
M-4D computer requires Collins adapter board STC compliance data) and for autopilot and flight director
2
40007463-0501 for FD-112V, FD-108/329B-7R. checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the
non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.
3 Existing FD on/off switch must be retained and
wired as shown. ACU P2-27 is looking for open =
FD Valid and +28v = FD Invalid.
Configuration Matrix
(see Section 10)

Set ACU FD TYPE = 10

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 207-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-23 G – FD-112V Emulation (Bendix M-4D) Flight Director

Figure 9-23 H – AD500 Emulation (Sperry) Flight Director

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 208-367 Revision AC

ACU
NAV Receiver
without internal
P2 NAV Converter

NAV Composite 1
KX-155
Composite GND 20
KX-155A
/ILS Engage 2
KNS-80/81
GS +UP 12
KN-53
GS +DN 31 SL-30
GS +FLG 13
GS -FLG 32

NAV Indicator
and Converter

KI-203
KI-204
KI-208
KI-209
KN-72

1 Parallel all lines shown maintaining shielding as 4 KX-165 and KX-165A’s may be connected as
required. Splice connections as close to NAV shown to these indicators or they may be
receiver as possible. Do not splice from back of connected to units with an OBS Resolver.
NAV indicator.
5 Complete ACU to NAV hook-up is shown on
2 GS lines will only be connected on NAV units Figure 9-15.
with this option.
Some Nav Receivers have multiple GS outputs. 6 Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to
3 verify the integration data and for information
Separate outputs should be used in lieu of regarding checkout procedures. This drawing,
paralleling the 4 wires when available. as it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is
for reference only.

Figure 9-24– Back-up NAV Indicator (Internal Converter)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 209-367 Revision AC

ACU
NAV Receiver
with internal
2 P2 NAV Converter

NAV Composite 1
Composite GND 20
/ILS Engage 2
GS +UP 12
GS +DN 31 3

GS +FLG 13
GS -FLG 32
KX-165
1 KX-165A
KNS-80/81
SL-30
NAV Indicator

KI-525A
KI-202 NAV FLG+
KI-206 NAV FLG-
CDI +RIGHT
KI-207 CDI +LEFT
KPI-552 + TO
GI-102/A + FROM
OBS RES A/H
GI-106/A OBS RES C
OBS RES D
OBS RES E
OBS RES F
OBS RES G

1 Parallel all lines shown maintaining shielding as 3 Some Nav Receivers have multiple GS outputs.
required. Splice connections as close to NAV Separate outputs should be used in lieu of
receiver as possible. Do not splice from back of paralleling the 4 wires when available.
NAV indicator.
4 Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to verify
2 Complete ACU to NAV hook-up is shown on the integration data and for information
Figure 9-15. regarding checkout procedures. This drawing,
as it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is
for reference only.

Figure 9-25 – Back-up NAV Indicator (OBS Resolver)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 210-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-26 – Back-up NAV/GPS Indicator (GNS-430/530)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 211-367 Revision AC

CNX-80/ GNS-480 (software 2.0 and below) NOTE 1 – GPS SDI Setting

This configuration is not authorized. The GNS-480 should be EFD1000 SW is v2.1 or below:
upgraded to software version 2.3 (see below) Set the SDI to COMMON on all single and dual 430/530 and
SYS1 or SYS2 for all single and dual GNS480.

EFD1000 SW is 2.2 and above:

CNX-80/ GNS-480 (software 2.3) Single GNS/GTN set to COMMON, Single 480 set to SYS1 or
SYS2.
GND MAINT - ARINC 429 SETUP Dual GNS/GTN - Set to LNAV1(SYS1) for GPS1 and
LNAV2(SYS2) for GPS2.
CH_IN SEL SPEED SDI
2 EFIS LOW See Note 1
GPS 155XL
CH_OUT SEL SPEED SDI
1 *GAMA 429 GFX Int LOW See Note 1 429 IN = SELECTED COURSE
2 VOR/ILS LOW SYS1 or SYS2 429 OUT = KING EFS 40/50

*GAMA 429 GFX Int – this configuration has Flight Plan

information. KLN-94
GND MAINT – MISCELLANEOUS SETUP
MAINTENANCE PAGE 7: *STANDARD RS-232 or
*ENHANCED RS-232
CDI SELECT: USE
*See Table 5-3 for details
With this configuration the EFD1000 will read the GNS480 CDI
logic state on the A429 bus and toggle between GPS and VLOC on
the PFD when pressing the GNS480 CDI button.
Garmin SL-30
EFD1000 will use GPS/NAV ID’s A and B The SL-30 can be connected to the EFD1000 in one of two
ways. The Resolver configuration is preferred.

GNS-430/530(W) & GPS-400/500(W) The composite output from the SL-30 to the PFD
will become invalid whenever VOR monitor mode or
MAIN ARINC 429 CONFIG Page localizer back course is selected on the SL-30. The
navigation source will show as failed on the PFD if either of
IN 1 Low Honeywell EFIS (when using pins 48/49) these two modes is entered and the SL-30 is the selected
or EFIS or EFIS/ADC* navigation source. If connected, the backup NAV indicator
IN 2 As required will continue to function if either of these two modes is
OUT Low GAMA 429 Graphics w/INT selected.

SDI See Note 1 VOR monitor mode or localizer back course

VNAV ENABLE LABELS (W models only) mode are disabled from selection on the SL-30. A backup
NAV indicator (GI-106) cannot be connected without a KN-
VOR/LOC/GS ARINC 429 CONFIG Page 72 between the SL-30 and indicator due to the fact that the
OBS resolver inputs become invalid with this configuration.
SPEED Low RX Low TX
SDI COMMON
* Note – Some GPS units require the EFIS config. ACU2 GTX-330 (When used as a Data
installs can use the EFIS/ADC config. Concentrator)
The ARINC channel that is connected to the EFD1000 (i.e.
GTN650/750 and GTN625/635/725 receiving the ARINC labels from the EFD1000) must be set
to “AHRS” on the GTX-330.
ARINC 429 CONFIG Page

IN 1 Low EFIS Format 3 or EFIS Format 2 if ACU2 Transponder or GPS using RS232 ADC
installed and using EFD1000 Air Data.
IN 2 As required
Output
OUT Low GAMA Format 3
GTX-330 – configure for ADC W/ALT if using the EFD1000
SDI See Note 1 as the encoding source. Configure for ADC NO ALT if
EFD1000 is not to supply encoding source but is used for
VOR/LOC/GS ARINC 429 CONFIG Page OAT/TAS and other labels.
GNS430/530 – configure for Shadin-adc or Shadin.
SPEED Low RX Low TX
GTN6xx/7xx – configure for Airdata Format 1 or Altitude
SDI COMMON
Format 3 as desired.
KLN90B - no config required
KLN89B/94 – Set RS232 Air Data = Y in Maintenance
Pages.

Figure 9-27 – Non-Aspen Equipment Configuration Notes

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 212-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-28 – Evolution Hazard Awareness – Traffic/XM/WX500

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 213-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-28 A - Digital Heading Outputs

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 214-367 Revision AC

From inverter or ARINC 407 Synchro

other 26V 400Hz source
ACU2 Heading “bootstrap”
26V 400Hz external ref H
P4 26V 400Hz external ref C Pin Description

Pxxx

26V 400HZ REF- H (in) 60 26V 400HZ REF- H (in)

26V 400HZ REF- C (in) 61 26V 400HZ REF- C (in)
1 or 1 or
400HZ REF HI (out) 25 26V 400HZ REF- H (in)
3
400HZ REF LO (out) 4 26V 400HZ REF- C (in)

HDG X 26 SYNCHRO X INPUT

HDG Y 5 SYNCHRO Y INPUT
HDG Z 27 SYNCHRO Z INPUT

2 /SYN-HDG VALID 52 HEADING VALID LO

1 The ACU2 and the device requiring the synchro heading 3 ACU2 26Vrms@400Hz reference output can support up to
input must use the same 400HZ reference. Either wire the 0.06VA. If more than one analog load is required use an
400HZ from the external source in to both the ACU2 and external inverter.
the device or use ACU2 400HZ output as reference to
device. Note if a external reference is connected to pins 4 Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to verify the
60/61, the ACU2 will disable the internal 400HZ reference integration data and for information regarding checkout
output on pins 25/4. procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the non-Aspen
equipment, is for reference only.
2 /SYN-HDG VALID is a active Lo output when the heading
system is valid. If the device requires a active Hi input
then use this output to drive a relay to invert the signal.
This output can sink up to 100ma to ground.
Configuration Matrix
(see Section 10)
ID#1 ID#2 Description
ACU2 connected.
S* None No GPS or NAV

*NOTE – The “S” configuration is only used

when no GPS/NAV or autopilot is connected but
features of the ACU2 are required (i.e., ADF/
Rad Alt/remote OAT, etc.)
If a GPS or NAV receiver is connected, use the
configuration on that drawing (Fig 9.6 thru 9.11)

Figure 9-28 B – ARINC 407 Synchro Output (ACU2 only)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 215-367 Revision AC

ACU2 ADF #1
P4 Bendix/King Other Compatible ADF
KR-87 Receivers
P872

ADF1 +SIN 31 A
ADF1 REF 10 D

ADF1 +COS 32 B
D 2

ADF #2
Bendix/King Other Compatible ADF
KR-87 Receivers
P872

ADF2 +SIN 33 A
ADF2 REF 12 D

ADF2 +COS 34 B
D 2

Radio Altimeter 1
Bendix/King Bendix/King Collins Sperry
ARINC 552 ARINC 429
KRA 10A KRA 405/B ALT50/55 RT200
TYPE 1 TYPE 4 TYPE 2 TYPE 3 TYPE 6 TYPE 7
P10A1 P4051 P1 BP P1
RADALT+ 20 8 K 57 47 W
RADALT- 42 12 b 59 46 N

RADALT VALID 21 6 S 8 12 Y

A429RX3A 24 429 TXA

A429RX3B 3 429 TXB

P2
DH+ 26
DH- 8 1 Configuration Matrix
(see Section 10)
ID#1 ID#2 Description
ACU2 connected.
S* None
1 See Figure 9-3 for DH interface. No GPS or NAV

2 KR-87 use pin D for Cos Lo and Sin Lo *NOTE – The “S” configuration is only used
when no GPS/NAV or autopilot is connected but
features of the ACU2 are required (i.e., ADF/
3 Refer to manufacturers’ documentation to verify the Rad Alt/remote OAT, etc.)
integration data and for information regarding checkout If a GPS or NAV receiver is connected, use the
procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the non-Aspen configuration on that drawing (Fig 9.6 thru 9.11)
equipment, is for reference only.

Figure 9-28 C – ADF and Radio Altimeter Interface (ACU2 only)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 216-367 Revision AC

ACU2 OAT Probe 1 3

2
P4 655-PROBE, 681201-1
black or white
OAT_SIG 13 OAT Output
OAT_+5V 11 5VDC Reference Input
Red

Configuration Matrix
(see Section 10)
ID#1 ID#2 Description
1 Compatible OAT Probes are: ACU2 connected.
Davtron P/N 655-PROBE S* None No GPS or NAV
Shadin P/N 681201-1
*NOTE – The “S” configuration is only used
when no GPS/NAV or autopilot is connected but
2 Sensor leads may be lengthened or shortened without features of the ACU2 are required (i.e., ADF/
Rad Alt/remote OAT, etc.)
affecting the calibration. If a GPS or NAV receiver is connected, use the
configuration on that drawing (Fig 9.6 thru 9.11)

3 Install probe using probe manufacturers instructions. Install

in a location unaffected by engine exhaust.

EFD1000 to ACU2 A429 OUT and IN Ports must be set to

4
“HIGH” in order for OAT information to be sent to the EFD.
OAT SOURCE must be set to “PROBE”.

Figure 9-28 D - Remote OAT Probe Connection (ACU2 only)

Figure 9-29 – Reserved

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 217-367 Revision AC

PFD with EFD1000 MFD or EFD500 MFD

EFD1000 PFD 7 EFD1000 MFD 7

A/P SOURCE
EFD500 MFD
PFD See Appendix F for
PFD optional PFD/MFD
MFD Reversion switch
MFD
REV
instructions

44 PIN 44 PIN

3 2
1 1
(optional)
RS-232 GPS

4
10

10 (optional)

EWR50
22 RS232_TX
4 RS-232_RX

5
(optional) (optional)
Existing WX-500 Display WX-500
10 10
8 20 RS232_TX
8 RS-232_RX

(optional)
Existing Traffic Display
10 10
(optional)

8 ARINC 429
Traffic Sensor
(TAS or TIS)

ARINC 429 OUT A

9
ARINC 429 OUT B

ARINC 429 IN A
6
ARINC 429 IN B

1 See Figures 9-6 to 9-11 for GPS/NAV connections. Parallel connections to 6 PFD or ACU A429 TX may be connected to the traffic sensor for Label 320
both the PFD and MFD from all A429 GPS/NAV and the ACU pins 2 &15. “Magnetic Heading” only. No traffic control panel functions are output by EFD1000
system.
2 ARINC 429 TX to the ACU or GPS A429 IN. See the EFD1000 Installation Inter-System Bus Configuration
Manual Figures 9-6 to 9-10 for connections 7 See Figure 9-1 for CM and RSM wiring connections DISPLAY RS232 PORT PORT SETTING

See the EFD1000 Installation Manual for Sonalert option. 8 See the existing Display’s Installation Manual for specifications. 232 IN PORT 4
EFD1000 MFD* or
3 EFD500 MFD*
PFD
9 See the existing Sensor’s Installation Manual for pin connections and complete 232 OUT PORT 2 EFD
4 Note, pre-existing RS232 GPS installations may be connected to PFD pin
interface to aircraft.
8. These must be re-pinned to PFD pin 9 when installing XM weather. 232 IN PORT 5 EFD1000 PFD
10
Carry shielding though all wire splices. RS232 wiring only - Optionally a MFD 500 or
See EWR50 Installation Manual for complete interface to aircraft. twisted pair (22TG2V64) may be used with the second conductor grounded MFD 1000
5 232 OUT PORT 2 EFD
at both ends in lieu of single conductor shown.
* Set to EFD1000 MFD or EFD500 MFD as per installed

Figure 9-30 - Two Display System PFD/MFD, Generic

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 218-367 Revision AC

© Copyright 2012 Aspen Avionics Inc.
RS232_RX0 31
RS232_RX1 8
RS232_RX2 9
RS232_RX3 10
RS232_RX4 11
RS232_RX5 12
RS232_TX0 30
RS232_TX1 13
RS232_TX2 14
RS232_TX3 15
ARINC 429_RX1A 16
ARINC 429_RX1B 17
ARINC 429_RX2A 18
ARINC 429_RX2B 19
ARINC 429_RX3A 20
ARINC 429_RX3B 21
ARINC 429_RX4A 22
ARINC 429_RX4B 23
ARINC 429_RX5A 24
EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual

Revision AC
ARINC 429_RX5B 25
Figure 9-30 A - Three Display System PFD/MFD1000/MFD500, Generic

ARINC 429_TX1A 26
ARINC 429_TX1B 27
RS232_RX0 31
RS232_RX1 8
RS232_RX2 9
RS232_RX3 10
RS232_RX4 11
RS232_RX5 12
RS232_TX0 30
RS232_TX1 13
RS232_TX2 14
RS232_TX3 15
ARINC 429_RX1A 16
ARINC 429_RX1B 17
ARINC 429_RX2A 18
ARINC 429_RX2B 19

© Copyright 2012 Aspen Avionics Inc.

ARINC 429_RX3A 20
ARINC 429_RX3B 21
ARINC 429_RX4A 22
ARINC 429_RX4B 23

PAGE 219-367
ARINC 429_RX5A 24
ARINC 429_RX5B 25
ARINC 429_TX1A 26
ARINC 429_TX1B 27
DIGITAL_OUT 7
RS232_RX0 31
RS232_RX1 8
RS232_RX2 9
RS232_RX3 10
RS232_RX4 11
RS232_RX5 12
RS232_TX0 30
RS232_TX1 13
RS232_TX2 14
RS232_TX3 15
ARINC 429_RX1A 16
ARINC 429_RX1B 17
ARINC 429_RX2A 18

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001
ARINC 429_RX2B 19
ARINC 429_RX3A 20
ARINC 429_RX3B 21
ARINC 429_RX4A 22
ARINC 429_RX4B 23
ARINC 429_RX5A 24
ARINC 429_RX5B 25
EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual

7 7 7 7 4

1
PFD with EFD1000 or EFD500 MFD
Config: (1A-2D) GNAV and Analog NAV#2 EFD1000 PFD EFD1000 MFD
Config: (1A-2H) GNAV and Analog NAV#2 and RS232 GPS#2
Config: (1A-2F) GNAV and RS232 GPS#2
EFD500 MFD

GNAV #1 7
GTN6xx GNS430/W GNS- 44 PIN 44 PIN
GTN7xx GNS530/W 480
P1001 P1004 Px001 Px006 P5 3
29 _ 47 _ 24
10 _ _ 4
46
_ _ 11
23 23 25
_ 24 _ 24 5

48 48(50) _ 8
_
_ _
67 49(51) 28

27 57 optional Air Data connection

11 (optional)
EWR50
22 RS232_TX
RS-232/Analog GPS #2 - optional 2 4 RS-232_RX
To PFD
11
RS-232 Flight Plan and MFD
Pin 9 (optional)
See Figure:
WX-500
9-12 for KLN89/B & KLN94 ACU 5 6
11
9-13 for KLN-90/A/B 20 RS232_TX
9-14 for GX-50/60/55/65
8 RS-232_RX

9
Analog VLOC #2 - optional
See Figure 9-15 for:

KX-155(A) &165(A) (optional)

KN-53
KX-170A/170B/175/175B ARINC 429
11
SL-30 Traffic Sensor
Autopilot-optional (TAS or TIS)

See Figure: ARINC 429 OUT A

9
9-16 to 9-22 for Autopilot ARINC 429 OUT B
Inter-System Bus Configuration
9-23 for Flight Director
P3 DISPLAY RS232 PORT PORT SETTING ARINC 429 IN A
EFD1000 MFD* or 10
ARINC 429_TX1A 2 232 IN PORT 4 A/P SOURCE ARINC 429 IN B
EFD500 MFD*
PFD PFD See Appendix F for
ARINC 429_TX1B 15 232 OUT PORT 2 EFD PFD optional PFD/MFD
ARINC 429_RX1A 1 Reversion switch
MFD 500 or 232 IN PORT 5 EFD1000 PFD MFD
ARINC 429_RX1B 14
MFD 1000
MFD
REV
instructions
232 OUT PORT 2 EFD
ARINC 429_TX2A 4
ARINC 429_TX2B 5 * Set to EFD1000 MFD or EFD500 MFD as per installed

1 This drawing is used for existing PFD installations that wired to Figure 9-8 5 See Figure 9-2 for ACU power and ground connections 10
ACU A429 TX2 (pins 4,5) may be connected to the traffic sensor for Label 320
or have one GNAV with Analog NAV and/or GPS. Other configurations “Magnetic Heading” only. No traffic control panel functions are output by EFD1000
must use their appropriate drawing. 6 See Figure 9-3 for DH wiring connections system
Existing PFD installation may have used pin 8 for the RS232 GPS connection. This 11 Carry shielding though all wire splices. RS232 wiring only - Optionally a
2 7 See Figure 9-1 for PFD/MFD power and CM/RSM wiring connections twisted pair (22TG2V64) may be used with the second conductor grounded
wire must be moved to pin 9 when adding the optional EWR50 XM receiver
at both ends in lieu of single conductor shown.
8 See the existing Display’s Installation Manual for specifications
3 See the EFD1000 Installation Manual for Sonalert option
See the existing Sensor’s Installation Manual for pin connections and
EFD500 installations do not use an RSM. 9 complete interface to aircraft
4

Figure 9-31 - Two Display System PFD/MFD, GNAV1 and Analog NAV#2 or GPS#2
Configurations (1A-2D) or (1A-2H) or (1A-2F)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 220-367 Revision AC

Figure 9-32 - Two Display System PFD/MFD, GNAV1 and GNAV2

Configurations (1B-2A) or (1B-2C)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 221-367 Revision AC

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 222-367 Revision AC

10 Configuration and Equipment Checkout

Print a copy of Appendix B – Installation Final Check Sheet prior to starting any tests. Log a Pass/Fail on
check sheet then sign and date upon completion. Include copy of form in permanent aircraft records.

NOTE: To avoid damage to the equipment, do not place the EFD1000 Display face down on the knobs.

The following Test Equipment will be required to complete the remaining steps in the ground test
procedure:
• Pitot Static Test Set
• NAV/ILS Signal Generator
• Digital Multimeter
• Electrical Bonding Tester

10.1 Post Installation Wiring Checks

10.1.1 Wiring Verification

Do not install the EFD, ACU, RSM or configuration module until instructed to do so in Section10.3.

1) Perform a continuity check on all wires between the EFD, ACU, RSM, Configuration Module
and their associated connections per wiring diagrams.

2) Verify over shields or over braids are installed on required wiring bundles.

3) Apply aircraft power and close the EFIS, MFD, and ACU circuit breakers and the EFIS and
MFD master switch if installed.

4) Verify proper voltage on EFD main connector pins 1, 2, and 3 and that there are proper
grounds on pins 4, 5, and 6.

5) If installed, verify proper voltage on ACU/ACU2 P1-10 and ground on P1-3.

10.1.2 Bonding Check – FAR 23.867(b)

1) Verify braided bonding strap is installed between EFD ground stud and airframe ground.

2) Verify EFD mounting bracket is bonded to instrument panel with no greater than 3
milliohms resistance.

3) Verify ACU(s) chassis is bonded to airframe with no greater than 3 milliohms resistance.

4) Verify RSM base plate or doubler plate is bonded to airframe with no greater than 3
milliohms resistance.

5) Verify EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery mounting bracket (if installed) is bonded to
airframe with no greater than 3 milliohms resistance.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 223-367 Revision AC

10.2 Database Installation

Each EFD1000 MFD and EFD500 MFD comes with a data card that must be installed during operation.
The EFD1000 PFD does not require a data card. See Section 1 “MFD Database Versions” for data card
types available.

If the data card is removed a “Database Failure” message will be shown when the system loads
additional data (normally the aircraft has flown some distance).

The data card contains Terrain, Obstacle, Cultural, NavData, and optionally Charts. The NavData,
Obstacle, and Cultural data is available for download on a 28-day cycle from Jeppesen. U.S.
Terminal Procedures Charts (Charts) are available for download on a 28-day cycle from Seattle
Avionics. Extra and replacement cards are purchased directly from Jeppesen. Jeppesen information
is available at 1-800-621-5377 or email [email protected]. Charts are available from Seattle
Avionics Software at www.seattleavionics.com

The data card is inserted in the card slot at the base the MFD. The data card (microSD card) is
inserted with the metal contacts facing down and toward the display. The card is inserted until it is
almost flush with the display bezel and locks into place. To remove the data card simply push in on
the card and it will eject part way. It can then be removed from the MFD.

10.3 Initial System Turn On

Remove power by pulling applicable circuit breakers. Install all EFD(s), ACU(s), RSM(s), and
Configuration Module(s). Push in all applicable circuit breakers and apply power. Verify the EFD
displays the initialization page after 5 seconds. The MFD will display database-loading information in
a small window at the bottom of the Navigation Map screen.

If a “Convert Config Module (CM)” message is displayed, press Convert. This will load the EFD
software level configuration pages to the configuration module.

Configure all systems using Section 10.4 prior to system check out.

NOTE: AHRS Flags may take up to 3 minutes to clear. Airspeed and Altitude flags may take up to
20 minutes to clear at temperatures below -20ºC.

NOTE: The MFD’s may require up to 3 minutes to completely load all database features. Menu
pages and configuration pages may be accessed during this time.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 224-367 Revision AC

10.4 System Configuration

Configure the EFD1000/500 system(s) prior to running the ground test procedure. The configuration
pages are accessed through the EFD display using the MENU button and the lower Right Control Knob
labeled MODE/SYNC.

10.4.1 Main Menu Access

Pushing the “MENU” button accesses the Main Menu operation. See PFD Pilot Guide and MFD Pilot
Guide for Main Menu operation.

10.4.2 Menu Navigation

When no fields are enabled for editing, rotating the right control knob clockwise advances to the
next menu page and counterclockwise advances to a previous
menu page.

Editable menu items are displayed in white text on a blue background, non-editable menus items
are green text on a blue background while grey text on a blue background is disabled from
editing.

10.4.3 Edit Mode

Pushing the line select key adjacent to an editable field enables the associated field for editing.
The field turns magenta when enabled and the right control knob reads “Edit Value”.

When the field is enabled for editing rotating the right control knob will adjust the value. Pushing
the right control knob or the adjacent line select key will exit from the editable field.

10.4.4 Main Menu Configuration

The Main Menu consists of pages that are pilot selectable. Refer to the PFD Pilot Guide and MFD
Pilot Guide for Main Menu configuration if necessary.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 225-367 Revision AC

10.4.5 INSTALLATION MENU – UNIT CONFIGURATION

The Installation Menu is entered from the Main Menu’s “SYSTEM STATUS PAGE” (page 11 of 11).
Simultaneously push and hold the MENU key, Line Select Key #1 and Line Select Key #2 for 3
seconds while the airspeed is below 30 units.

Figure 10-1 – Installation Menu Access

Whenever the warning message in Figure 10-2 is displayed, pressing either control knob shall
advance the Installation menu.

WARNING:
THE INSTALLATION MENU CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
MUST BE SET IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPROVED
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. UNAUTHORIZED
MODIFICATION OF THESE INSTALLATION SETTINGS MAY
INVALIDATE THE TYPE CERTIFICATED STATUS OF THIS
AIRCRAFT AND/OR RENDER IT UNAIRWORTHY.

PRESS EITHER CONTROL KNOB TO ACCEPT

PRESS MENU KEY TO EXIT

Figure 10-2 – Installation Menu Warning

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 226-367 Revision AC

To exit the Installation Menu at any time press the MENU button. All data will be saved as
displayed. The system will reboot and “INITIALIZING” will appear on the display for approximately
40 seconds.

Select the appropriate section from the following pages that applies to your system or systems.
The EFD1000 PFD, EFD1000 MFD, and the EFD500 MFD have identical page layouts and
configuration options. The EFD500 MFD pages are unique in that some configuration options are
grayed out because they refer to a depopulated ADAHRS function.

• Section 10.4.6 -EFD1000 PFD and MFD (print twice for dual EFD1000 systems)
• Section 10.4.8 -EFD500 MFD
Record aircraft information at the beginning of the section and record the configuration in each
table as shown below.

Make a copy of the appropriate section with the information recorded for inclusion into Aspen
Avionics document #900-00012-001, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

Use section10.4.9– Configuration Definitions, to assist with configuration “Options” selection.

EXAMPLE:

Record Aircraft and Equipment Data

Installation Date:
Aircraft Model: EFD1000 S/N:
Aircraft Type: RSM S/N:
Aircraft S/N: ACU S/N:
CM S/N:

EXAMPLE:

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 9 – ACU CONFIG SW v1.0

Feature Options Actual Setting
ACU HSI TYPE 0,1 (0=KI525A, 1=NSD360)
ACU FD TYPE 0,1,3,4 (0=NONE,1=KI256, 3=G550)
ACU DATUM NORMAL, REVERSED
FD PITCH OFFSET ADJ -10.0 to +10.0 (degrees)
FD ROLL OFFSET ADJ -10.0 to +10.0 (degrees)
Notes:

Record installation as configured and wired

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 227-367 Revision AC

10.4.6 EFD1000 Installation Menu Configuration

Use this form for both the EFD1000 PFD and EFD1000 MFD

INSTALLATION MENU Configuration – EFD1000

Installation Date:
Aircraft Model: EFD1000 S/N:
Aircraft Type: RSM S/N:
Aircraft S/N: ACU S/N:
CM S/N:

WARNING: Only an appropriately rated mechanic or repairman (14 CFR 43.3) may set the values
on the IAS Config A and B menu pages. The values must match the certified speeds in the Aircraft
Flight Manual (AFM), Pilot Operating Handbook (POH), or other legal form of documentation (e.g.,
Placard).

The following menus are based on software version 2.5. Previous software levels do not have all
shown options below and some items have been moved to another menu page.

10.4.6.1 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - IAS CONFIG A

Aircraft that use a Vmo/Mmo airspeed indicator are shown in Table 10-1 (Section 10.4.8.1) and
will set the MOL TYPE to 2 thru 6. See Table 10-1 for MOL TYPE and MOL Parameter values. Set
the MOL MARKER/BAND to either a BARBER POLE or REDLINE depending on existing airspeed
indicator marking. MACH DSPL TYPE may be set to operator preference. This setting determines
when the airspeed tape changes from Vmo to Mmo, either at an Altitude or at a Speed.

All standard airspeed indicators (that use a Vne) will set the MOL TYPE to 1 and then enter the
Vne in the MOL PARAM VALUE field.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG A SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
MOL TYPE 1,2,3,4,5,6
MOL PARAM SEL See instructions in table below
MOL PARAM VALUE See instructions in table below
MOL MARKER/BAND BARBER POLE, REDLINE
MACH DSPL TYPE ALTITUDE, SPEED
Notes:

MOL MOL Parameter Description

Type Selection Options And Example
(Known Values)
1 Vne For this type, Vne is displayed as a fixed value. Set MOL TYPE = 1
Example: If Vne = 180Kts, enter 180 in the MOL PARAM VALUE field.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 228-367 Revision AC

MOL MOL Parameter Description

Type Selection Options And Example
(Known Values)
2 Vmo For this type, Vmo is displayed as a fixed value. Set MOL TYPE =2
Example: If Vmo = 210Kts, enter 210 in the MOL PARAM VALUE field.
3 Vmo For this type, Vmo and Mmo are known values. MAX ALT is the service ceiling
Mmo of the aircraft. Set MOL TYPE=3. Push line select key next to MOL PARAM SEL
and scroll to Vmo. Press line select next to MOL PARAM VALUE and rotate right
MAX ALT
knob until Vmo value is correct. Repeat for Mmo and MAX ALT
4 Vmo1 For this type, Vmo is displayed as a fixed value to a known altitude and then
ALT 1 Vmo decreases by # knots per # feet (were # is a number)

KNOTS or MPH
Example:
(depending on the
Vmo is 226 KIAS to 15,500 feet and then Vmo decreases 4 KIAS per 1,000 feet
setting on the IAS
Known values: Vmo=226, ALT1=15500, KNOTS=4, ALT2=1000, MAX ALT =
UNIT installation
A/C service ceiling.
menu setting)
Use MOL PARAM SEL to select Vmo/ALT1/KNOTS/ALT2
ALT 2
Use MOL PARAM VALUE to enter 226/15500/4/1000
MAX ALT
5 Vmo 1 For this type, the aircraft has multiple Vmo’s (Vmo x) that depend on different
ALT 1 altitudes (ALT x).

Vmo2
Example:
ALT 2
Vmo = 160 KIAS from 0 ft. to 5000 ft.
Vmo 3 Vmo = 155 KIAS from 5000 ft. to 10000 ft.
ALT 3 Vmo = 145 KIAS from 10000 ft. to 15000 ft.
Vmo 4
ALT 4 In this example Vmo1=160, ALT1=5000, Vmo2=155, ALT2=10000,
Vmo3=145, ALT3=15000
Vmo 5
ALT 5
This type can support up to 6 Vmo’s.
Vmo 6
ALT 6
6 Vmo 1 For this type, Vmo (Vmo1) is displayed as a fixed value to a known altitude
ALT 1 (ALT1) and then Vmo decreases in a straight-line variation between the Vmo1
altitude and a Vmo2 altitude (ALT2). ALT2 = aircraft maximum altitude.
Vmo 2
ALT 2
Example:
Vmo = 197 KIAS from 0 ft. to 15000 ft.
Vmo = 160 KIAS at 25000 ft.

In this example Vmo1=197, ALT1=15000, Vmo2=160, ALT2=25000

10.4.6.2 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG B

Set Speed Bands per Aircraft Flight Manual. Note- Vne is set on previous page.
OVERSPEED ALERT–A setting of DISABLE is the only valid configuration allowed under the STC at
this time.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG B SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
OVERSPEED ALERT DISABLE, ENABLE

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 229-367 Revision AC

Vno 0 to 450
Vfe 0 to 450
Vs 0 to 450
Vso 0 to 450
Notes:

10.4.6.3 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG C

Set Speed Markers per Aircraft Flight Manual.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG C SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
Vyse 0 to 450
Vmc 0 to 450
Triangle 0 to 450
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

10.4.6.4 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG D

These selections are rotorcraft only and are grayed out.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG D SW v2.2 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
Vne (power on) 0 to 450
Vne (power off) 0 to 450
MIN CAUTION SPD 0 to 450
MIN SAFE SPD 0 to 450
MAX AUTOROT SPD 0 to 450
Notes:

10.4.6.5 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG E

This menu is used to select the color of the airspeed tape speed bands so that they can exactly
match the existing airspeed indicator.

SPD Band 2 - Maximum structural cruising speed (Vno) to the never exceed speed (Vne). Yellow is
the default for piston engine aircraft. Set as required to match existing IAS indicator.
SPD Band 3 - No flap stall speed (Vs) to the maximum structural cruising speed (Vno). Green is
the default for piston engine aircraft. Set as required to match existing IAS indicator.
SPD Band 4 - Full flap stall speed (Vso) to the maximum flap extend speed (Vfe). White is the

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 230-367 Revision AC

default for piston engine aircraft. Set as required to match existing IAS indicator.

Note – “CLEAR” will render a tape marking (Speed Band) with no color, which will replicate certain
Vmo/Mmo mechanical airspeed indicators such as ones with a black background with white tick
marks and numbers.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG E SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
SPD Band 2 YELLOW, CLEAR
SPD Band 3 GREEN, WHITE, CLEAR
SPD Band 4 WHITE, CLEAR
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

10.4.6.6 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - IAS CONFIG F

IAS UNITS - Set per Aircraft Flight Manual.

TAPES - Configure based on Flowchart in Figure 10-3.
VPSD EDIT - Set based on “Operator Configuration Checklist” of Appendix C or to owner/operator
preference.
INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG F SW v2.0 and above
Feature Options Actual Setting
IAS UNITS kts, mph
TAPES UNLOCKED, LOCK OFF, LOCK ON
VSPD EDIT UNLOCKED, LOCKED
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

10.4.6.7 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - IAS CONFIG G (SW v2.2 and above)

IAS DISPLAY – DISABLE will remove the airspeed bug from the tape, the upper left window, and
the left knob. The window will continue identify the units (KTS or MPH) displayed on the airspeed
tape.
ALT DISPLAY – DISABLE will remove the altitude bug from the tape, the upper right window, and
the right knob. It also removes the MIN field.
BARO DISPLAY – When disabled will remove the BARO setting from the right knob and the BARO
display from the center Databar. The Disable setting will also remove the baro-corrected altitude
label from the A429 and RS232 busses.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 231-367 Revision AC

VSI DISPLAY (added sw 2.2.3) – Always On means the tape will always be displayed. Always Off
means the tape is always turned off. AUTO means the tape will declutter when the vertical speed
is between +/-100fpm. ALWAYS ON or AUTO are the only settings permitted under this STC.

CAUTION – Setting BARO DISPLAY to DISABLE may only be used when the TAPES are Locked Off
and it is a stand-alone PFD. PFD/MFD installations must be set to ENABLE.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG G SW v2.2 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
IAS DISPLAY DISABLE, ENABLE
ALT DISPLAY DISABLE, ENABLE
BARO DISPLAY DISABLE1, ENABLE 1(read Caution above)
VSI DISPLAY ALWAYS ON, ALWAYS OFF, AUTO*
Not Used
Notes: * ALWAYS ON or AUTO are the only permitted settings under this AML-STC

10.4.6.8 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SETUP A

The following menu will be used to configure the EFD1000 system for the installed GPS, NAV and
autopilot interfaces. The installation wiring diagrams in Section 9 have a Configuration Matrix
table that will be used to set ID#1 and ID#2.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SETUP A SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
GPS/NAV #1 NONE,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M,P,Q,R,S
GPS/NAV #2 NONE,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M

If no GPS or NAV’s are installed but the ACU is installed, then use Config 1S-2NONE

10.4.6.9 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SETUP B

The following menu will pre-fill based on the GPS/NAV #1/2 selections made on the previous
page. No changes required here unless it is required to change the GPS1/GPS2/NAV1/NAV2
order to accommodate parallel connection of the EFD1000 and a second EFIS system running GPS
and NAV at mixed A429 speeds (see Figure 9-9B and 9-9C for these connections).

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SET UP B SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
429 IN PORT 1 NONE, GPS1, VLOC1, VLOC1+ACU,
GPS1+ACU, GPS1+ACU+VLOC1, GPS2,
VLOC2, VLOC2+ACU, GPS2+ACU,
GPS2+ACU+VLOC2

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 232-367 Revision AC

429 IN PORT 2 Same as IN PORT 1 options

429 IN PORT 3 Same as IN PORT 1 options
429 IN PORT 4 Same as IN PORT 1 options
429 IN PORT 5 NONE, TRAFFIC*
* If setting is grayed out it is because this feature requires a “Unlock” card on PFD.

10.4.6.10 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SETUP C

A429 input ports will be set to HIGH or LOW. ADF/RAD ALT/remote OAT require high speed to
the ACU2. The standard ACU only operates low speed. Set the appropriate number of ADF
receivers installed. Set NAV#2 Position Source to GPS1 if it is desired to have GPS1 map data
displayed when VLOC#2 is selected. Set to GPS2 if GPS2 map data is to be displayed when
VLOC#2 is selected. Single GPS installations set to GPS1.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SET UP C SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
429 OUT PORT SPEED HIGH, LOW(1)
429 IN PORTS 1 & 2 HIGH, LOW(1)
SPEED
429 IN PORTS 3 & 4 HIGH, LOW(1)
SPEED
ADF CONFIG NONE, 1, 2
NAV #2 POSITION GPS1, GPS2
SOURCE
(1) ACU set to LOW. ACU2 set to HIGH if using ADF, RAD ALT, or remote OAT, Otherwise it could be set to low.

NOTE– Power to the ACU2 should be reset after configuring the EFD because if it was running low
speed when powered up, it will continue to run low speed even if changed to high above until it
boots back up. ADF/RAD/ALT/RMT OAT will not function in this case.

10.4.6.11 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG A

The following menu is used to configure the RS-232 RX IN sensor ports. Options include GPS
TYPE X, WX500, XM Weather, RSM, EFD1000 PFD, EFD1000 MFD, and EFD500 MFD inter-system
communication. Note - some ports do not include all interface options. (See wiring diagrams in
sections 9 to determine how each port was wired and configure port accordingly)

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG A SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
232 IN PORT 0 NONE, RSM, GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
232 IN PORT 1 NONE, GPS TYPE 1, GPS TYPE 2, GPS TYPE
3, GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5, XM1
232 IN PORT 2 NONE, GPS TYPE 1, GPS TYPE 2, GPS TYPE
3, GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 233-367 Revision AC

232 IN PORT 3 NONE, WX500, GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5

232 IN PORT 4 NONE, EFD1000 MFD, EFD1000 PFD,
EFD500 MFD
Notes: GPS TYPE 1= KLN94/90B “standard”, GPS TYPE 2= KLN94 Enhanced, GPS TYPE 3=
GX50/55/60/65, GPS TYPE 4 & GPS TYPE 5 – not used at this time
1 If XM is selected then ADC type 1 or 2 cannot be selected for 232 OUT PORT 1

10.4.6.12 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG B

The following menu is used to configure the RS-232 RX IN 5 sensor port and the four RS-232 TX
OUT ports. Options include XM Weather, WX500, ADC (two types) and PFD or MFD inter-system
communications. Note - some ports do not include all interface options. (See wiring diagrams in
sections 9 to determine how each port was wired and configure port accordingly)

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG B SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
232 IN PORT 5 NONE, EFD1000 MFD, EFD1000 PFD,
EFD500 MFD
232 OUT PORT 0 NONE, RSM, GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
232 OUT PORT 1 NONE, XM, ADC TYPE 11, ADC TYPE 21,
GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
232 OUT PORT 2 NONE, EFD, ADC TYPE 1, ADC TYPE 2, GPS
TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
232 OUT PORT 3 NONE, WX500, ADC TYPE 1, ADC TYPE 2,
GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
Notes: ADC TYPE 1=”Z” (Shadin) format, ADC TYPE 2=”C” (Bendix King C) format
Note: EFD is any PFD or MFD, GPS TYPE 4 & GPS TYPE 5 not used at this time
1 If XM was selected for 232 IN PORT 1 then ADC type 1 or 2 cannot be selected for 232
OUT PORT 1

10.4.6.13 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG C

For PFD only installations these are grayed out. For PFD/MFD installations set all three to HIGH
after configuring the inter-system buss in the previous two menu pages.

SW v2.5 (B2.3.3) and above

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG C
Feature Options Actual Setting
232 IN PORT 4 SPEED LOW, HIGH
232 IN PORT 5 SPEED LOW, HIGH
232 OUT PORT 2 SPEED LOW, HIGH
empty
empty
Note: These port settings are grayed out unless a PFD/MFD installation and the inter-
system buss is configured.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 234-367 Revision AC

10.4.6.14 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG A

The following menu configures the emulation modes for the Flight Director and HDG and CRS
Datum interfaces. The installation wiring diagrams in Section 9 have a Configuration Matrix table
that will be used to set ACU HSI TYPE and ACU FD TYPE. (See Section 10.4.9 for example). Flight
Director display pitch and roll offset adjustments are also made.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG A SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
ACU HSI TYPE 0,1,2,3
ACU FD TYPE 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 (8,9,10,11,12)(1)
ACU DATUM NORMAL,REVERSED
FD PITCH OFFSET ADJ -10.0 to +10.0 (degrees)
FD ROLL OFFSET ADJ -10.0 to +10.0 (degrees)
Notes: (1) FD TYPES 8-12 require optional “Unlock” card.

10.4.6.15 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG B

The ACU/ACU2 transmit buss speed to the GPS receiver and receive buss speed from the digital
VLOC receiver will be configured. For ACU set both to LOW. ACU2 may change these to HIGH if
required but most configurations as shown in Section 9 use Low speed settings.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG B SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
Digital Nav Tx Speed HIGH. LOW
Digital Nav Rx Speed HIGH, LOW
empty
empty
empty
Notes: Tx Speed is ACU P3 pins 4&5, Rx Speed is ACU P1 pins 1&2

10.4.6.16 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG A

RSM Orientation– TOP (A-05-111-00, -001, and -002 RSM), BOTTOM (-003 RSM)
RSM GPS Enable - ENABLE if A-05-111-00 RSM or -001 RSM and RSM has view of satellites. Set
to INTERCOM if MFD1000 using a -002 or -003 RSM or -001 RSM is internal with no view of
satellites. Set to DISABLE if a PFD is using a -002 or -003 RSM or has no view of satellites.
INTERCOM setting was added in software v2.3 and later.
RAD ALT CONFIG –Set to NONE unless Radio Altimeter is installed, then set to correct type per
table in Section 8.
RSM GPS USAGE – EMER ONLY is the only permitted setting under the STC.
WIND DISPLAY (added SW v2.2.3) – ENABLE>=30KIAS is default setting. DISABLE removes the
wind vector/speed/direction from databar. Maybe set per operator preference.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 235-367 Revision AC

Caution - Use of the MODE 2 selection affects the certification of the EFD1000 system and is
prohibited.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG A SW 2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
RSM Orientation TOP, BOTTOM (Inverted orientation)
RSM GPS Enable DISABLE, ENABLE, INTERCOM
RSM GPS USAGE EMER ONLY/ MODE 2 (read Caution
above)
RAD ALT CONFIG NONE, TYPE 1, TYPE 2, TYPE 3, TYPE 4,
TYPE 5, TYPE 6, TYPE 7
WIND DISPLAY DISABLE, ENABLE>=30KIAS,
ENABLE>=40KIAS, ENABLE>=50KIAS,
ENABLE>=60KIAS, ENABLE>=70KIAS,
ENABLE>=80KIAS, ENABLE>=90KIAS
Notes: The standard EFD1000 MFD RSM (-002) does not include a GPS.

10.4.6.17 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG B

The following menu will be used to set the aircraft electrical system voltage. EFD Battery Config
will be set to INTERNAL for all -001 EFDs and REMOTE for all -002 EFDs. The Panel Tilt Pitch Adj
is aligned for tilted instrument panels and the Panel Roll Adj is adjusted to compensate for
slightly misaligned EFD mounting in the instrument panel. See Section 10.4.9for instructions on
setting the Panel Tilt Pitch Adj, Panel Roll Adj, and Attitude Ref Symbol adjustments.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG B SW 2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
ELEC SYSTEM 14 VOLT, 28 VOLT
EFD BATTERY CONFG: INTERNAL, REMOTE*
ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL -5.0 to +5.0 degrees
ADJ:
PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ -10.0 to +20.0 degrees
PANEL ROLL ADJ -2.0 to +2.0 degrees
Notes: * REMOTE is for EFD1000 MFD (-002) with EBB58 only

10.4.6.18 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG C

COMPOSITE PHASE (VOR1,2) – If the analog NAV receiver has a 180⁰ phase shifted output
(i.e.,RT-385) then select 180 for VOR1 or 2 or both.
GPSS GAIN - 1.0 is default, Rate Based autopilots may need a setting of up to 2.0.
CRS SDI – For a dual A429 GPS interface set to NAV 1/2 and set GPS1 for SDI=LNAV1 and GPS2
for SDI=LNAV2. All other GPS configurations set to COMMON. See Figure 9.27.
OBS DISPLAY – Set to ENABLE (this is a user preference item and can be set to disable).

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 236-367 Revision AC

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG C SW 2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
COMPOSITE PHASE (0,0) (180,0) (0,180) (180,180)
(VOR1,2)
GPSS GAIN: 0.5 to 2.0 (0.1 increments)
CRS SDI COMMON, NAV 1/2 (SW v2.2 and above)
OBS DISPLAY DISABLE, ENABLE (SW v2.2 and above)

Notes:

10.4.6.19 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG D

OAT Source – If a PFD only install, and the RSM is internally mounted or in an area that affects
OAT accuracy then set to NONE. If the RSM is externally mounted then set to RSM. If using a
remote OAT probe connected to the ACU2 then set to PROBE. If a multi display install, and the
connected RSM does not have accurate OAT and another EFD does then set to INTERCOM and this
EFD will use the other EFD’s OAT information.
OAT BIAS - Should the OAT display on the PFD be in error on the high side it may be lowered by
up to 8 degrees C. Note the adjustment is done in degrees C only. If configured for degrees F
then perform the conversion and lower the value in C then required amount.

Caution – Do not adjust the OAT BIAS without comparing it to a calibrated temperature source.

Adjustment procedure
a) Make sure the aircraft has been in a hangar for long enough that the skin temperature
has reached that of the surrounding air temperature or the aircraft and RSM are not being
influenced by radiant heat (such as the Sun or radiant heaters).
b) Turn on the EFD1000 system and allow it to run for a minimum 20 minutes.
c) Using the reading from a calibrated temperature gauge located in the immediate vicinity
of the RSM, compare it to the OAT reading on the PFD.
d) If the OAT reading on the PFD is high by up to 8 degrees it can be adjusted by entering -1
to -8 in the OAT BIAS field.

SV ALERT CONFIG – There are 5 options but only two are permitted under the STC. Set to Option
1 if the aircraft does not have a TAWS installed, set to Option 3 if it does have a TAWS installed.
FPM is Flight Path Marker.
1= Alert Tone, Alert Annunciations, FPM Alert Colors, and Terrain Coloring are configured
2= Only Alert Annunciations, FPM Alert Colors, and Terrain Coloring are configured
3= Only FPM Alert Colors, and Terrain Coloring are configured
4= Only Terrain Coloring is configured
5= None of the Above

DISPLAY FPM – There are 3 settings and the “PFD/MFD” setting is recommended.
DISABLE = FPM is not displayed
PFD ONLY= FPM is displayed on the PFD, not on the MFD

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 237-367 Revision AC

PFD/MFD= FPM is displayed on both the PFD and MFD

AIRCRAFT REF SYMBOL – Option 1 is recommended.

1= Ref Symbol Type 1

2= Ref Symbol Type 2

3= Ref Symbol Type 3

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG D SW v2.4 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
OAT SOURCE NONE, RSM, PROBE, INTERCOM
OAT BIAS 0 to -8 degrees
SV ALERT CONFIG 1,2,3,4,5
DISPLAY FPM DISABLE, PFD ONLY, PFD/MFD
AIRCRAFT REF SYMBOL 1,2,3

10.4.6.20 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RSM CALIBRATION

The following menu will be used in the next section to calibrate and validate the magnetometer
in the RSM. Heading errors of up to +/- 6.0º can be calibrated at 30º increments beginning with
North. (Follow RSM Cal procedure in Section10.5)

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RSM CALIBRATION SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options
START CALIBRATION Press to Initiate
ACCEPT CALIBRATION? Press to ACCEPT Cal
REJECT CALIBRATION? Press to REJECT Cal
HDG SEL 030º to 360º (in 30º increments)
HDG ADJ -6.0 to +6.0 (degrees)
Notes:

This table is used to record the HDG ADJ values used to bring the compass heading values in to
specification.

RSM CALIBRATION PAGE 12 Options Actual Setting

(PFD Software 1.1 and
later

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 238-367 Revision AC

RSM CALIBRATION PAGE 12 Options Actual Setting

(PFD Software 1.1 and
later
HDG SEL: 030 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6
HDG SEL: 060 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6
HDG SEL: 090 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6
HDG SEL: 120 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6
HDG SEL: 150 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6
HDG SEL: 180 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6
HDG SEL: 210 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6
HDG SEL: 240 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6
HDG SEL: 270 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6
HDG SEL: 300 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6
HDG SEL: 330 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6
HDG SEL: 360 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6

10.4.6.21 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACCEL BIAS CAL

This page is for Factory Calibration only and has no installation purpose.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACCEL BIAS CAL SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options
BIASES (x,y,z) Factory Use Only
START CALIBRATION Factory Use Only
ACCEPT CALIBRATION? Factory Use Only
REJECT CALIBRATION? Factory Use Only

Notes:

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 239-367 Revision AC

10.4.6.22 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – WX-500

The following menu is used for WX-500 configuration, system status, and system test. HEAD
TYPE is configuration status. It will display NONE if there is no WX-500 connection, DISPLAY
when a RS232 RX Port is set to WX500, and CONTROL when a RS232 TX Port is set to WX500.

SW v2.0 and above

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – WX-500
Feature Options Actual Setting
HEAD TYPE NONE, DISPLAY, CONTROL
SYSTEM DATA PAGE1,PAGE2,PAGE3,PAGE4
STRIKE TEST Press to Initiate
NOISE MONITOR Press to Initiate
ANTENNA MOUNT TOP,BOTTOM
Notes: The HEAD Type menu entry is status only. It is necessary to exit and re-enter the
menu to view the updated information.

10.4.6.23 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NETWORK PAGE

This menu is for diagnostic purposes only, unless an EA100 is installed.

For EA100 installations verify the following:

a) IP ADDR is set to 192.168.28.12
b) SUBNET MASK to 255.255.255.0
c) GATEWAY to 0
d) PORT to 8550
Use the line select key next to IP ADDR and the right knob to set the value. Subsequent pushes of
the line select key will advance the cursor to the right so that each set of digits between the
decimal points may be entered.

SW v2.0 and above

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NETWORK PAGE
Feature Options
IP ADDR 0-255
SUBNET MASK 0-255
GATEWAY 0-255
PORT 0-9999
Not Used
Notes: Repeated presses of top 3 line select keys will select one of 4 selectable fields

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 240-367 Revision AC

10.4.6.24 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - DIAGNOSTICS

This menu is for diagnostic purposes only. Note – Operational Time and Flight Time are stored in
the configuration module of the aircraft and these times are cumulative for the installation not
the EFD unit itself.

SW v2.0
10.4.7 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – DIAGNOSTICS
Feature Options
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 241-367 Revision AC

10.4.7.1 EXITING / SAVING DATA

To exit the Installation Menu press the MENU button. All data will be saved as it was displayed
on each page. The system will reboot and “INITIALIZING” will appear on the display for
approximately 40 seconds. Normal operation continues.

NOTE – Cycle power to the ACU/ACU2 so that it can accept the changes made to the installation
menu.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 242-367 Revision AC

10.4.8 EFD500 MFD Installation Menu Configuration

INSTALLATION MENU Configuration – EFD500

Installation Date:
Aircraft Model: EFD500 S/N:

Aircraft Type: RSM S/N:

Aircraft S/N: ACU S/N:

CM S/N:

NOTE: Some menus are grayed out as they do not apply to the EFD500 MFD. The EFD500
is depopulated of the ADC and AHRS sensors.

10.4.8.1 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - IAS CONFIG A

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG A SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
MOL TYPE
MOL PARAM SEL
Does Not Apply to EFD500
MOL PARAM VALUE
MOL MARKER/BAND
MACH DSPL TYPE
Notes:

10.4.8.2 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG B

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG B SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
OVERSPEED ALERT
Vno
Does Not Apply to EFD500
Vfe
Vs
Vso
Notes:

10.4.8.3 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG C (SW v2.2 and above)

This page is not shown in SW v2.0 and v2.1.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG C SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 243-367 Revision AC

Vyse
Vmc Does Not Apply to EFD500
Triangle
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

10.4.8.4 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG D

These selections are rotorcraft only and are grayed out.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG D SW v2.2 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
Vne (power on) 0 to 450
Vne (power off) 0 to 450
MIN CAUTION SPD 0 to 450
MIN SAFE SPD 0 to 450
MAX AUTOROT SPD 0 to 450
Notes:

10.4.8.5 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE - IAS CONFIG E

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG E SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
SPD Band 2
SPD Band 3
Does Not Apply to EFD500
SPD Band 4
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

10.4.8.6 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG F

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG F SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
IAS UNITS
TAPES
Does Not Apply to EFD500
VSPD EDIT
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 244-367 Revision AC

10.4.8.7 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG G

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – IAS CONFIG G SW v2.2 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
IAS DISPLAY
ALT DISPLAY
Does Not Apply to EFD500
BARO DISPLAY
VSI DISPLAY
Not Used
Notes:

10.4.8.8 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SET UP A

The following menu will be used to configure the EFD500 system for the installed GPS, NAV and
autopilot interfaces. The installation wiring diagrams in Section 9 have a Configuration Matrix
table that will be used to set ID#1 and ID#2.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SET UP A SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
GPS/NAV #1 NONE,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M,P,Q,R,S
GPS/NAV #2 NONE,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M

If no GPS or NAV’s are installed but the ACU is installed, then use Config 1S-2NONE

10.4.8.9 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SET UP B

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SET UP B SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
429 IN PORT 1 NONE, GPS1, VLOC1, VLOC1+ACU,
GPS1+ACU, GPS1+ACU+VLOC1, GPS2,
VLOC2, VLOC2+ACU, GPS2+ACU,
GPS2+ACU+VLOC2
429 IN PORT 2 Same as IN PORT 1 options
429 IN PORT 3 Same as IN PORT 1 options
429 IN PORT 4 Same as IN PORT 1 options
429 IN PORT 5 NONE, TRAFFIC*
* If setting is grayed out it is because this feature requires a “Unlock” card on PFD.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 245-367 Revision AC

10.4.8.10 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SET UP C

A429 input ports will be set to HIGH or LOW. Set NAV#2 Position Source to GPS1 if it is desired to
have GPS1 map data displayed when VLOC#2 is selected. Set to GPS2 if GPS2 map data is to be
displayed when VLOC#2 is selected. Single GPS installations set to GPS1.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NAV SET UP C SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
429 OUT PORT SPEED(2) HIGH, LOW
429 INPUT PORTS 1 & 2 HIGH, LOW(1)
SPEED
429 INPUT PORTS 3 & 4 HIGH, LOW(1)
SPEED
ADF CONFIG Does not apply to EFD500
NAV #2 POSITION GPS1, GPS2
SOURCE
(1)Set the same as PFD config. (2) EFD500 has no usable A429 labels on the TX1 output.

10.4.8.11 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG A

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG A SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
232 IN PORT 0 NONE, RSM, GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
232 IN PORT 1 NONE, GPS TYPE 1, GPS TYPE 2, GPS TYPE
3, GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5, XM
232 IN PORT 2 NONE, GPS TYPE 1, GPS TYPE 2, GPS TYPE
3, GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
232 IN PORT 3 NONE, WX500, GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
232 IN PORT 4 NONE, EFD1000 MFD, EFD1000 PFD,
EFD500 MFD
Notes: GPS TYPE 1= KLN94/90B “standard”, GPS TYPE 2= KLN94 Enhanced, GPS TYPE 3=
GX50/55/60/65, GPS TYPE 4 & GPS TYPE 5 – not used at this time

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 246-367 Revision AC

10.4.8.12 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG B

The following menu is used to configure the RS-232 RX IN 5 sensor port and the four RS-232 TX
OUT ports. Options include XM Weather, WX500, and PFD or MFD inter-system communications.
Note - some ports do not include all interface options. (See wiring diagrams in sections 9 to
determine how each port was wired and configure port accordingly)

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG B SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
232 IN PORT 5 NONE, EFD1000 MFD, EFD1000 PFD,
EFD500 MFD
232 OUT PORT 0 NONE, RSM, GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
232 OUT PORT 1 NONE, XM, ADC TYPE 1, ADC TYPE 2, GPS
TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
232 OUT PORT 2 NONE, EFD, ADC TYPE 1, ADC TYPE 2, GPS
TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
232 OUT PORT 3 NONE, WX500, ADC TYPE 1, ADC TYPE 2,
GPS TYPE 4, GPS TYPE 5
Notes: ADC TYPE 1=”Z” (Shadin) format, ADC TYPE 2=”C” (Bendix King C) format
Note: EFD is any PFD or MFD, GPS TYPE 4 & GPS TYPE 5 not used at this time

10.4.8.13 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RS232 CONFIG C

For PFD only installations these are grayed out. For PFD/MFD installations set all three to HIGH
after configuring the inter-system buss in the previous two menu pages.

SW v2.5(B2.3.3) and above

10.4.8.14 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG A

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG A SW v2.0

Feature Options Actual Setting
ACU HSI TYPE
ACU FD TYPE
Does Not Apply to EFD500
ACU DATUM
FD PITCH OFFSET ADJ
FD ROLL OFFSET ADJ

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 247-367 Revision AC

10.4.8.15 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG B

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACU CONFIG B SW v2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
Digital Nav Tx Speed
Digital Nav Rx Speed Does Not Apply to EFD500

10.4.8.16 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG A

RSM GPS Enable - Set to INTERCOM. If the PFD does not have the RSM GPS enabled then set to
DISABLE. INTERCOM setting was added in software v2.3 and later.
RSM GPS USAGE – EMER ONLY is the only permitted setting under the STC.
Caution - Use of the MODE 2 selection affects the certification of the EFD1000 system and is
prohibited.
WIND DISPLAY (added SW v2.2.3) – ENABLE>=30KIAS is default setting. DISABLE removes the
wind vector/speed/direction from databar. Maybe set per operator preference.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG A SW 2.3 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
RSM Orientation Does not apply to EFD500
RSM GPS Enable DISABLE, ENABLE, INTERCOM1
RSM GPS USAGE EMER ONLY/ MODE 2 (read Caution
above)
RAD ALT CONFIG Does not apply to EFD500
WIND DISPLAY DISABLE, ENABLE>=30KIAS,
ENABLE>=40KIAS, ENABLE>=50KIAS,
ENABLE>=60KIAS, ENABLE>=70KIAS,
ENABLE>=80KIAS, ENABLE>=90KIAS
1Notes: The EFD500 MFD does not include a RSM. Set to INTERCOM so the MFD can use
the PFD or MFD1000 RSM GPS.

10.4.8.17 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG B

ELEC SYSTEM – Set to aircraft charging system voltage.

EFD BATTERY CONFIG – Set to INTERNAL

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG B SW 2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
ELEC SYSTEM 14 VOLT, 28 VOLT
EFD BATTERY CONFG: INTERNAL, REMOTE

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 248-367 Revision AC

Panel Tilt Pitch Does not apply to EFD500

Adjustment
Panel Roll Adjustment Does not apply to EFD500
Not Used

10.4.8.18 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG C

COMPOSITE PHASE (VOR1, 2) – If the analog NAV receiver has a 180⁰ phase shifted output (i.e.,
RT-385) then select 180 for VOR1 or 2 or both.
CRS SDI – For a dual GNAV interface set to NAV 1/2 and set GNAV1 for SDI=1 and GNAV2 for
SDI=2. For single GNAV/GPS set to COMMON.
OBS DISPLAY – Set to ENABLE (this is a user preference item and can be set to disable).

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG C SW 2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
COMPOSITE PHASE (0,0) (180,0) (0,180) (180,180)
(VOR1,2)
GPSS GAIN: Does not apply to EFD500
CRS SDI COMMON, NAV 1/2 (SW v2.2 and above)
OBS DISPLAY DISABLE, ENABLE (SW v2.2 and above)

Notes:

10.4.8.19 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG D

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – MISC CONFIG D SW v2.4 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
OAT SOURCE Set to INTERCOM
OAT BIAS Does not apply to EFD500
SV ALERT CONFIG Set the same as PFD
DISPLAY FPM Set the same as PFD
AIRCRAFT REF SYMBOL Set the same as PFD

10.4.8.20 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RSM CALIBRATION

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – RSM CALIBRATION SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options
START CALIBRATION
ACCEPT CALIBRATION?
Does Not Apply to EFD500
REJECT CALIBRATION?
HDG SEL
HDG ADJ

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 249-367 Revision AC

10.4.8.21 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACCEL BIAS CAL

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – ACCEL BIAS CAL SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options
BIASES (x,y,z) Factory Use Only
START CALIBRATION Factory Use Only
Does Not Apply to EFD500
ACCEPT CALIBRATION? Factory Use Only
REJECT CALIBRATION? Factory Use Only

Notes:

10.4.8.22 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – WX500

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – WX-500 SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options Actual Setting
HEAD TYPE NONE, DISPLAY, CONTROL
SYSTEM DATA PAGE1,PAGE2,PAGE3,PAGE4
STRIKE TEST Press to Initiate
NOISE MONITOR Press to Initiate
ANTENNA MOUNT TOP,BOTTOM
Notes: The HEAD Type menu entry is status only. It is necessary to exit and re-enter the
menu to view the updated information.

10.4.8.23 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NETWORK PAGE

This menu is for diagnostic purposes only.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – NETWORK PAGE SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options
IP ADDR 0-255
SUBNET MASK 0-255
GATEWAY 0-255
PORT 0-9999
Not Used
Notes: Repeated presses of top 3 line select keys will select one of 4 selectable fields

10.4.8.24 INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – DIAGNOSTICS

This menu is for diagnostic purposes only.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 250-367 Revision AC

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE – DIAGNOSTICS SW v2.0 and above

Feature Options
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

10.4.8.25 EXITING / SAVING DATA

To exit the Installation Menu press the MENU button. All data will be saved as it was displayed
on each page. The system will reboot and re-initialize. Normal operation continues.

10.4.9 CONFIGURATION DEFINITIONS

This section contains an expanded definition of each menu feature and detailed instructions for
the available configuration options. Note not all PFD and MFD versions have every option as
defined below.

10.4.9.1 Aircraft with Vmo/Mmo airspeed indicators

Use the following table to fill in Configuration Menu Page 1. Verify settings with POH, existing
airspeed indicator, or any applicable STC’s performed to the aircraft.

Aircraft Model TCDS MOL MOL Parameters Vmo Test Points (±4kts)
TYPE
BN-2T, BN-2T-4R A17EU 2 Uses fixed Vmo: Verify Redline or Barber Pole is
positioned at the Vmo airspeed
Enter Vmo value per existing mark.
IAS indicator

BN2A Mk III (with A29EU 2 Uses fixed Vmo: Verify Redline or Barber Pole is
NB/M/501 airspeed positioned at the Vmo airspeed
indicator) Enter Vmo value per existing mark.
BN2A Mk III-2* IAS indicator
BN2A Mk III-3* * The -2 & -3 with NB/M/579
Airspeed Indicator have a Vne
(use MOL Type 1)

Cessna 208/208B A37CE 2 Uses fixed Vmo: Verify Redline or Barber Pole is
positioned at 175kts
Vmo = 175kts

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 251-367 Revision AC

Cessna 425 A7CE 3 Vmo = 230kts Verify Redline or Barber Pole

Mmo = .52 appears at the correct airspeed
MAX ALT = 30,000ft at the following altitudes:
Field Elevation = 230kts
24Kft = 218kts
27Kft = 205kts

Cessna 406 A25CE 3 Vmo = 229kts Verify Redline or Barber Pole

Mmo = .52 appears at the correct airspeed
MAX ALT = 30,000ft at the following altitudes:
Field Elevation = 229kts
24Kft = 218kts
27Kft = 205kts

Cessna 441 A28CE 3 Vmo = 245kts Verify Redline or Barber Pole

Mmo = .55 appears at the correct airspeed
MAX ALT = 33,000ft (s/n at the following altitudes:
441-0001* to 0172*), or Field Elevation = 245kts
MAX ALT = 35,000ft (s/n 23Kft = 236kts
441-0173 and up) 26Kft = 222kts
* 35,000ft if modified with
SK441-36

Dornier A16EU 2 Uses Fixed Vmo = 199kts Verify Redline or Barber Pole is
Do228-100 positioned at 199kts
Do228-200

Hawker Beechcraft 3A20 2 Uses fixed Vmo: Verify Barber Pole is positioned
65-A90-1, 65-A90-2 at 208kts
65-A90-4 Vmo = 208kts
B90, C90

Hawker Beechcraft 3A20 2 Uses fixed Vmo: Verify Barber Pole is positioned
E90, H90, C90A, at 226kts
C90GT, C90GTi Vmo = 226kts

Hawker Beechcraft A31CE 3 Vmo = 253kts Verify Barber Pole appears at

F90 Mmo = .48 the correct airspeed at the
MAX ALT = 31,000ft following altitudes:
Field Elevation = 253kts
15Kft = 241kts
21Kft = 214kts

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 252-367 Revision AC

Hawker Beechcraft A14CE 4 Vmo=226kts up to 15,500ft Verify Barber Pole appears at

99, 99A, A99, A99A, 15,500ft to 25,000ft Vmo the correct airspeed at the
B99, 100, A100, decreases by 4kts/1000ft following altitudes:
A100A Vmo=226 Field Elevation = 226kts
ALT1=15500 18Kft = 216kts
KNOTS=4 20Kft = 208kts
ALT2=1000
MAX ALT=25000 (A99,
A99A, B99), or
MAX ALT=25500 (99,99A),
or
MAX ALT=31000 (100,
A100, A100A)

Hawker Beechcraft A14CE 4 Vmo=223kts up to 15,500ft Verify Barber Pole appears at

B100 15,500ft to 25,000ft Vmo the correct airspeed at the
decreases by 4kts/1000ft following altitudes:
Vmo=223 Field Elevation = 223kts
ALT1=15500 18Kft = 213kts
KNOTS=4 20Kft = 205kts
ALT2=1000
MAX ALT=31000

Hawker Beechcraft A14CE 4 Vmo=224kts up to 15,500ft Verify Barber Pole appears at

C99 15,500ft to 25,000ft Vmo the correct airspeed at the
decreases by 4kts/1000ft following altitudes:
Vmo=224 Field Elevation = 224kts
ALT1=15500 18Kft = 214kts
KNOTS=4 20Kft = 206kts
ALT2=1000
MAX ALT=25000

Hawker Beechcraft A24CE 3 Vmo=270kts, Mmo = .48 Verify Redline or Barber Pole
200, A200C (UC-12B), (s/n BB-2, BB-6 thru BB- appears at the correct airspeed
200C, B200, B200C 198, BC-1* thru BC-61*, at the following altitudes:
(C-12F, UC-12M, C- BD-1* and up*) Field Elevation = 270kts
12R, UC-12F), A200* 12Kft = 256kts
(C-12A, C-12C) * if modified with Beech 17Kft = 232kts
Service Instructions C-12-
*serial number 0076 then use lower Vmo
specific -see below below.
MAX ALT = Enter maximum
operating altitude per POH

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 253-367 Revision AC

Hawker Beechcraft A24CE 3 Vmo=260kts, Mmo = .52 Verify Redline or Barber Pole
200, A200C (UC-12B), (s/n BB-199 and up, BL-1 appears at the correct airspeed
200C, B200, B200C and up, BJ-1 and up, BP-64 at the following altitudes:
(C-12F, UC-12M, C- and up, BU-1 and up, BV-1 Field Elevation = 260kts
12R, UC-12F), A200* and up, BW-1 and up, BC-62 18Kft = 247kts
(C-12A, C-12C), and up, BC-1* thru BC-61*, 20Kft = 237kts
A200CT (C-12D, C- BD-1* thru BD-30*), all
12F), B200GT, A200CT (C-12D, C-12F),
B200CGT, A100-1 (U- (s/n BY-1 and up, BZ-1 and
21J) up and aircraft modified per
Hawker Beechcraft Kit 101-
*serial number 9113), all A100-1 (U-21J)
specific -see above
* when modified with Beech
Service Instructions C-12-
0076

MAX ALT = Enter maximum

operating altitude per POH

Hawker Beechcraft A24CE 3 Vmo=245kts, Mmo=.472 Verify Barber Pole appears at

200T, 200CT, B200T, (all models and s/n’s) the correct airspeed at the
B200CT, A200CT following altitudes:
(FWC-12D, RC-12D, MAX ALT = Enter maximum Field Elevation = 245kts
RC-12G, RC-12H) operating altitude per POH 15Kft = 237kts
20Kft = 215kts

IndustrieAeronautiche 7A4 4 Vmo=220kts up to 10,000ft Verify Barber Pole appears at

(formerly Piaggio) decreases by 4kts/1000ft the correct airspeed at the
P.166 DL3 above 10,000ft following altitudes:
Vmo=220 Field Elevation = 220kts
ALT1=10000 15Kft = 200kts
KNOTS=4 17Kft = 192kts
ALT2=1000
MAX ALT=24000

M7 Aerospace A5SW 2 Uses fixed Vmo: Verify Barber Pole is positioned

(formerly Fairchild) at 208kts
SA26-T, SA26-AT Vmo = 208kts

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 254-367 Revision AC

M7 Aerospace A5SW 4 Vmo=265kts up to 26,000ft Verify Barber Pole appears at

(formerly Fairchild) 26,000 to 31,000 Vmo the correct airspeed at the
SA226-T decreases by 6kts/1000ft following altitudes:
Vmo=265 Field Elevation = 265kts
ALT1=26000 28Kft = 253kts
KNOTS=6 29Kft = 247kts
ALT2=1000
MAX ALT=31000

M7 Aerospace A5SW 4 Vmo=248kts up to 17,000ft Verify Barber Pole appears at

(formerly Fairchild) decreases by 5kts/1000ft the correct airspeed at the
SA226-AT above 17,000ft following altitudes:
Vmo=248 Field Elevation = 248kts
ALT1=17000 21Kft = 228kts
KNOTS=5 23Kft = 218kts
ALT2=1000
MAX ALT=31000

M7 Aerospace A5SW 4 Vmo=265kts up to 24,000ft Verify Barber Pole appears at

(formerly Fairchild) decreases by 5kts/1000ft the correct airspeed at the
SA226-T(B) above 24,000ft following altitudes:
Vmo=265 Field Elevation = 265kts
ALT1=24000 26Kft = 255kts
KNOTS=5 28Kft = 245kts
ALT2=1000
MAX ALT=31000

Pilatus A50EU 3 Vmo = 270kts Verify Barber Pole appears at

PC-7 Mmo = .55 the correct airspeed at the
MAX ALT = 25,000ft following altitudes:
Field Elevation = 270kts
18Kft = 262kts
22Kft = 241kts

Piper A8EA 6 Contact Aspen Field Service Contact Aspen Field Service
PA-31T, PA-31T1, (requires airspeed info from (requires airspeed info from
PA-31T2, PA-31T3 POH) POH)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 255-367 Revision AC

Piper A23SO 6 Contact Aspen Field Service Contact Aspen Field Service
PA-42, PA-42-720, (requires airspeed info from (requires airspeed info from
PA-42-1000 POH) POH)

Interceptor Aircraft 3A18 2 Uses fixed Vmo: Verify Barber Pole is positioned
400 at 208kts
Vmo = 208kts

REIMS Aviation A54EU 3 Vmo = 229kts Verify Barber Pole appears at

F406 Mmo = .52 the correct airspeed at the
MAX ALT = 30,000ft following altitudes:
Field Elevation = 229kts
24Kft = 218kts
26Kft = 209kts

Socata A60EU 2 Uses fixed Vmo: Verify Barber Pole is positioned

TBM 700 at 270kts
Vmo = 270kts

Twin Commander 2A4 2 Uses fixed Vmo: Verify Barber Pole is positioned
680T, 680V, 680W, Vmo = 217kts at 217kts
681, 690 (680T, 680V, 680W, 681) (680T,680V,680W,681)

Vmo = 243kts Verify Barber Pole is positioned

(690) at 243kts (690)

Twin Commander 2A4 3 Vmo = 243kts Verify Barber Pole appears at

690A, 690B, 690C, Mmo = .52 the correct airspeed at the
695 MAX ALT = 31,000ft following altitudes:
Field Elevation = 243kts
21Kft = 232kts
24Kft = 218kts
Twin Commander 2A4 3 Vmo = 252kts Verify Barber Pole appears at
695A, 690D, 695B Mmo = .60 the correct airspeed at the
MAX ALT = 35,000ft (695A) following altitudes:
MAX ALT = 31,000ft (690D*) Field Elevation = 252kts
26Kft = 243kts
*increases to 35,000ft if 28Kft = 233kts
Twin Commander Kit No.
149 installed

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 256-367 Revision AC

Viking Air (de A9EA 1 Contact Aspen Field Service Contact Aspen Field Service
Havilland) (requires airspeed info from (requires airspeed info from
DHC-6-1, DHC-6- POH) POH)
100, DHC-6-200,
DHC-6-300

Table 10-1 – Turbo Prop Aircraft with Vmo Airspeed Indicators

10.4.9.2 IAS Configurations

Vne: Never Exceed speed (beginning of red band)

Vmo: Maximum Operating Speed
Mmo: Maximum Operating Mach number
Vno: Maximum Structural Cruise speed (beginning of yellow band). For aircraft with no
published yellow speed band set Vno = Vne.
Vfe: Maximum Flap Extend speed (top of white band) - set to Vfe = Vs on aircraft with no flaps
Vs: No Flap Stall speed (bottom of green band)
Vso: Full Flap Stall speed (bottom of white band) - set to Vso= Vs on aircraft with no flaps
Vyse: Single Engine best rate of climb (blue marker) on multi engine aircraft – set to
zero “0” on single engine aircraft.
Vmc: Single Engine minimum control speed (red marker) on multi engine aircraft – set to
zero “0” on single engine aircraft.
Initial Flap Extension Speed – set to zero “0” on aircraft without a published initial flap
extension speed. For aircraft that have a published speed at which the first notch of flap
may be deployed, set to that published value.

IAS UNITS: Set to Knots or MPH as defined in the AFM

TAPES: UNLOCKED = Must only be set when Airspeed and Altimeter are still in basic T
configuration. With this setting the pilot can turn airspeed and altitude tapes on or off
via menu.
LOCK OFF = Must be used when the aircraft has a Vmo “Barber Pole” airspeed indicator.
Tapes are turned off and cannot be turned on by pilot.

NOTE: Tapes cannot be locked off unless the airspeed indicator and altimeter are located within
the Primary Field of View and in the basic “T” configuration.

LOCK ON = This setting required whenever Altimeter or Airspeed Indicator has been
relocated from basic T configuration. Tapes are always enabled and cannot be turned
off by pilot.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 257-367 Revision AC

Use the following flowchart to determine the proper configuration for the TAPES setting of
Installation Menu 3.

START

Requirements for
configuring Installation
Menu setting “TAPES”

Is the aircraft RVSM YES

Qualified?

Can the
Does the
YES PFD IAS tape be NO
aircraft have a Vmo
configured to match the
“barber pole” Airspeed
mechanical IAS
Indicator
indicator?

NO
YES

Is the TAPES must be

Altimeter and Airspeed YES configured to
Indicator still in Basic “T” LOCK OFF
configuration?

NO
TAPES can be
configured to
UNLOCKED or any
other customer
preference
EFD500 and MFD1000
installations adjacent to the PFD require the
TAPES to be configured to LOCK ON

TAPES must be
configured to
LOCK ON

STOP

Figure 10-3 – TAPES Configuration Flow Chart

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 258-367 Revision AC

VSPD EDIT: UNLOCKED= pilot can modify value of VSPEED textual markers in the Main Menu.
LOCKED = the pilot cannot modify the values of the VSPEED textual
markers in the Main Menu.

10.4.9.3 PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ

This setting is used to compensate for aircraft instrument panels that are inclined with respect to
the aircraft leveling indices. The EFD1000 AHRS performance and the RSM calibration depend on
the AHRS sensor orientation to the aircraft waterline using the aircraft leveling indices.

CAUTION: Do not use the “PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ” adjustment to align the Aircraft Reference
Symbol to a zero pitch mark for level flight. Though such an adjustment appears
to be a natural step, incorrect adjustment may result in incorrect pitch, roll and
heading values. For non-tilted panel installations, the EFD1000 AHRS must show
zero degrees pitch when the aircraft is leveled using the aircraft leveling indices.
Adjustment of the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ to set the Aircraft Reference Symbol to a
zero pitch mark for level-flight may result in improper PFD alignment. If the level
flight level zero pitch reference needs adjustment, proceed in accordance with the
ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL ADJ procedure described below.

NOTE: Once the PFD is installed and properly aligned, the Aircraft Reference Symbol’s
level-flight pitch attitude indication changes with speed and aircraft loading and
cannot be adjusted by the pilot. See 14CFR 23.1303(f). See ATTITUDE REF
SYMBOL ADJ adjustment to determine if further action is required.

Adjust the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ value using one of the two methods shown below.

Method 1 — Using an Inclinometer

Using an inclinometer and the aircraft leveling indices, measure the offset angle in degrees
(±0.5°), from aircraft level. This reading should be taken when a technician is seated in the
cockpit since the angle could shift when the technician boards the aircraft. This measurement
will be entered in the EFD1000 as CORRECTED PITCH ATTITUDE. Nose high is + degrees.

CORRECTED PITCH ATTITUDE: 2.0°

CORRECTED ROLL ATTITUDE: 0.3°

Figure 10-4 – Illustration of aircraft 2º nose high

1) Set the ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL ADJ to 0.0º.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 259-367 Revision AC

2) Press the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ line select key and use the bottom right knob to enter a
value for PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ that results in the CORRECTED PITCH ATTITUDE (Figure 10-4)
equaling the value read on the inclinometer. It may also be set to the amount of panel tilt as
determined through measurement.
3) Press the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ line select key.

Method 2 – Leveling the Aircraft

Level the airplane in pitch in accordance with the aircraft manufacturer’s procedure. Then
change the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ adjustment to make the CORRECTED PITCH ATTITUDE equal to
0.0°.

1) Level the aircraft in pitch using the aircraft manufacturer’s procedure.

CORRECTED PITCH ATTITUDE: 0.0°

CORRECTED ROLL ATTITUDE: 0.0°

Figure 10-5 – Illustration of Zero degree pitch adjustment

2) Set the ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL ADJ to 0.0º.

3) Press the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ line select key and use the bottom right knob to enter a
value for PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ that will result in the CORRECTED PITCH ATTITUDE equaling 0.0º.
4) Press the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ line select key.

10.4.9.4 PANEL ROLL ADJ

Panel Roll Adjust is used to align the roll reference mark of the EFD1000 to zero degrees when
the aircraft is wings level. With the aircraft wings level change the Panel Roll Adjust adjustment to
make the CORRECTED ROLL ATTITUDE equal to 0.0º. Should more than 2º of correction be
required the mechanical mounting of the EFD1000 for level in the panel should be re-verified.

CAUTION A RSM Calibration must be performed before first flight after changing either the
PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ or PANEL ROLL ADJ values.

10.4.9.5 ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL ADJ

This is used to make small changes to the pitch attitude reference mark on the EFD1000 should
the aircraft fly consistently slightly nose high or nose low in cruise trim. It is not necessary to
perform the RSM Calibration after making changes to this setting.

10.4.10 NAV Setup Configuration

10.4.10.1 GPS/NAV#1 (ID#1)

Ranges from A to S as specified on the wiring diagrams of Section 9. See example below

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 260-367 Revision AC

10.4.10.2 GPS/NAV#2 (ID#2)

Ranges from A to M as specified on the wiring diagrams of Section 9. See example below.

Using the Configuration Table from Figure 9-11 as an example;

If you wired the drawing exactly as shown you would select ID#1 = H and ID#2 = D. This would
mean you have a RS-232/Analog GPS1 (i.e., KLN-94, GX-55) with an Analog NAV1 (i.e., KX-
155A) and an Analog NAV2 (i.e., KX-155A).

If you have the above installation without a NAV2 then select ID#1 = H and ID#2 = NONE.

If you have the above installation with no NAV1 or NAV2 (just GPS and autopilot) then select ID#1
= G and ID#2 = NONE.

10.4.10.3 COMPOSITE PHASE (VOR1, VOR2)

Most modern navigation receivers will be set to (0, 0) as VOR1 and VOR2 will have VOR composite
outputs with zero degree phase shift. For receivers with VOR composite outputs that are 180º out
of phase (i.e., ARC RT-385) set to 180 as required.

10.4.11 ACU Configuration

10.4.11.1 ACU HSI TYPE

0= KI-525A, Emulates the KI-525A HSI

1= NSD-360A, Emulates the NSD-360A HSI
2= reserved
3= PN-101

Below is an example from Figure 9-16 showing a KI-525A Emulation with a Bendix King
autopilot. In this case you would set the ACU HSI TYPE =0:

10.4.11.2 ACU FD TYPE

0= None, no flight director installed

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 261-367 Revision AC

1= KI-254/KI-256, Emulates the KI-254/256 Flight Director

3= G-550A, Emulates the G-550A Flight Director
4= 52C77, Emulates the 52C77 Flight Director
9= Reserved
10= FD-112X
11= AD500

Below is an example from Figure 9-23 showing a KI-256 Emulation. In this case you would set
the ACU FD TYPE =1:

10.4.11.3 ACU DATUM

0 = Normal
1 = Reversed. It may be necessary to select “Reversed” if the HDG or CRS Datum drives the
autopilot in the opposing direction. Some HSI units use reversed logic for CRS and HDG Datum.
Verify through ground test the proper setting.

10.4.11.4 FD ROLL OFFSET ADJ

Flight Director Roll Offset is used to align the PFD Command Bars to the Command Bars on the
mechanical FD instrument in the roll axis. Positive number increases roll in RIGHT (clockwise)
direction. Negative number increases roll in LEFT (counterclockwise) direction.

10.4.11.5 FD PITCH OFFSET ADJ

Flight Director Pitch Offset is used to align the PFD Command Bars to the Command Bars on the
mechanical FD instrument in the pitch axis. Positive number increases pitch in UP direction.
Negative number increases pitch in DOWN direction.

The value of the command bars position is digitally shown in the top portion of the Installation
Menu when the autopilot’s flight director is valid and engaged. This will assist you in aligning
the PFD flight director to the mechanical flight director indicator.

10.4.11.6 EXITING / SAVING DATA

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 262-367 Revision AC

10.5 RSM Calibration

10.5.1 Calibration Overview

The Remote Sensor Module must be calibrated by performing a compass swing in the aircraft for
any new installations and any follow up maintenance activities that could affect RSM accuracy.

Such activities might include but are not limited to the replacement of the RSM, replacement of the
Configuration Module, installation of a mechanical or electrical device in the vicinity to the RSM,
installation of an appliance that might generate a magnetic interference.

NOTE: Before replacing the RSM and/or the Configuration Module, determine if the current
installation has had SB2009-02 applied by referring to the EFD1000 Configuration Chart
or the aircraft logs. If so, do not replace the Configuration Module or RSM without
completing the calibrations as identified in the SB2009-02. Contact an Aspen Avionics
FSE for more information.

An overview of the RSM Calibration procedure is as follows (see Figure 10-8):

CAUTION: When a Calibration is initiated, the aircraft must be turned as described below. If the
calibration is initiated and then accepted without moving the aircraft, an erroneous
calibration will be written to the Configuration Module, potentially resulting in failure to
initialize.

• A heading will be checked to verify the reasonableness of PFD heading prior to calibration.
• The aircraft will be taxied to a magnetically quiet and level area at least 200ft from metal
buildings and clear of metal grates, manhole covers and rebar within the concrete. A
Compass Rose is ideal for this procedure.
• The aircraft can start from any heading.
• With engines running, all electrical equipment operating, and the aircraft stationary the
RSM CAL page will be entered and Start Calibration will be initiated (see Figure 10-7).
• After a 15 second countdown timer the pilot/operator will begin to taxi the aircraft in a
circle (cw or ccw) with the radius of approximately twice the length of the aircraft’s wing as
viewed from the cockpit (≈ 30ft).
• The aircraft will be taxied under its own power at a constant rate around a circle until a 60
second timer elapses. The aircraft must not stop until the timer has exhausted.
• At the completion of the 60 seconds the aircraft will have made at least a 450º circle (360º
+ 90º) to approximately two complete circles (720º).
• At the end of the 60-second timer four headings about 90º apart will be checked against a
calibrated heading source (i.e., site compass, compass rose).
• If PFD heading is acceptable then the calibration is Accepted.
• If the PFD heading is not within tolerance then it is Rejected and the calibration procedure
is re-run.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 263-367 Revision AC

• After the calibration is accepted headings are checked using a calibrated reference (i.e., a
sight compass) every 30º (starting from North) to verify that the heading accuracy is within
±4º.
• EFD1000 PFD software version 1.1 and subsequent will allow the heading to be calibrated
every 30º.

10.5.1.1 Second Phase RSM Location Evaluation

As a second check against potentially damaging magnetic interference near the RSM it is required
that the following test be run. The handheld compass test in section 6 usually does an
acceptable job of locating a magnetically quiet area for mounting a RSM but does not take out all
the factors such as ferrous RSM mounting hardware and an RSM that may have come in contact
with a magnet due to poor handling and mounting practices. Follow the instructions below to fill
in Table 10-1.

STEP Example Actual

Vertical Component (Z) from NOAA (nT) 40,422.2nT
(Los Angeles)
Vertical Component (Z) from NOAA converted by
moving the decimal 5 places to left
.40
Z1
Vertical Component (Z) from EFD1000
(RSM level within 5 degrees)
.37
Z2
Vertical Component (Z) Average of North and
South reading (RSM tilted more than 5 degrees)
Not required as
RSM was within 5⁰
Z2
Add 0.1 to the Z1 box above .40 + .1 = .50
Z3
Subtract 0.1 from the Z1 box above .40 - .1 = .30
Z4
Does Z2 lie in between the Z3 and Z4 number? Yes

Table 10-2 – Vertical Component Evaluation table

Obtaining Vertical Component (Z) for your location

The first step will require navigating to the NOAA website and entering the geographical location
of the aircraft. Enter the following link in your Internet browser:

http://www.ngdc.noaa.gov/geomagmodels/IGRFWMM.jsp

Either enter your Zip code and click on “Get Location” or select a country and city from the drop
down menus. Your known Lat/Long may also be entered. Once your closest geographical area is
found the Lat/Long will pre-fill to the right. Leave the date fields as pre-filled (today’s date) and
then click on “Compute Magnetic Field Values” near the bottom center of the screen. Under the
column “Vertical Component” copy this value in nT (nanotesla) to the top box of Table 10-1.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 264-367 Revision AC

This value must be converted by moving the decimal point over 5 places to the left. For example
a value of 40,422.2nT will become .40 after the decimal is moved five places to the left and the
0.004222 is discarded. This value (Z1) will be compared to the Vertical Component on the
EFD1000 Diagnostic Page in the installation menu.

Obtaining Vertical Component (Z) from EFD1000

Enter the EFD1000 installation menu and navigate to the last menu page. On the Diagnostic Page
locate the MAGNETOMETER (GAUSS) row and note the third value in the row. Copy this value to
the Z2 box in Table 10-1 (example value is .37).

If the pitch angle of the RSM to the horizon (with aircraft sitting on the landing gear) is less than
5 degrees then the “Z” value can be read directly and compared to the NOAA number above. If
the RSM is tilted more than 5 degrees to the horizon then the averaging of two values to come up
with a “Z” for comparison will be required. To average two readings the aircraft should be
positioned facing north (±20 degrees) and a Z value recorded and then with the aircraft
positioned exactly 180 degrees from the northern heading the Z value is recorded. Add these
two numbers together and then divide by 2 to get the average “Z” value. Enter this value in the Z2
box of Table 10-1.

Now add and subtract 0.1 from Z1 to come up with a Z3 and Z4 range limit.

If Z2 falls between the Z3 and Z4 limits then the RSM location and magnetic signature is
acceptable for your geographic location and a RSM Calibration can proceed.

If the Z2 value does not fall between the Z3 and Z4 range limits then further investigation is
required. The RSM is not seeing the correct vertical component of the earth’s magnetic field due
to magnetic interference near the RSM. Check the RSM area for ferrous hardware and magnetic
interference. Contact an Aspen Avionics Field Service Engineer if further troubleshooting is
required.

If the RSM location is suspected of having magnetic interference a more accurate check is to level
the RSM to the horizon and compare the actual Z (Z2) to the NOAA value. When level the RSM Z
value should be within 0.03 of the NOAA value.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 265-367 Revision AC

10.5.1.2 Conventional Gear RSM Calibration Procedure

Perform the RSM calibration procedure per Section 10.5.2 with the tail wheel on the ground.
Verify heading accuracy is within +/- 4º. If the heading accuracy cannot be brought within +/-
4º tolerance then try temporarily shimming the rear of the RSM up. Perform another RSM
calibration. If a shim corrects the heading accuracy then install permanent shim per Section
6.9.12.

In some installations it might not be possible to achieve +/- 4º accuracy during the RSM
calibration with the aircraft tail wheel on the ground. If feasible and necessary, the RSM
calibration can be performed in the aircraft flight attitude (with the aircraft tail wheel lifted off
the ground). Contact Aspen Avionics product support for tail dragger RSM calibration assistance.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 266-367 Revision AC

Figure 10-6 – RSM Calibration Graphic

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 267-367 Revision AC

10.5.2 RSM Calibration Procedure

The RSM calibration routine is accomplished using the Installation Menu “RSM CALIBRATION” menu
page. See Section 10.4.5 (Installation Menu Access) for instructions on entering the INSTALLATION
MENU.

CAUTION: The “PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ” and “ROLL ATT TRIM” must be set correctly on the
Installation Menu page prior to calibrating the RSM.

Figure 10-7 – RSM Calibration Page

On the “RSM CALIBRATION” menu page the current calibrated heading (to the nearest 0.1 degrees)
will be continuously displayed adjacent to the “CAL HDG:” menu field.

NOTE: Verify CAL HDG is within 25 degrees of a calibrated compass source prior to starting
the RSM Calibration. This is a rough check of the hard and soft iron effects (magnetic
interference) in the vicinity of the RSM. Should the CAL HDG be greater than 25
degrees then the RSM location should be re-surveyed per Section 6.9.1.

With aircraft stationary at (POSITION 1) of Figure 10-6 press the “START CALIBRATION” line select
key. The annunciation shown in Figure 10-8 will be displayed with a countdown timer that begins
with 15 secs and counts down to 0 secs.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 268-367 Revision AC

CAUTION: Do not press ACCEPT Calibration without moving the aircraft in the procedure below
as corruption to the configuration module could occur.

MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION
IN PROGRESS

DO NOT MOVE THE AIRCRAFT

FOR THE NEXT 7 SECS

Figure 10-8 – Calibration in Process

When the menu of Figure 10-9 is displayed immediately begin taxiing the aircraft clockwise or
counter-clockwise at a constant rate of no faster than 1 turn every 30 seconds. About half normal
taxi speed or a brisk walking speed is about right. Approximately 10 seconds after initial
movement (see POSITION A) the aircraft should be taxiing at a constant rate (CR) throughout the
rest of the procedure. When the countdown timer is reached between one and a quarter turns
(450º) (POSITION B) and two turns (720º) (POSITION D) should have been completed. While turning
the aircraft do not stop the aircraft until the end of the 60-second timer and Figure 10-10
appears.

If you find that the timing of the turns was not right such that “Magnetometer Calibration
Complete” message occurs between B & D of Figure 10-6, then REJECT the results and re-run the
procedure.

MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION
IN PROGRESS

TURN THE AIRCRAFT

NO FASTER THAN
1 CIRCLE IN 30 SECS
UNTIL TIMER STOPS

TIME REMAINING: ## SECS

Figure 10-9 – Aircraft Turning

At the end of the calibration routine the “ACCEPT CALIBRATION?” and “REJECT CALIBRATION?”
menu options will be enabled.

NOTE: If the message “Erroneous Calibration Values” is displayed then magnetic interference
exists in the vicinity of the calibration area or the RSM is mounted in a magnetically noisy
area. Try the calibration process again in a flat magnetically quiet area. If the message is
displayed again the RSM location must be surveyed for magnetic interference.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 269-367 Revision AC

MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION
COMPLETE

PLEASE ACCEPT OR REJECT RESULTS

Figure 10-10 – Accept/Reject Results

To determine whether to ACCEPT or REJECT the results check four headings approximately 90º
apart against a known good heading source (i.e., aircraft compass, sight compass, compass rose).

If the headings are within ±10º then press ACCEPT and use the Heading Offset Adjustment in
Section 10.5.3 to align each heading value to actual.

NOTE: Typically with a clean RSM location the heading values will be within 3 degrees of actual
heading. If they are outside this value the RSM mounting area should be rechecked for
magnetic contamination (internal interference) or the calibration can be rerun in a new
location (external interference) to see if the values are improved. RSMs tilted to the upper
end of the limit may not be able to achieve the 3 degree or less of error without using the
Heading Offset Adjustment).

Pressing the “ACCEPT CALIBRATION” selection shall accept the calibration results, display the
annunciation shown in Figure 10-11 for 5 seconds, and return the “RSM CALIBRATION” menu page
to its initial state.

MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION

ACCEPTED

Figure 10-11 – Results Accepted

Pressing the “REJECT CALIBRATION” selection shall reject the calibration results. Reject the results
if the calibration was poor or a previously stored calibration has better heading accuracies.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 270-367 Revision AC

MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION

REJECTED

Figure 10-12 – Results Rejected

10.5.3 Heading Offset Adjustment

10.5.3.1 Heading Offset Adjustment

When the calibration routine is complete and the results have been accepted the CAL HDG value
will be displayed.

MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION

CAL HDG: 032.7º

Figure 10-13 – Calibration Heading before adjustment

Position the aircraft so that it is at a heading of 30º as verified by a sight compass or other
calibrated means. Press the line select key next to “HDG SEL” and then turn the right knob until
HDG SEL: 030º is displayed. Now press the line select key next to “HDG ADJ” and turn the right
knob until the CAL HDG of figure 10-13 displays exactly 030.0º as shown in figure 10-14 or as
close to 030º as possible within a ±4º tolerance. The HDG ADJ field will display the amount of
correction (+/- 6.0 degrees) that was required. Press the HDG ADJ line select key to accept the
setting.

MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION

CAL HDG: 030.0º

Figure 10-14 – Calibrated Heading after adjustment

Now repeat the process above for all other headings in 30º increments from 60º to 360º. Press
the MENU key to exit the Installation Menu. Continue with heading accuracy tests in Section
10.5.4.

NOTE: In some aircraft, prop wash and wind during ground operations can create inconsistent
pressures in the pitot-static system. The pressures can affect the ADAHRS, resulting in
small pitch and heading perturbations. Before reading the aircraft headings for the
purposes of calibration, ensure the attitude solution has stabilized and is not influenced
by external winds and pressures. The disturbances normally settle out over a period of

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 271-367 Revision AC

15 to 60 seconds. Idle power or temporarily selecting the alternate static source can
sometimes eliminate the effect.

10.5.4 Heading Accuracy Test

As a final check, position the aircraft on the headings shown on “Installation Final Check Sheet” of
Appendix B and verify heading (viewed on HSI display) is within +/- 4 degrees using a calibrated
heading source (i.e., sight compass, compass rose). Record the actual PFD headings in the table
for inclusion in the aircraft maintenance records.
If any heading is outside ±4º then rerun the Calibration Procedure and or Heading Offset
adjustment.

10.5.5 Heading Interference Test

With aircraft engine(s) running monitor current aircraft heading on PFD and exercise flight controls
stop to stop including flaps and any electric trim tabs. Verify the heading (viewed on HSI display)
does not change on the PFD by more than 2º. If movement of flight controls causes more than a
2º heading change then it may be necessary to degauss the flight controls including the cables. A
handheld degausser can be found at most audio and video stores.

• Operate all electrical and environmental equipment including:

• Blowers, fans, heaters, air conditioner
• Deice boots, fuel pump(s), backup vacuum pumps
• Landing, logo, NAV lighting
• Operate pulse equipment – transponder, WX radar, DME
• Key all VHF communication radios.
• Operate autopilot so that all servos run (roll, pitch, yaw, trim)

If the operation of any electrical system causes the heading to change by more than 2º the RSM
wiring may need to be relocated away from the offending system. The offending system may also
have a bonding issue to the airframe that needs to be corrected.

Run engine(s) from idle to take off power and verify that the heading does not change by more
than 2º. Prop wash at higher engine RPMs may cause a heading shift; try an alternate static source
if this is an issue.

This completes all RSM calibration and heading tests.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 272-367 Revision AC

10.6 Ground Test Procedure (PFD, EFD500 MFD and EFD1000 in PFD Rev & MFD Mode)

The ground test procedure will consist of checking for proper operation of the following items.
Check the PFD and the EFD1000 MFD in reverted mode simultaneously. Check the EFD1000 MFD and
EFD500 MFD using the sections marked for these devices:

a) Airspeed Tape, Altitude Tape, and OAT Sensor

b) AHRS Sensor
c) GPS Sensor Inputs (including Backup RSM GPS Sensor)
d) Navigation Sensor Inputs (if installed)
e) Backup Navigation Indicator
f) Autopilot Sensor Outputs and FD input (if installed)
g) ACU2 Analog features (ADF, Radio Altimeter)
h) Sonalert (if installed)
i) Decision Height (if installed)
j) Traffic Display (if installed)
k) XM Weather Display and Control (if installed)
l) WX500 Display and Control (if installed)
m) Reversion Mode (EFD1000 MFD only)
n) Ancillary Equipment Heading Check (if using heading output from EFD or ACU)
o) Ancillary Equipment Air Data Check (if connected)
p) Inter-Display Communication Test
q) EMI Test
r) Flight Control Interference Check
s) OBS Test - Dual A429 GPS
t) OBS Test – Single A429 with RS232 GPS, or Single RS232 GPS and Analog GPS
u) OBS Test – Single GPS

CAUTION: Do not exceed the aircraft’s maximum Airspeed, Altitude, or Vertical Speed at anytime
during the testing. Damage could result to the pre-existing aircraft instruments.

NOTE: When changing indicated airspeed or altitude on the ground using pitot/static test
equipment, changes in the AHRS display of pitch, roll and heading will result, possibly
accompanied by a CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE annunciation. This behavior is the result of
the Kalman Filter algorithms employed in the EFD1000 attitude solution. These changes
in pitch, roll or heading are normal and do NOT indicate a system failure. The integrated
nature of the EFD1000 AHRS algorithms is such that AHRS performance can only be
properly evaluated during flight or ground maneuvers.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 273-367 Revision AC

10.6.1 Indicated Airspeed Display

WARNING: This test must be accomplished by an appropriately rated mechanic or repairman (14
CFR 43.3).

For aircraft with a Vne:

Use the Installation Final Check Sheet of Appendix B to record the aircraft speed settings from
the Aircraft Flight Manual in the IAS Setting column. Set the Pitot/Static test set for 5000 ft.
above field elevation. Increase airspeed to Vne and check all Speed Bands and Speed Markers
listed in table.

For aircraft with a Vmo:

Use the Installation Final Check Sheet of Appendix B and Table 10-1 (Section 10.4.8.1) for this
test. Record the aircraft speed settings from the Aircraft Flight Manual in the IAS Setting
column. Set the Pitot/Static test set to the Altitudes listed in Table 10-1 for your aircraft type.
Verify the Barber Pole or Redline is in the right position for each altitude. Increase airspeed to
Vmo and check all Speed Bands and Speed Markers listed in the table.

10.6.2 Altitude Display

a) With the Pitot/Static tester still set for 5000 ft. above field elevation and with BARO Set to
29.92 in. Hg. on the PFD (see Section 12), verify altitude tape displays altitude within ±40ft
of the calibrated test set altitude.

10.6.3 System Leak Test

a) Perform a pitot-static system leak test per the aircraft manufacturer’s maintenance manual
or set the Pitot Static Test Set to 1000ft above field elevation and without additional
pumping for a period of 1 minute the aircraft static system should not lose more than
100ft of altitude in a non-pressurized aircraft.

10.6.4 Outside Air Temperature (if ENABLED)

a) Verify the OAT displays on the Data Bar and is not dashed.

10.6.5 AHRS Sensor Test

a) Verify that correct aircraft attitude information is presented on the Attitude Indicator
portion of the PFD. The Flags may take up to 5 minutes to clear when the ambient
temperature is below -20° C. Typically the attitude solution will be available in less than 3
minutes.

10.6.6 GPS Sensor Test

Refer to GPS manufacturer’s instructions for operating GPS receiver and verifying a complete and
fully functional interface.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 274-367 Revision AC

10.6.6.1 All GPS interfaces

a) Allow the GPS receiver to acquire a valid position and enter a Direct To waypoint or a
Flight Plan. Verify the flight plan data appears on the PFD (if wired) and that it is correctly
oriented on the magnetic compass card.

NOTE: If the basemap does not correctly orient on the compass card, ensure that
the GPS is configured for magnetic north reference.

b) Ensure GPS2 (if installed) is OFF.

c) Select GPS1 on the PFD and verify the CRS pointer auto-slews (if enabled) to the desired
track (DTK). To enable AUTOCRS go to Main Menu page 1.
d) Select OBS or Hold Mode (if available) on the GPS and verify that the CRS knob on the PFD
has control over the CRS pointer (manual-slew).
e) Verify the To/From and Left/Right deflection has the correct polarity.

NOTE: The EFD1000 displays the CDI in EFIS scale factors which are 2.5 dots full scale
deflection. This is half that shown on a mechanical indicator. Therefore 0.155DDM = 2.5
dots and 0.093DDM =1.5 dots on the EFD indicator.

NOTE: The EFD1000 system will not display a VDI (GPS LPV Glide Slope) indicator
without an activated valid LPV approach with APPROACH mode active.

NOTE: The EFD1000 requires software v2.3 or later to display a VDI needle when the WAAS GPS is
on the self-test page.

f) Verify that the OBS resolver output (if available) reads correctly on the GPS.
g) Turn off the GPS receiver and verify GPS1 is red slashed and goes invalid on PFD.
h) Verify that RSM GPS Reversion is correctly annunciated.
i) Repeat procedure for GPS2 if installed.

10.6.6.2 Analog GPS interfaces

a) Verify OBS accuracy on GPS and calibrate if necessary using GPS manufacturer’s
instructions.

NOTE: The self-test page on these types of GPS may not pull the lateral flag and therefore may
not show a valid CDI or to/from indication when in test mode.

10.6.6.3 RSM GPS (if ENABLED)

a) With RSM GPS enabled verify RSM GPS in yellow box does not appear on left side of HSI
display. Absence of RSM annunciation verifies correct operation of RSM GPS. See
Installation Menu 4 for instructions on enabling the RSM GPS module.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 275-367 Revision AC

10.6.7 NAV Receiver Sensor Test

a) Select NAV1 on the PFD and create a valid and invalid condition with a Nav Signal Generator
verifying that the NAV Flag is displayed (Red Slash) when invalid.
b) Tune an ILS frequency on the Nav Receiver and verify the LDI (Localizer) scale is displayed
on the ADI portion of the PFD.
c) Tune the Nav Signal Generator to the ILS test frequency and generate a valid Glide Slope
signal. Verify the VDI (Glide Slope) scale appears on the right side of the ADI.
d) Generate a signal above and below the Glide Slope beam and verify proper polarity of the
GS deviation for Fly Up and Fly Down on the PFD.

NOTE: The EFD1000 system will not display a VDI (Glide Slope) indicator without both valid
localizer and Glide Slope signals.

e) Repeat procedure for NAV2 if installed.

10.6.8 Backup Navigation Indicator

a) Verify the backup navigation indicator continues to function after pulling the PFD and ACU
circuit breakers.

10.6.9 Autopilot Sensor Test

Refer to autopilot manufacturer’s post installation check out procedures for complete autopilot
post installation ground checks. At a minimum complete the following checks to verify the
EFD1000 interface is satisfactory.

NOTE: For attitude-based autopilots it might be necessary to level the autopilot gyro to get
proper FD and autopilot response from the test.

CAUTION: Verify control surfaces are free and clear.

a) If installed, center the HDG Bug under the lubber line and engage the autopilot and select
HDG Mode.
b) The FD (if installed) should be level and the yoke should not turn.
c) Move the HDG Bug left of the lubber line and the FD and or yoke should bank left.
d) Move the HDG Bug to right of lubber line and the FD and or yoke should bank right.
e) With NAV1 selected on the PFD and a valid Nav Signal generated engage the autopilot in
NAV Mode and verify that the FD and/or yoke follow the CRS Pointer in phasing.
f) Verify that the autopilot responds to correct Left/Right phasing by generating left and right
needle deflection. For autopilots that monitor the NAV FLAG, generate an invalid Nav
Signal and verify autopilot responds accordingly.
g) Engage APPR Mode and verify that the autopilot responds correctly to a generated Fly Up
and Fly Down command. For autopilots that monitor the GS FLAG, generate an invalid GS
Signal and verify autopilot responds accordingly.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 276-367 Revision AC

Flight Director Test

a) If installed, engage the Flight Director (FD) in HDG Mode and verify that the command bars
are in view.

NOTE: Some rate-based autopilots may require a valid vertical and lateral mode to be engaged to
view the flight director.

b) Adjust the HDG Bug to the right of the lubber line. Verify the command bars indicate bank
right. Adjust the HDG Bug to the left of the lubber line and verify the command bars
indicate bank left.
c) Compare the FD bars to the mechanical FD instrument, if installed. Note the degrees of
difference between displays, if any, and adjust “FD Roll Offset Adj” as necessary on
Installation Menu page 9 to closely match both displays. For example, if PFD FD bars need
2 more degrees of right bank then set FD Roll Offset Adj = +2.
d) Generate a pitch up command with the flight director and verify FD bars indicate pitch up.
Generate a pitch down command with the flight director and verify FD bars indicate pitch
down.
e) Compare the FD bars to the mechanical FD instrument, if installed. Note degrees of
difference between displays, if any, and adjust “FD Pitch Offset Adj” as necessary on
Installation Menu page 9 to closely match both displays. For example, if PFD FD bars need
3 more degrees of pitch up then set FD Pitch Offset Adj = +3.

10.6.10 ACU2 Analog Inputs

10.6.10.1 Automatic Direction Finder (ADF)

a) Press one of the bearing pointer selection keys until ADF1 and or ADF2 is shown.
b) Tune the ADF receiver to a radio station or the frequency on a signal generator.
c) Verify the ADF needle points to the station or generator.

10.6.10.2 Radio Altimeter

a) Make sure the Radar Altimeter setting is turned on in the Main Menu.
b) Press the radar altimeter self test button and verify the display shows (RA 50, or RA 100
depending on type of a radio altimeter) +/-10ft in the radio altitude display field.
Otherwise make sure it displays 0ft +/-10ft while the aircraft is sitting on its gear and is
outside away from buildings and manhole covers.

10.6.11 Sonalert Test

a) If installed (may be required of ESV enabled PFD), verify the Sonalert is operational by
generating a Selected Altitude alert on the PFD. This can be done by setting the Selected
Altitude to 300ft above current altitude.
b) Then adjust the BARO setting (increasing altitude on the tape) until the solid yellow altitude
flag is seen on the PFD (just left of Selected Altitude window).
c) The Sonalert should sound before reaching the selected altitude.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 277-367 Revision AC

d) Compare the amplitude of the Stall warning tone or the autopilot-disconnect tone to the
Sonalert tone. The amplitudes should be comparable when seated in the pilot’s position
and wearing headsets.

10.6.12 Decision Height (DH) Test

a) If installed, set Decision Height on Radar Altimeter indicator to less than

50ft.
b) Press the Test button on the Radar Altimeter Indicator and verify that the DH
annunciation displays on the PFD.
c) For KRA-10A installations it may be necessary to turn the DH off and then push and hold
the DH Test knob while turning it clockwise until the DH light comes on.

10.6.13 Traffic Display Test (if installed, for PFD, EFD500 MFD, & EFD1000 MFD)

a) Turn on traffic processor and initiate TAS self test through traffic control unit. Verify traffic
test pattern appears correctly on the EFD. The traffic interface may also be verified by
observing aircraft in the vicinity on the EFD display.

10.6.14 XM Weather Display and Control Test (if installed, applies to PFD, EFD500 MFD, and
EFD1000 MFD)

a) Turn on XM weather receiver and allow it to acquire satellite data. A clear view of the
southern sky will be required.
b) Select the XM STATUS page on the EFD and verify the XM Serial Number and the Signal
Quality is reported.
c) Select various weather options from EFD to verify control bus functionality.

10.6.15 WX-500 Display and Control Test (if installed, applies to PFD, EFD500 MFD, and
EFD1000 MFD)

a) Turn on WX500 receiver.

b) Select WX500 display on EFD and initiate a strike test through EFD (if configured for
“Control”) or initiate the strike test through the WX-500 control unit if configured for
“Display”.
c) Verify strike test data appears on the EFD display.

10.6.16 Ancillary Equipment Heading Check

a) Verify proper operation of any ancillary components that are using either the ARINC 429,
RS-232 or the ARINC 407 synchro heading output.
b) Use ancillary equipment manufacturers’ installation test procedures to perform ground
check on their equipment.

10.6.17 Ancillary Equipment Air Data Check

a) Verify proper operation of any ancillary components that are using the ARINC 429 or RS-
232 air data output from the EFD1000 system.
b) Use ancillary equipment manufacturers’ installation test procedures to perform ground
checks on their equipment.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 278-367 Revision AC

10.6.18 EFD Inter-System Communication Test

For all multi display interfaces the RS232 inter-system communications should be checked as
follows:
a) Begin with all displays powered on.
b) Pull the circuit breaker to the PFD display and verify that the MFD display(s) annunciate
“Cross Link Failure”. Reset PFD breaker.
c) In a Three-display installation pull each MFD circuit breaker individually and verify the
other MFD displays “Cross Link Failure”.
d) In EFD1000 MFD installations press the REV button on the MFD and adjust the Baro setting
on the EFD1000 MFD and verify the Baro changes on the PFD to match.

10.6.19 EBB58 Battery Test (if installed) & internal battery tests

All EFD systems have an internal or external battery that must be tested. Some EFD1000 MFD
systems are connected to the EBB58 external battery. The battery percentage is verified on all EFD
systems. For EBB58 installations the Emergency Disconnect switch must be exercised to verify
operation.

For best results, read these instructions before executing the test.

a) Provide external power to all EFD1000 PFD/MFD and EFD500 MFD.

b) Select the battery menu by pressing the MENU key and rotating the right knob to the
second to the last page. This is the page that shows the battery and external power
conditions. Verify that the external power voltage (the power to the EFD) is at the
appropriate level for the aircraft, and the last line on the Menu page shows BATT:
CHARGING.
c) With the EFD Menu displayed, press the line select key on the EFD menu next to “BATTERY”.
A timer will count down, after which the battery percentage remaining will be displayed.
Power for the EFD will transition from external power to EFD battery power.
d) NOTE: The external power to the EFDs must continue to be supplied.
e) Verify that the battery percentage remaining is at least 80%. See the note below.
f) For internal batteries this completes the test. For EFD1000 MFD connected to the EBB58
external battery, continue with step g).
g) Turn off the MFD master switch. Select the EBB Emergency Disconnect switch to DISC.
Verify the EFD1000 MFD immediately turns off. Switch the Emergency Disconnect back to
NORM. Turn on the MFD master switch and verify the EFD1000 MFD restarts in the normal
boot-up sequence.

NOTE: If the battery remaining percentage is below 80%, then charge the internal or EBB battery
to 80% or above by leaving the EFD powered on from external power with the EBB
emergency disconnect switch in the NORM position.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 279-367 Revision AC

10.6.20 TAPES Configuration Check

Verify the tapes are “LOCKED” or “UNLOCKED” as required by the flowchart in Figure 10-3.

a) If TAPES are locked on (LOCK ON) - IAS and Altitude tapes should be visible and when
pressing the MENU key the TPS line select key should be locked to ENABLE.
b) If TAPES are locked off (LOCK OFF) – IAS and Altitude tapes should not be displayed on PFD
and when pressing the MENU key the TPS line select key should be locked to DISABLE.
c) If TAPES are UNLOCKED – then pressing the MENU key and then the TPS line select key will
allow setting to be changed from ENABLE to DISABLE.

10.6.21 EMI Test (test with all EFD units operating)

Monitor the EFD for Flags, Red-X’s, Red Slashes, heading changes, altitude changes, airspeed
changes, attitude changes or any error messages while performing the following Test:

a) Transmit on all Comm radios for 20 seconds each at 118.000MHz, 126.900MHz, and
136.950MHz.
b) Turn on all transponders, DMEs, Wx Radar, and all other pulse type equipment for 20
seconds each.
c) Operate all aircraft lighting including position lights, strobe lights, navigation lights, and all
other forms of lighting for 20 seconds each.
d) Operate all environmental equipment including fans, air conditioning, heaters, and all other
forms of environmental control equipment for 20 seconds each.
e) Operate Fuel pump(s), deice boots, windshield heat, prop heat, flaps.
f) Operate autopilot, servos, yaw damper, and all electric trim servos.
g) Operate engine(s) and verify no interference.

10.6.22 Flight Control Interference Check

CAUTION: Verify control surfaces are free and clear.

a) With all EFD mounted in the instrument panel push the control column (yoke or stick) all
the way forward (nose down) and verify there is sufficient clearance between all EFD, and
their knobs, and the control column. With the control column fully forward move it from
lock to lock (full right to full left) and verify there is sufficient clearance between all EFD,
and their knobs, and the control column.

10.6.23 OBS Mode Check - Dual ARINC SDI GPS devices

a) Establish flight plans on each ARINC SDI-enabled GPS with destinations within 200 miles.
b) Enable the OBS mode on each GPS device.
c) Select GPS 1 on the PFD
d) Select GPS 1 on the MFD Secondary HSI (SHSI), if installed.
e) Select CRS on the PFD and turn the CRS PFD knob.
f) The GPS 1 OBS should respond to the CRS pointer (not GPS 2).
g) The MFD SHSI Course pointer should track the PFD CRS pointer.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 280-367 Revision AC

h) Select GPS 2 on the PFD.

i) The GPS 2 OBS should respond to the PFD CRS pointer (not GPS 1).
j) When GPS 2 is selected on the MFD SHSI, the MFD should track the PFD CRS pointer.
k) If enabled on the installation menu, the OBS indication (white and magenta lines extending
from the destination fix) will be displayed on the PFD, EFD500 MFD and EFD1000 MFD as
applicable.

10.6.24 OBS Mode Check for one analog/RS-232 GPS device and one analog GPS device or one
analog/RS-232 GPS device and one ARINC GPS device.

a) Establish a flight plan on the GPS devices with destinations within 200 miles.
b) Enable the OBS mode on the GPS devices.
c) Select GPS 1 on the PFD and select CRS on the PFD.
d) Turn the CRS knob.
e) The GPS 1 OBS should respond to the CRS value.
f) The GPS 2 OBS should respond to the CRS value.
g) The Secondary HSI on the MFD should track the PFD CRS value.
h) If enabled, the OBS indication (white and magenta lines extending from the destination fix)
will be displayed on the PFD, EFD500 MFD and EFD1000 MFD as applicable.

10.6.25 OBS Mode Check - Single analog, ARINC or RS-232 GPS device

a) Establish a flight plan on the GPS device with a destination within 200 miles.
b) Enable the OBS mode on the GPS devices.
c) Select GPS 1 on the PFD and select CRS on the PFD
d) Turn the CRS knob.
e) The GPS 1 OBS should respond to the CRS value.
f) The Secondary HSI on the MFD should track the PFD CRS value.
g) If enabled, the OBS indications (white and magenta lines extending from the destination
fix) will be displayed on the PFD, EFD500 MFD and EFD1000 MFD as applicable.

10.6.26 EA100 Adapter Testing

See Appendix E for EA100 Adapter configuration and testing.

10.7 WX-500 Installation and Maintenance

When an EFD is configured as “CONTROL” the following functions are accessed through the WX-500
page of the installation menus. They are intended to assist maintenance personnel in performing
installation or repair of the WX-500. Consult manufacturer’s data for troubleshooting and repair of
the WX-500 sensor and peripheral equipment.

When the WX-500 Mode is Control, the WX-500 Installation Menu shall display and enable the
SYSTEM DATA, STRIKE TEST, NOISE MONITOR, and ANTENNA MOUNT menu keys.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 281-367 Revision AC

When the WX-500 Mode is Display or None, the WX-500 Installation Menu shall disable (gray) the
SYSTEM DATA, STRIKE TEST, NOISE MONITOR, and ANTENNA MOUNT menu keys. Note - Use other
installed WX-500 control panel to access these functions.

10.7.1 System Data

When the System Data display is selected (line select key depressed), information regarding the
WX-500 is requested by the EFD and displayed in the upper portion of the screen. There are four
pages of data that are selected by rotating the right knob.

• Software Versions – Page 1

• Configuration Inputs and Heading – Page 2
• Environmental Data – Page 3
• Fault Log – Page 4

Figure 10-15 – WX-500 System Data Page 1

Figure 10-16 – WX-500 System Data Page 2

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 282-367 Revision AC

Figure 10-17 – WX-500 System Data Page 3

Figure 10-18 – WX-500 System Data Page 4

10.7.2 Strike Test

When the Strike Test display is selected, the EFD sends a Strike Test mode control message to the
WX-500 and displays the test strikes in the upper portion of the screen.

The outer ring of the Strike Test display shall represent 25 nm. The sides of the Strike Test mode
acceptance box shall be drawn at 18±3 nm and 45±10 degrees. Test strikes shall be displayed
for one second and appear as a cross at the reported range and bearing as shown above.

Figure 10-19 – WX-500 Strike Test Page

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 283-367 Revision AC

10.7.3 Noise Monitor

When the Noise Monitor display is selected, the EFD sends a Noise Monitor mode control message
to the WX-500 and displays the noise strikes in the upper portion of the screen as shown.

Figure 10-20 – WX-500 Noise Monitor Page

The noise monitor mode shall display triggers, out to 400 nm, until the noise monitor mode is
exited. The noise monitor mode shall display the number of triggers received since entering this
mode. Pressing and holding the noise monitor line select key shall activate the clear strike
function.

10.7.4 Antenna Mount

When the Antenna Mount menu item is selected, the installer can edit the Antenna Mount setting
to be Top or Bottom. When the Antenna Mount menu item is deselected, the EFD1000 EFD sends
an Antenna Mount message to the WX-500. If the value transmitted by the EFD1000 EFD matches
the jumper value detected by in the WX-500, the Antenna Jumper Error condition is cleared.
Otherwise the Antenna Jumper Error condition is set and no weather data will be transmitted.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 284-367 Revision AC

11Post Installation Flight Check

CAUTION: Only perform flight test in day VFR conditions with an appropriately rated
pilot for the aircraft type to be flown.

For MFD1000 installations press the REV button on the MFD to revert the MFD to a PFD. Observe both
the PFD and MFD1000 during the flight checks below.

11.1 Basic ADI Flight Checks (PFD and EFD1000 MFD in reversion)

Fly the aircraft in straight and level flight and verify that the ADI roll indication is level with reference
to the horizon. Observe the Slip Indicator is centered under the Roll pointer and adjust rudder trim if
available to center.

a) Make a coordinated 30-degree banked turn to the right and verify that the ADI roll indication
is correct with reference to the horizon.

b) Make a coordinated 30-degree banked turn to the left and verify the ADI roll indication is
correct with reference to the horizon.

c) Pitch the aircraft up 10 degrees and verify the ADI pitch indication is correct with reference to
the horizon.

d) Pitch the aircraft down 10 degrees and verify the ADI pitch indication is correct with reference
to the horizon.

11.2 Basic HSI/DG Flight Checks (PFD and EFD1000 MFD in reversion)

a) Make a 180-degree coordinated turn to the right and verify that the compass scale and
numerical heading indication correctly track the aircraft heading during the turn.

b) Make a 180-degree coordinated turn to the left and verify that the compass scale and
numerical heading indication correctly track the aircraft heading during the turn.

c) Then turn from West to North (30° Angle of Bank) and, using an outside reference, roll out to a
northerly heading. (In the Southern Hemisphere, also turn West to South)

d) Immediately after the aircraft rolls out, record the heading indication.

e) Maintain the same heading by outside visual reference. There may be some movement of the
heading indicator as the heading system stabilizes.

f) When the heading stabilizes, record the heading again. Then perform the test from East to
North (In the southern Hemisphere, also turn east to South).

g) If the difference between the heading on rollout and the heading after stabilizing is more than
7°, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Appendix A.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 285-367 Revision AC

11.3 ILS Flight Checks PFD (EFD1000 MFD and EFD1000 Secondary HSI)

a) Hand fly an ILS approach and verify that the raw data on the PFD and MFD for Lateral and
Vertical Deviation Indicators are correctly displayed. Check the CDI indication for correct
needle displacement. Momentarily verify the MFD Secondary HSI also shows the lateral and
vertical deviation indicators correctly.

b) Check ILS2 if installed.

11.4 Autopilot Flight Checks (if installed, PFD only)

WARNING: Remember to disconnect the Autopilot immediately if it is not performing its intended
function.

With wings level and the HDG Bug centered under the lubber line, deselect GPSS and engage the
autopilot in HDG Mode and ALT Hold Mode (if available). Verify that the aircraft makes no abrupt
turns during engagement and the aircraft continues to track straight.

a) Now turn the HDG Bug 10 degrees to the right and verify the aircraft smoothly turns to the
right with a bank angle not exceeding 10 degrees. If 10 degrees was acceptable in
performance then proceed by turning the HDG Bug 90 degrees to the right and verify the
aircraft makes a standard rate turn and smoothly rolls out on to the correct Heading.

b) Now repeat the test to the left.

c) With VLOC1 selected (VOR1 source indication) and a VOR Station tuned. Adjust the CRS
pointer to center the CDI. Engage the autopilot in NAV Mode and verify the aircraft tracks to
the VOR.

d) Repeat with NAV2, if installed.

e) Enter a valid flight plan or Direct To on the GPS. Couple the GPS to the HSI. Engage the
autopilot in NAV Mode, verify the autopilot tracks the GPS. (Note: GPSS is disabled for this test,
this test is verifying the GPS deviations to the autopilot)

f) Repeat with GPS2, if installed.

g) For GPS receivers using ARINC 429 interfaces, enable GPSS and engage the autopilot in HDG
Mode. Verify the autopilot tracks the GPS flight plan. Place the GPS into OBS (HOLD) Mode
(some GPS installations may require manual disabling of AUTOCRS). Use the CRS Pointer on
the HSI to steer the autopilot via the GPS. With the HDG Bug centered, press the GPSS button
again and verify the HDG Bug controls the autopilot as before.

h) Perform an ILS approach using VLOC1 (ILS1 source indication). Verify that the autopilot tracks
the localizer, then captures and tracks the glideslope if installed.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 286-367 Revision AC

i) Now repeat with ILS2 if installed.

j) If your GPS supports GPS WAAS LPV approaches, perform an LPV approach using GPS1. Verify
that the autopilot tracks the GPS lateral approach guidance, then captures and tracks the GPS
LPV vertical guidance.

k) Repeat with GPS2, if installed.

11.5 Document Test Flight

This completes the flight test. If everything was satisfactory then document the completion of the
Test Flight in aircraft logbook in accordance with FAR 91.407(b).

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 287-367 Revision AC

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 288-367 Revision AC

12Operating Instructions
The operation section describes all of the features of the PRO model with all available sensor options
configured. Should your installation not include a particular sensor (i.e., NAV2, autopilot) then that
system feature will be not available. The PRO DIGITAL model has all the features of the PRO minus the
autopilot interface.

Basic operation of the EFD1000 MFD and EFD500 MFD are covered in this section. For detailed operating
instructions see the MFD pilot’s guide.

The EFD1000 is a Multi-use system. The following describes the functions that are intended to be
provided by this article.

12.1 Pilot Controls

12.1.1 Overview

Pilot interaction with the EFD1000/EFD500 is accomplished through two knobs with push/rotate
function and 11 buttons located on the display bezel. Refer to
Figure 12-1.

Two control knobs are used to control pilot settable bugs and references.

Three lower push buttons, located between the control knobs, are used to select navigation
sources for the bearing pointers and the HSI.

Three dedicated buttons on the upper side of the right bezel control map range, display reversion,
and provide access the main menu.

Five soft keys on the lower half of the right bezel control frequently used commands. These five
keys are also used when navigating the main menu.

12.1.2 Power Control

To enhance safety, the EFD1000/EFD500 includes an internal or Emergency Backup Battery

(Optional, EFD1000 MFD) that allows the system to continue to operate in the event of a failure of
the aircraft electrical system. This ensures that in addition to the standby instruments, the
EFD1000 primary flight instrument and the EFD1000 MFD continues to remain available for a
period of time following the loss of all external supply power.

If the EFD1000 MFD is being used for required standby instruments then the EBB58 Emergency
Backup Battery is required by regulation. See AFMS for instructions on testing prior to flight.

The typical EFD1000 installation receives aircraft power from the battery bus via a dedicated circuit
breaker and EFIS Master and optional MFD Master switch.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 289-367 Revision AC

Whenever indicated airspeed is invalid or below 30 KIAS the EFD1000 will power up and power
down with the application or removal of external power. A message is presented during the
normal power down sequence to enable the pilot to abort the shutdown and switch to internal
battery.

When IAS is greater than 30 KIAS and the input voltage drops below 12.3V (14V Electrical System)
or 24.6V (28V Electrical System) the EFD will automatically switch to its internal battery (e.g.
aircraft charging system failure).

The EFD will also switch to internal or the EBB battery if an overvoltage condition is sensed.

The EFD1000 internal battery (or Emergency Backup Battery in the case of the 910-00001-002
EFD) will provide at least 30 minutes of power when it is fully charged. The battery provides power
to the display head, RSM and emergency GPS. Reducing the backlight intensity will extend the
battery operating time.

When operating from battery, a red “ON BAT” annunciation and battery charge status indication is
presented in the lower portion of the Attitude Indicator.

A unit operating from battery may be powered off using the “Shut Down” command available in
the Power Settings Menu.

In the unlikely event that the normal power control is not working, the EFD may be forced to shut
down by first pulling its associated circuit breaker and then pressing and holding the REV button
for at least 5 seconds.

Battery charge status may be viewed from the “Power Settings” page of the Main Menu.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 290-367 Revision AC

12.1.3 PFD Display and Control 12) CDI Source Control

13) Dual-Line Bearing Pointer Source Select
Layout
14) Micro SD Card slot
NOTE: The MFD control layout is similar to
15) Automatic Dimming Photocell
the PFD. The display button (#9) 16) Attitude Indicator
selects the view. 17) Aircraft Symbol
18) Single Cue Flight Director (optional
– compatible autopilot required)
19) Roll Pointer
20) Slip / Skid Indicator
21) Airspeed Indicator Tape
22) Selected Airspeed Field
23) Airspeed Drum/Pointer
24) Altitude Alert
25) Selected Altitude Field
26) Altitude Drum/Pointer
27) Altitude Tape
28) Radio Altitude
29) Selected Minimums Field and MINIMUMS
annunciation
30) Decision Height “DH” Annunciation
31) LDI Navigation Source Indication
32) Lateral Deviation Indicator
33) Vertical Deviation Indicator
34) True Airspeed
35) Barometric Pressure Setting Field
36) Ground Speed
37) OAT
38) Wind Direction Arrow
39) Wind Direction and Speed
40) Selected Source Information Field
41 Selected Course (CRS)Field
42) Selected Heading Field
43) Vertical Speed Digital Value
44) Vertical Speed Tape
45) Left Control Knob state
46) Right Control Knob state
47) Single-Needle Bearing Pointer Source
48) Single-Needle Source Info Block
49) Dual-Needle Bearing Pointer Source
Figure 12-1 – Bezel and Display Features 50) Dual-Needle Source Info Block
51) CDI Navigation Source
PFD Controls
52) Magnetic Heading
1) Reversion Control
53) Compass Scale
2) Range Control
54) Hot Key legend
3) Menu Control
55) CRS Pointer
4) 1/2 page, 2/2 page
56) Single-Needle Bearing Pointer
5) “MIN” (1/2 page), LTNG (2/2 page)
57) Double-Needle Bearing Pointer
6) “360/ARC” his (1/2 page), NXRD (2/2 page)
58) Heading Bug
7) “GPSS” GPS Steering (1/2 page), TRFC (2/2 page)
59) Airspeed Bug
8) ON/OFF Control BARO
60) Altitude Bug
9) Right Control Knob
10) Left Control Knob
11) Single-Line Bearing Pointer Source Select

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 291-367 Revision AC

12.1.4 Control Knobs

12.1.4.1 General

Two control knobs on the EFD bezel are used to adjust pilot editable data fields on the EFD. The
left knob adjusts data fields on the left side of the display, and the right knob adjusts data fields
on the right side of the display.

The knob logic includes active and inactive states to prevent inadvertent adjustment of editable
fields. After 10 seconds of inactivity, the knob returns to an inactive “home” state. A single push
or rotating the knob activates an inactive knob. Pushing the knob again will advance the knob to
the next editable field in a round-robin sequence.

When inactive, the knob legend is rendered in Cyan. Once activated, the knob legend and
associated data field and bug (where appropriate) are rendered in magenta.

The MFD control knobs select the views and the pages.

12.2 Traffic Display (optional)

Traffic is displayed on the PFD as an overlay on the HSI display. To enable traffic press the TRFC line
select key to highlight. To remove the overlay press the TRFC line select key again.

Traffic may be displayed on the MFD as either a dedicated traffic display or as an overlay with other
data.

See the PFD and MFD Pilot’s Guides for additional operational information.

12.3 XM Weather Display (optional)

XM Weather on the PFD is an overlay on the HSI display. To enable XM Wx press the NXRD line select
key to highlight. To remove the overlay press the NXRD line select key again.

XM Weather may be displayed on the MFD as either a dedicated XM Weather display or as an overlay
with other data.

See the PFD and MFD Pilot’s Guides for additional operational information.

12.4 WX-500 Display (optional)

WX-500 data is displayed on the PFD as an overlay on the HSI display. To enable lightning press the
LTNG line select key to highlight. To remove the overlay press the LTNG line select key again. STRK
and CELL indications show the WX-500 functions.

Lightning may be displayed on the MFD as either a dedicated lightning display or as an overlay with
other data.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 292-367 Revision AC

See the PFD and MFD Pilot’s Guides for additional operational information.

12.5 Charts

Software version 2.2 and above allows for the display of AeroNav Services (formerly NACO) Charts and
Geo-Referenced airport diagrams [Aerodrome Moving Map Display (AMMD)] on all versions of MFD.
The (AMMD) function is an Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) Type C application.

NOTE
The intended function of AMMD is to help flight crews orient themselves on the airport surface
and improve pilot positional awareness during taxi operations. AMMD function is not sufficient to
be used as the basis for maneuvering and is not to be used for navigation.

Airport Diagrams may be viewed in Heading Up (HDG), North Up (N UP), and Normal (NORM)
orientations through round-robin Hot Key selection. The Normal orientation mimics the presentation
provided in the AeroNav Services hardcopies.

NOTE
Not all airports have AeroNav Services Airport Diagrams. Not all diagrams are geo-referenced

The pilot may overlay the Ownship symbol on geo-referenced Airport Diagrams, which, in turn,
becomes an Aerodrome Moving Map Display (AMMD). To display the Ownship symbol, press the OWN
Hot Key when a diagram is displayed. As long as the aircraft is located within the area of the Airport
Diagram, and GPS position and EFD1000 heading information are valid, the Ownship symbol will be
displayed and oriented appropriately. The EFD1000’s heading determines the Ownship’s orientation
and its position is determined by a connected GPS navigation source.

Instrument Approach Procedures may be viewed in HDG and N UP orientations.

The pilot can overlay the Ownship symbol on geo-referenced Approach Procedures. To display the
Ownship symbol, press the OWN Hot Key when a procedure is displayed. As long as the aircraft is
located within the area of the approach procedure, the procedure is geo-referenced, the aircraft
position is not in an area where the Ownship is blocked out, and GPS and EFD1000 heading
information are valid, the Ownship symbol will be displayed and oriented appropriately. The
EFD1000’s heading determines the Ownship’s orientation and its position is determined by a
connected GPS navigation source.

NOTE
Discrepancies are known to exist in the placement of navigational aid symbols are known to exist
in the source material. This product is not intended for navigation guidance.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 293-367 Revision AC

NOTE
The intended function of the display of terminal procedures is to provide a graphical depiction of
the approach chart used to improve the flight crew awareness of the aircraft Ownship position
relative to other items depicted on the chart. The Ownship on the terminal procedures charts is
not sufficient to be used as the basis for maneuvering and is not to be used for navigation.

NOTE
Not all Approach Charts are geo-referenced. No SIDs or STARS are Geo-Referenced.

NOTE
The intended function of the display of terminal procedures when the ownship is not displayed is
to provide a graphical depiction of the approach chart used to improve the flight crew awareness of
the aircraft ownship position relative to other items depicted on the chart.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 294-367 Revision AC

13Environmental Qualification Forms

Nomenclature: EFD1000/500 Evolution Flight Display with Configuration Module
Part Number: A-05-110-00, 910-00001-001, 910-00001-002 (including EBB58),
910-00001-003, 910-00001-004, and CM: A-05-113-00, A-05-114-00
and 910-00005-004
TSO Numbers: TSO-C2d, TSO-C3d, TSO-C4c, TSO-C6d, TSO-C8d, TSO-C10b,
TSO-C106, TSO–C113
Manufacturer: Aspen Avionics, Inc.
Address: 5001 Indian School Road NE, Albuquerque, NM 87110
DO-160 Revision: DO-160E
Date Tested: 2/2008

CONDITIONS SECTION DESCRIPTION OF TESTS CONDUCTED

Temperature and Altitude 4.0 Equipment tested to Category A1, Decompress to 55,000”, Controlled temp and
(Pressurized) pressurized to <15,000’
Temperature and Altitude 4.0 Equipment tested to Category C1, Controlled temp and non-pressurized to 35,000’
(Unpressurized)
Loss of Cooling 4.5.5 Equipment tested to Category Y, 300 minutes min.
Temperature Variation 5.0 Equipment tested to Category C
Humidity 6.0 Equipment tested to Category A, standard humidity environment
Operational Shock and Crash 7.0 Equipment tested to Category B, standard operational shock and crash safety
Safety
Vibration (Fixed Wing) 8.0 Equipment tested to Category S, aircraft Zone 2 for Fixed Wing Reciprocating & Turboprop
Engines, Multi Eng over 5700 KG (12,500 lbs.), Multi Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs.),
and Single Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs.) using vibration test curve M.
Explosive Atmosphere 9.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Waterproofness 10.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Sand and Dust 12.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Fungus 13.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Salt Fog Test 14.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Equipment tested to Category Z, causes < 0.5 deg deflection to compass 0.3 meter away
Power Input 16.0 Equipment tested to Category B
Voltage Spike 17.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Audio Freq Conducted 18.0 Equipment tested to Category B
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 Equipment tested to Category ZC
RF Susceptibility 20.0 Equipment tested for conducted susceptibility to Category W and for radiated
susceptibility Category W. Bench test to show compliance with interim HIRF rules.
100V/m
RF Emissions 21.0 Equipment tested to Category M, significant EM apertures, not in direct view of radio
receiver antenna (Equipment mounted in cockpit or cabin area)
Lighting Induced Transient 22.0 Equipment tested to Category B3K33, moderately exposed all-metal airframes, airframes
composed of metal framework and all composite skin panels or carbon fiber composite
airframes whose major surface areas have been protected with metal meshes or foils
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Icing 24.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
ESD 25.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Fire, Flammability 26.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Other Tests Fire resistance was conducted by analysis in accordance with Federal Aviation Regulations
Part 25, Appendix F.

Table 13-1 - EFD1000 Environmental Qualification Form

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 295-367 Revision AC

Nomenclature: EFD1000 Remote Sensor Module (RSM)

Part Number: A-05-111-00, 910-00003-001, 910-00003-002, 910-00003-003
TSO Numbers: TSO-C113
Manufacturer: Aspen Avionics, Inc.
Address: 5001 Indian School Road NE, Albuquerque, NM 87110
DO-160 Revision: DO-160E
Date Tested: 2/2008

CONDITIONS SECTION DESCRIPTION OF TESTS CONDUCTED

Temperature and Altitude 4.0 Equipment tested to Category F2, non-controlled temp and non-pressurized to 55,000’
Temperature Variation 5.0 Equipment tested to Category A, external, non-temperature controlled - 10 deg. C/minute
Humidity 6.0 Equipment tested to Category C, external humidity environment
Operational Shocks 7.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Vibration 8.0 Equipment tested to Category S, aircraft Zone 1 for Fixed Wing Reciprocating & Turboprop
Engines, Multi Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs.) (Does not include structure directly
affected by jet efflux), and Single Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs.) using vibration test
curve M.
Explosive Atmosphere 9.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Waterproofness 10.0 Equipment tested to Category S
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 Equipment tested to Category F, deicing fluids and aircraft cleaning compounds only
Sand and Dust 12.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Fungus 13.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Salt Fog Test 14.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Equipment tested to Category Z, causes < 0.5 deg deflection to compass 0.3 meter away
Power Input 16.0 n/a - Powered from PFD display
Voltage Spike 17.0 n/a - Powered from PFD display
Audio Freq Conducted 18.0 n/a - Powered from PFD display
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 Equipment tested to Category ZC
RF Susceptibility 20.0 Equipment tested to Category WW, (Conducted/Radiated) Bench test to show compliance
with interim HIRF rules. 100V/m
RF Emissions 21.0 Equipment tested to Category H, direct view of radio receiver antenna. (equipment mounted
outside airframe)
Lighting Induced Transient 22.0 Equipment tested to Category B3K33, moderately exposed all-metal airframes, airframes
composed of metal framework and all composite skin panels or carbon fiber composite
airframes whose major surface areas have been protected with metal meshes or foils
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 Equipment tested to Category 2A, mounted in area with sweptback attachment, but no
hang on
Icing 24.0 Equipment tested to Category C, external environment
ESD 25.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Fire, Flammability 26.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Other Tests Fire resistance was conducted by analysis in accordance with Federal Aviation Regulations
Part 25, Appendix F.

Table 13-2 - RSM Environmental Qualification Form

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 296-367 Revision AC

Nomenclature: Analog Converter Unit (ACU and ACU2)

Part Number: A-05-112-00, 910-00004-001 and 910-00004-10x
TSO Numbers: TSO-C113
Manufacturer: Aspen Avionics, Inc.
Address: 5001 Indian School Road NE, Albuquerque, NM 87110
DO-160 Revision: DO-160E
Date Tested: 2/2008

CONDITIONS SECTION DESCRIPTION OF TESTS CONDUCTED

Temp/ Altitude (Pressurized) 4.0 Equipment tested to Category C4, controlled temp and pressurized to <15,000’
Temp/ Altitude 4.0 Equipment tested to Category A1, Operating low temperature -40C, Operating High
+55C, Short Time Operating Low -40C, Short-Time Operating High +70C, Loss of
Cooling, N/A, Ground Survival Low -55C, Ground Survival High +85C and non-
pressurized to 35,000’
Temperature Variation 5.0 Equipment tested to Category C, internal, temperature controlled - 2 deg. C/minute
Humidity 6.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Operational Shocks and Crash 7.0 Equipment tested to Category B
Safety
Vibration (Fixed Wing) 8.0 Equipment tested to Category S, aircraft Zone 2 for Fixed Wing Reciprocating & Turboprop
Engines, Multi Eng over 5700 KG (12,500 lbs.), Multi Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs.),
and Single Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs.) using vibration test curve M.
Explosive Atmosphere 9.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Waterproofness 10.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Sand and Dust 12.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Fungus 13.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Salt Fog Test 14.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Equipment tested to Category Z , causes < 1.0 deg deflection to compass 0.3 meter away
Power Input 16.0 Equipment tested to Category B
Voltage Spike 17.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Audio Freq Conducted 18.0 Equipment tested to Category B
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 Equipment tested to Category ZC
RF Susceptibility 20.0 Equipment tested to Category WW, (Conducted/Radiated) Bench test to show compliance
with interim HIRF rules. 100V/m
RF Emissions 21.0 Equipment tested to Category M, significant EM apertures, not in direct view of radio
receiver antenna (Equip mounted in cockpit or cabin area)
Lighting Induced Transient 22.0 Equipment tested to Category B3K33, moderately exposed all-metal airframes, airframes
composed of metal framework and all composite skin panels or carbon fiber composite
airframes whose major surface areas have been protected with metal meshes or foils
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Icing 24.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
ESD 25.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Fire, Flammability 26.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Other Tests Fire resistance was conducted by analysis in accordance with Federal Aviation Regulations
Part 25, Appendix F.

Table 13-3 - ACU Environmental Qualification Form

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 297-367 Revision AC

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 298-367 Revision AC

Appendix A TROUBLESHOOTING

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 299-367 Revision AC

System Troubleshooting

Initialization Page (SW v2.0 and above)

Test Fault Corrective Action

IOP a) Fail a) Replace EFD
b) System reboots after IOP test b) Replace EFD
ARINC a) Fail a) Replace EFD
RS232 a) Fail a) Replace EFD
Config Module a) Fail a) Check Config Module wiring.
Replace Config Module.
b) Wrong CM version b) Install correct SW version CM.
c) System reboots after Config c) v2.0 or v2.1 display installed with
Module Test a v2.2 CM. Install correct CM or EFD.
d) displays “Initializing” for more d) Config Module unplugged or mis-
than 20 seconds wired.
RSM a) Fail (x) a) Check RSM to PFD wiring for
shorts or opens. Repair or replace
RSM. Repair or replace PFD.
IMU a) Fail a) Replace EFD
ADC a) Fail a) Replace EFD
ADAHRS a) Fail a) Replace EFD
b) “Initializing” for more than 3 b) Remove Pitot and Static line from
minutes back of EFD and reboot. If problem
still exists then replace the EFD. If
problem clears then repair Pitot or
Static obstruction/kink.
c) “Initializing” for more than 3 c) Repair RSM wiring or replace RSM.
minutes with a RSM Fail above.
Troubleshooting Note: The version 2.2 EFD (the software version/part number is marked on the
EFD) should not be installed in to a 2.0 or 2.1 system unless it is desired to configure the
installation to v2.2. Booting a version 2.2 EFD with a version 2.0 or 2.1 CM will render the CM
invalid for the 2.0 or 2.1 EFD.

Note – With software version 2.3 and later it is possible to advance the system beyond a failed
Initialization Screen by holding the MENU key and line select keys #1 and #2 simultaneously for 3-4
seconds. The Diagnostic screen may then be accessed in the installation menu for further
troubleshooting.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 300-367 Revision AC

System Troubleshooting –continued

Fault Cause Corrective Action

Display does not power on a) PFD missing A/C power a) Check PFD circuit breaker, PFD
(Note: there can be up to a on/off switch on panel, wiring, and
20 second delay from the A/C battery voltage > 11.5 volts.
application of power to a b) PFD may have been b) Switch unit off using “REV” button
visible display) improperly shut down or “SHUT DOWN” command from
Main Menu page 6.
c) PFD missing A/C ground c) Check wiring to PFD
d) PFD is defective d) Repair or replace PFD
Display does not power off a) Airspeed is above 30kts a) Normal operation
(Note: PFD will switch to b) PFD may have been b) Switch unit off using “REV” button
internal battery if airspeed switched to internal battery or “SHUT DOWN” command from
is greater than 30kts.) Main Menu page 6.
c) PFD may have been c) Hold “REV” button for 20 seconds
improperly shut down or unplug PFD internal battery for 3
seconds
d) PFD is defective d) Repair or replace PFD
Display flashes on/off, a) Configuration Module a) Check CM plug and wiring from
black/white or blue/white unplugged or miss wired PFD to CM
repetitively b) RSM or CM wiring short b) Verify RSM pin 6 or CM pin 1 is
not shorted to aircraft ground or
another pin.
c) Configuration module c) Repair or replace CM
defective
d) PFD defective d) Repair or replace PFD
“CONFIG MODULE LINK a) Configuration Module a) Check CM plug and wiring from
FAIL” message (SW v1.X) unplugged or miss wired PFD to CM
b) Configuration module b) Repair or replace CM
defective
c) PFD defective c) Repair or replace PFD
“INITIALIZING” message for a) RSM to PFD a) Check RSM to PFD wiring for
more than 60 seconds communication lost shorts or opens.
(SW v1.X) b) RSM failed b) Repair or replace RSM
c) PFD failed c) Repair or replace PFD
“RSM LINK FAIL” message a) RSM to PFD a) Check RSM to PFD wiring for
(SW v1.X) communication lost shorts or opens.
b) RSM failed b) Repair or replace RSM
c) PFD failed c) Repair or replace PFD
“WRONG CONFIG MODULE” a) PFD is at one software a) Convert config module per
message (SW v1.X) level and config module is appropriate service bulletin.
at a different software level

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 301-367 Revision AC

Fault Cause Corrective Action

ALTIMETER, AIRSPEED, VSI a) Air data sensor has not a) Allow up to 20 minutes at temps
FAIL (RED-X) had sufficient warm-up below -20ºC for flags to clear
time.
b) Pitot/static lines reversed b) Connect pitot line to “P” port and
static line to “S” port on PFD
c) Air data sensor failed c) Repair or replace PFD
Vmo Fail Vmo configured incorrectly Re-check MOL programming
ATTITUDE FAIL or a) AHRS sensor has not a) Allow up to 3 minutes for AHRS to
DIRECTION FAIL ( RED-X) completed initialization. initialize.
(Note: Attitude flags could b) RSM failed/data missing. b) Check RSM to PFD wiring. Repair
take up to 3 minutes to or replace RSM.
clear at temps below -20 c) Pitot and/or Static lines c) Correct pitot/static plumbing
ºC) crossed, unplugged, or issue.
blocked.
d) PFD is defective d) Repair or replace PFD.
ATTITUDE FAIL and a) In Flight, Normal if pitot a) Use pitot heat or check pitot
DIRECTION FAIL associated blockage due to ice or system for blockage.
with “CHECK PITOT HEAT” other.
message b) On Ground, Normal if b) No further action required unless
GPS reception is marginal message is due to faulty GPS
and GPS GS ramps above system, then repair GPS system.
50Kts intermittently.
CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE a) If it occurred on system a) RESET AHRS
message (yellow) start.
(also see sluggish AHRS b) Normal after abrupt b) RESET AHRS
performance maneuvers on ground or in
troubleshooting) air
Red Slash through a) GPS or VLOC receiver a) Turn on GPS or VLOC receiver
Navigation Sensor (i.e., turned off.
GPS1, NAV2) b) GPS does not have a valid b) Allow GPS to acquire a position
“TO” waypoint and position and enter a flight plan or Direct To
c) GPS or VLOC receiver c) See GPS/VLOC manufacturer’s
failed instructions for troubleshooting

d) ACU not powered d) Check ACU circuit breaker

e) Wiring fault between e) Check wiring between GPS/VLOC
sensor and ACU or PFD and ACU or PFD
f) ACU to PFD wiring fault. f) Check ACU circuit breaker, check
ACU to PFD A429 wiring and ACU to
sensor wiring
g) ACU is defective. g) Repair or replace ACU
h) PFD is defective. h) Repair or replace PFD

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 302-367 Revision AC

Fault Cause Corrective Action

GPS1 or GPS2 selection not a) GPS receiver turned off a) Turn on GPS and initialize
available on Display b) GPS does not have a valid b) Allow GPS to acquire a position
(GNS430/GNS530/GNS480 “TO” waypoint and position and enter a flight plan or Direct To
only) c) GNS CDI is selected to c) Verify the GNS CDI is selected to
VLOC. GPS.
d) GPS to PFD A429 wiring d) Check A429 wiring for shorts,
issue. opens or crossed A and B lines.
e) GPS defective. e) Repair or replace GPS
f) PFD defective. f) Repair or replace PFD
Autopilot or analog a) ACU chassis not a) Ground ACU chassis to airframe
NAV/GPS inoperative grounded ground

b) ACU not powered b) Check ACU circuit breaker and

power/grounds
c) ACU to sensor wiring c) Check ACU to sensor wiring
d) ACU to PFD wiring d) Check ACU to PFD A429 wiring
e) ACU fault e) Repair or replace ACU
f) PFD fault f) Repair or replace PFD
“ERRONEOUS CALIBRATION a) RSM is tilted more than a) Shim RSM to within limits defined
VALUES” message during allowed per Section 6 of in Section 6 of this manual
RSM Cal (SW v2.0 and later) this manual
or b) Poor RSM calibration b) Re-run RSM calibration at
Excessive Heading errors in constant rate turns on flat ground.
one quadrant, or errors that c) RSM calibrated too close c) Re-run RSM calibration away from
are higher than actual in to buildings or ferrous buildings and other ferrous objects
some quadrants and lower objects d) Only non-ferrous screws, nuts,
than actual in other d) Ferrous hardware used to washers may be used on RSM
quadrants. mount RSM
e) Airframe or external e) Check for magnetized areas on
magnetic interference airframe close to RSM. Verify no
ferrous hardware is near RSM.
Degauss magnetized area(s)
Sluggish or Poor AHRS (ADI) a) RSM magnetic a) Survey RSM location using
performance interference handheld compass per Section
6.9.1. Verify there are no cabin
Poor AHRS performance in speakers within 3ft of RSM. Degauss
steep bank turns any areas found to be magnetized
or remove magnetism by other
Sluggish compass card methods.
b) RSM has become b) With power removed from
(Note: may or may not be magnetized. EFD1000 system degauss RSM and
associated with “Cross general area using degausser.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 303-367 Revision AC

Fault Cause Corrective Action

Check Attitude” message) c) “Pitch Attitude Trim” or c) Perform an RSM Calibration per
“Panel Tilt Pitch Section 10.5.2
Compensation” adjustment
made without performing a
subsequent RSM
Calibration.
d) Pitot and/or Static line d) Check pitot/static connections
connections at PFD blocked, and plumbing for blockage. Check
kinked, or unplugged. IAS and ALT sensor per Section 10.
e) Normal after abrupt e) Perform AHRS Reset
maneuvers.
Excessive Heading Lead / Magnetic Interference Verify that all steps have been
Lag during or after turns accomplished to remove magnetic
(>7°) interference (see section 6.9.4), then
contact an Aspen Field Service
Engineer
Autopilot has lateral offset a) Autopilot roll “null” a) Follow the autopilot
in GPSS or APPR mode centering out of adjustment manufacturer’s guidelines for
(HDG Bug may also be out adjusting roll “null” centering
of center)
Century II/III autopilot a) Value of R1 set a) Follow the autopilot
performance poor in all incorrectly manufacturer’s instructions for
modes checking NAV intercept angle.
Larger value for R1 will raise angle
and smaller value of R1 will lower
intercept angle. See Tech Note
2009-06.
OAT Display dashed a) Wiring fault between PFD a) Check wiring
and RSM
b) RSM is defective b) Repair or replace RSM
WIND vector, velocity, and a) Groundspeed < 20kts a) Normal operation
direction display dashed b) No GPS ground track b) GPS not computing GTK
(Note: wind readout will c) Airspeed failed c) See AIRSPEED FAIL
dash when velocity is < 10 troubleshooting procedure
kts)
OBS mode inoperative on a) GPS A429 IN bus a) See Figure 9.27 for GPS
GPS configured wrong configuration notes
b) ARINC 429 “A” and “B” b) Correct wiring error to GPS A429
lines reversed IN bus
“CROSS LINK FAILURE” a) PFD or MFD not powered a) Power up all EFD displays
message up
b) PFD or MFD inter-system b) Check wiring per diagrams in

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 304-367 Revision AC

Fault Cause Corrective Action

bus wiring fault Section 9
c) PFD or MFD is defective c) Repair or Replace defective EFD
“DATABASE FAILURE” a) Data Card (microSD) is a) Insert Data Card in display
message not inserted in MFD display.
b) Wrong Data Card b) Insert correct Data Card See
inserted Section 1 for authorized database
part numbers
c) Data Card is bad c) Replace data card with new
d) MFD card slot is d) Repair or replace MFD display
defective
“Database Init” message a) Database is missing or a) Insert functional database card
files are missing from card
“TERRAIN FAIL” message a) Data Card not inserted a) Insert valid MFD Database
b) Data Card failed b) Insert valid MFD Database
c) Heading fail c) Verify EFD1000 MFD Direction
Indicator is valid and repair if
needed. EFD500 MFD inter-
communication bus to PFD may
have failed or is not configured.
d) GPS position fail d) Verify GPS has good position data
e) Altitude fail e) Verify EFD1000 Altitude is valid.
EFD500 MFD intercommunication
bus to PFD may have failed or is not
configured.
“TRFC FAIL” message a) Traffic sensor is a) Verify traffic processor is turned
configured but not valid. on and is operational.
Dedicated Traffic Display See AFMS or pilots guide
page messages
Dedicated WX500 Display See AFMS or pilots guide
page messages
Dedicated XM Weather See AFMS or pilots guide
Display page messages
“RSM GPS” message a) Message is on MFD and a a) Set RSM GPS Enable to DISABLE in
-002 or -003 RSM is installation menu.
installed.
b) New RSM installation. b) New RSM installations may need
to acquire an almanac and could
require up to 15 minutes to clear.
c) Wiring issue between EFD c) Check RSM pins 1 and 2 for
and RSM. continuity to EFD.
d) RSM GPS engine has d) Replace RSM.
failed.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 305-367 Revision AC

System Troubleshooting –continued

EA100
Fault Cause Corrective Action
A/P AHRS FAIL lamp is a) Probable lamp failure. a) Verify the autopilot circuit breaker
never illuminated when the The A/P AHRS FAIL lamp is not tripped.
EA100 circuit breaker is power source is the b) Check wiring for the lamp and
engaged and the circuit is autopilot circuit. autopilot circuit breaker. If OK,
closed and energized (press replace the A/P AHRS FAIL lamp.
to test fails)
A/P AHRS FAIL lamp is a) EA100 is not functioning. a) Verify the EFD1000 IP
illuminated whenever the ADDR/SUBNET MASK/PORT is set
EA100 circuit breaker is correctly (see “Configuration” in
engaged and the circuit is Appendix E of this manual).
closed and energized. b) Verify the EFD1000 has software
version 2.2.2 or later.
c) Verify the A/P AHRS circuit
breaker is not tripped. Check the
wiring to the EA100. If OK, replace
the EA100.
d) Normal operation if EA100
Alignment Tool is in use. Use
“Engage Relay” to close relay contact
and turn off light.
Autopilot has lateral offset a) Autopilot roll “null” a) Follow the autopilot
in GPSS or APPR mode centering out of manufacturer’s guidelines for
(HDG Bug may also be out adjustment. adjusting roll “null” centering.
of center)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 306-367 Revision AC

Appendix B INSTALLATION FINAL CHECK SHEET

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 307-367 Revision AC

EFD1000/500 Installation Final Check Sheet

Aircraft Type: Date:

Aircraft Serial Number: Tail Number:

The following five pages must be printed and used during checkout. The Section number refers
to the section in the manual where the test is performed. This form must be included in
document package to be included in aircraft maintenance records.

Complete by performing test of Section 10.5.4(EFD1000 only)

Calibrated TOLERANCE Actual Actual Calibrated TOLERANCE Actual Actual

Heading PFD MFD Heading PFD MFD
Source Heading Heading Source Heading Heading
30 +/- 4 210 +/- 4
60 +/- 4 240 +/- 4
90 +/- 4 270 +/- 4
120 +/- 4 300 +/- 4
150 +/- 4 330 +/- 4
180 +/- 4 360 +/- 4

Complete by performing test of Section 10.6.1(EFD1000 only)

IAS Setting Band Band Description Pass

Color Range
Vne = Red >Vne Red arc displayed at all speeds above Vne
Vno = Yellow Vno - Vne Yellow arc extending from Vno to Vne
Vs = Green Vs - Vno Green arc extending from Vs to Vno
Vfe = White Vso - Vfe Top of White arc
Vso = White Bottom of White Arc
Vyse = Blue = Vyse Blue Marker at Vyse
Marker
Vmc = Red = Vmc Red Marker at Vmc
Marker
W = Triangle =W White triangle at initial flap extension
(White) airspeed
NOTE: Single engine aircraft and aircraft with no flaps will not use all parameters above

Aircraft with Vmo/Mmo Airspeed Indicator (EFD1000 only)

Test Description Pass

Barber Pole or Redline Verify the Barber Pole or Redline appears at the correct
Position airspeeds as shown in Table 10-1.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 308-367 Revision AC

EFD1000/500 Installation Final Check Sheet (cont.)

SECTION POST INSTALLATION TESTS PASS FAIL

10.5.1.1* Second Phase RSM Location Evaluation – Aircraft “Z”

component within NOAA determined Z range?
10.5.4* Heading Accuracy Check (from Page 1)

10.5.5* Heading Interference Test

10.6.1* Indicated Airspeed Test

10.6.2* Altitude Display Test

10.6.3* System Leak Test

10.6.4* OAT- Outside Air Temperature Test (if ENABLED)

10.6.5* AHRS (attitude solution) Test

10.6.6 GPS Sensor Test - GPS1 (if installed)

10.6.6 GPS Sensor Test – GPS2 (if installed)

10.6.6* RSM GPS Sensor Test (if ENABLED)

10.6.7* NAV Receiver Sensor Test – NAV1 (if installed)

10.6.7* NAV Receiver Sensor Test – NAV2 (if installed)

10.6.8* Back-up NAV Indicator Test (if installed)

10.6.9* Autopilot/FD Sensor Test (if installed)

10.6.10.1* ADF Test (if installed)

10.6.10.2* Radio Altimeter Test (if installed)

10.6.11* PFD Sonalert Test (when required on a Synthetic Vision

enabled PFD or MFD)
10.6.12* Decision Height Test (if installed)

10.6.13 Traffic Display Test (if installed)

10.6.14 XM Weather Display and Control Test (if installed)

10.6.15 WX-500 Display and Control Test (if installed)

10.6.16* Ancillary Equipment Heading and Air Data (if connected)

10.6.17* List equipment interfaced:
10.6.18 EFD Inter-System Communication Check (if multi-display)

10.6.19 Battery Capacity Check – EBB and Internal batteries > 80%
Charge
10.6.20* TAPES Configuration Check

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 309-367 Revision AC

10.6.21 EMI Test

10.6.22* Flight Control Interference Check

10.6.23 or .24 OBS Mode Check

or .25*
*Does not apply to an EFD500

EFD1000/500 Installation Final Check Sheet (cont.)

SECTION COMPLIANCE CHECK PASS FAIL

6.4 Weight and Balance performed

7.1 Electrical Load Analysis performed for each EFD

4.4 For aircraft not limited to VFR, a Standby Attitude indicator

must be installed in accordance with section 4.4
4.4 Standby Airspeed, Altimeter must be installed in
accordance with section 4.4
4.4.3 Is the EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery installed for
installations that removed standby Airspeed Indicator
and/or Altimeter and replaced them with the MFD1000.
4.4.3 If the EBB58 is installed, is the required placard installed?

7.2.14 If the EBB58 is installed, is the required Emergency

Disconnect switch installed and properly labeled?
7.2.14 Verify the EBB58 wiring harness and the EFD1000 MFD’s
RSM wiring is isolated/separated from the EFD1000 PFD’s
RSM wiring to provide independence.
5.1.6 For aircraft limited to VFR, a placard or other acceptable
means, stating “Operation of This Aircraft is Limited to VFR
Only”, or similar phraseology acceptable to the FAA. Note:
This placard should be pre-existing under TC or STC.
(This verifies that the placard is still present)
5.1.7 Cessna 190/195 Aircraft s/n 16083 and below only, verify
the TAPES are configured to LOCKED OFF, and the original
airspeed indicator and altimeter are in the standard “T”
arrangement.
4.5.1 Backup Nav Indicator (if required) connected to a nav
source installed in pilot’s field of view. The indicator must
function if the PFD and/or ACU circuit breaker is pulled
7.2 Circuit breaker installed for each EFD and each ACU.

6.9.4 RSM location(s) are <2 degrees of needle deflection on

hand held compass within 18”x18”x18” survey area

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 310-367 Revision AC

EFD1000/500 Installation Final Check Sheet (cont.)

SECTION COMPLIANCE CHECK PASS FAIL

10.1.2 Each EFD braided ground strap is installed between unit

and panel, RSM ground wire attached to ground stud, RSM
doubler/mounting plate bonded to airframe ground and
ACU(s) chassis bonded to airframe ground. All measure no
greater than .003 ohms to ground.
7.2 Wires, cables, and connectors clearly marked or stamped

7.2, 5.1.5 When installed, EFD1000/500 master switch(s) and/or

circuit breakers and “EBB58 EMER DISC” switch must be
easily accessible to flight crew and clearly marked.
One switch exists for each display.
1.1.1 If the aircraft is Class III, does the PFD contain Level B
software?
11 Post Installation Flight Test

11.4 Document successful completion of flight test in aircraft

log book per FAR 91.407b
4.4.3 In aircraft with independent pitot/static systems each
EFD1000 must be connected to different systems.
4.2 If an EFD1000 MFD is installed then each EFD1000 display
is connected to an IFR GPS
6.8.5 EFD1000 PFD and EFD1000 MFD (if installed) do not share
the same ground strap location.
6.6 Dual RSMs harness shielding (if installed) does not share
the same ground path (bonding strap location).
6.8.6 If an EFD1000 MFD is installed there is an alternate static
source available to the pilot.
4.3 In multi-EFD installations, all EFD must be at software
version 2.0 or above.
7.2.14 The EBB58 may only be installed in a multiple display
configuration and may only be connected to an EFD1000
MFD no other connections are permitted.
6.3 Log book entry stating aircraft has been modified in
accordance with EFD1000 AML-STC.
1.10 Update warranty records on Aspen Avionics website at
www.aspenavionics.com/dealerramp

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 311-367 Revision AC

EFD1000/500 Installation Final Check Sheet (cont.)

SECTION COMPLIANCE CHECK PASS FAIL

Misc Complete the Installed Equipment Configuration Matrix in

Section 1.2 of the EFD1000 AFMS (900-00008-001) and
insert the completed AFMS in the Airplane Flight Manual.
(See sample Appendix C)
Misc Complete wire routing diagram Figure 1&2 in Aspen
Avionics document #900-00012-001 Rev P or later,
Instructions for Continued Airworthiness. Complete circuit
breaker and switch location diagram Figure 3 in the ICA
document.
Misc Copy of Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-001 Rev P
or later, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness with copy
of wiring diagrams (Section 9 or installer drafted), copy of
Configuration Pages Section 10.4.6 and 10.4.7 for each
installed EFD, and copy of Pre-Modification Checklist Table
5-1 and 5-2 inserted. This data package is to be given to
owner/operator for inclusion in aircraft permanent records.
EA100 Adapter Installations Only

Appendix E IFR GPS installed and connected to EFD1000(s)

Appendix E “A/P AHRS FAIL” annunciator installed in the pilot primary

field of view.
Appendix E “A/P AHRS FAIL” annunciator powered from the autopilot
main breaker so that the light is illuminated whenever the
autopilot is powered but the EA100 is not.
Appendix E Insert AFMS 900-00008-001 Rev H or later with section
1.2 completed in the Airplane Flight Manual, which must
be furnished.
Appendix E Post EA100 Test Flight resulted in similar or better
performance than the Pre EA100 Test Flight.

Inspected by (print & sign)

Installer/ Inspector Date

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 312-367 Revision AC

Appendix C OPERATOR CONFIGURATION CHECKLIST

And
Sample of AFMS Section 1.2
(Installed Equipment Configuration Matrix)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 313-367 Revision AC

EFD1000 Operator Configuration Checklist

Aircraft Type: Aircraft S/N:

Aircraft Tail #:

Owner/Operator:

I request that the following settings be configured into my EFD1000 PFD as described below.
These airspeeds must match the requirements for the aircraft above and must match the values
in the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM), Pilot Operating Handbook (POH), or other legal form of
documentation (e.g., Placard).

Vne (or Vmo)

Vno
Vfe
Vs
Vso
Vyse Multi engine only
Vmc Multi engine only
initial flap extension speed

I also would like my V-Speed Textual Markers set as per below: (Note – these may be edited by
the pilot unless LOCKED). Insert a zero “0” in any field you wish not to appear on display.

Va
Vbg
Vref
Vr
Vx
Vy
Vlo Retractable Gear only
Vle Retractable Gear only

I would like my Airspeed Textual Markers above: LOCKED / UNLOCKED (circle one)

Owner/ Operator Date

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 314-367 Revision AC

Instructions for Printing the AFMS

Each page of the Airplane Flight Manual must be of a type that is not easily erased, disfigured, or
misplaced, and is capable of being inserted in the existing approved Airplane Flight Manual.

How to Fill Out AFMS Section 1.2

The Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement Section 1.2 contains information about the installed
configuration of the EFD systems in the customer aircraft. The installer must complete the table
in the AFMS before giving the completed AFMS document to the customer.

Enter a “3” in all applicable boxes noting the installed equipment. The backup Instrument type
and configurations are to be circled.

Sample - Installed Equipment Configuration Matrix

The following sample installation is of an EFD1000 PFD, EFD1000 MFD, and EFD500 MFD with a -
001 RSM connected to the PFD and a -003 RSM connected to the EFD1000 MFD. It has a EWR50
XM receiver connected to all three displays, a WX-500 connected to both MFDs, and no Traffic.
The EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery is installed because the standby airspeed and altimeter
where removed and replaced with the EFD1000 MFD. An EA100 is also installed. Synthetic Vision
is enabled on the PFD and both MFD and since there is no TAWS installed the audible and textual
alerts are enabled on all three displays.

EFD500 EFD1000 EFD1000 Level B EFD1000

MFD PFD PFD EFD1000 MFD
PRO PILOT C3 PFD
3 3 3
Installed Evolution Flight Displays
Not Available
RSM with GPS 3

Not Available
RSM without GPS 3

Not Not Not Not

EBB Emergency Backup Battery Authorized Authorized Authorized Authorized 3

Traffic Interface Not Available

XM Weather Interface (Requires optional

3 3 Not Available Not Available 3
EWR50)

Charts 3 Not Available Not Available Not Available 3

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 315-367 Revision AC

EA100 Autopilot AHRS Connection Not Available Not Available 3

Synthetic Vision with Flight Path Marker and

3 3 Not Available Not Available 3
Aspen Terrain Warning System (TWS)

Aspen Terrain Warning System (TWS) audible

and textual alerts. The audible and textual
3 3 Not Available Not Available 3
alerts are only available if TAWS is not
installed.

Type of backup Attitude Indicator in this Mechanical backup attitude (this is

required)
aircraft:

Type of Standby Airspeed Indicator in this EFD1000 MFD* Mechanical Airspeed

aircraft:

Type of Standby Altimeter in this aircraft: EFD1000 MFD* Mechanical Altimeter

*EBB Emergency Backup Battery and EFD1000 MFD are required if standby Airspeed
indicator and Altimeter are not installed.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 316-367 Revision AC

Appendix D Component Maintenance Manual (CMM)

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 317-367 Revision AC

Component Maintenance Manual

The following is information on the periodic maintenance, calibration and repair, for the
continued airworthiness of the Electronic Map Displays, including recommended inspection
intervals and service life:

Periodic Maintenance: None beyond that which is described in Aspen Avionics document #900-
00012-001, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

Calibration: None beyond that which is described in Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-001,
Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

Repair: On Condition

Recommended Inspection Intervals: None beyond that which is described Aspen Avionics
document #900-00012-001, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

Service Life: None Specified

Field Replaceable Parts

Description Aspen Part Number
EFD Internal Battery – black connector 413-00001-001
EFD Internal Battery – white connector 409-00003-001
EFD “SYNC” knobs (CRS/HDG knob) 520-00020-001

EFD Knob Replacement Procedure

The knob(s) are removed by gripping the knob with the fingers of your hand and then pulling
straight off the shaft using moderate force. Install the new knob P/N 520-00020-001 by pushing
the knob on to the shaft with the fingers of your hand until it bottoms out. After knob
replacement power up the system and verify the knob can turn freely and that the “push to enter”
function operates properly by accessing the HDG bug or CRS pointer function.

EFD Internal Battery Replacement Procedure

See Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-001, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 318-367 Revision AC

Appendix E EA100 Adapter

Optional Autopilot Attitude Adapter

Replaces Bendix King KG-258/KI-254/255/256

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 319-367 Revision AC

The EA100 Adapter is an optional sub-component of the required EFD1000 system designed to replace
the KG-258, KI-254, KI-255 and KI-256 attitude output. The EA100 converts the digital pitch and roll
signals of the EFD1000 into equivalent analog signals. The EA100 is approved to replace the KG-258,
KI-254, KI-255 or KI-256 for any autopilot model shown in the wiring diagrams of this appendix.
Removal of the KG-258, KI-254, and KI-256 is approved by this STC when the EA100 is installed per
this appendix and a required backup AI is located within the pilot’s primary maximum field of view in
accordance with FAR 23.1321(a), see Section 5.2.1 of this manual.

General Limitations

The EA100 must only be used to replace the analog outputs from a KG-258, a KI-254, a KI-255 or a KI-
256 Flight Command Indicator to a compatible autopilot, as identified by the wiring diagrams in this
appendix.

The EA100 provides attitude data to the autopilot. If an EFD1000 MFD is installed, it is recommended
that the EA100 is connected to the MFD. If there is only an EFD1000 PFD, the EA100 can be connected
to the PFD.

The currently permitted configurations are shown in the table below:

System Configuration EA100 Ethernet

Connection
An EFD1000 Pro PFD (software version The EA100 can be
2.2.2 or subsequent) without an EFD1000 connected to the
MFD EFD1000 PFD
An EFD1000 Pro PFD with an EFD1000 MFD The EA100 should
(software version v2.2.2 or subsequent) be connected to the
EFD1000 MFD
An EFD1000C3 PFD (Level B software The EA100 can be
version 2.2.3 or subsequent) without an connected to the
EFD1000 MFD EFD1000C3 PFD
An EFD1000C3 PFD with an EFD1000 MFD The EA100 should
(software version v2.2.2 or subsequent) be connected to the
EFD1000 MFD
Table F1 – Authorized EA100 Ethernet Connection

NOTE – A Pre-Installation test flight is recommended to verify that the autopilot performance is
satisfactory prior to starting the EA100 installation. Autopilot problems should be corrected prior to the
EA100 installation as troubleshooting post installation autopilot issues will be much easier if the
autopilot performance was base lined prior to install. See Pre-installation Test Flight in this Appendix.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 320-367 Revision AC

Specifications

General Specifications:

Part Number ………………… 910-00013-001

Width …………………………… 6.83 in. including mounting flanges
Height ………………………… 1.85 in.
Length ………………………… 4.28 in.
Weight ………………………… 1.25 lbs.

Operational Specifications:

Operating Temp: …………… -20°C to +55°C

Storage Temp: ……………… -55°C to +85°C
Max Operating Altitude …… 55,000 ft.
Cooling ………………………… none required
Max Humidity ………………… 95% at 50°C
Input Voltage ………………… +14 and 28 VDC
Nominal Current …………… 0.25/0.5 Amps (28v/14v)

I/O Specifications:

Ethernet Port ………………… 1 Digital

Autopilot Pitch gyro Out …… 1 Analog
Autopilot Roll gyro Out …… 1 Analog
Autopilot gyro Ref In ……… 1 Analog
AP Disc Relay ………………… 1 Output
ATT Fail Relay ………………… 1 Output
Signal Output ………………… Attitude Reference Signals for the KC 295 Flight Computer:
50mV AC/degrees, Roll and Pitch

Certification Specifications:

The EA100 is certified as a sub-component of the required EFD1000 system

Software: ……………………… RTCA DO-178B, Level C

Complex Electronic Hardware: None
Environmental:
RTCA DO-160E ……………… See Environmental Qualification Form this Appendix

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 321-367 Revision AC

Outline Drawing:

Figure F1 – EA100 Outline Drawing (inches) and center of gravity

EA100 System Architecture

A/P INTRLK
A/P AHRS

Figure F2 – EA100 Block Diagram

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 322-367 Revision AC

EA100 Installation

Installation Limitations

• The EFD1000 display must be at software level 2.2.2 or subsequent (v2.2.3 or subsequent if a
EFD1000C3)
• An IFR GPS must be connected to the EFD1000 that is connected to the EA100.
• The EA100 must be installed in a temperature-controlled part of the aircraft.
• The EA100 must not be installed on the firewall.
• Maximum Ethernet cable length between the EFD and the EA100 is 30 feet.
• An “A/P AHRS FAIL” light (amber) must be installed in the pilot primary field-of-view.
• AFMS 900-00008-001 Rev H or later FAA approved revision with the Configuration Matrix in
Section 1.2 completed must be inserted in the Airplane Flight Manual.

Equipment Location Documentation

The AML-STC requires recording of the EA100 mounting location on Figures 1 and 2 Aspen Avionics
document #900-00012-001, Instructions for Continued Airworthiness. In addition, the location of the
“A/P AHRS FAIL” annunciator and an accurate description of the wire and cable routing must be shown
on those figures.

Weight and Balance

Using the EA100 weight from the table below and the moment arm of the mounting location perform a
weight and balance calculation per AC 43.13-1B Chapter 10. Also account for equipment removed
during the modification process.

Component Weight (mass)

EA100 Adapter 1.25lbs
(0.57Kg)
Table F2 – EA100 Component Weight

Mechanical Installation

The EA100 has no user interface, and therefore can be remote mounted in any orientation as long as it is
accessible. Orientation with the connectors facing upwards is not recommended due to the potential for
accumulated water in the connectors. The optimum mounting location is an area that minimizes wire
runs to interfacing equipment. This typically means near the autopilot computer or near the attitude
gyro it is replacing.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 323-367 Revision AC

NOTE
The EA100 has been tested for normal operation over a temperature range from -20C to +55C,
and for short time operations from -40C to +70C. This qualification permits installation in non-
pressurized but temperature controlled regions of aircraft operated up to 50,000ft. For all aircraft
on the EFD1000 AML STC installation in a temperature controlled region of the aircraft is
acceptable. Should an alternate location be selected the installer must validate that the
temperature in the alternate location is within the equipment’s qualified temperature range.

Locate the EA100 on an existing avionics shelf, radio rack, or cabin or cockpit floor. Attach to material
and structure that is appropriate for equipment mounting, using appropriate fasteners and corrosion
control. The EA100 is suitably protected against corrosion. Do not permit other parts of the aircraft or
cabling to abrade against the EA100. Installation of the EA100 must be in accordance with AC43.13-2B,
Chapter1 Paragraphs 100 to 114, pages 1 to 8.

An unpainted surface of the EA100 case must be bonded to aircraft ground either through mounting to a
metal shelf or with an installer fabricated bonding strap or wire braid no more than 12 inches in length.
Attach ground lug of bonding strap to one of the mounting screws if required. Refer to AC 43.13-1B
paragraphs 11-187 to 11-190, pages 11-73 to 11-79 for additional bonding information.

Verify EA-100 case to airframe ground has ≤ 3 milliohms of resistance.

Shelf or bracket fabrication is beyond the scope of this STC and will require separate FAA approved
data..

Structural DER analysis or static testing should be accomplished to the following ultimate load factors
for items of mass within the cabin or cockpit: upward and downward 10.0g, forward 18.0g, aft and
sideward 4.5g. The load factors should be multiplied by the weight of the EA100 plus any attachment
brackets and hardware. See AC43.13-2B, Chapter1 Paragraph 103, page 2 and Paragraph 105, page 3.
Structural Sizing and Analysis must be accomplished for the installation location in accordance with
AC43.13-2B, Chapter1 Paragraph 104, page 2. Materials and workmanship must be accomplished in
accordance with AC43.13-2B, Chapter1 Paragraph 106, page 4.

Mount the EA-100 using six (6) MS35206 #8-32 screws, six (6) NAS1149FN832P washers, and six (6)
MS21044N08 #8-32 self-locking nuts. Tighten nuts to 12 in-lbs.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 324-367 Revision AC

Figure F3 – EA100 Mounting

Electrical Installation

The Electrical installation of the EA100 will involve the following steps:

a) Add limiting diodes to the Flight Director wiring as shown in Figure F12. This replaces necessary
diodes that are removed when the KI-256 is removed from the aircraft. Should the KI-256 remain
in the aircraft the Flight Director wiring to the KI 256 must be capped and stowed, or removed. It
is not permitted to have Flight Director on the KI 256 in an EA100 installation.

b) Wire the main connections to the EA100 as shown in Figure F5.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 325-367 Revision AC

c) Wire the appropriate autopilot connections as shown in Figures F6 thru F11.

NOTE – if the existing gyro is supplying radar stabilization then these wires should be separated
from the autopilot wires and connected to the EA100 Aux output as the AP Output may not be
capable of driving both loads.

Perform an electrical load analysis to verify the aircraft complies with FAR 23.1351(a) using the current
draw of the EA100 from the table below. Refer to AC 43.13-1B paragraphs 11-35 and 11-36, page 11-
12 for additional information on Electrical Load determination and control.

Component Current Draw (amps)

EA100 0.25A @ 28Vdc

0.5A @ 14Vdc
Table F3 – EA100 Current Draw

A two-ampere trip-free resettable (push-pull type) circuit breaker must be installed for the EA100 in a
location accessible to the pilot while seated. The power source for the EA100 is the same as that of the
autopilot computer. In most cases this is the avionics buss. The source could be the switched battery
buss through an autopilot on/off switch. The breaker must be labeled “A/P AHRS”. Record the location
of circuit breaker on Figure 3 of Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-001, Instructions for Continued
Airworthiness.

An “A/P AHRS FAIL” annunciator light must be installed in the pilot primary field-of-view. The light
must have the following specifications:

• Lens color must be Amber.

• There must be a push-to-test function or momentary on switch so that the A/P AHRS lamp can
be tested prior to each flight. The integrated “dimmable cat’s-eye” light/switch (MS25041-4) has
a momentary lamp test and is labeled Push to Test.

• The light must be dimmable for night and yet readable and discernable in sunlight and free from
glare and reflections that could interfere with the pilot's vision in all operations for which the
aircraft is certified. The light must be installed so that their direct rays, and rays reflected from
the windshield or other surface, are shielded from the pilot's eyes.

• The power source for the light must come from the EA100 A/P AHRS relay.

• The “A/P AHRS FAIL” label is required and must be of a text size similar to other labels in the
panel and be readable and discernable (lit) at night.

Note – due to the above specifications it is recommended to use the “dimmable cat’s-eye” integrated
lamp/switch (MS25041-4) as it meets all the requirements above once positioned appropriately and
labeled “A/P AHRS FAIL”.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 326-367 Revision AC

Primary Field-of-View for the purpose of this STC uses the location of the PFD as the measuring point.
The A/P AHRS FAIL light must be within the box defined in Figure F4 below. The lamp and label should
be viewable from the normal seated position with minimum head movement. Record the location of the
light on Figure 3 of Aspen Avionics document #900-00012-001, Instructions for Continued
Airworthiness.

Figure F4 – A/P AHRS FAIL Annunciator Location

MIL-C-27500 shielded wire and MIL-W-22759 single conductor wire should be used. All wires should
be fabricated as shown, keeping all grounds as short as possible.

The Ethernet cable between the EA100 and the EFD1000 has a maximum cable length of 30ft. This
cable is an Aspen-supplied component.

Wires and connectors must be clearly marked per FAR 23.1365(d).

Wires and wiring bundles must be secured in such a way to eliminate risk of mechanical damage and
minimize exposure to heat and fluids per FAR 23.1365(e).

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 327-367 Revision AC

Figure F4A - MS25041-4 Dimmable “Catseye”

Electrical Connections

EA100 P1 Connector

PIN NAME INPUT/ OUTPUT FUNCTION

1 ETHERNET TX- OUTPUT ETHERNET TX- OUT TO EFD1000
2 ETHERNET TX+ OUTPUT ETHERNET TX+ OUT TO EFD1000
3 RESERVED
4 RESERVED
5 RESERVED
6 RESERVED
7 GND AIRCRAFT GROUND
8 POWER INPUT AIRCRAFT POWER 9-28VDC
9 ETHERNET RX- INPUT ETHERNET RX- IN FROM EFD1000
10 ETHERNET RX+ INPUT ETHERNET RX+ IN FROM EFD1000
11 RESERVED
12 RESERVED
13 RESERVED
14 GND AIRCRAFT GROUND
15 POWER INPUT AIRCRAFT POWER 9-28VDC
Table F4 – EA100 P1 Connector Pin Out

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 328-367 Revision AC

EA100 P2 Connector

PIN NAME INPUT/ OUTPUT FUNCTION

1 AP EXCITE HI INPUT ATTITUDE REFERENCE HI
2 AP PITCH HI OUTPUT PITCH HI
3 AP ROLL HI OUTPUT ROLL HI
4 -15 RESERVED
16 AP EXCITE LO INPUT ATTITUDE REFERENCE LO
17 AP PITCH LO OUTPUT PITCH LO
18 AP ROLL LO OUTPUT ROLL LO
19 AUX EXCITE LO INPUT ATTITUDE REFERENCE LO
20 AUX PITCH LO OUTPUT PITCH LO
21 AUX ROLL LO OUTPUT ROLL LO
22-30 RESERVED
31 AUX EXCITE HI INPUT ATTITUDE REFERENCE HI
32 AUX PITCH HI OUTPUT PITCH HI
33 AUX ROLL HI OUTPUT ROLL HI
34-38 RESERVED
39 A/P INTRLK COMM INPUT “COMM” CONTACT ON RELAY
40 A/P INTRLK RELAXED OUTPUT RELAXED STATE OF RELAY
41 A/P INTRLK OUTPUT ENERGIZED STATE OF RELAY
ENERGIZED
42 A/P AHRS VALID OUTPUT ENERGIZED STATE OF RELAY
43 A/P AHRS INVALID OUTPUT RELAXED STATE OF RELAY
44 A/P AHRS COMM INPUT “COMM” CONTACT ON RELAY
Table F5 – EA100 P2 Connector Pin Out

Outputs 1-3 & 16-18; and 31-33 & 19 to 21 are KI-256-format pitch and roll outputs.

AML STC SA10822SC approves use of the Pitch/Roll attitude outputs for the autopilots identified in this
installation data. Other applications were not evaluated under this STC. Other uses of the TSO EA100
equipment must have separate approval for installation in an aircraft. Refer to the TSO Installation
Instructions (Aspen document 900-00018-001).

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 329-367 Revision AC

Wiring Diagrams

GENERAL INSTALLATION NOTES

All wires in this section 22AWG unless otherwise specified

All grounds should be as short as possible

Terminate all shields within connector back shell

EA100 A/P AHRS

P1 2A
Avionics Buss
POWER 8 14Vdc or 28Vdc
POWER 15
GND 7
GND 14

EFD1000
1 P1
P/N 412-00013-00x
ENET TX- 1 40 ENET RX-
ENET TX+ 2 39 ENET RX+
ENET RX- 9 38 ENET TX-
ENET RX+ 10 37 ENET TX+

A/P AHRS FAIL

MS25041-4

P2 2 3 1 A/P circuit
breaker
A/P AHRS INVALID 43
(existing)
20 AWG
20 AWG 5
A/P AHRS COMM 44
existing wire

KI 25X

AP POWER H
ACU
P2
3

A/P AHRS VALID 42 27 FD VALID 4

1 EA100 to EFD1000 Ethernet connection must use Aspen 4 The flight director valid input to the ACU must be controlled
P/N 412-00013-00x cable. Shields must be terminated by the EA100 A/P AHRS Relay as shown so that the flight
within the EA100 and EFD back shells to pass EMI/RFI director is disabled if the EA100 autopilot output fails.
interference tests.
5 Use 20 AWG or wire size appropriate for A/P circuit breaker
2 A/P AHRS FAIL light must be installed in the pilots primary rating. Wire may be spliced to a 22 AWG wire not more than
field of view. Use light/dimmer/test switch P/N MS25041-4. 4 inches in length at the EA100 to accommodate the high
Wire as shown. density pin size.

3 Existing installations of the EFD1000 that are adding a

EA100 must remove the wire connection from the KI 256
pin H or from A/P circuit breaker to ACU P2-27. Wire ACU
P2-27 to EA100 pin 42 as shown.

Figure F5 – EA100 Main Wiring Connections

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 330-367 Revision AC

Before
A/P DISC Switch OR Relay Connection (partial)

KC19X
To A/P circuit
breaker
A/P DISC 19X1 19X2
3
OR B A/P DISC IN
Existing Wire
To A/P circuit NC
breaker

C
NO
To A/P Sonalert

A/P DISC
“Existing” AP
DISC Relay

After
KC19X
EA100
P2 19X1 19X2
1
AP EXCITE HI 1 C GYRO EXCITATION
AP EXCITE LO 16 Z VERT GYRO REF

AP PITCH HI 2 Y VERT GYRO PITCH 4

AP PITCH LO 17

AP ROLL HI 3 21 VERT GYRO ROLL

AP ROLL LO 18

19X1 19X2
20 AWG
A/P INTRLK ENERGIZED 41 B A/P DISC IN
A/P INTRLK COMM 39
5

20 AWG

To A/P circuit
breaker
A/P DISC
2
OR
Existing Wire
To A/P circuit NC
breaker

C
NO
To A/P Sonalert

A/P DISC
3 The existing autopilot disconnect circuit must be run through an
internal relay within the EA100. This ensures the autopilot
“Existing” AP
DISC Relay cannot be engaged or will disengage if the EA100 attitude is
invalid. The autopilot “sonalert” or disconnect tone must not be
1 Wire and shield as shown. interrupted with this relay. Wire as shown.

2 Remove wires from KC19X2-B. The wires should be spliced 4 No connect on KAP100
together with a third wire which will be connected to the EA100
pin 39. Connect EA100 pin 41 to KC19X2-B. 5 20 AWG wire may be spliced to a 22 AWG wire of no more
than 4 inches in length at the EA100 to accommodate the high
density pin.

Figure F6 – EA100 to KAP100/KAP150/KFC150 Attitude Source w/DISC

Before
A/P DISC Relay Connection (partial)

To optional
Yaw Axis

KC290
NC P2902
To A/P circuit breaker
Existing Wire
D A/P DISC IN
C
NO 2

To A/P DISC switch

“Existing” AP
DISC Relay

After

EA100 KC295
P2 P2952
1
AP EXCITE HI 1 w GYRO EXCITATION
AP EXCITE LO 16 s VERT GYRO REF

AP PITCH HI 2 y VERT GYRO PITCH

AP PITCH LO 17

AP ROLL HI 3 CC VERT GYRO ROLL

AP ROLL LO 18

A/P INTRLK ENERGIZED 41

4
A/P INTRLK COMM 39

To optional
Yaw Axis

KC290
NC P2902
To A/P circuit breaker

3 D A/P DISC IN
Existing Wire
C
NO

To A/P DISC switch

“Existing” AP
DISC Relay

1 Wire and shield as shown. 3 Remove existing wire from P2902 pin D and extend to
EA100 pin 39. Run new wire from P2902 pin D to EA100
2 The existing autopilot disconnect circuit must be run through an pin 41. Verify optional yaw axis wire is on pin 41 side of
internal relay within the EA100. This ensures the autopilot EA100.
cannot be engaged or will disengage if the EA100 attitude is
invalid. The autopilot “sonalert” or disconnect tone must not be 4 20 AWG wire may be spliced to a 22 AWG wire of no
interrupted with this relay. Wire as shown. more than 4 inches in length at the EA100 to
accommodate the high density pin.

Figure F7 – EA100 to KAP/KFC200 Attitude Source w/DISC

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 332-367 Revision AC

Before
A/P DISC Connection (partial)

To A/P circuit To A/P

breaker Servos
A/P DISC
KC225
P2251
Existing Wire
9 A/P DISC IN

After

EA100 KC225
P2 P2251
1
AP EXCITE HI 1 38 VG EXC
AP EXCITE LO 16 39 VG EXC LO

AP PITCH HI 2 50 PITCH ATT HI

AP PITCH LO 17 52 ATT REFERENCE

AP ROLL HI 3 51 ROLL ATT HI

AP ROLL LO 18

A/P INTRLK ENERGIZED 41

4
A/P INTRLK COMM 39

To A/P circuit To A/P

breaker Servos
A/P DISC
KC225
P2251

Existing Wire
2 9 A/P DISC IN
Existing Wire

1 Wire and shield as shown. 3 Remove existing wire from P2251 pin 9 and extend to
EA100 pin 39. Run new wire from P2251 pin 9 to EA100
2 The existing autopilot disconnect circuit must be run through an pin 41.
internal relay within the EA100. This ensures the autopilot
cannot be engaged or will disengage if the EA100 attitude is 4 20 AWG wire may be spliced to a 22 AWG wire of no
invalid. The autopilot “sonalert” or disconnect tone must not be more than 4 inches in length at the EA100 to
interrupted with this relay. Wire as shown. accommodate the high density pin.

Figure F8 – EA100 to KFC225 Attitude Source w/DISC

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 333-367 Revision AC

Before
A/P DISC from KA136 to KCP299

KCP299 Flight Computer

KA136 Trim Adapter 4
with KA141
with P/N 065-5016-XX Adapter
Board (for 3" instruments)
P1362 P2991 P2992 5
2
A/P DISC L Existing Wire
j A/P DISC IN

After
KCP299 Flight Computer
4
with KA141
EA100 with P/N 065-5016-XX Adapter
Board (for 3" instruments)
P2991 P2992 5
P2
1
AP EXCITE HI 1 w 10VAC 400Hz
AP EXCITE LO 16 F PWR REF

KI256 E
KA141 Autopilot Monitor

Existing Wire
4 GYRO REF
AP PITCH HI 2 12 PITCH AC (H)
AP PITCH LO 17 N GYRO REF

AP ROLL HI 3 10 ROLL AC (H)

AP ROLL LO 18

A/P INTRLK ENERGIZED 41

7
A/P INTRLK COMM 39

KCP299 Flight Computer

4
KA136 Trim Adapter with KA141
with P/N 065-5016-XX Adapter
Board (for 3" instruments)
P1362 P2991 P2992 5

A/P DISC L j A/P DISC IN

Existing Wire 3 Existing Wire

1 Wire and shield as shown. 5 Only KCP299 flight computers with adapter board 065-
5016-XX may use this drawing. Flight computers with 065-
The existing autopilot disconnect circuit from the KA136
2 5015-XX adapter boards not approved.
must be run through an internal relay within the EA100. This
ensures the autopilot cannot be engaged or will disengage if 6 Wire from KA141-4 to KI256-E is a ground reference from
the EA100 attitude is invalid. Wire as shown. the KA141. If removing the KI256, it is not necessary to
ground this wire.
3 Remove existing wire from P2992 pin j and extend to
EA100 pin 39. Run new wire from P2992 pin j to EA100 7 18 AWG wire may be spliced to a 22 AWG wire of no
pin 41. more than 4 inches in length at the EA100 to
4 KFC250 autopilots that do not use a KA141 cannot use this accommodate the high density pin.
drawing. See appropriate wiring diagram in this manual.

Figure F9 – EA100 to KFC250 (with KA141) Attitude Source w/DISC

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 334-367 Revision AC

Before
A/P DISC from KA136 to KCP299

KCP299 Flight Computer

KA136 Trim Adapter 4
without KA141
with P/N 065-5016-XX Adapter
P1362 P2991 P2992 Board (for 3" instruments)
5
2
A/P DISC L j A/P DISC IN
Existing Wire

After
KCP299 Flight Computer 4
without KA141
EA100 with P/N 065-5016-XX Adapter
Board (for 3" instruments)
P2991 P2992 5
P2
1
AP EXCITE HI 1 w 10VAC 400HZ
AP EXCITE LO 16 F PWR REF

AP PITCH HI 2 y PITCH ATT

AP PITCH LO 17 s ATT REF

AP ROLL HI 3 CC ROLL ATT

AP ROLL LO 18 HH ATT REF

A/P INTRLK ENERGIZED 41

6
A/P INTRLK COMM 39

KCP299 Flight Computer

KA136 Trim Adapter 4
without KA141
with P/N 065-5016-XX Adapter
P1362 P2991 P2992 Board (for 3" instruments)
5
j A/P DISC IN
A/P DISC L Existing Wire 3 Existing Wire

1 Wire and shield as shown. 4 KFC250 autopilots with a KA141 cannot use this drawing.
See appropriate wiring diagram in this manual.
The existing autopilot disconnect circuit from the KA136
2 must be run through an internal relay within the EA100. This 5 Only KCP299 flight computers with adapter board 065-
ensures the autopilot cannot be engaged or will disengage if 5016-XX may use this drawing. Flight computers with 065-
the EA100 attitude is invalid. Wire as shown. 5015-XX adapter boards not approved.

3 Remove existing wire from P2992 pin j and extend to 6 18 AWG wire may be spliced to a 22 AWG wire of no
EA100 pin 39. Run new wire from P2992 pin j to EA100 more than 4 inches in length at the EA100 to
pin 41. accommodate the high density pin.

Figure F10 – EA100 to KFC250 (without KA141) Attitude Source w/Disc

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 335-367 Revision AC

18 AWG

Figure F11 – EA100 to KFC275 Attitude Source w/Disc

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 336-367 Revision AC

Before
Existing EFD1000 Installations

ACU KI-254 KI-256

P1 P1
P2
FD VALID 27 H H
FD PITCH COM 14 N N
FD ROLL COM 15
FD PITCH 33 L L
FD ROLL 10 M M
FD ENGAGE 9 P P

AP FD Power
AP CMD Bar Ref
AP CMD Bar Pitch
AP CMD Bar Roll
AP FD Engage

After
Existing EFD1000 Installations
And all new installations

EA100 2 2

ACU 42 A/P AHRS VALID

KI-254 KI-256

P1 P1
P2
FD VALID 27 H H
FD PITCH COM 14 N N
FD ROLL COM 15
FD PITCH 33 L L
FD ROLL 10 M M
1

FD ENGAGE 9 P P

AP CMD Bar Ref

AP CMD Bar Pitch
AP CMD Bar Roll
AP FD Engage

1 Install two diodes in opposite polarity as shown to emulate the diode circuit inside the KI
254/256. These diodes are required when the KI 254/256 is removed from aircraft for
proper autopilot and flight director operation. Use Aspen p/n 122-00031-001 or 1N4003
(200v). Note – the side of the diodes shown to aircraft ground may instead be connected
to ACU P2 pins 14 and 15 (which is ACU flight director ground).

2 If the KI 254/256 is not removed from the aircraft then the Flight Director wiring to the KI
254/256 must be removed on all existing installations when adding the EA100.

Figure F12 – ACU Flight Director Modification

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 337-367 Revision AC

Configuration

Use Tech Note 2010-10 for instructions on using the EA100 Tool to setup and align the EA100.

EFD1000 (the one connected to the EA100)

On the EFD1000 “Network Page” (the second to the last Installation Menu page) set the IP ADDR,
SUBNET MASK and PORT as follows:

IP ADDR = 192.168.28.12
SUBNET MASK = 255.255.255.0
GATEWAY = 0
PORT= 8550

To change the IP ADDR press the line select key next to IP ADDR and then rotate the right knob
to set the first three digits. Press the line select key again next to IP ADDR to advance the cursor
to the next field to the right and set the next three digits. Continue with this sequence until all
digits of the IP ADDR are set to 192.168.28.12.

Using Section 10.4.9 verify and set if necessary, the “PANEL ROLL ADJUST” and the “PANEL TILT
PITCH ADJ” so that the roll attitude and pitch attitude are 0.0⁰ on the EFD1000 when the aircraft
is level. Adjust any remaining EFD1000 displays so that they all display the same corrected
roll/pitch attitude.

Ground Test

Complete the ground tests in this section as well as the EA100 specific items in Appendix B,
EFD1000/500 Installation Final Check Sheet.

Autopilot

Power up the EFD1000(s). Close the AP AHRS circuit breaker. Power up the autopilot.

a) Engage the autopilot.

b) Press the autopilot disconnect switch momentarily and verify the autopilot disengages.
c) Engage the autopilot.
d) Pull the A/P AHRS circuit breaker and verify the autopilot disengages. Verify the AP AHRS
FAIL light on the instrument panel illuminates.
e) Verify the Flight Director bars are removed from the PFD display. (note – any illuminated
FD modes will remain illuminated on the A/P control head or annunciator unit).
f) Verify the autopilot cannot be engaged as long as the A/P AHRS FAIL light is illuminated.
g) Push in the A/P AHRS circuit breaker and after the A/P AHRS FAIL light goes out. Verify
that the autopilot can be re-engaged.
h) Press the A/P AHRS FAIL light “press-to-test” switch and verify the lamp illuminates.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 338-367 Revision AC

Using the EA100 Tool (see Tech Note 2010-10) or by pitching/rolling the EFD1000 connected to
the EA100, perform the following tests with the autopilot engaged in ATT Hold mode (no HDG,
NAV, APPR engaged).

NOTE: When the EA100 Tool is running the A/P Engage relay and the A/P AHRS FAIL light relay
are not engaged. These must be engaged using the tool to extinguish the light and to be able to
engage the autopilot.

Positive numbers are Roll right and Pitch Up. Negative numbers are Roll left and Pitch down.

a) Generate a +5º right bank – verify the yoke moves counter-clockwise or left.
b) Generate a -5º left bank – verify the yoke moves clockwise or right.
c) Generate a +5º pitch up – verify the yoke moves forward.
d) Generate a -5º pitch down – verify the yoke moves back.

Autopilot Gyro Alignment

It may be required to align the EA100 Adapter to the autopilot computer using a KTS-150 Test
Set, a KTS-158 Test Set, a KTS-154 Test Set or other appropriate autopilot test set, and following
the autopilot manufacturer’s procedure for aligning the gyro (KI-256) to the autopilot computer.
The EA100 Alignment Tool will be used to manipulate the gyro pitch and roll signals and the
autopilot Test Set will be used to measure the autopilot demodulated gyro voltages. In the case
of the KFC225 the Remote Terminal Interface will be required in place of the test sets.

NOTE: The appropriate autopilot test equipment and certifications will be required for this work.

See Tech Note 2010-10 for instructions on using the EA100 Alignment Tool and the autopilot
manufacturer’s alignment procedure to make these adjustments.

Ground EMI/RFI Test

Perform the following EMI / RFI tests: (In the tests below, the “Threat Equipment” is the EA100.

EA100
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Pass Fail
POSITION
Tests are to be conducted with the aircraft
operating with engine(s) running
COMMUNICATIONS

VHF COMMUNICATIONS
Set VHF communications radios to multiple frequencies and
No 1
monitor effects of Threat equipment while transmitting and

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 339-367 Revision AC

EA100
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION POSITION
Pass Fail
receiving. Testing should be accomplished on multiple
frequencies in the low, middle and upper ranges of the
No 2
frequency band. Record the frequencies tested.
Specifically test at 120.00 MHz and 125.00 MHz
COCKPIT INTERCOM
Initiate several conversations between crew positions and
verify interference free communications while monitoring the
effects of the Threat equipment.
Using the cockpit intercom, verify interference free
communications between the crew while monitoring the
effects of the Threat equipment.

NAVIGATION

VOR / ILS
Verify the operation of each VHF Nav receiver in both VOR and
ILS modes (including glideslope) while monitoring the effects No 1
of the Threat equipment. At a minimum, use of ground test
equipment is required. Use of ground stations should be
accomplished if facilities are available. Record the frequencies
No 2
tested.

DME

Verify the operation of each DME while monitoring the effects

No 1
of the Threat equipment. Ground test equipment or the same
local frequencies used for VOR and ILS testing may be used
for this test. No 2

MARKER BEACON
Verify the operation of each Marker Beacon Receiver while No 1
monitoring the effects of the Threat equipment.
No 2

ADF (If Installed)

Verify the operation of each ADF receiver while monitoring the
effects of the Threat equipment. Frequencies from each band
should be tested where possible. Public broadcast stations
are acceptable for conducting test.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 340-367 Revision AC

EA100
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION POSITION
Pass Fail

GPS

Verify the operation of each GPS receiver while monitoring the

effects of the Threat equipment. GPS satellite signals should
be stable and of similar strength with the threat equipment on No 1
and off. The navigation systems used to display GPS
information should not have any interference effects from the
threat equipment. Record GPS satellite and position data for
each system.
No 2

FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEMS AND DISPLAYS

EFIS
Verify the PFD and MFD displays function without interference
while monitoring the effects of the Threat equipment.

FLIGHT DIRECTOR

Operate the flight director system and verify it responds to

commands from the control panel while monitoring the effects
of the Threat equipment.
AIR DATA
Verify the air data system is presenting correct and steady
information while monitoring the effects of the Threat
Equipment.
AUTOPILOT
Verify the autopilot operates correctly while monitoring the
effects of the Threat Equipment. Sufficient testing should be
accomplished to provide confidence in system operation. If
this level of testing is not possible, the autopilot should not
be engaged in flight until a safe altitude has been achieved.
COMPASS SYSTEM
Verify the compass system is presenting correct information
while monitoring the effects of the Threat equipment.

ATTITUDE SYSTEM

Verify the attitude system is presenting correct information

while monitoring the effects of the Threat equipment.
SAFETY EQUPIMENT
DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 341-367 Revision AC
© Copyright 2012 Aspen Avionics Inc.
EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual

EA100
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION POSITION
Pass Fail

WEATHER RADAR (If Installed)

Verify the function of the weather radar system while

monitoring the effects of the Threat equipment. Prior to
ground operation of the radar, proper safety precautions need
to be observed to prevent injury or damage to ground
personnel or equipment.

RADIO ALTIMETER (If Installed)

Verify the radio altimeter system functions correctly while

monitoring the effects of the Threat equipment. The radio
altimeter should self test correctly and be free of continuous
variation while parked on the ramp.

ENGINE INDICATING AND FUEL QUANTITY

Start the aircraft engine(s) and configure the aircraft for

ENGINE
normal in-flight operations (i.e. pitot heat, lights, etc.) Verify
the engine instruments display correct and stable information
while monitoring the effects of the Threat Equipment. This FUEL
may be accomplished immediately prior to flight-testing if QTY
practicable.

CONTROL SURFACE POSITION INDICATIONS

Verify operation of flaps and electric trim while monitoring the

FLAPS
effects of the threat equipment. Surfaces should move
smoothly through the entire range of operation without ELEC
interference. TRIM
OTHER EQUIPMENT (specify)

Traffic Avoidance Systems (TCAS, TAS, TIS, TCAD)

Verify that the equipment functions properly without
interference while monitoring the effects of the Threat
equipment.
Flight Data Recorder
Verify that the equipment functions properly without
interference while monitoring the effects of the Threat
equipment.
DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 342-367 Revision AC
© Copyright 2012 Aspen Avionics Inc.
EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual

EA100
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION POSITION
Pass Fail
Enhanced Vision System
Verify that the equipment functions properly without
interference while monitoring the effects of the Threat
equipment.
TAWS/GPWS
Verify that the equipment functions properly without
interference while monitoring the effects of the Threat
equipment.
Other Avionics (Specify)
Verify that the equipment functions properly without
interference while monitoring the effects of the Threat
equipment.

FADEC
Note: FADEC installations normally require special verification
in accordance with the FADEC certification information. The
installer must determine whether the design change is
compatible with previously approved modifications.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 343-367 Revision AC

Flight Test

For new EFD1000 system installations that include the EA100 perform the “Pre EA100 Test Flight” below.
After installation of the EA100 perform the “Post EA100 Test Flight” below.

The autopilot should have similar flight performance before and after the EA100 Adapter installation.

NOTE: Any “Pre EA100 Test Flight” performance issues should be resolved prior to the EA100
installation.

Pre-installation Test Flight

a) Under VFR conditions fly the aircraft to a safe maneuvering altitude. Level and trim the aircraft
for coordinated flight. Perform all tests (except the approaches) at cruise speed.

b) Engage the autopilot in pitch and roll mode (Attitude Mode) and verify the aircraft produces no
oscillations.

c) Engage HDG and ALT mode and verify the aircraft will fly the HDG bug within 3 degrees of the
lubber line and there are no oscillations.

d) Turn the HDG bug 90 degrees left. During the turn record the maximum bank angle. Verify the
aircraft does not lose more than 100ft during the turn. Verify the autopilot rolls out on the HDG
bug with little overshoot.

e) Turn the HDG Bug 90 degrees right. During the turn record the maximum bank angle. Verify the
aircraft does not lose more than 100ft during the turn. Verify the autopilot rolls out on the HDG
bug with little overshoot.

f) Using the Pitch Modifier (pitch rocker switch) press the “up” side of the switch to initiate a climb
attitude of about 5 degrees. Verify the aircraft climbs and maintains a consistent 5-degree +/-
2-degree attitude with no oscillations.

g) Using the Pitch Modifier (pitch rocker switch) press the “down” side of the switch to initiate a
descent attitude of about 5 degrees. Verify the aircraft descends and maintains a consistent 5-
degree +/- 2-degree attitude with no oscillations.

h) Perform an ILS approach and note the performance in the lateral and vertical (if Glide Slope
equipped) axes.

i) Should the autopilot fail any of the tests it is recommended that the autopilot be serviced prior to
installing the EA100 Adapter.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 344-367 Revision AC

Post EA100 Installation Test Flight

NOTE: Autopilot adjustment in accordance with the autopilot manufacturer’s instructions may be
necessary to correct HDG Bug out of center or aircraft tracking off course conditions. The “roll
centering pot” adjuster tool should be available. For best results, determine the location of
the roll centering pot prior to the test flight so that it may be accessed if needed.

a) Under VFR conditions fly the aircraft to a safe maneuvering altitude. Level and trim the aircraft
for coordinated flight. Perform all tests (except the approaches) at cruise speed.

b) Engage the autopilot in pitch and roll mode (Attitude Mode) and verify the aircraft produces no
oscillations.

c) Engage HDG and ALT mode and verify the HDG bug centers under the lubber line. If the HDG bug
is not under the lubber line verify the slip/skid indicator is centered. If the slip/skid indicator is
centered then the autopilot roll null “roll centering” is out of adjustment. If the slip/skid indicator
is out of center then adjust rudder trim to center.

h) Perform an ILS approach and note the performance in the lateral and vertical (if Glide Slope
equipped) axes. Verify no oscillations.

i) If the autopilot performance is similar to or better than that of the pre-install test flight (and the
pre-install test flight was satisfactory) then no further adjustments are necessary. If the HDG
bug did not center use the “roll centering” pot to correct this condition. If the maximum bank
angles or pitch angles were outside the maximum allowed by the autopilot manufacturer then the
autopilot must be aligned to the EA100 using the manufacturer’s gyro alignment procedure.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 345-367 Revision AC

This Page is to be printed and given to the aircraft owner for inclusion in the aircraft records.

AUTOPILOT “PRE” AND “POST” EA100 TEST FLIGHT

AIRCRAFT TYPE: AIRCRAFT REG#:

AIRCRAFT S/N: AUTOPILOT MODEL:

A/P PARAMETERS PRE EA100 INSTALL POST EA100 INSTALL

MODE
HDG HDG Bug from Lubber Line
ALT
-Oscillations?
HDG Maximum Left Bank Angle
ALT
HDG Maximum Right Bank Angle
ALT
HDG ALT HOLD mode (does it hold
ALT aircraft within 100ft during
turns)
HDG 5 Degree Pitch Up
ATT
HOLD -Oscillations?
HDG 5 Degree Pitch Down
ATT -Oscillations?
HOLD
APPR ILS lateral Performance

-Oscillations?
APPR Glide Slope Performance
-Oscillations?
NOTES:

Record the EA100 Final configuration in the table below

Autopilot Wx Radar
Gain Up mV/º mV/º
Gain Dn mV/º mV/º
Gain Rt mV/º mV/º
Gain Lt mV/º mV/º
Pitch Offset mV/º mV/º
Roll Offset mV/º mV/º

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 346-367 Revision AC

Environmental Qualification Form

Nomenclature: EA100 Adapter
Part Number: 910-00013-001
TSO Numbers: TSO-C4c, TSO-C113
Manufacturer: Aspen Avionics, Inc.
Address: 5001 Indian School Road NE, Albuquerque, NM 87110
DO-160 Revision: DO-160E
Date Tested: 7/2010

CONDITIONS SECTION DESCRIPTION OF TESTS CONDUCTED

Temperature and Altitude 4.0 Equipment tested to Category D1

Low temperature 4.5.1

High Temperature 4.5.2 & 4.5.3
Altitude 4.6.1
Decompression 4.6.2
Overpressure 4.6.3

Temperature Variation 5.0 Equipment tested to Category B

Humidity 6.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Operational Shocks and Crash 7.0 Equipment tested to Category B
Safety
Vibration (Fixed Wing) 8.0 Equipment tested to Category S, aircraft Zone 2 for Fixed Wing Reciprocating &
Turboprop Engines, Multi Eng over 5700 KG (12,500 lbs.) (Using curve M), Multi
Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs.) (Using curve M), Single Eng Less than 5700
KG (12,500 lbs.) (using curve M)
Explosive Atmosphere 9.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Waterproofness 10.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Sand and Dust 12.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Fungus 13.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Salt Fog Test 14.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Equipment is Category Z
Power Input 16.0 Equipment tested to Category B
Voltage Spike 17.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Audio Freq Conducted 18.0 Equipment tested to Category B
Susceptibility
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 Equipment tested to Category ZC
Radio Frequency Susceptibility 20.0 Equipment tested to Category TT
Radio Frequency Emission 21.0 Equipment tested to Category M, significant EM apertures, not in direct view of
radio receiver antenna (Equipment mounted in cockpit or cabin area)
Lighting Induced Transient 22.0 Equipment tested to Category B3K33, Waveform Sets B and K are applicable for
Susceptibility equipment interconnected with wiring installed within any airframe or airframe
section when structural resistance is also a significant source of induced
transients, (i.e. carbon fiber composite structures). Level 3 is intended for
equipment and interconnecting wiring installed in a moderately exposed
environment.
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Icing 24.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Electrostatic Discharge 25.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Fire, Flammability 26.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Other Tests Fire resistance conducted by analysis in accordance with Federal Aviation
Regulations Part 25, Appendix F.
Section 22.5.1 (Pin Injection): Communication between the EA100 and EFD1000 stopped. The EFD1000 remained operational, and the EA100
successfully disengaged the autopilot relays.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 347-367 Revision AC

Appendix F A/P Source Select

Optional Autopilot Source Selection between the EFD1000 or EFD1000C3

PFD and the EFD1000 MFD

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 348-367 Revision AC

The A/P Source Select switch permits the EFD1000 MFD to drive the autopilot (and ACU outputs) when
the MFD is in Reversion Mode. The design provides a “Lockout” of the MFD when not in reversion and
also provides annunciation to the flight crew as to which display (PFD or MFD) is driving the autopilot.

NOTE: These instructions do not approve any co-pilot mounted PFD or MFD to be selected for coupling
to the autopilot. Only the PFD and EFD1000 MFD mounted on the pilot side of the panel are approved to
use this “Autopilot Source” switch.

Ref
Nomenclature Part Number Manufacturer Qualification/Comment
Des
K1 Multi-pole relay with minimum of 4 poles AK-950-Rx-xx Ameri King TSO C129a
N&K
S1 Switch, DPDT, Mom-On-Mom, Toggle M83731/10-351 MIL-S-83731
Components

L1/L2
Lamp, Green, PTT, Dimmable 01-91180-3 Electroswitch MS25041-3
Opt A
L1/L2
Lighted engraved LED or Lamp Series 582 Eaton MIL-S-22885/101
OPT B
1/4w resistor, value determined by night
R1 viewing test (optional if dimming bus not MIL-R-39008 Vishay Dale MIL-R-39008
available)
Table F1 – Component Part Information

Circuit Overview:

The K1 relay coil receives its ground from pin 7 of the MFD so that the relay cannot be energized unless
the MFD is in Reversion Mode (REV button pressed on MFD). S1 is a spring-loaded toggle with a
momentary PFD position and momentary MFD REV position that returns to center after the desired
display is selected. The switch may be installed in either a horizontal orientation with the PFD position
to the LEFT, or in a vertical orientation with the PFD position UP. If the MFD is in Reversion and the S1
switch is selected to the MFD position, the relay will energize and electrically latch. The relay will remain
latched until the PFD position is selected on S1 or the REV button on the MFD is pressed (reverts back to
a MFD) or by loss of power to the ACU circuit breaker.

The following aspects of the design must not be altered:

• The Relay must be controlled by the MFD reversion discrete so that the MFD cannot be connected
to the ACU and the autopilot unless it is in Reversion Mode.
• A “PFD and MFD” annunciator or light bulbs must annunciate the PFD or MFD REV switch position.
• The orientation of the “PFD” and “MFD” annunciators must be similar to that of S1. (i.e., the PFD
annunciation is either LEFT or UP to agree with the switch movement.
• The added switches and annunciators must be installed in the pilot’s primary field of view and
observable with minimum head and eye movement. The preferred location is near the autopilot
mode annunciator panel.
• The “PFD” and “MFD” annunciators must be readable in sunlight and also dimmable and readable
for night operations

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 349-367 Revision AC

• Each control must be easily readable and discernible and the lights must be installed so that their
direct rays, and rays reflected from the windshield and other surface are shielded from the pilot’s
eyes. See AC 43-13-2B Paragraph 1104 (e) Page 129. If the aircraft does not have a day/night
lighting bus a separate dimming switch and resistors may be required.
• The annunciator labeling must be properly illuminated by the instrument panel lighting system
so as to be visible at night
• Relay K1 and switch S1 must be powered from the ACU circuit breaker.

Only the following deviations are allowed from the circuit design:

• K1 may be replaced with two 2-pole relays. Only relays with electrically suppressed coils may be
used.
• S1 may be of another switch design as long as the DPDT Mom-ON-Mom design is retained.
• The PFD and MFD annunciators may be of a legend style (i.e., Eaton style) or separate lamp
assemblies with one labeled “PFD” and the other labeled “MFD”.

Any other deviations from this design require separate approval.

NOTE: The PFD and MFD must be at software version 2.3.1 or later and the inter-system buss must be
wired and configured so that the PFD can cross-fill its PFD settings to the MFD when the MFD is in
reversion mode.

Install the relays and wiring in accordance with AC 43.13-2B Chapter 1 Paragraphs 100 through 114,
pages 1-7 and Chapter 2 paragraphs 200 through 207 and 209, pages 9 to 19.

System Checkout

1. Power up the PFD, MFD1000, and the autopilot computer.

2. Verify the PFD and the MFD have software version 2.3.1 or later.
3. With the PFD initialized and the MFD initialized and in MFD mode, verify the green PFD indicator
is lit on the A/P SOURCE panel.
4. Engage the autopilot in HDG mode and verify the PFD HDG Bug controls the autopilot.
5. Push the REV button on the MFD, verify the green PFD indicator is still lit, the PFD HDG Bug still
controls the autopilot, and the MFD HDG Bug does not control the autopilot.

CAUTION: Before performing Step 6, hold the control yoke/stick as the autopilot may disengage or the
HDG Mode may drop with the PFD to MFD transition. This may also require the re-engagement of the
autopilot or HDG mode.

6. Move the A/P SOURCE switch to the MFD position and release, verify the green PFD indicator goes
out, the green MFD indicator is now lit, the PFD HDG Bug does not control the autopilot, and the
MFD HDG Bug does control the autopilot (autopilot or HDG mode may need to be re-engaged).
7. Press the REV button on the MFD and verify the green MFD indicator is out and the green PFD
indicator is lit, autopilot control will go back to the PFD (autopilot or HDG mode may need to be
re-engaged).
DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 350-367 Revision AC
© Copyright 2012 Aspen Avionics Inc.
EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual

8. Verify the switch marking and annunciators are readable in day/night.

9. Test is complete.

Aircraft Documentation

1. Remove the previously approved PFD-MFD AFMS P/N 900-00008-001 and install a copy (with
Section 1.2 completed) of the approved PFD-MFD AFMS P/N 900-00008-001 Rev P or later in the
aircraft Flight Manual or Supplemental Flight Manual. NOTE: Complete Section 1.2 in the AFMS
by transferring the existing data from the original AFMS.
2. Insert copy of ICA P/N 900-00012-001 Rev P or later.
3. Return the aircraft to service in accordance with appropriate regulatory procedures.

L1/L2 K1
May be green incandescent indicators, Ameri King
L1/L2 green LED indicators, Relay (K1) Aircraft Power
or green split legend indicator (Eaton style) labeled
Option B PFD and MFD. AK-950-R8-14 14V

AK-950-R8-28 28V
PFD
S1
A 3 2
DPDT Toggle Switch
6 B
Mom – ON – Mom R1
9 Momentary LEFT and RIGHT
1/4w resistor, value to be determined by night
or
time viewing evaluation. May be required if
12 11 Momentary to Up and Down
C aircraft dimming bus not available.
MFD Spring loaded to center position

EATON A/P SOURCE L1/L2

582 Series PFD MFD REV Option A

PFD
2 5
BRT
L1
A B
BATT
ACU 2A
1 3 4 6 BUS
S1 R1
L2 DIM
C
MFD
ACU K1
P1
24
PFD
+14Vdc/+28Vdc IN 10 4
44
n/c 26 ARINC 429 TX1A
P3 3 43 27 ARINC 429 TX1B
22
ARINC 429_RX1A 1 2
42
21
ARINC 429_RX1B 14 1
41
MFD
26 ARINC 429 TX1A
78 62
27 ARINC 429 TX1B

NOTE – A429 Wiring is double shielded or 7 Reversion Discrete

single shield with tinned copper overbraid. AK-950-R8-xx

Figure F1 – A/P Source Select Wiring Diagram

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 351-367 Revision AC

Suggested control switch layouts

Make all wiring connections in accordance with AC43.13-2B Chapter 2 paragraph 207, pages 18 and 19.

Provide sufficient illumination to make the switch nomenclature easily readable at night (see AC 43.13-
2B, Chapter 11, page 129, paragraph 1104).

Use MIL-C-27500, 22 gauge shielded wire and MIL-W-22759, 22 gauge single conductor wire. All
grounds should be as short as possible. A429 Wiring is double-shielded or single shield with tinned
copper overbraid.

Wires and connectors must be clearly marked per FAR 23.1365(d).

Wires and wiring bundles must be secured in such a way to eliminate risk of mechanical damage and
minimize exposure to heat and fluids per FAR 23.1365(e) and AC 43.13-2B Chapter 2 paragraph 207,
page 18.

Warning, Caution, Advisory lights must be effective under all probable cockpit lighting conditions per
FAR 23.1322(e).

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 352-367 Revision AC

Appendix G APS4A Altitude Pre-Select System

Optional KFC-200 Autopilot Interface Using the

Avionik Straubing APS4A Altitude Preselect System

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 353-367 Revision AC

The APS4A system may be installed with the EFD1000 PFD to provide automatic enablement of the ALT
HOLD function of the autopilot upon the aircraft reaching the PFD Selected Altitude. The interface
consists of an EFD1000 system, an APS4A system, and a PRESEL/ARMED switch and annunciator.

Note – As of this revision the APS4A system has been tested with the EFD1000 and KFC200 autopilot.
Connection to any other EFIS or autopilot is beyond the scope of this STC and requires separate
approval.

Ref
Nomenclature Part Number Manufacturer Qualification/Comment
Des
Avionik 14VDC Bendix-King KFC-200
APS4A Altitude Preselect Interface Box (14Vdc) AS02-ALTPIB-01
Straubing TSO-C9 and TSO-C52b
Avionik 28VDC Bendix-King KFC-200
APS4A Altitude Preselect Interface Box (28Vdc) AS02-ALTPIB-41
Straubing TSO-C9 and TSO-C52b
APS4A Install Kit – 9 pin D-Sub AS12-ALTPKT-00 Avionik
Components of APS4A
conn/sockets/back-shell Straubing
Circuit Breaker, Miniature, Ambient 2TC14-2 or
CB1 Klixon MS3320 or MS26574
Compensated 7274-2-2
Lighted Push-Button 2PDT Mom Switch
horizontal split-dual gnd, LED or Lamp
S1/DS1 (Note – The AS03-ALTPIN-0x
Series 582 Eaton MIL-S-22885/101
OPT A indicator/switch is not approved as the
engraving does not meet the required
PRESEL/ARMED wording)
S1 C&K
Switch, Single Pole, Momentary, Toggle NKK Model 7108 MS27716
OPT B Components

DS1
Lamp, Green, PTT, Dimmable 01-91180-3 Electroswitch MS25041-3
OPT B

Table G1 – Component Part Information

Technical Specifications
Supply Input: 11-32VDC at 0.15A
Weight: 0.55lb (250g)
Dimensions: 1.53 x 2.84 x 4.13 inches (39 x 72 x 105mm)
Mounting: 4ea. 6-32” screws
Connector: D-Sub 9 PIN
Cooling: Not required
Software: None
Complex Electronic Hardware: None

TSO/ETSO Limitations
The APS4A is certified to TSO-C9c/ETSO-C9c and TSO-C52b/ETSO-C52b standards.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 354-367 Revision AC

Mechanical Installation
The APS4A unit has no user interface, and therefore can be remote mounted. The optimum mounting
location is an area that minimizes wire runs to interfacing equipment. It may be mounted in any
orientation.

Mount the APS4A in accordance with AC43.13-2B Chapters 1 and 2. Failure of the APS4A is a minor
failure condition. There is no software. The mechanical installation must be structurally substantiated
in accordance with AC43.13-2B Chapter 1 Pages 1 to 7, Paragraphs to 100 to 114.

Figure G1– APS4A Mount to Flat Metal Shelf (dimensions in mm)

Install using four (4) MS35206 #6-32 screws, four (4) NAS1149FN632P washers, and four (4)
MS21044N06 #6-32 self-locking nuts. Tighten nuts to 12 in-lbs.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 355-367 Revision AC

An unpainted surface of the APS4A case must be bonded to aircraft ground either through mounting to a
metal shelf or with an installer fabricated bonding strap of wire braid or single stranded wire no more
than 12 inches in length. Attach ground lug of bonding strap to one of the mounting screws if required.

The center of gravity of the APS4A is the exact dimensional center of the unit.

Verify APS4A case to airframe ground has ≤ 3 milliohms of resistance.

Electrical Installation

PIN Input/Output Description

1 Input Relay NC
2 Output Relay Com
3 Input Relay NO
4 --- 28Vdc lighting
5 Output ARMED annunciator output (GND)
6 Input Alt Preselect ARM switch input (mom. GND)
7 Input +10V or Ground from A/P mode controller
8 Input Power Ground
9 Input 10 to 32Vdc Input Power

Table G2 – APS4A Pin out

Install the relays and wiring in accordance with AC 43.13-2B Chapter 2 paragraphs 200 through 207 and
209, pages 9 to 19.

The added switches and annunciators must be installed in the pilot’s primary field of view and
observable with minimum head and eye movement. The preferred location is near the autopilot mode
annunciator panel.

Label the circuit breaker CB1, PRESEL.

Warning, Caution, Advisory lights must be effective under all probable cockpit lighting conditions per
FAR 23.1322(e). Each control must be easily readable and discernible and the lights must be installed so
that their direct rays, and rays reflected from the windshield and other surface are shielded from the
pilot’s eyes. See AC 43-13-2B Paragraph 1104 (e) Page 129.

If the aircraft does not have a Day/Night annunciator bus a separate switch and resistors may be used.

Use MIL-C-27500, 22 gauge shielded wire and MIL-W-22759, 22 gauge single conductor wire. All
grounds should be as short as possible.

Wires and connectors must be clearly marked per FAR 23.1365(d).

Wires and wiring bundles must be secured in such a way to eliminate risk of mechanical damage and
minimize exposure to heat and fluids per FAR 23.1365(e) and AC 43.13-2B.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 356-367 Revision AC

PRESEL/ ARMED switch/annunciator installation

The switch must be labeled as specified in the wiring diagram so that it agrees with the wording in the
AFMS. The switch labeling will be “PRESEL” and the “ARMED” light will be green.

Description Eaton
Pin
Switched 28VDC or GND (ARMED light) 12
GND 2, 3
PTT Lamp Test 11
28VDC/ BRT DIM 6
Momentary GND to ARM (ARMED) 1
GND 8

Table G3 – Eaton Annunciator/switch Pinot

Figure G2 - Eaton Quik Connect

A panel mounting spacer is supplied with each unit so as to place the switch mounting flange flush with
a 0.235” thick edge lighted panel. For other switch applications the spacer is discarded.

A reversible mounting sleeve is supplied with each unit as to be usable with or without the panel
mounting spacer. The mounting sleeve allows the switch to be installed on mounting plates ranging
from 0.032” to 0.187” thick.

The switch assembly is mounted from the front of the mounting plate by means of a screwdriver only.
All mounting screws are integral to the switch.

Mounting the switch

Using the extraction slots, pull the pushbutton cap fully out of the switch body and allow the cap to
rotate 90⁰ where it is held by the retaining element as shown in Figure G3. Remove the mounting sleeve
and insert the switch body into the mounting plate cutout. From behind the mounting plate slide the
mounting sleeve onto the switch body. Tighten the two screws inside the switch body until the integral
mounting hardware pulls the mounting sleeve up tight against the mounting plate using typically 18
inch-ounces of torque. The pushbutton cap is then reinserted and the QUIK-CONNECT™ plug can be
plugged into the switch housing. A side view of a properly mounted switch is shown in Figure G4.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 357-367 Revision AC

Figure G3 – Switch Body removal

Figure G4 – Side View of properly mounted switch

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 358-367 Revision AC

Figure G5– APS4A System Wiring Diagram

System Checkout
1. Power up the PFD and the autopilot system.
2. Set the PFD Selected Altitude to 300 ft (or greater) above the current field elevation (current
altimeter reading). Pressing the right knob until “ALT” is displayed sets selected Altitude. Then
turn the right knob until the value in the upper right window displays 300ft or more above
current altitude [i.e., current altitude is 540 ft, then set the Selected Altitude to 540 + 300 = 840

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 359-367 Revision AC

(use 900 ft), note the Selected Altitude is in 100 ft increments so round up to the next altitude =
900 ft]
3. Verify the ARMED light is OFF, now verify the autopilot ALT Hold mode can be engaged by the
ALT button on the autopilot computer/mode controller. Disengage ALT Hold.
4. Press the PRESEL switch and verify the ARMED light is ON, now verify the autopilot ALT Hold
mode can also be engaged by the ALT button on the autopilot computer. Disengage ALT Hold.
5. With the ARMED light ON and ALT Hold mode OFF, slowly decrease the baro setting on the PFD
so that the altimeter tape is increasing in altitude toward the Selected Altitude. When the
Selected Altitude is reached (+/-20ft) the ARMED light should go OUT and the ALT Hold light on
the autopilot computer/mode controller/annunciator should go ON.
6. Verify the switch marking and annunciators are readable in day/night.
7. This completes the required testing.

NOTE – The altitude is captured by engagement of the ALT Hold function. During flight there will be
some overshoot of the selected altitude. The overshoot will be proportional to the amount of vertical
speed at which the aircraft approaches the selected altitude.

Aircraft Documentation

1. Remove the previously approved PFD-MFD AFMS P/N 900-00008-001 and install a copy (with
Section 1.2 completed) of the approved PFD-MFD AFMS P/N 900-00008-001 Rev P or later in the
aircraft Flight Manual or Supplemental Flight Manual.
2. Insert copy of ICA P/N 900-00012-001 Rev P or later.
3. Return the aircraft to service in accordance with appropriate regulatory procedures.

APS4A Vendor Information Eaton Switch/Annunciator Vendor Information

Avionik Straubing Avionics International Supply

Avionik Straubing Entwicklungs GmbH 1750 Westcourt Rd
Flugplatzstr. 5 Denton, TX 76207
Atting D-94348 940-566-0035
Germany [email protected]
[email protected]
www.avionik.de

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 360-367 Revision AC

Appendix H Technical Notes Applicable to AML-STC

SA10822SC

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 361-367 Revision AC

Tech Note 2010-08

Technical Note Number: 2010-08 Revision D
Effective Date: June 6, 2011

DESCRIPTION: This Tech Note provides instructions on operation of the

Pitot Monitor Tool.

The Pitot Monitor Tool can be used to set older EFD1000 installations to the new settings1 under
STC10822SC or can be used to set the parameters per other STC holder’s requirements. It is not
necessary to make the change to the EFD500 MFD.

1Note – it is only required to modify an existing installation if the operator is reporting “Check Pitot
Heat” annunciations after landing or during a flight maneuver which the IAS drops below 30kts.

SUBJECT

The EFD1000 uses several parameters to determine the attitude solution, including airspeed. If
the airspeed indication fails due to a plugged pitot tube, it is possible for the display to present
erroneous attitude information. The Pitot Tool is used to modify the parameters at which the
“Check Pitot Heat” or “Cross Check Attitude” annunciations are displayed.

STC10822SC
At the time of initial certification, a time of one-half second was established to detect the
airspeed failure condition by comparing the GPS data. Field experience indicates that this
duration should be extended to 5.0 seconds for reliable detection.

EFFECTIVITY (Hardware Applicability and Compatibility)

This Tech Note is applicable to the EFD1000 displays (including Pro and Pilot versions and MFDs) with
Software version 2.2 or B2.2 or later. It is not applicable to the EFD500.

NOTE: Installing this modification does not affect the software or the TSO of the EFD1000 system. It
disables or modifies the detection time for the Pitot Obstruction Monitor, which is a Configuration
Module parameter. The timing change has been evaluated under AML STC SA10822SC only.

COMPLIANCE

This Tech Note is:

Mandatory Recommended 6 Optional

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 362-367 Revision AC

APPROVAL

The engineering design data of this Tech Note are FAA approved for STC SA10822SC only. Installations
approved under a certification other than STC SA10822SC require appropriate approval.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

This tool is provided free of charge (if downloaded from the Aspen website) and can be optionally used
to modify the detection duration. Charges related to the adjustment are covered under warranty for
those systems under warranty. A warranty claim of 1 hour may be submitted with prior approval of
Aspen Tech Support or if the system is interfaced with a Bendix King GPS navigator and is exhibiting
nuisance Red-X indications. Electronic copies of required documentation are available free of charge for
download from the Aspen Avionics web site.

LABOR

Approximately 1 hour of labor will be required to perform the actions in this Tech Note.

REFERENCE

For modifying the detection time:

STC SA10822SC, Amended 9/29/09, or later.
900-00003-001Rev H, EFD1000 and EFD500 Version 2.X Installation Manual, or later FAA approved
revision.
For other STCs or approvals:
See the Installation Documentation for the aircraft installation.

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIRED

Qty Part Number Description

1 Dealer Supplied Kingston® or SanDisk brand MicroSD
card, 2GB
1 Aspen PN 309-00011-001 B Pitot Monitor Tool

PRE MODIFICATION CONFORMITY

Verify the EFD system software level is at MAP software v2.2 or later, IOP software v2.0.1 or later.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 363-367 Revision AC

MODIFICATION STEPS

For aircraft not modified in accordance with the Aspen STC SA10822SC, obtain proper regulatory
approval prior to commencing any modification activities.

1) Download the tool from the Aspen Avionics website or other electronic means.
2) Boot and run the tool.
3) Make the desired change (the change should be made to the EFD1000 PFD and the EFD 1000
MFD. It is not necessary to make the change to the EFD500 MFD).
4) Update the Aircraft Records.

For aircraft on the AML, make a logbook entry regarding the implementation of this Tech Note as a
minor change to the STC SA10822SC and complete the appropriate documentation. For aircraft
installations previously approved via a Field Approval, this change must be approved locally via the same
method as the original approval.

DETAILED MODIFICATION PROCEDURE

Download the Tool from the website

This requires a dealer supplied microSD card and high capacity microSD card writer. This same card can
be used to update multiple aircraft.

1) Navigate to the dealer ramp of the Aspen Avionics website.

2) Click the Technical link at the top of the page
3) Under Service Bulletins and Technical Notes heading, click the Technical Notes link.
4) Click the Download Tech Note #TN2010-08 link. Disregard the Rev Level.
5) Click the Download Pitot Monitor Tool. A File Download dialog box will open.
6) As an alternative to the steps 1 to 5, download the software through an electronic means.
7) Click the Save button, a Save As dialog box will open.
8) Select the drive and folder where you want to save the file, and click the Save button.
9) Once the file is saved to your local drive you can copy it to the MicroSD card. Verify no files are
on the card.
a) Copy the “sdboot.bin” file to the root directory of the MicroSD card.

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 364-367 Revision AC

Run the Tool Using the MicroSD Card

Figure H1 - EFD Loading “key” Functions

1) Power on the EFD and confirm that it is a v2.2 or later unit by going to the last page of the PFD or
MFD menu verifying the following:
MAP VER: 2.2 or later
IOP VER: 2.0.1 or later
If the display does not show the above message, the unit is not eligible for using this tool.

NOTE: This is a ground operation. If the airspeed is greater than 30 knots the system will
not enter the Installation Menu

2) Put the microSD card into the EFD card slot.

3) Go into the Installation Menu by pressing the “MENU” key and the two line select keys directly
below “MENU” simultaneously for 3 seconds (Figure H1). Follow the instructions on the screen.

4) Go to the last page of the Installation Menu. Boot from the SD card by pressing the two buttons
closest to the knobs for three seconds (Figure H1). When the display responds to the button
press, release the buttons.

5) You will see a screen titled PITOT MONITOR TOOL. Checking Configuration.
Please wait while the Config Module is opened and read.

Config Module……..[This will display the current CM part number]

UPGRADER ERROR indicates that an error occurred trying to access the Configuration Module of
the EFD.

NOT UPGRADABLE indicates only certain configurations may be upgraded,

See Section 2 “EFFECTIVITY” in this Tech Note for more information.
DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 365-367 Revision AC
© Copyright 2012 Aspen Avionics Inc.
EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual

The display will present the following information if a change is permitted:

IAS Threshold
GS Threshold
Trigger Time
Return Time
Message Type

Definitions:
IAS = Indicated Airspeed on EFD airspeed tape
GS = groundspeed from GPS receiver
POM = Pitot Obstruction Monitor, specific function (Message Type) that occurs when certain airspeed
(IAS) and groundspeed (GS) values are met for a length of time (Trigger Time).

The table below lists the required values per STC 10822SC and suggested values to be used in a
helicopter application that must be approved separately.

Parameter STC10822SC Helicopter Description

required Value Suggested
Value
IAS Threshold: 30kts 10kts IAS at which the airspeed must go below to start the
Trigger Time
GS Threshold: 50kts 30kts GPS groundspeed at which the speed must be higher than
to start the Trigger Time
Trigger Time: 5 sec 5 sec Time in seconds at which if IAS Threshold and GS
Threshold exceed programmed values the POM will
activate
Return Time: 15 sec 15 sec Time in seconds the display requires to reset to normal if
speeds go below the IAS or GS thresholds
Message Type: Chk Pitot Cross Chk How the POM reacts when the thresholds are met:
OFF = No message
Chk Pitot = “Check Pitot Heat” annunciated with Red-X of
ADI/HSI
Cross Chk = “Cross Check Attitude” annunciated on ADI

NOTE: Up to the point of pressing MENU to proceed, the change has not been written to the
EFD’s CM

6) Once you are satisfied with the changes, press MENU to save.

NOTE: If you do not wish to continue, and instead wish to return to normal operation, press
the REV key

The change will be saved to the Configuration Module. Once the save is complete, the screen will
read:

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 366-367 Revision AC

Change Complete
Press the ‘REV’ button to reset

7) Remove the microSD card and, in the case of the MFD, replace with the database card. There
should be no database card in the PFD.
8) Reset the system by pressing the ‘REV’ button.

Complete the Post-Installation Checks

1) Verify that the system starts normally with no error messages.

Update the Aircraft Records (Maintenance Record Entry Procedures)

1) Update necessary maintenance logs. This is a maintenance personnel responsibility.

Return the aircraft to service in accordance with appropriate regulatory procedures.

END

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 367-367 Revision AC

GI 275 Installation Manual 190-02246-14 - 17
100% (1)
GI 275 Installation Manual 190-02246-14 - 17
358 pages
AMS-5000 Reference Guide
100% (1)
AMS-5000 Reference Guide
33 pages
Efd 1000 Install Manual
100% (1)
Efd 1000 Install Manual
256 pages
G500/G600 Txi: Part 23 Aml STC Maintenance Manual
No ratings yet
G500/G600 Txi: Part 23 Aml STC Maintenance Manual
169 pages
900-00003-001 AM EFD1k-5c SW2.X Instl Manual
100% (1)
900-00003-001 AM EFD1k-5c SW2.X Instl Manual
348 pages
Efd1000 PFD and Efd1000 MFD - Installation Manual
No ratings yet
Efd1000 PFD and Efd1000 MFD - Installation Manual
0 pages
KT 76a Im
No ratings yet
KT 76a Im
27 pages
DME-40 Installation Manual
100% (2)
DME-40 Installation Manual
71 pages
Installation Manual - TSO, GDL 84-88
No ratings yet
Installation Manual - TSO, GDL 84-88
148 pages
Model A-30 Altitude Digitizer Operation Manual Installation Manual
100% (1)
Model A-30 Altitude Digitizer Operation Manual Installation Manual
6 pages
34 60 04rev3
No ratings yet
34 60 04rev3
800 pages
Electronic Standby System: Installation Manual
100% (1)
Electronic Standby System: Installation Manual
160 pages
Aspen 1000 Calibration
100% (3)
Aspen 1000 Calibration
11 pages
Altimetro Cessna RVSM
100% (1)
Altimetro Cessna RVSM
42 pages
KT 70 and KT 71 Panel-Mounted Transponders
100% (1)
KT 70 and KT 71 Panel-Mounted Transponders
3 pages
Traffic Alert/Advisory System: SKY899 Installation Manual
100% (2)
Traffic Alert/Advisory System: SKY899 Installation Manual
155 pages
King KT-79 Install PDF
No ratings yet
King KT-79 Install PDF
31 pages
G600 TXi G500 - G600 TXi Part 23 Maintenance Manual
No ratings yet
G600 TXi G500 - G600 TXi Part 23 Maintenance Manual
155 pages
GDU 104X Installation Manual
100% (2)
GDU 104X Installation Manual
70 pages
Jackscrew Backshell Installation Instructions: 190-00313-11 October, 2017 Revision E
No ratings yet
Jackscrew Backshell Installation Instructions: 190-00313-11 October, 2017 Revision E
24 pages
KI208 209InstallManual
0% (1)
KI208 209InstallManual
26 pages
KI 525A - KI 825 Replacement Wiring
No ratings yet
KI 525A - KI 825 Replacement Wiring
1 page
EX 5000 - Installation Manual
No ratings yet
EX 5000 - Installation Manual
114 pages
Garmin GNS430W STC
0% (1)
Garmin GNS430W STC
3 pages
GTS Series Traffic Systems Maintenance Manual: (Gts 800 Tas - Gts 820 Tas - Gts 850 Tcas I)
100% (2)
GTS Series Traffic Systems Maintenance Manual: (Gts 800 Tas - Gts 820 Tas - Gts 850 Tcas I)
24 pages
Wiring Diagram Manual: Beechcraft KING AIR 90, A90, 890, C90 E90
100% (2)
Wiring Diagram Manual: Beechcraft KING AIR 90, A90, 890, C90 E90
6 pages
wx950 Stormscop
83% (6)
wx950 Stormscop
65 pages
Automatic Flight Control System: Includes Instructions For Continued Airworthiness For STC SA01844WI
No ratings yet
Automatic Flight Control System: Includes Instructions For Continued Airworthiness For STC SA01844WI
89 pages
331a 3G
100% (1)
331a 3G
13 pages
Gtx327 M Guide
No ratings yet
Gtx327 M Guide
57 pages
Model Risk Tiering
100% (2)
Model Risk Tiering
32 pages
900-00003-001 AS EFD1k-5c SW2 X Instl Manual Dec-2013
No ratings yet
900-00003-001 AS EFD1k-5c SW2 X Instl Manual Dec-2013
360 pages
Bendix King KI 229 IM 006-0192-02, Rev 2, January 1983
100% (1)
Bendix King KI 229 IM 006-0192-02, Rev 2, January 1983
4 pages
TAS6XX Install Manual Rev04 Oct05
100% (2)
TAS6XX Install Manual Rev04 Oct05
98 pages
WX-500 Installation Manual PDF
100% (3)
WX-500 Installation Manual PDF
68 pages
Garmin GTS 8XX GPA 65 Installation Manual
No ratings yet
Garmin GTS 8XX GPA 65 Installation Manual
84 pages
WX-10 Owner S Manual
No ratings yet
WX-10 Owner S Manual
16 pages
Garmin GMA 350-350H Installation Manual
100% (1)
Garmin GMA 350-350H Installation Manual
50 pages
GDU 620 Installation Manual Rev. B
No ratings yet
GDU 620 Installation Manual Rev. B
112 pages
GTX 330, GTX 330D: Transponder Installation Manual
No ratings yet
GTX 330, GTX 330D: Transponder Installation Manual
81 pages
KFC-200 For A36 Bonanza
100% (1)
KFC-200 For A36 Bonanza
322 pages
GFC500 Bonanza 190-02291-08 03
100% (2)
GFC500 Bonanza 190-02291-08 03
16 pages
900-00003-001 AQ EFD1k-5c SW2 X Instl Manual
No ratings yet
900-00003-001 AQ EFD1k-5c SW2 X Instl Manual
350 pages
Part 23 AML STC Maintenance Manual: GTN Xi
No ratings yet
Part 23 AML STC Maintenance Manual: GTN Xi
174 pages
190 00303 72 - V
100% (1)
190 00303 72 - V
82 pages
KC290 292
No ratings yet
KC290 292
6 pages
GMA 347 Audio Panel Installation Manual: Garmin Ltd. or Its Subsidiaries
No ratings yet
GMA 347 Audio Panel Installation Manual: Garmin Ltd. or Its Subsidiaries
76 pages
AHS 3000+Attitude+Heading+Reference+System
No ratings yet
AHS 3000+Attitude+Heading+Reference+System
121 pages
GNS480 Install Manual
No ratings yet
GNS480 Install Manual
186 pages
190 00181 02 - T
100% (1)
190 00181 02 - T
140 pages
KAP140, IM, 006 00991 0006, Rev.6, Oct2002
100% (3)
KAP140, IM, 006 00991 0006, Rev.6, Oct2002
94 pages
Sa02571se 1906
No ratings yet
Sa02571se 1906
31 pages
GTX 327 Transponder Installation Manual: Garmin International, Inc
No ratings yet
GTX 327 Transponder Installation Manual: Garmin International, Inc
57 pages
GFC 500 Maint Manual
No ratings yet
GFC 500 Maint Manual
53 pages
ATA 29 Power Hdy
No ratings yet
ATA 29 Power Hdy
34 pages
GMA 35 - 35c, IM, 190-00858-11, Rev 3-16
100% (2)
GMA 35 - 35c, IM, 190-00858-11, Rev 3-16
55 pages
AIPC56 10 00 25j.full
No ratings yet
AIPC56 10 00 25j.full
12 pages
Apollo820 Installation
No ratings yet
Apollo820 Installation
60 pages
Annex 3-1 - CMR FORMAT
No ratings yet
Annex 3-1 - CMR FORMAT
3 pages
190 00837 00 - H
No ratings yet
190 00837 00 - H
40 pages
GTX335 - Ica - 190-00734-21 - 01
No ratings yet
GTX335 - Ica - 190-00734-21 - 01
122 pages
Im Gps155xl
No ratings yet
Im Gps155xl
59 pages
Ameri-King AK-950R Installation/Operation Manual
100% (1)
Ameri-King AK-950R Installation/Operation Manual
18 pages
GSB15 Installation Manual
No ratings yet
GSB15 Installation Manual
33 pages
IM ATG 5000 D13928 RevT
No ratings yet
IM ATG 5000 D13928 RevT
112 pages
600 00174 000 R3 MLB700 Im PDF
No ratings yet
600 00174 000 R3 MLB700 Im PDF
67 pages
CTR-12 - FPSO Firenze - Clarification Report - Ph-1 Presv Items
100% (1)
CTR-12 - FPSO Firenze - Clarification Report - Ph-1 Presv Items
3 pages
AIPC34 10 00 10.full
No ratings yet
AIPC34 10 00 10.full
4 pages
Sr00925de Aml Rev D
No ratings yet
Sr00925de Aml Rev D
10 pages
Reference Data 1. Revision Level: LEARJET 31/31A Maintenance Manual
No ratings yet
Reference Data 1. Revision Level: LEARJET 31/31A Maintenance Manual
26 pages
2019 G6NA Language Arts Paper 2
No ratings yet
2019 G6NA Language Arts Paper 2
10 pages
EfES L1
No ratings yet
EfES L1
10 pages
D 34-14-00-Air Data Computers 02
No ratings yet
D 34-14-00-Air Data Computers 02
9 pages
Interview Questions - For LinkedIn
No ratings yet
Interview Questions - For LinkedIn
4 pages
5A6 Rev 68
No ratings yet
5A6 Rev 68
24 pages
Engine Fire Extinguishing
No ratings yet
Engine Fire Extinguishing
6 pages
LEARJET 31/31A Maintenance Manual
No ratings yet
LEARJET 31/31A Maintenance Manual
11 pages
Data - Sheet-Iridium-Telefoni-Sky Connect Installation Manual
No ratings yet
Data - Sheet-Iridium-Telefoni-Sky Connect Installation Manual
32 pages
The Role of The Media in Peace Building Conflict Management and Prevention
No ratings yet
The Role of The Media in Peace Building Conflict Management and Prevention
3 pages
Dynamic Regulatory System
No ratings yet
Dynamic Regulatory System
4 pages
ML C 750 C75PC908
No ratings yet
ML C 750 C75PC908
5 pages
301
No ratings yet
301
4 pages
XS2D LogPlot
No ratings yet
XS2D LogPlot
16 pages
Verbal Autopsy Standards 2022 Who Verbal Autopsy Instrument v1 Final
No ratings yet
Verbal Autopsy Standards 2022 Who Verbal Autopsy Instrument v1 Final
40 pages
T 34-14-01-710-802-Operational Test of The Air Data Computer 1
No ratings yet
T 34-14-01-710-802-Operational Test of The Air Data Computer 1
4 pages
Gogo Brochure Biz
No ratings yet
Gogo Brochure Biz
16 pages
Shear Strength of Deep Hollow-Core Slabs: Aci Structural Journal Technical Paper
No ratings yet
Shear Strength of Deep Hollow-Core Slabs: Aci Structural Journal Technical Paper
29 pages
cfb70 Workbench+views
No ratings yet
cfb70 Workbench+views
1 page
FM Heat & Smoke Detector
No ratings yet
FM Heat & Smoke Detector
34 pages
2023 Mktgmemo Gns Repair Service Limitations
No ratings yet
2023 Mktgmemo Gns Repair Service Limitations
2 pages
Hydrogen Use in Internal Combustion Engine - A Review
No ratings yet
Hydrogen Use in Internal Combustion Engine - A Review
13 pages
Superintendent
No ratings yet
Superintendent
55 pages
Fluting Vs Non-Fluting Steel Technical Bulletin V14.0
No ratings yet
Fluting Vs Non-Fluting Steel Technical Bulletin V14.0
3 pages
JPT Story
No ratings yet
JPT Story
47 pages
Introduction To Environmental Science
No ratings yet
Introduction To Environmental Science
40 pages
Concept Note Project
No ratings yet
Concept Note Project
3 pages
Validation of Sitewind Version 4
No ratings yet
Validation of Sitewind Version 4
25 pages
Steps Involved in Production and Utilization of A TV Programme
No ratings yet
Steps Involved in Production and Utilization of A TV Programme
5 pages
Resource Utilization & Optimization in Quran: Synopsis For PHD Usulddin
No ratings yet
Resource Utilization & Optimization in Quran: Synopsis For PHD Usulddin
8 pages
Sample Diagnostic
No ratings yet
Sample Diagnostic
29 pages
Bio IA Template
100% (2)
Bio IA Template
4 pages
Chapman - From Their POV
No ratings yet
Chapman - From Their POV
18 pages
20A2341 Pick List
No ratings yet
20A2341 Pick List
12 pages
Gold Care
No ratings yet
Gold Care
16 pages
BMC Script Writing
No ratings yet
BMC Script Writing
2 pages
Confirmation and Itinerar1
No ratings yet
Confirmation and Itinerar1
6 pages
Halter
No ratings yet
Halter
2 pages
Zoning Map
No ratings yet
Zoning Map
1 page
Crane Telescopic
No ratings yet
Crane Telescopic
1 page
Do You: Part 1
From Everand
Do You: Part 1
Greg Hightower
No ratings yet